Cibrarp  of  the  'theological 

PRINCETON  • NEW  JERSEY 


•a  ^Re- 
presented BY 

Delavan  L.  Pierson 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/philippineswarpeOOrobi 


THE  PHILIPPINES: 

THE  WAR  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


THE  PHILIPPINES: 

THE  WAR  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


A RECORD  OF  PERSONAL 
OBSERVATIONS  AND 
EXPERIENCES 


BY 

ALBERT  G.  ROBINSON 


NEW  YORK 

McGLURE,  PHILLIPS  & GO. 

M.  CM.  I. 


Copyright,  1901 
McClube,  Phillips  & 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

Author’s  Note 13 

i  Philippine  History  in  Brief 

An  unregarded  region— America’s  awakened  in- 
terest—Magellan— The  islands  discovered— The 
islands  named— Expedition  under  Legaspi— 
Spain’s  permanent  establishment— Chinese  inva- 
sion— Native  rebellions  and  foreign  invasions— 
England’s  conquest — Native  revolt — The  real 
germs  of  the  present  war 15 

ii  The  Revolutions  of  1872  and  1896 

A distinction  between  causes— The  present  war  an 
outcome  of  former  movements — Unique  position 
of  the  monastic  orders  in  the  Philippines— The 
Cavite  insurrection — Joseph  Burgos — Secret  soci- 
eties— The  Katipunan — Jose  Rizal — Punishment 
and  its  results — Development  of  aspiration  for  in- 
dependence— Rise  of  Emilio  Aguinaldo  — Growth 
of  the  insurrection— Demands  made  of  the  Fili- 
pinos by  Spanish  governors- general— Treaty  of 
Biak-na-bato  — Smouldering  fires  of  insurrection  22 

iii  Root  Causes  of  the  War 

The  Junta  Patriotica— Continuance  of  insurrection 
— Aguinaldo’s  return  and  leadership  — America’s 
first  touch  in  the  Philippines — The  Singapore 
meeting — Aguinaldo  sent  to  Manila — Proclama- 
tion by  the  Junta— Renewal  of  war  in  Luzon 
under  General  Aguinaldo— Declaration  of  Fili- 
5 


6 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

pino  desire  for  independence— American  encour- 
agement of  the  idea— The  Filipino- American 
military  alliance 37 

iv  Immediate  Causes  of  the  War 

The  dictatorial  government— The  constitution  of 
a revolutionary  government— America’s  attitude 
toward  the  Philippines— Arrival  of  American 
troops — Distrust  engendered— Strained  relations 
—American  commanders— Attitude  of  American 
soldiery  toward  the  Filipinos— Faults  of  enlisted 
men— American  fighters— The  germs  of  war— 
Faith  in  the  American  people— Increasing  strain 
upon  relations — Paris  treaty — A blow  to  Filipino 
aspirations— A doubtful  proclamation— The  com- 
mission   52 

v Midsummer  of  1899 

The  opinion  of  an  army  officer— The  midsummer 
situation— Filipino  fighters— American  heroism 
and  fortitude— Pseudo-activity  in  Manila— Mili- 
tary success  more  apparent  than  real — Custom- 
house and  post-office  — Schools— An  unsatisfac- 
tory balance-sheet G8 

vi  The  News  and  the  Censorship 

Lessened  activity— The  protest  of  the  correspon- 
dents—Its  effect  in  America— The  story  of  the 
protest— Private  letter  of  a correspondent— A 
mysterious  order  from  the  War  Office— Its  effect 
in  Manila— Difficulty  of  news-getting— Experi- 
ence of  Manila  editor— A note  from  the  censor  . 81 

vii  The  November  Dispersion 

The  early  autumn  of  1899— The  campaign  in  the 
north— Hardships  of  the  troops— Filipino  move- 
ments—Continuance  of  hostilities— The  pursuit  of 
Aguinaldo— Indications  for  the  future— Filipino 


CONTEXTS 


PAGE 

money— Spanish  prisoners— Thanksgiving  day 
in  the  Philippines — Merry-making  under  difficul- 
ties—What  some  of  us  were  thankful  for  . . . 101 

vm  Inefficiency  of  the  Dispersion 

Disturbed  conditions— Establishing  military  dis- 
tricts—Situation  in  Manila— A problem  in  the 
south  — Inaccurate  information  — The  business 
condition — Misleading  statements— A “humane 
war  ” 125 

ix  Progress  of  the  War 

Early  days  of  1900— Occupation  of  Luzon— Ex- 
tent of  American  influence — Apathy  of  the  igno- 
rant peasantry — Robber  bands  — Professional 
ci’iminals — Misguided  patriots— Daugers  of  travel 
—Diplomatic  policy  advisable— Unthinking  op- 
timism dangerous— An  unsatisfactory  situation— 

A general  summary— A gloomy  outlook  . . . 150 

x The  Islands  and  their  People 

A lesson  in  geography— Areas  of  principal  islands 
—Geology  of  the  Philippines— Volcanoes— Earth- 
quakes— Climate — Philippine  zones — Philippine 
races  and  tongues— Distribution  of  population  — 

The  Tagal  language  — Filipino  character — Clean- 
liness of  the  Filipinos— Apparel— Buyo-chewing— 

A musical  race — The  savages 157 

xi  Philippine  Trade  and  Industries 

Some  general  reflections — Gold-hunting — Real 
wealth  of  the  islands— Sugar,  tobacco  and  hemp 
— Philippine  commerce— Lumber  possibilities— 
Possibilities  in  imports — Railways  in  Luzon — The 
Philippines  as  a field  for  young  men— Chances 
for  the  capitalist— Hemp  industry  and  its  pro- 
cesses—Manila  wood-workers— Mining  a specu- 
lation   178 


8 CONTENTS 

PAGE 

xii  The  Moros  of  Mindanao 

A mysterious  island— Zamboanga— The  Calle  de 
la  Marina— American  occupation  of  Zamboanga 
— The  request  of  the  people— An  official  delega- 
tion—A letter  from  a datto— Cottabatto— A close 
shave — Davao — Datto  Mandi — Palawan — Polyg- 
amy and  slavery— Future  relations  with  the  Moros  211 

xm  The  Moros  of  Sulu 

Our  Mohammedan  people— Spanish  garrisons— 
Jolo— A city  of  trees  and  flowers— A stroll  among 
the  people— Moro  weapons— Bargaining  for  curios 
—A  coffee  estate— The  datto  and  the  deserters— 

The  datto  as  a witness— All  Americans  look  alike 
to  him— A good-natured  people— The  universality 
of  child-nature— A Moro  trader— Love  of  color — 
Boats  and  blacksmiths— Island  fruits— Pearl  fish- 
eries—The  religious  question— The  sultan  . . . 233 

xrv  In  and  Around  Manila 

First  impressions— A mongrel  place— Description 
of  the  city— Vehicles — Cigars  and  cigarettes — 
Filipino  garments— Local  trade— Banking  busi- 
ness in  Manila— An  awkward  system— Theaters 
and  grand  opera— A drive  in  the  suburbs— Ecclesi- 
astical barracks 259 

xv  American  vs.  Filipino  Government 

Filipino  self-government  in  operation— Conflict- 
ing reports  — Journey  of  two  American  naval 
officers— A tribute  to  Aguinaldo’s  government — 
Balls  and  receptions— Order  and  industry— Testi- 
mony of  Mr.  John  Barrett— American  methods — 
Manila  in  August,  1899— The  civil  government 
order— American  administrators— Filipino  ob- 
stinacy—A provisional  city  government— San 
Fernando— A Filipino  residence— Scenes  in  a 


CONTENTS 


9 

PAGE 

provost  marshal's  office— The  purpose  of  the 
administration 282 

xvi  The  Church  and  the  Friars 

The  root  of  Philippine  troubles— Early  arrival 
of  the  friars— Abuse  of  power  and  influence 
— Religion  rather  than  spirituality — A Manila 
church  service  — Curious  customs — Church  music 
—America’s  position— Arrival  of  Archbishop 
Chapelle — Its  immediate  results — Local  press 
comments— An  alleged  interview  and  its  results 
— Free  speech  in  Manila 314 

xyh  The  ARjrf  and  the  Navy  in  the  Philippines 
Submerged  heroes— A word  for  deserving  men 
—Philippine  “battles” — An  attack  on  San 
Mateo— An  army  “ dandy  ”— An  engagement  on 
the  south  line— Stragglers— Incidents  of  the  field 
— Imus—  Generals  in  the  Philippines— The  work 
of  the  navy— A fight  at  Subig  Bay— At  Novaleta 
—A  dangerous  coast— The  navy  in  the  south— 

The  Mosquito  Fleet 334 

xvm  The  Present 

Official  reports— Change  in  the  situation— Com- 
parison of  incidents  of  different  dates— Repoids 
of  correspondents— A serious  factor— Unfortu- 
nate attitude  of  American  soldiery  ....  371 

xix  The  Future 

The  future— The  Chinese  as  a factor — The 
Chinese  worker— The  Chinese  merchant — The 
social  future— The  educational  future— The  re- 
ligious future— The  Filipinos  as  they  are— 
Evidence  of  capacity  for  self-government— The 
policy  needed 386 


AUTHOR’S  NOTE 


THE  major  portion  of  this  volume  consists  of 
letters  which  were  sent  to  the  New  York 
“Evening  Post”  in  my  capacity  as  staff  corre- 
spondent for  that  paper.  The  period  covered 
by  the  letters  was  that  from  July,  1899,  to  Feb- 
ruary, 1900.  An  entire  rewriting,  which  would 
have  taken  time  not  at  my  immediate  disposal, 
might  have  resulted  in  a more  coherent  and 
better  literary  form  for  the  book.  I had  no 
choice  in  the  matter,  and  perhaps  an  advantage 
lies  in  the  presentation  of  the  letters  in  so 
nearly  their  original  form,  as  they  thus  offer  the 
impressions  of  the  time  and  place  from  an  im- 
mediate viewpoint. 

My  trip  to  the  islands  was  made  for  the  pur- 
pose of  obtaining  the  fullest  possible  informa- 
tion upon  the  general  subject.  In  obtaining 
that  information  I have  been  hampered  by  no 
prejudices,  influenced  by  no  partisan  politics.  I 
have  sought  only  that  which  was  fair  and  honest 
and  right.  Some  will  accept  the  views  and  opin- 
ions here  presented ; some  will  doubtless  refuse 
them.  They  are  at  least  honest  and,  I believe, 
also  just  and  charitable.  I was  under  no  instruc- 

11 


12 


AUTHOR'S  NOTE 


tions  from  the  home  office,  save  the  brief  in- 
junction to  tell  the  truth  as  I saw  it.  That  I 
endeavored  to  do,  seeking  no  favor  and  fearing 
no  rebuke. 

My  sources  of  information  were  many  and 
various.  Friends  and  acquaintances  in  army 
life  and  in  civil  life,  Filipinos,  Americans  and 
aliens,  have  all  been  channels  through  which 
information  has  been  obtained.  My  conclu- 
sions have  not  been  hastily  formed.  They  are,  in 
large  measure,  a consensus  of  the  statements  of 
the  many  whom  I have  met,  rather  than  a purely 
individual  opinion.  That  the  book  is,  in  its 
general  tenor,  a pro-Filipino  argument,  I freely 
admit.  If  I have  erred  in  anything,  my  error 
lies  in  an  overestimate  of  the  vitality  of  funda- 
mental issues  for  which  the  Filipinos  have  fought 
again  and  again  during  their  history. 

In  their  present  stage,  American  affairs  in  the 
Philippines  are,  to  large  extent,  a matter  of  argu- 
ment. That  which  is  here  stated  I believe  to  be 
true.  The  events  of  coming  days  will  establish 
the  correctness  or  determine  the  error  of  the 
conclusions  and  opinions.  The  future  alone 
can  measure  the  extent  and  the  seriousness  of 
America’s  problem  in  the  far  East. 

Albert  Gardner  Robinson. 


THE  PHILIPPINES: 

THE  WAR  AND  THE  PEOPLE 


I 


PHILIPPINE  HISTORY  IN  BRIEF 

An  unregarded  region— America’s  awakened  interest— Ma- 
gellan—The  islands  discovered— The  islands  named— 
Expedition  under  Legaspi— Spain's  permanent  establish- 
ment—Chinese  invasion— Native  rebellions  and  foreign 
invasions— England’s  conquest— Native  revolt— The  real 
germs  of  the  present  war. 

SO  little  have  the  American  people  known  or 
cared  about  the  Philippine  Islands  until 
within  the  last  few  months,  that  so  comprehen- 
sive a work  as  Larned’s  “ Topical  History,” 
issued  within  the  last  five  years,  fails  even  to 
mention  them.  Early  in  May,  1898,  American 
attention  was  very  sharply  called  to  the  fact 
that  the  islands  had  a place  in  the  world.  Al- 
though at  times  overshadowed  by  important 
interests  elsewhere,  it  may  be  said  that  no  other 
topic  has  held  so  firm  and  so  continuous  an 
interest  for  the  American  mind  as  have  these 
islands,  during  all  the  world  disturbances  since 
the  outbreak  of  the  Spanish- American  War. 

The  fighting  around  Santiago,  the  expedition 
to  Porto  Rico,  the  general  occupation  of  Cuba, 

15 


16 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  annexation  of  Hawaii,  the  war  in  South 
Africa,  the  famine  in  India,  the  war  in  China, 
the  gold  discoveries  at  Cape  Nome— these  and 
all  the  thousands  of  lesser  incidents  have,  for  a 
longer  or  shorter  time,  played  their  parts  in  the 
competition  for  supremacy  in  American  interest. 
Great  men  have  died  and  rulers  have  been  as- 
sassinated. War-clouds  have  gathered  and  dis- 
persed. Science  has  made  new  discoveries  and 
mechanical  skill  has  enriched  the  world  of  civili- 
zation. All  these  matters  have  held  their  place 
in  the  public  thought  for  their  little  day,  but  for 
thirty  months  there  have  been  few  American 
journals  or  magazines  whose  every  issue  has  not 
held  some  more  or  less  ample  news,  comment  or 
criticism  regarding  the  Philippine  Islands  and  the 
relations  of  the  American  people  toward  them. 

Behind  the  two  and  a half  years  of  history 
which  America  has  made  in  the  islands  there 
stand  the  three  and  a half  centuries  of  history 
made  by  Spain,  China,  Holland,  Portugal,  J apan, 
England,  and  the  powers  and  people  of  their 
island  neighbors— a period  of  no  little  activ- 
ity, with  a development  upward.  Great  nations 
have  fought  for  possession  of  the  islands.  Re- 
bellion has  followed  rebellion  in  efforts  to  expel 
the  ruler  whose  reign  was  regarded  as  unjust, 
oppressive  and  ‘tyrannical.  It  is  no  part  of  the 
purpose  of  this  book  to  enter  into  the  detail  of 
that  history.  A brief  resume,  however,  may  be 
of  service  and  interest. 


PHILIPPINE  HISTORY  IN  BRIEF  17 


In  March,  1521,  Ferdinand  Magellan,  hav- 
ing passed  through  the  -strait  which  has  since 
borne  the  name  Magellan  in  his  honor,  entered 
the  group  of  islands  now  known  as  the  Philip- 
pines. Sailing  through  the  strait  of  Surigao,  he 
effected  a landing  near  the  mouth  of  the  Bu- 
tuan  River,  on  the  north  coast  of  Mindanao,  and 
took  possession  of  the  district  in  the  name  of 
Charles  I,  King  of  Spain. 

The  expedition  crossed  to  the  island  of  Cebu, 
where  it  became  embroiled  in  an  affair  with  the 
natives.  It  seems  fairly  established  that  Ma- 
gellan was  killed  in  a skirmish  on  the  small  island 
of  Magtan.  Soon  after  his  death,  the  expedition 
sailed  away  to  the  westward  and  reached  Spain 
in  the  month  of  September,  1522.  Two  or  three 
minor  expeditions  were  essayed  within  the  fol- 
lowing years,  but  they  were  of  no  special  impor- 
tance or  result,  save  that  an  expedition  which 
sailed  from  Mexico  in  1543  gave  the  islands  their 
present  title  in  honor  of  Philip,  Prince  of  Astu- 
rias, the  son  of  Charles,  and  afterward  King  of 
Spain  under  the  title  of  Philip  II. 

On  November  21,  1564,  the  Basque  navigator, 
Miguel  Lopez  de  Legaspi,  sailed  from  the  port  of 
Navidad,  on  the  Mexican  coast,  en  route  for  the 
Philippines.  He  followed  the  track  of  his  prede- 
cessors, via  the  Ladrones,  aud  reached  the  mid- 
dle group  of  the  archipelago,  that  division 
which  we  now  know  as  the  Visayans.  This 
expedition  was  the  first  to  establish  a permanent 


18 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


occupation  of  the  islands.  The  dates  of  Le- 
gaspi’s  expedition  appear  to  be  confused  and 
unreliable,  but  it  is  fairly  established  that  the 
first  occupation  of  the  island  of  Luzon  occurred 
in  tlie  middle  of  the  year  1570.  On  June  24, 
1571,  a city  government  was  definitely  estab- 
lished at  Manila,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Pasig 
River,  which  drains  the  lake  known  as  Laguna 
de  Bay. 

In  November,  1574,  the  island  of  Luzon  was 
invaded  by  the  Chinese  under  Li  Ma  Hong.  In 
a series  of  land  and  naval  engagements,  lasting 
for  several  months,  the  Chinese  were  defeated. 
A portion  of  the  dispersed  Chinese  army  escaped 
to  the  mountains  of  the  interior  and  ethnologists 
assert  the  existence  of  manifest  traces  of  Chinese 
blood  among  some  of  the  hill  tribes  of  to-day. 

The  two  hundred  years  which  followed  the 
Spanish  establishment  in  the  islands  were  a 
time  of  frequent  strife  with  the  island  people, 
and  of  successful  resistance  to  foreign  invasion. 
Dutch,  Portuguese  and  Japanese  all  essayed 
either  conquest  or  rival  occupation  by  repeated 
attempts.  Spain  maintained  her  position  until 
1762.  On  September  22  of  that  year  a British 
squadron  entered  Manila  Bay  and  demanded 
the  surrender  of  the  city.  A bombardment  fol- 
lowed the  refusal  of  the  demand.  British  troops 
were  landed,  under  command  of  Brigadier-Gen- 
eral Draper.  After  two  weeks  of  fighting,  the 
terms  of  capitulation  submitted  by  Archbishop 


PHILIPPINE  HISTORY  IN  BRIEF  19 

Rojo,  acting  as  governor  in  the  absence  of  a 
governor-general,  were  approved  and  England’s 
flag  flew  over  the  walls  of  Manila,  as  it  did  over 
the  fortifications  of  Havana  in  the  same  year. 
The  terms  of  the  Peace  of  Paris,  under  date  of 
February  10,  1763,  reached  Manila  on  August  27. 
Yet  fighting  continued  for  more  than  sis  months 
after  the  receipt  of  the  Paris  determination,  and 
hostilities  and  minor  troubles  continued  until 
the  final  evacuation  by  the  British  in  the  spring 
of  1764. 

Spain’s  sovereignty  in  the  islands  remained 
practically  undisturbed  by  foreign  powers  from 
this  time  until  Admiral  Dewey  made  his  May- 
day  call  upon  them  in  the  early  morning  of  that 
eventful  May  1,  1898.  The  intervening  years 
were  by  no  means  a time  of  peace.  Rebellion 
followed  rebellion;  uprising  followed  uprising. 
Spanish  government  in  the  islands,  domi- 
nated as  it  unquestionably  was  by  corrupt, 
grasping  and  licentious  monastic  orders,  aroused 
the  continuous  resentment  of  the  island  people. 
Revolts  and  conspiracies,  great  and  small,  oc- 
curred at  comparatively  close  intervals.  Yet 
Senator  Hoar’s  statement  that  “the  people  of 
the  Philippine  Islands  have  never  submitted 
themselves  willingly  to  Spain  ” needs  some  quali- 
fication. Their  protest  was  not  so  much  against 
the  government  of  Spain  as  against  the  dominant 
influence  of  the  obnoxious  friars  in  the  processes 
of  that  government.  Even  in  their  latest  rebel- 


20 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


lion,  tliat  of  1896,  the  cry  of  the  Filipino  soldiery 
was,  “Viva  Espana!  Abajo  los  frailes!” 
(“  Live  Spain  ! Down  with  the  friars ! ”) 

Spain  encountered  many  difficulties  in  the 
establishment  of  her  foothold  at  the  beginning. 
That,  once  established,  involved  the  necessity  of 
fighting  for  its  maintenance.  The  first  of  the 
more  notable  revolutions  was  that  of  the  year 
1622,  under  the  leadership  of  the  redoubtable 
Dagohoy,  who  maintained  the  independence  of 
the  island  of  Bohol  for  thirty-five  years.  A 
three  years’  revolt  started  up  in  eastern  Minda- 
nao in  1629.  In  1649  a large  portion  of  the 
Visayan  district  was  in  armed  opposition  to  the 
Spanish  authority.  Extensive  disturbances  oc- 
curred in  northern  and  central  Luzon  in  1660. 
These  and  many  of  those  which  followed,  down 
to  the  very  latest,  were  purely  local.  Within 
the  present  century  the  notable  uprisings  have 
been  those  of  1823,  in  Luzon ; of  1827,  in  Cebu ; 
of  1844,  in  Negros ; in  Cavite  province,  in  1872 ; 
and  the  general  revolution  of  1896. 

The  uprising  in  Cavite  province,  in  1872,  is  of 
special  importance,  inasmuch  as  there  is  no 
doubt  that  it  was  the  progenitor  of  the  present 
strife.  The  revolution  of  1896  may  be  called 
the  father,  in  point  of  pedigree,  of  the  present 
trouble,  and  that  of  1872  may  be  called  the 
grandfather.  The  same  blood  and  very  much 
the  same  motive  may  be  said  to  run  through 
them  all.  Not  a few  students  and  observers  fail 


PHILIP  PIKE  HISTORY  IK  BRIEF  21 


to  see  the  connection.  It  is,  perhaps,  only  visi- 
ble to  those  who,  laying  aside  all  personal  and 
even  national  predilection,  will  investigate  and 
analyze,  broadly  and  charitably,  the  character 
and  motives  of  the  Filipino  people,  and  the 
almost  unbroken  chain  of  events  whose  latest 
link  is  the  present  American-Filipino  War. 


II 


THE  REVOLUTIONS  OF  1872  AND  1896  1 

A distinction  between  causes— The  present  war  an  outcome 
of  former  movements — Unique  position  of  the  monastic 
orders  in  the  Philippines — The  Cavite  insurrection — Joseph 
Burgos — Secret  societies — The  Katipunan— Jose  Rizal— 
Punishment  and  its  results — Development  of  aspiration  for 
independence — Rise  of  Emilio  Aguinaldo — Growth  of  the 
insurrection— Demands  made  of  the  Filipinos  by  Spanish 
governors-general — Treaty  of  Biak-na-bato— Smouldering 
fires  of  insurrection. 

IN  any  consideration  of  the  conditions  which 
have  resulted  in  the  present  war  in  the 
Philippine  Islands,  it  is  necessary  to  make  some 
distinction  between  immediate  causes  and  root 
causes.  The  war  was  not  a sudden  and  spon- 
taneous outbreak  resultant  upon  a given  incident. 
Whether  or  not  it  was  avoidable  may  be  and  is 
open  to  question.  But  it  is  not  to  be  denied 
that  war  followed  partly  as  a result  of  preexist- 
ing conditions.  The  root  cause,  I believe,  will 
be  found  in  the  Filipino  uprisings  of  1872  and 

1 In  the  making  of  this  chap-  now  the  standard  work  upon  the 
ter,  I have  drawn  to  some  ex-  subject.  For  that  which  I have 
tent  upon  Mr.  John  Foreman’s  taken,  I beg  Mr.  Foreman’s  par- 
book,  “ The  Philippine  Islands,”  don,  and  thank  him. — A.G.R. 

oo 


THE  REVOLUTIONS  OF  1872  AND  1896  23 

1896.  I believe  also  that  these  two  are  connected 
by  a definite  chain  of  events,  the  latter  being  but 
a revival,  on  larger  scale,  of  its  predecessor. 

In  1872  there  occurred  what  is  known  as 
the  Cavite  insurrection.  Through  all  the  term 
of  Spanish  occupation  in  the  Philippine  Islands, 
there  have  been  heard  the  mutterings  and  there 
have  arisen  the  storms  of  discontent  among  the 
people.  The  year  1872  marked  the  gathering  of 
one  of  these  storms.  There  was  a focusing  of 
that  issue  which  is  to-day  the  most  important 
factor  in  the  strife.  In  other  chapters  I shall 
review  more  fully  the  question  of  the  place  and 
influence  of  the  monastic  orders  in  the  political 
life  of  the  Philippine  Islands.  Here  I shall  only 
assert  that  the  question  of  those  orders  lies  at 
the  bottom  of  the  uprisings  of  1872  and  1896 
directly,  and  that,  indirectly,  it  lies  also  at  the 
bottom  of  the  present  trouble. 

The  monastic  orders  in  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church  have  been  defined  as  being  “ like  corpo- 
rations in  a civil  government,  having  special  ex- 
emptions and  privileges.”  With  the  exceptions 
of  the  Mohammedans  of  the  southern  Philippine 
Islands  and  the  comparatively  limited  number 
of  semi-savages  of  the  interior,  the  religion  of 
the  islanders  is  that  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church.  The  Philippine  Islands  stand  almost, 
if  not  quite,  unique,  in  that  the  administration 
of  the  church,  its  preaching  and  its  work,  is 
wholly  in  the  hands  of  monastic  orders — the 


24 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Dominican,  the  Franciscan,  the  Austin,  and  the 
Recoletos.  Secular  priesthood,  save  in  minor 
and  subordinate  posts,  is  virtually  unknown. 
The  ranks  of  these  orders  are  filled  from  Spain. 
Protests  against  the  abuses  of  the  friars  have 
again  and  again  been  followed  by  revolt.  In 
many  instances  an  outraged  people,  individually 
or  collectively,  have  taken  the  law  into  their  own 
hands,  because  the  laws  of  the  land  gave  them 
no  protection  against  the  friars,  and  have  killed 
the  incumbent  of  their  district  for  his  crimes. 

The  ground  of  the  Cavite  insurrection  was  the 
local  opposition  to  the  friars  of  the  district.  The 
outbreak  failed  through  a mistaken  signal,  but  it 
could  hardly  have  succeeded  in  any  case.  Its 
leader,  a Filipino,  one  Joseph  Burgos,  together 
with  three  other  native  priests,  was  executed 
upon  the  Luneta  in  Manila  by  the  Spanish  mili- 
tary authorities  at  the  instigation  of  the  friars. 
A number  of  others,  native  clergy  and  private 
citizens,  were  deported  and  their  property  con- 
fiscated. To-day  the  name  of  Joseph  Burgos  is 
one  of  reverence  among  the  Filipino  people  as 
that  of  a martyr.  Some  of  those  who  were  ex- 
pelled the  country  are  still  living.  The  memory 
of  the  event  remains,  a bitter  and  never-to-be- 
forgotten  story,  in  the  minds  of  thousands. 
There,  in  reality,  was  the  seed  sown  which  de- 
veloped in  dim  light  and  in  darkness  until  it 
sprang  into  larger  life  in  the  revolt  of  1896. 

Of  this  time  John  Foreman  says : “ No  native, 


TEE  REVOLUTIONS  OF  1872  AND  1896  25 


at  that  period,  dreamed  of  absolute  indepen- 
dence.” The  sole  object  of  the  uprising  of  1872 
was  the  expulsion  of  the  friars.  At  about  the 
same  time  the  constitutional  government  in 
Spain,  which  followed  the  deposition  of  Queen 
Isabella  II,  promised  various  reforms  in  the 
Philippine  Islands.  The  reforms  were  never 
carried  out,  but  the  germ  of  a new  idea,  dimly 
seen  and  but  partly  realized,  was  implanted  in 
Filipino  minds. 

Secret  societies  were  organized.  Among  these 
were  La  Liga  Filipina  and  the  mysterious  Kati- 
punan  with  its  “ blood  compact.”  The  aims  and 
objects  of  these  societies  were  not  identical  and 
not  all  of  them  were  directed  toward  either  eccle- 
siastical or  political  reform.  One,  at  least, 
looked  to  the  establishment  of  a trade  combina- 
tion in  the  various  departments  of  the  leading 
agricultural  interests,  for  protection  and  defense 
against  the  avarice  of  foreign  commission  mer- 
chants who  fixed  the  prices  and  terms  of  payment 
for  the  commodities. 

Preeminent  among  the  men  of  this  period 
stands  Jose  Rizal  y Mercado,  author,  physician 
and  martyred  patriot,  whose  tragic  ending  is 
one  of  the  dark  stains  upon  the  pages  of  ecclesi- 
astical history  in  the  Philippines.  He  was  a man 
of  high  culture  and  wide  attainments.  He  was 
a graduate  of  the  University  of  Madrid  and 
qualified  himself  for  the  medical  profession  by 
continuing  his  studies  in  the  schools  of  Paris  and 


26 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  Germany.  During  his  stay  in  Europe  he  pro- 
duced his  now  well-known  story  of  Filipino  life 
under  the  title  of  “Noli  me  T anger  e, ” 1 and  one 
of  lesser  fame,  “ El  Filibusterismo.”  The  former 
especially  found  a wide  circulation  among  the 
Filipino  people.  Though  nominally  a novel,  it 
was  really  an  expose  of  the  many  offenses  of  the 
friars  against  the  Filipino  people.  Chiefly 
because  of  these  books  their  author  incurred  the 
bitter  hatred  of  those  friars  against  whom  they 
were  directed.  The  church  forbade  the  reading 
of  them,  and  it  is  asserted  that  even  the  owner- 
ship of  them  involved  the  risk  of  life.  Rizal 
returned  to  Manila  in  1893.  He  was  at  once 
arrested,  at  the  instigation  of  the  friars,  upon  a 
charge  of  sedition.  Against  the  combination  of 
church  and  state  he  was  powerless.  He  was 
banished  to  one  of  the  small  coast  villages  of  the 
island  of  Mindanao,  where  he  remained  until 
July,  1896.  He  was  then,  at  his  own  request, 
granted  permission  to  go  to  Cuba  for  enlistment 
as  a surgeon  in  the  Spanish  army.  He  sailed 
for  Spain  early  in  the  month  of  September, 
bearing  letters  of  recommendation  from  General 
Blanco  to  Spanish  cabinet  officials.  ■ Arriving  in 
Spain,  he  was  arrested,  in  response  to  cable- 
grams from  Manila,  and  returned  to  the  Phil- 
ippines as  a state  prisoner.  Rizal’s  stay  in 
Manila,  prior  to  his  departure  for  Spain,  was 

1 An  adaptation  of  it  has  been  published  in  America,  by  [Messrs. 
McClure,  Phillips  & Co.,  under  the  title  of  “An  Eagle  Flight.” 


THE  REVOLUTION'S  OF  1872  AND  1896  27 


coincident  with  the  outbreak  of  1896.  Although 
there  was  no  evidence  that  he  was  in  any  way 
connected  with  the  plots  of  that  time,  and  in 
spite  of  the  fact  that  he  had  been  a Spanish 
prisoner  in  Mindanao  during  the  three  preceding 
years,  he  was  charged  with  complicity  in  the 
affair,  tried,  condemned  as  guilty  and  shot  as 
a traitor.  The  closing  years  of  his  young  life 
were  a martyrdom.  His  death  was  a tragedy. 

Against  the  secret  societies,  and  particularly 
against  the  mysterious  Katipunan,  the  friars 
directed  all  their  energies.  Unable  to  fathom 
them,  they  denounced  them  as  u masonic,”  and 
consequently  anti-Christian,  prohibited  by  the 
church  and  by  special  papal  bulls.  Members 
and  suspects  were  denounced  by  the  hundred, 
and,  at  the  instigation  and  through  the  influence 
of  the  friars,  hundreds  of  people,  whose  only 
offense  was  that  they  were  offensive  to  the  friars, 
were  banished  from  their  homes,  some  to  other 
lands,  and  some  to  the  smaller  and  unpeopled 
islands  of  the  archipelago.  Their  personal  prop- 
erty was  confiscated,  their  real  estate  was  con- 
demned and  sold.  Some  of  their  holdings 
unquestionably  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  various 
orders  and  now  constitute  a part  of  that  im- 
mense possession  of  the  friars,  the  title  to  which 
will  yet  furnish  a great  deal  of  complicated  work 
for  the  law-courts.  It  is  even  asserted  by  some 
that  the  Cavite  uprising  was  instigated  and 
fomented  by  emissaries  of  the  friars  for  the  ex- 


28 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


press  purpose  of  implicating  certain  individuals 
wlio  made  themselves  offensive  to  the  church 
dignitaries.  Be  that  as  it  may,  the  uprising  came 
and  was  quelled  with  a strong  and  cruel  hand, 
but  the  idea  which  lay  behind  it  took  new  life. 
That  which  the  friars  hoped  would  prove  a 
deadly  poison  proved  to  be  a tonic,  a stimulant. 
It  roused  the  Filipinos  to  a closer  union,  a firmer 
purpose.  The  societies  which  were  formed  anew 
taught  the  Filipinos  the  value  of  organization 
and  served  as  a nucleus  for  the  insurrection 
of  1896. 

The  heart  of  this  insurrection  appears  to  have 
been  the  Katipunan.  The  word  has  no  other 
meaning  than  “the  league.”  The  movement 
failed  in  its  first  stroke.  It  is  asserted  that  its 
plans  were  revealed  by  a woman  in  the  confes- 
sional and  were  carried  to  the  archbishop,  the 
present  incumbent,  Nozaleda,  whom  Foreman 
styles  “ the  Bloodthirsty.” 

The  usual  cooperation  between  the  church  and 
the  military  authorities  led  to  the  prompt  arrest 
and  imprisonment  of  hundreds  of  the  native 
people,  among  them  many  of  the  best  and 
wealthiest  families.  The  banishment  of  the 
strongest  supporters  and  wisest  leaders,  those 
who  could  and  would  give  of  their  time,  their 
money  and  their  strength  to  the  cause,  only 
served  to  embitter  the  masses  and  to  stimulate 
them  to  more  active  and  determined  revolt.  It 
was  evident  that  the  motive  was  ecclesiastical 


THE  REVOLUTIONS  OF  1872  AND  1896  29 

rather  than  political  reform.  It  has  been  alleged 
by  some  that  even  then  there  was  no  idea  of  a 
blow  for  independence.  Much  that  I heard  while 
in  the  islands  leads  me  to  a conviction  that  the 
idea  of  independence,  though  not  yet  an  appre- 
ciable force  among  the  masses,  was  even  then  a 
purpose  of  the  leaders.  But,  even  to  them,  in- 
dependence as  a nation  was  less  an  end  than  a 
means  to  an  end— the  expulsion  of  the  friars. 
Their  idea  of  independence  was  crude  and 
almost  chaotic.  They  understood  little  of  its 
meaning,  less  of  its  responsibilities.  How  should 
they  know  anything  of  it  ? Where  in  their  past 
experience  had  there  been  that  which  would 
teach  it  them? 

As  Santiago  province  has  been  the  hotbed  of 
Cuban  revolutions  in  the  past,  so  has  Cavite 
province,  just  southward  of  Manila,  been  the 
focal  point  of  Filipino  insurrection.  In  this 
movement  of  1896  Emilio  Aguinaldo  y Famy 
first  came  into  political  and  military  prominence. 
He  was  then  a young  man  of  twenty-seven  years 
of  age,  but  little  known  outside  his  own  province, 
— that  of  Cavite, — and  far  from  specially  notable 
there.  He  was  a man  of  fair  and  respectable, 
though  not  prominent,  social  connection.  He 
was  well,  but  not  unusually  well,  educated. 
By  just  what  steps  he  attained  leadership  I do 
not  know.  It  is  a safe  assumption  that  he  rose 
as  he  did  mainly  through  the  operation  of  those 
little  understood  laws  which,  in  time  of  stress 


30 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  crisis,  so  often  bring  fitting  men  to  the  front. 
It  is  useless  to  sneer  at  him,  to  vilify  him  as  a 
schemer  and  a trickster.  For  four  years  he  has 
been  the  leader  and  the  idol  of  his  people. 
Schemers  and  tricksters  may  attain  that  height ; 
none  but  strong  and  forceful  men  can  hold  it 
through  four  years  of  national  struggle.  He 
has  been  lauded  as  a Washington  and  con- 
demned as  a knave.  He  probably  is  not  the 
former,  but  he  certainly  is  not  the  latter. 

In  spite  of  the  revelation  of  its  plans  and  the 
rigid  punishment  of  many  who  were  supposed  to 
be  connected  with  it,  the  insurrection  grew  in 
strength  and  in  extent.  Spain  increased  her 
army  and  her  navy  in  the  Philippines.  Gov- 
ernor-General Ramon  Blanco,  the  same  man  who 
succeeded  Weyler  in  Cuba,  was  not  disposed  to 
follow  the  brutal  measures  urged  by  Archbishop 
Nozaleda  and  some  of  the  leading  Spanish  citi- 
zens. Probably  at  the  instance  of  this  group, 
Blanco  was  recalled,  and  Polavieja,  a ready  tool 
for  the  hands  of  the  friars,  was  sent  to  succeed 
him.  More  reinforcements  were  sent  out  from 
Spain. 

The  first  encounter  between  the  Spaniards  and 
the  insurgents  worthy  to  be  called  a battle  oc- 
curred on  Sunday,  August  30, 1896,  at  the  village 
of  San  Juan  del  Monte,  some  three  or  four  miles 
outside  the  city  of  Manila.  On  that  day  martial 
law  was  proclaimed  in  Manila  and  throughout  a 
considerable  area  of  the  surrounding  country. 


THE  REVOLUTIONS  OF  1872  ANI)  1896  31 


The  story  of  the  ensuing  months  is  too  long  for 
a place  in  this  volume.  Numerically  the  insur- 
gents were  in  overwhelming  force,  but  they 
lacked  arms  and  ammunition,  training  and  dis- 
cipline. Their  forces  were  little,  if  anything, 
better  than  a mob.  At  the  time  of  their  greatest 
strength  the  Spaniards  numbered  about  twenty- 
seven  thousand  soldiers.  Battles  were  fought 
with  varying  success  and  with  severe  losses 
upon  both  sides. 

Few  wars  of  civilized  or  semi-civilized  peoples 
have  been  carried  on  with  so  much  of  utter  bru- 
tality as  that  waged  by  Polavieja  against  the 
Filipinos.  If,  in  our  own  struggle  with  them, 
there  have  been  occasional  instances  of  a savage 
inhumanity  manifested  by  Filipinos,  it  is  more 
than  probable  that  they  learned  their  lesson  from 
Spanish  butchers  under  the  command  of  this 
chief  butcher.  In  the  spring  of  1897  Polavieja 
asked  to  be  recalled  on  the  ground  of  broken 
health.  He  was  succeeded  by  General  Primo  de 
Rivera. 

The  new  governor-general  inaugurated  his 
rule  by  a proclamation  of  amnesty  to  all  in- 
surgents who  would  lay  down  their  arms.  It 
was  a politic  move.  The  war  was  virtually  a 
deadlock.  Neither  side  was  strong  enough  to 
win  within  a calculable  period.  The  Filipinos 
held  much  of  the  country  and  could  not  be  de- 
feated or  suppressed  by  any  force  which  the 
Spaniards  could  send  against  them.  The  Span- 


32 


TEE  PEIL1PPIXES 


iards  held  Manila  and  some  of  the  larger  cities. 
Their  dislodgment  was  beyond  the  powers  of 
the  Filipinos  because  of  the  native  lack  of  suita- 
ble ordnance  and  small  arms.  A portion  of  the 
Filipino  army  adopted  guerrilla  methods  and 
minor  engagements  were  of  more  or  less  fre- 
quent occurrence. 

A second  edict  issued  by  Primo  de  Rivera 
was  followed  by  one  issued  from  the  Filipino 
side  which  bore  no  date  and,  unfortunately,  no 
official  signature.  But  it  appears  to  have  ex- 
pressed in  formal  terms  the  demands  of  some 
portion  of  the  Filipino  people.  A preamble  is 
followed  by  the  ensuing  demands : 

1.  Expulsion  of  the  friars,  and  restitution  to  the 
townships  of  the  lands  which  the  friars  have  appro- 
priated, dividing  the  incumbencies  held  by  them,  as  well 
as  the  episcopal  sees,  equally  between  Peninsular  [Span- 
ish] and  Insular  [Filipino]  secular  priests. 

2.  Spain  must  concede  to  us,  as  she  has  to  Cuba, 
parliamentary  representation,  freedom  of  the  press, 
toleration  of  all  religious  sects,  laws  common  with  hers, 
and  administrative  and  economic  autonomy. 

3.  Equality  in  treatment  and  pay  between  Penin- 
sular and  Insular  civil  servants. 

4.  Restitution  of  all  lands  appropriated  by  the  friars 
to  the  townships,  or  to  the  original  owners,  or,  in  de- 
fault of  finding  such  owners,  the  state  to  put  them  up 
at  public  auction  in  small  lots  of  a value  within  the 
reach  of  all,  payment  to  be  made  within  four  years,  as 
in  the  case  of  the  present  state  lands. 

5.  Abolition  of  the  government’s  authority  to  banish 
citizens,  as  well  as  of  all  unjust  measures  against  Fili- 
pinos ; legal  equality  for  all  persons,  whether  Penin- 
sular or  Insular,  under  the  civil  as  well  as  the  penal  code. 


TEE  REVOLUTIONS  OF  1872  AND  1896  33 


This  was  widely  circulated  during  the  month 
of  July,  1897.  Shortly  afterward  there  appeared 
a manifiesto,  signed  by  Emilio  Aguinaldo.  A 
portion  of  it  reads  as  follows : 

We  aspire  to  the  glory  of  obtaining  the  liberty,  in- 
dependence and  honor  of  the  country.  ...  We  aspire 
to  a government  representing  all  the  live  forces  of  the 
country,  in  which  the  most  able,  the  most  worthy  in 
virtue  and  talent,  may  take  part,  without  distinction  of 
birth,  fortune  or  race.  We  desire  that  no  monk  nor 
friar  shall  sully  the  soil  of  any  part  of  the  archipelago, 
nor  that  there  shall  exist  any  convent,  etc. 

In  view  of  certain  allegations  that  it  was  only 
after  the  return  of  Aguinaldo  to  Manila  in  May, 
1898,  that  any  idea  of  a national  independence 
was  ever  entertained,  or  even  formed,  the  fore- 
going is  not  without  interest.  It  was  issued  in 
the  summer  of  1897,  and  it  will  be  noted  that  it 
contains  a specific  statement  of  Filipino  aspira- 
tion for  independence  and  a representative  gov- 
ernment. 

During  the  month  of  August,  1897,  steps  were 
taken  toward  effecting  a settlement  of  the  diffi- 
culties between  the  islanders  and  the  home  gov- 
ernment. A series  of  conferences  resulted  in  a 
treaty,  known  as  the  Treaty  of  Biak-na-bato,  on 
December  14,  1897.1 

1 This  is  the  treaty  according 
to  Aguinaldo  (from  his  “True 
Version  of  the  Philippine  Revo- 
lution,” published  in  Tarlak, 

September  23,  1899) : 

“Don  Pedro  Alejandro  Pa- 


temo  (who  was  appointed  by 
the  Spanish  governor-general 
sole  mediator  in  the  discussion 
of  the  terms  of  peace)  visited 
Biak-na-bato  several  times  to 
negotiate  terms  of  the  treaty, 


34 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


The  major  portion  of  the  terms  of  this  treaty 
were  virtually  nullified  by  subsequent  events 
and  proceedings.  A special  interest  centers 
around  the  clause  which  relates  to  the  money 
payment  to  be  made  by  Spain  to  the  participants 
in  the  insurrection.  This  has  been  made  the 
basis  of  many  representations,  or  misrepresenta- 
tions, reflecting  upon  the  honor  and  the  sincerity 
of  Senor  Aguinaldo.  He  has  been  charged  with 
seeking  only  his  own  ends  and  with  playing  a 


■which,  after  negotiations  ex- 
tending over  five  months,  and 
careful  consideration  had  been 
given  to  each  clause,  was  finally 
completed  and  signed  on  De- 
cember 1-1,  1897,  the  following 
being  the  principal  conditions  : 

“ 1.  That  I would,  and  any  of 
my  associates  who  desired  to  go 
with  me,  be  free  to  live  in  any 
foreign  country.  Having  fixed 
upon  Hongkong  as  my  place  of 
residence,  it  was  agreed  that 
payment  of  the  indemnity  of 
$800,000  (Mexican)  should  be 
made  in  three  instalments ; 
namely,  $400,000  when  all  the 
arms  in  Biak-na-bato  were  de- 
livered to  the  Spanish  authori- 
ties ; $200,000  when  the  arms 
surrendered  amounted  to  eight 
hundred  stands ; the  final  pay- 
ment to  be  made  when  one 
thousand  stands  of  arms  shall 
have  been  handed  over  to  the 
authorities  and  the  Te  Dcum 
sung  in  the  Cathedral  in  Manila 
as  thanksgiving  for  the  restora- 
tion of  peace.  The  latter  part  of 
February  was  fixed  as  the  limit 
of  time  wherein  the  surrender 
of  arms  should  be  completed. 

“ 2.  The  whole  of  the  money 


was  to  be  paid  to  me  personally, 
leaving  the  disposal  of  the 
money  to  my  discretion  and 
knowledge  of  the  understand- 
ing with  myassociates  and  other 
insurgents. 

“3.  Prior  to  the  remainder 
of  the  insurgent  forces  evacuat- 
ing Biak-na-bato  Captain-Gen- 
eral Primo  de  Rivera  should 
send  to  Biak-na-bat6  two  gen- 
erals of  the  Spanish  army  to  be 
held  as  hostages  by  my  associ- 
ates who  remained  there  until  I 
and  a few  of  my  compatriots 
arrived  in  Hongkong  and  the 
first  instalment  of  the  money 
payment  (namely, $400,000)was 
paid  to  me. 

“4.  It  was  also  agreed  that 
the  religious  corporations  in  the 
Philippines  be  expelled  and  an 
autonomous  system  of  govern- 
ment, political  and  administra- 
tive, be  established,  though  by 
special  request  of  GeneralPrimo 
de  Rivera  these  conditions  were 
not  insisted  on  in  the  drawing 
up  of  the  treaty,  the  general 
contending  that  such  conces- 
sions would  subject  the  Span- 
ish government  to  severe  criti- 
cism and  even  ridicule.’7 


THE  REVOLUTIONS  OF  1872  AND  1896  35 


shrewd  game  for  the  lining  of  his  own  pockets. 
He  has  been  charged  with  “selling  his  country 
for  Spanish  gold.”  The  total  amount  payable 
was  seventeen  hundred  thousand  dollars,  Mex- 
ican silver  (equivalent  practically  to  one  half  that 
sum  in  gold).  But  only  four  hundred  thousand 
dollars  (Mexican)  of  this  was  ever  paid;  and  it 
is  upon  the  receipt  and  alleged  disposition  of  this 
amount  that  there  rest  the  charges  of  greed  and 
dishonesty  on  the  part  of  Emilio  Aguinaldo. 
The  evidence  in  the  case  tends  to  show  that 
Aguinaldo’s  conduct  was  wholly  honorable  and 
conscientious. 

Under  the  terms  of  this  Treaty,  Aguinaldo 
and  his  associates  left  for  Hongkong  on 
December  27,  1897.  It  was  mutually  hoped 
that  the  trouble  was  ended.  But  the  friars 
could  neither  forget  nor  forgive.  Former  ex- 
periences were  repeated.  Persecution  and  ex- 
ecution followed,  again  creating  unrest.  In  its 
issue  of  March  17,  1898,  the  “ Diario  de  Manila” 
published  an  article  demanding  autonomy  and 
the  carrying  out  of  the  reforms  provided  for 
by  the  Treaty  of  Biak-na-bato.  Gfovernor- 
Gfeneral  Rivera  ordered  the  suspension  of  the 
paper.  Recognizing  more  and  more  clearly 
that  they  had  been  tricked,  the  deported  Fili- 
pino leaders  established  a more  effective  or- 
ganization of  La  Junta  Patriotica  (the  Patriotic 
Council)  in  Hongkong.  This  organization  has 
continued  up  to  the  present  time,  working 


36  THE  PHILIPPINES 

persistently  in  tlie  interests  of  the  Filipino 
people. 

Yet  the  Spanish  authorities  appear  to  have 
regarded  the  troubles  as  over.  Some  of  the 
Spanish  troops  were  returned  to  the  Peninsula. 
Prirno  de  Rivera  was  recalled  and  General  Ba- 
silio  Augusti  was  appointed  to  the  governorship. 
On  April  3 a wide-spread  uprising  occurred  in 
Cebu.  The  rebellion  revived  actively  in  the 
northern  provinces.  The  smouldering  fires  of 
protest  sprang  into  new  and  stronger  flame. 
This  was  the  situation  when  Admiral  Dewey 
sailed  into  Manila  Bay. 


Ill 

ROOT  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR 

The  Junta  Patriotica— Continuance  of  insurrection— Agui- 
naldo’s  return  and  leadership— America’s  first  touch  in  the 
Philippines— The  Singapore  meeting— Aguinaldo  sent  to 
Manila— Proclamation  by  the  Junta— Renewal  of  war  in 
Luzon  under  General  Aguinaldo— Declaration  of  Filipino 
desire  for  independence— American  encouragement  of  the 
idea— The  Filipino- American  military  alliance. 

IT  has  been  asserted  that  the  revolution  of 
1896  was  wholly  suppressed,  that  it  had  ter- 
minated in  the  dispersion  of  the  Filipino  forces 
and  the  expatriation  of  the  leaders.  This  asser- 
tion is  not  supported  by  the  facts  in  the  case. 
The  Treaty  of  Biak-na-bato  was  effected  on  De- 
cember 14,  1897,  and  Aguinaldo  and  his  com- 
panions were  sent  to  Hongkong  in  accordance 
with  its  terms.  Whether  or  no  the  Filipinos 
lived  strictly  up  to  their  part  of  the  compact  is 
perhaps  a question,  but  there  seems  little  doubt 
that  Spain  was  unduly  dilatory  in  fulfilling  her 
part. 

The  expatriated  leaders,  convinced  that  they 
had  been  duped  in  this  matter  as  they  had  on 

37 


38 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


similar  occasions  in  earlier  days,  organized  in 
Hongkong  and  prepared,  through  the  Junta 
Patriotica,  for  a resumption  of  the  struggle. 
They  were  in  active  communication  with  their 
followers  on  the  islands  and  to  some  extent  di- 
rected movements  there.  That  active  military 
operations  against  the  Spaniards  had  been 
resumed  and  were  in  process  at  the  time  of 
Admiral  Dewey’s  arrival  at  Manila  is  amply 
evidenced  by  the  reports  of  the  United  States 
consul  at  Manila,  Mr.  Oscar  F.  Williams.  Dur- 
ing the  month  of  February,  1898,  Mr.  Williams 
wrote  to  the  department  at  Washington  as 
follows : 

Peace  was  proclaimed  and,  since  my  coming,  festivi- 
ties therefor  were  held ; but  there  is  no  peace,  and  has 
been  none  for  about  two  years.  Conditions  here  and 
in  Cuba  are  practically  alike.  War  exists,  battles  are 
of  almost  daily  occurrence,  ambulances  bring  in  many 
wounded,  and  hospitals  are  full.  Prisoners  are  brought 
here  and  shot  without  trial,  and  Manila  is  under  mar- 
tial law.  The  crown  forces  have  not  been  able  to  dis- 
lodge a rebel  army  within  ten  miles  of  Manila  and 
last  Saturday,  February  19,  a battle  was  there  fought 
and  five  dead  left  on  the  field. 

During  the  month  of  March  he  again  wrote : 

Insurrection  is  rampant ; many  killed,  wounded  and 
made  prisoners  on  both  sides.  A battle-ship,  the  Don 
Juan  de  Austria,  sent  this  week  to  the  northern  part 
of  Luzon  to  cooperate  with  a land  force  of  two  thou- 
sand despatched  to  succor  local  forces,  overwhelmed  by 
rebels.  Last  night  special  squad  of  mounted  police 
were  scattered  at  danger-points  to  save  Manila.  . . . 
Rebellion  never  more  threatening  to  Spain. 


ROOT  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR 


39 


Around  Manila,  in  northern  Luzon  and  in 
some  of  the  southern  islands,  the  insurrection 
was  still  alive  and  active  and  fighting  was  still 
going  on.  Upon  Aguinaldo’s  arrival,  on  May 
19,  he  reassumed  the  command  of  the  insurgent 
forces.  He  resumed  that  place  in  their  political 
life  which  he  had  held  from  the  beginning  of  the 
outbreak,  and  which  he  holds  to-day — that  of 
acknowledged  leader,  guide  and  commander.  It 
was  no  unwilling  tribute  and  service  which  they 
rendered.  He  took  his  place  by  no  act  of  a 
tyrannical  usurper,  but  by  the  consent  and 
with  the  support  of  his  people,  heartily  accorded. 
Despite  assertions  to  the  contrary,  the  insurrec- 
tion of  1896,  though  interrupted  and  declared 
by  Spain  to  be  at  an  end,  was  still  in  progress 
at  the  time  of  Dewey’s  arrival. 

I have  no  purpose  to  discuss  here  whether  or 
not  the  Filipinos  were  or  are  capable  of  self-gov- 
ernment ; whether  a government  of  their  own  or 
a government  by  the  United  States  would  be 
the  better  for  them  and  for  the  world  at  large. 
That  is  another  and  a different  matter.  The 
purpose  of  this  chapter  is  the  indication  of  some 
of  the  root  causes  of  the  war  which  followed 
between  the  Filipinos  and  the  United  States. 

America’s  first  touch  upon  the  Philippines 
appears  on  February  25,  1898,  ten  days  after 
the  destruction  of  the  Maine  in  Havana  harbor 
and  one  month  before  the  declaration  of  war 
with  Spain.  On  that  date,  Mr.  Roosevelt,  As- 


40 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


sistant  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  then  acting  as 
Secretary,  sent  the  following  despatch  to  Com- 
modore Dewey,  commanding  the  Asiatic  squad- 
ron of  the  United  States  navy: 

Order  the  squadron,  except  Monocacy,  to  Hongkong. 
Keep  full  of  coal.  In  the  event  of  declaration  of  war 
with  Spain  your  duty  will  be  to  see  that  the  Spanish 
squadron  does  not  leave  the  Asiatic  coast,  and  then 
offensive  operations  in  Philippine  Islands.  Keep  Olym- 
pia until  further  orders. 

On  April  23  war  was  declared  between  Spain 
and  the  United  States.  Hongkong  being  a neu- 
tral port,  the  American  squadron  was  obliged  to 
withdraw  from  its  harbor  under  the  established 
international  law  covering  such  situations.  It 
sailed  to  Mirs  Bay,  a few  miles  to  the  northward, 
in  Chinese  waters,  China  not  being  included  in 
the  international  agreement.  In  the  meantime 
Aguinaldo  had  gone  to  Singapore.  It  is  at  this 
point,  practically,  April  24,  that  there  begins  the 
much-disputed  question  of  the  encouragement 
given  to  Aguinaldo,  by  officials  of  the  United 
States,  concerning  the  future  independence  of 
the  Philippine  Islands.  Charges  and  denials, 
allegations  and  contradictions,  have  followed 
and  the  matter  is  still  in  dispute.  There  would 
seem  to  be  no  question  that  a midnight  meeting 
occurred,  on  the  night  of  April  24,  in  Singapore, 
at  the  instance  of  Mr.  Spencer  Pratt,  the  Ameri- 
can consul-general  at  that  port.  Seven  people 
are  said  to  have  been  present— Emilio  Aguinaldo, 


ROOT  CA  USES  OF  TEE  WAR 


41 


Mr.  Howard  W.  Bray,  an  Englishman  long  resi- 
dent in  the  far  East  and  closely  affiliated  with 
the  Filipino  Junta  in  Hongkong,  American  Con- 
sul Spencer  Pratt,  the  editor  of  the  Singapore 
“Free Press  ” and  three  of  Aguinaldo’s  associates. 
As  to  the  tenor  and  the  results  of  this  meeting, 
Mr.  Pratt  denies  the  statements  made  by  the 
other  parties.  They  assert  the  drawing  up  of  a 
provisional  agreement,  of  which  the  following 
were  the  terms : 

1.  Philippine  independence  to  be  proclaimed. 

2.  A federal  republic  to  be  established  by  vote  of 
the  rebels ; pending  the  taking  of  this  vote,  Aguinaldo 
to  appoint  the  members  of  that  government. 

3.  The  federal  republic  to  recognize  a temporary 
intervention  of  American  and  European  administrative 
commissions  to  be  appointed  by  Commodore  Dewey. 

4.  The  American  protectorate  to  be  recognized  on 
the  same  terms  as  those  fixed  for  Cuba. 

This  was  followed  by  ten  other  and  general 
clauses,  and  a fifteenth  clause  provided  that  the 
agreement  was  subject  to  ratification  (by  tele- 
graph) by  Commodore  Dewey  and  President 
McKinley. 

Consul  Pratt  denies  this  agreement,  and  the 
others  have  produced  no  incontrovertible  proof 
that  it  ever  existed.  The  Junta  in  Hongkong- 
assured  me  in  emphatic  terms  that  it  was  a fact. 
It  appears  to  remain  largely  a question  of  per- 
sonal veracity  and  I make  no  effort  to  determine 
which  side  has  the  rights  of  the  matter.  That 
pleasant  relations  existed  at  the  time  between 


42 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Messrs.  Pratt  and  Aguinaldo,  that  Mr.  Pratt’s 
sympathies  were  with  the  insurgents,  and  that 
he  eagerly  sought  to  make  use  of  Aguinaldo  as 
an  ally  of  the  United  States,  is  clearly  evidenced 
by  Mr.  Pratt’s  telegram  of  April  28,  four  days 
subsequent  to  the  meeting.  This  is  reported  in 
Senate  Document  No.  62,  in  the  following  form 1 : 

Consulate-General  of  the  United  States, 
Singapore,  April  28, 1898. 

On  the  evening  of  Saturday,  the  23d  instant,  I was 
confidentially  informed  of  the  arrival  here,  incognito, 
of  the  supreme  leader  of  the  Philippine  insurgents, 
General  Emilio  Aguinaldo,  by  Mr.  Howard  W.  Bray, 
an  English  gentleman  of  high  standing,  who,  after 
fifteen  years’  residence  as  a merchant  and  planter  in 
the  Philippines,  had  been  compelled  by  the  disturbed 
condition  of  things  resulting  from  Spanish  misrule  to 
abandon  his  property  and  leave  there,  and  from  whom 
I had  previously  obtained  much  valuable  information 
for  Commodore  Dewey  regarding  fortifications,  coal 
deposits,  etc.,  at  different  points  in  the  islands. 

Being  aware  of  the  great  prestige  of  General  Agui- 
naldo with  the  insurgents,  and  that  no  one,  either  at 
home  or  abroad,  could  exert  over  them  the  same  influ- 
ence and  control  that  he  could,  I determined  at  once  to 
see  him,  and,  at  my  request,  a secret  interview  was 
accordingly  arranged  for  the  following  morning,  Sun- 
day, the  24th,  in  which,  besides  General  Aguinaldo, 
were  only  present  the  general’s  trusted  advisers  and 
Mr.  Bray,  who  acted  as  interpreter.  ...  I telegraphed 
the  commodore  the  same  day  as  follows,  through  our 
consul-general  at  Hongkong : 

“Aguinaldo,  insurgent  leader,  here.  Will  come  Hong- 
kong. Arrange  with  commodore  for  general  cooperation 
insurgents  Manila  if  desired.  Telegraph.  Pratt.” 

1 Senate  Document  No.  62,  Part  I,  Fifty-fifth  Congress,  Third 
Session,  Despatch  No.  212. 


ROOT  CAUSE 8 OF  THE  WAR 


43 


The  commodore’s  reply  reading  thus  : 

“ Tell  Aguinaldo  come  soon  as  possible.  Dewey.” 

I received  it  late  that  night,  and  at  once  communi- 
cated it  to  General  Aguinaldo,  whom,  with  his  aide-de- 
camp  and  private  secretary,  all  under  assumed  names, 
I succeeded  in  getting  off  by  the  British  steamer 
Malacca , which  left  here  on  Tuesday,  the  26th. 

E.  Spencer  Pratt, 

TJ.  8.  Consul-General  at  Singapore. 

Aguinaldo  returned  to  Hongkong,  but  did 

not  arrive  until  after  Dewey  had  sailed  for 

Manila.  Instructions  had  been  left  and  arrange- 

© 

ments  made  with  Consul  Bounsevelle  Wildman 
of  Hongkong  for  his  early  transportation  to 
Manila. 

Whatever  may  be  the  real  truth  about  the  con- 
ference at  Singapore  between  Mr.  Spencer  Pratt 
and  Emilio  Aguinaldo,  it  is  hardly  open  to  doubt 
that  Aguinaldo  received  a certain  impression 
from  the  conversation.  The  Singapore  “Free 
Press,”  the  editor  of  which  was  present  at  the 
conference  on  the  night  of  April  24,  1898,  pub- 
lished a report  of  the  meeting  at  the  time  of  its 
occurrence,  and  Mr.  Howard  Bray,  who  was  also 
present,  asserts  that  Aguinaldo  “ had,  in  view  of 
what  took  place  in  Singapore  and  the  telegrams 
received  from  Commodore  Dewey  [then  in  Hong- 
kong], full  justification  for  believing  that  the 
United  States  would  raise  no  objection  to  the 
complete  autonomy  of  the  Philippines,  and 
would,  after  the  Spaniards  were  expelled  from 


44 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  islands,  establish  a protectorate  over  the 
whole  group.”  I quote  Mr.  Bray’s  own  words. 

A few  days  prior  to  the  sailing  of  the  Ameri- 
can squadron,  the  following  proclamation  was 
sent  by  the  Junta  Patriotica  in  Hongkong  to 
representative  Filipino  insurgents  in  Manila : 

Compatriots  : Divine  Providence  is  about  to  place 

independence  within  our  reach,  and  in  a way  the  most 
free  and  independent  nation  could  hardly  wish  for. 

The  Americans,  not  from  mercenary  motives,  but  for 
the  sake  of  humanity  and  the  lamentations  of  so  many 
persecuted  people,  have  considered  it  opportune  to  ex- 
tend their  protecting  mantle  to  our  beloved  country, 
now  that  they  have  been  obliged  to  sever  relations  with 
Spain,  owing  to  the  tyranny  this  nation  is  exercising 
in  Cuba,  causing  enormous  injury  to  the  Americans, 
who  have  such  large  commercial  and  other  interests 
there. 

At  the  present  moment  an  American  squadron  is 
preparing  to  sail  for  the  Philippines. 

We,  your  brothers,  are  very  much  afraid  that  you 
may  be  induced  to  fire  on  the  Americans.  No, 
brothers  ; never  make  this  mistake.  Rather  blow  your 
own  brains  out  than  fire  a shot  or  treat  as  enemies 
those  who  are  your  liberators. 

Your  natural  enemies,  your  executioners,  the  authors 
of  your  misery  and  unhappiness,  are  the  Spaniards  who 
govern  you.  Against  these  you  must  raise  your 
weapons  and  odium ; understand  well — against  the 
Spaniards,  and  never  against  the  Americans. 

Take  no  notice  of  the  decree  of  the  govern  or- general 
calling  you  to  arms,  although  it  may  cost  you  your 
lives.  Rather  die  than  be  ungrateful  to  our  American 
liberators. 

The  governor-general  calls  you  to  arms.  What  for? 
To  defend  your  Spanish  tyrants?  To  defend  those 
that  have  despised  you  and  even  in  public  speeches 


ROOT  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR 


45 


asked  for  your  extermination— those  that  have  treated 
you  little  better  than  savages?  No!  No!  A thou- 
sand times,  no ! 

Give  a glance  at  history,  and  you  will  see  that  all 
Spain’s  wars  in  Oceaniea  have  sacrificed  Philippine 
blood.  We  have  been  put  to  fight  in  Cochin-China  to 
assist  the  French  in  an  affair  that  in  no  way  concerned 
the  Philippines.  We  were  compelled  to  spill  our  blood 
by  Simon  de  Anda  against  the  English,  who  in  any 
case  would  have  made  better  rulers  than  the  Span- 
iards. Every  year  our  children  are  taken  away  to  be 
sacrificed  in  Mindanao  and  Sulu,  on  the  pretense  of 
making  us  believe  these  people  are  our  enemies,  when 
in  reality  they  are  our  brothers— like  us,  fighting  for 
their  independence. 

After  having  sacrificed  our  blood  against  the  Eng- 
lish, against  the  Annamites,  against  the  people  of 
Mindanao,  etc.,  what  recompense  or  thanks  have  we 
received  from  the  Spanish  government?  Obscurity, 
poverty,  the  butchery  of  those  dear  to  us.  Enough, 
brothers,  of  this  Spanish  tutelage  ! 

Take  note.  The  Americans  will  attack  by  sea  and 
prevent  any  reinforcements  coming  from  Spain  ; there- 
fore we  insurgents  must  attack  by  land.  Probably  you 
will  have  more  than  sufficient  arms,  because  the  Amer- 
icans have  arms  and  will  find  means  to  assist  us. 

There,  where  you  see  the  American  flag  flying,  as- 
semble in  numbers ; they  are  our  redeemers. 

Our  unworthy  names  are  as  nothing,  but  one  and  all 
of  us  invoke  the  name  of  the  greatest  patriot  our  coun- 
try has  seen,  in  the  sure  and  certain  hope  that  his 
spirit  will  be  with  us  in  these  moments  and  guide  us  to 
victory— our  immortal  Jose  Rizal. 

That  the  United  States  authorities  in  Wash- 
ington discredited,  in  the  terms  of  the  following 
despatch,  any  definite  arrangement  or  under- 
standing which  Mr.  Pratt  might  have  made  or 
did  make  with  Aguinaldo  is  a fair  implication 


46 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  their  impression  that  an  indiscretion  had  been 
committed;  but  it  does  not  alter  the  fact  that 
Aguinaldo  certainly  appears  to  have  left  Singa- 
pore with  a conviction  of  American  support  in 
the  .Filipino  struggle  for  independence,  or,  at 
least,  autonomy  under  an  American  protectorate. 
Washington  cabled  to  Mr.  Pratt  as  follows: 

It  is  assumed  that  you  did  not  attempt  to  commit 
this  government  to  any  alliance  with  the  Philippine 
insurgents.  To  obtain  the  unconditional  personal 
assistance  of  General  Aguinaldo  in  the  expedition  to 
Manila  w’as  proper  if  in  so  doing  he  was  not  induced 
to  form  hopes  which  it  might  not  be  practicable  to 
gratify.  ...  If,  in  the  course  of  your  conferences 
with  Aguinaldo,  you  acted  upon  the  assumption  that 
this  government  would  cooperate  with  him  for  the 
furtherance  of  any  plan  of  his  own,  or  that,  in  accept- 
ing his  cooperation,  it  would  consider  itself  pledged  to 
recognize  any  political  claims  which  he  may  put  for- 
ward, your  action  was  unauthorized  and  cannot  be 
approved. 

On  May  19  Aguinaldo  arrived  in  Manila  Bay 
with  seventeen  of  his  associates,  having  crossed 
on  the  United  States  despatch-boat  McCulloch , 
according  to  an  arrangement  effected  by  Com- 
modore Dewey.  Upon  their  arrival  they  re- 
ceived a cordial  welcome  from  the  commodore 
and  a most  enthusiastic  welcome  from  the  Fili- 
pino people.  Aguinaldo  was  promptly  installed 
in  an  official  headquarters  in  Cavite  and  at  once 
took  up  the  work  of  directing  the  movements  of 
his  people.  Orders  and  proclamations  were  is- 
sued in  great  numbers.  The  insurrection 


ROOT  CA  USES  OF  THE  WAR 


47 


throughout  the  islands  sprang  into  newness  of 
life.  The  insurgents  were  supplied  with  arms, 
ammunition  and  stores  by  the  American  au- 
thorities. So  active  and  energetic  were  their 
movements  that,  less  than  thirty  days  from  the 
date  of  Aguinaldo’s  arrival,  Consul  Williams 
sent  the  following  despatch  (dated  June  16)  to 
the  officials  in  Washington : 

U.  S.  S.  “ Baltimore,  Consulate  of 
the  United  States, 

Manila,  Philippine  Islands,  June  16,  1898. 

I have  the  honor  to  report  that  since  our  squadron 
destroyed  the  Spanish  fleet  on  May  1,  the  insurgent 
forces  have  been  most  active  and  almost  uniformly  suc- 
cessful in  their  many  encounters  with  the  crown  forces 
of  Spain.  General  Emilio  Aguinaldo,  the  insurgent 
chief,  who  was  deported  late  in  1897,  returned  recently 
to  Cavite  and  resumed  direction  of  insurgent  forces. 
He  is  not  permitted  by  his  people  to  personally  lead  in 
battle,  but  from  headquarters  governs  all  military  move- 
ments. He  told  me  to-day  that  since  his  return  his 
forces  had  captured  nearly  5000  prisoners,  nearly  4000 
of  whom  were  Spaniards,  and  all  of  whom  had  rifles 
when  taken.  General  Aguinaldo  has  now  about  10,500 
rifles  and  8 field-pieces,  with  8000  more  rifles,  2 Maxim 
guns,  and  a dynamite-gun  bought  in  China  and  now  in 
transit.  The  insurgents  have  defeated  the  Spaniards  at 
all  points  except  at  fort  near  Malate  and  hold  not  only 
North  Luzon  to  the  suburbs  of  Manila,  but  Batangas 
province  also,  and  the  bay  coast  entire,  save  the  city  of 
Manila. 

While  the  Spaniards  cruelly  and  barbarously 
slaughter  Filipinos  taken  in  arms,  and  often  non-com- 
batants, women  and  children,  the  insurgent  victors, 
following  American  example,  spare  life,  protect  the 
helpless  and  nurse,  feed  and  care  for  Spaniards  taken 


48 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


prisoners  and  for  Spanish  wounded  as  kindly  as  they 
care  for  the  wounded  fallen  from  their  own  ranks. 

Oscar  F.  Williams, 

U.  S.  Consul. 

The  Philippine  Islands,  with  the  exception  of 
the  besieged  city  of  Manila,  were  virtually  in 
the  hands  of  the  Filipinos. 

Space  does  not  permit  the  inclusion  here  of  a 
great  mass  of  documentary  proof,  some  already 
published  and  some  as  yet  withheld,  fairly  es- 
tablishing that  which  is  indicated  by  the  fore- 
going, namely,  that,  authoritatively  or  otherwise, 
American  officials,  notably  Consuls  Pratt,  Wild- 
man  and  Williams,  did  honestly  and  deliberately, 
whether  or  not  through  inefficient  diplomacy, 
convey  to  Aguinaldo  and  his  associates  an  idea, 
which  he  and  they  converted  into  a belief,  that 
out  of  the  Spanish- American  complication  would 
come  political  independence  for  the  Filipinos. 
In  view  of  the  attainable  facts  in  the  case,  it  is 
both  astonishing  and  puzzling  to  read  in  the  re- 
port of  the  first  Philippine  Commission  that  it 
was  only  at  the  time  of  the  arrival  of  American 
troops  under  General  Anderson,  on  July  1,  1898, 
that  there,  “ for  the  first  time,  arose  the  idea  of 
national  independence.”  The  statement  seems 
to  leave  the  commissioners  open  to  a charge  of 
either  perversion  of  facts  or  a superficial  inves- 
tigation. 

I have  already  quoted,  in  the  preceding  chap- 
ter, Aguinaldo’s  manifesto  of  the  midsummer 


BOOT  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAB 


49 


of  1897,  asserting  the  Filipino  aspiration  “ to  the 
glory  of  obtaining  the  liberty,  independence  and 
honor  of  the  country.”  Without  going  into  any 
earlier  history,  and  dealing  only  with  the  period 
of  the  early  days  of  American  occupation,  we 
find,  under  date  of  April  30,  1898,  a letter  from 
Consul  Pratt  to  the  Secretary  of  State  in  Wash- 
ington, in  which  he  says : 

The  general  [Aguinaldo]  further  stated  that  he 
hoped  the  United  States  would  assume  protection  of 
the  Philippines  for  at  least  long  enough  to  allow  the 
inhabitants  to  establish  a government  of  their  own. 

Further  evidence  is  found  in  the  proclamation 
of  the  Junta,  already  quoted. 

On  June  8, 1898,  and  before  the  declaration  of 
independence  by  the  Filipinos,  the  Filipinos  of 
Singapore  presented  an  address  to  Mr.  Pratt, 
the  American  consul,  in  which  they  said : 

Our  countrymen  at  home  and  those  of  us  residing 
here — refugees  from  Spanish  misrule  and  tyranny  in 
our  beloved  native  land— hope  that  the  United  States, 
your  nation,  persevering  in  its  humane  policy,  will 
efficaciously  second  the  program  arranged  between  you, 
sir,  and  General  Aguinaldo  in  this  port  of  Singapore, 
and  secure  to  us  our  independence  under  the  protection 
of  the  United  States. 

Aguinaldo’s  proclamation,  issued  from  Cavite 
June  18,  contains  these  words : 

I proclaim  in  the  face  of  the  whole  world  that  the 
aspirations  of  my  whole  life  and  the  final  object  of  all 


50 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


my  desires  and  efforts  is  no  other  thing  than  your 
independence,  because  I have  the  innate  conviction 
that  that  constitutes  your  unalterable  desire,  as  inde- 
pendence means  for  us  the  redemption  from  slavery 
and  tyranny,  the  reconquest  of  our  lost  liberties,  and 
our  entry  into  the  concert  of  the  civilized  nations. 

The  following  appears  in  a decree  issued  June 
23,  though  probably  prepared  at  an  earlier  date : 

Article  1.  The  dictatorial  government  will  be  called 
in  future  the  revolutionary  government,  whose  object 
is  to  fight  for  the  independence  of  the  Philippines 
until  the  free  nations,  including  the  Spanish,  shall  ex- 
pressly recognize  it,  and  to  prepare  the  country  for  the 
establishment  of  a true  republic.  The  dictator  iu  the 
future  will  bear  the  title  of  president  of  the  revolution- 
ary government. 

These  are  but  a few  of  the  many  references 
made  at  this  time  and  at  earlier  dates  to  the 
aspiration  and  aim  of  the  Filipinos  for  national 
independence.  That  the  Filipinos  were,  for 
several  months  after  Dewey’s  naval  victory, 
regarded  by  the  Americans  as  allies,  is  fully 
established  by  a mass  of  correspondence.  Upon 
his  arrival  in  Manila  Bay,  under  date  of  July  4, 
General  Anderson  wrote  Aguinaldo  as  follows : 

Senor  Don  Emilio  Aguinaldo  y Famy, 

Commanding  Philippine  Forces. 

General  : I have  the  honor  to  inform  you  that  the 
United  States  of  America,  whose  forces  I have  the 
honor  to  command  in  this  vicinity,  being  at  war  with 
the  kingdom  of  Spain,  have  entire  sympathy  and  most 
friendly  sentiments  for  the  native  people  of  the  Philip- 
pine Islands. 


ROOT  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR 


51 


For  these  reasons,  I desire  to  have  the  most  amicable 
relations  with  yon,  and  to  have  you  and  your  people 
cooperate  with  us  in  military  operations  against  the 
Spanish  forces,  etc. 

The  argument  of  an  alliance  finds  support  in 
the  friendly  personal  relations  existing  between 
Aguinaldo  and  Commodore  Dewey;  in  the  fact 
of  the  military  operations  throughout  Luzon 
and  the  investment  of  Manila  within  sight  of  the 
American  ships;  in  the  fact  that  for  a number 
of  weeks  vessels  flying  the  Filipino  flag  moved 
about  Manila  Bay,  saluting  and  being  saluted  by 
the  ships  of  the  American  squadron ; in  the  .fact 
that  arms  and  ammunition  and  stores  were  sup- 
plied to  the  insurgents,  and  that  Spanish  pris- 
oners to  the  number  of  several  hundred,  taken 
by  Americans,  were  turned  over  to  the  Filipinos ; 
and  in  all  of  that  general  cooperation  which  is 
known  to  have  existed  prior  to  the  final  attack 
on  Manila  on  August  13. 

There  would  seem  to  be  but  two  possible 
interpretations  of  the  situation : either  the  Fili- 
pinos were  the  allies  of  the  Americans  and  were 
so  regarded  by  the  Americans  and  by  them- 
selves, or  they  were  looked  upon  only  as  con- 
venient tools. 


IV 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR 


The  dictatorial  government— The  constitution  of  a revolu- 
tionary government— America’s  attitude  toward  the  Philip- 
pines—Arrival  of  American  troops— Distrust  engendered 
—.Strained  relations— American  commanders— Attitude  of 
American  soldiery  toward  the  Filipinos— Faults  of  enlisted 
men— American  fighters— The  germs  of  war— Faith  in  the 
American  people— Increasing  strain  upon  relations— Paris 
treaty— A blow  to  Filipino  aspirations— A doubtful  procla- 
mation—The  commission. 


WITHIN  the  range  of  Dewey’s  guns,  Agui- 


naldo,  on  June  18,  1898,  established  a 
dictatorial  government,  placing  himself  at  its 
head  by  the  advice  and  with  the  support  of  his 
associates.  A few  days  later  the  dictatorial  was 
changed  to  a revolutionary  government.  An 
elaborate  constitution  was  issued.  It  is  probable 
that  it  had  been  in  course  of  preparation  for 
many  weeks.  Of  that  constitution  an  eminent 
American  authority,  Senator  Hoar,  has  said: 
“ There  are  not  ten  men  on  the  planet  who  could 
have  made  one  better.”  They  organized  an 
army,  launched  a small  navy,  which  they  main- 


52 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR  53 


tained  until  their  little  vessels  were  seized  by 
the  American  authorities,  and  established  local 
governments  throughout  the  islands.  They  had 
telegraphs  and  a post-office,.  They  had  a Presi- 
dent and  a Cabinet,  recognized  and  supported 
by  all.  In  these  processes  they  received  direct 
and  indirect  support  and  encouragement  from 
American  officials.  In  the  main,  up  to  the  cap- 
ture of  Manila  on  August  13,  the  relations 
between  Filipinos  and  Americans  were  cordial. 
Some  little  friction  occurred  from  time  to  time 
between  members  of  the  two  armies  and  there 
were  occasional  differences  between  command- 
ers, but,  in  general,  they  rubbed  along  easily 
enough. 

Up  to  about  August  1,  little  had  been  said  or 
thought  in  America  concerning  the  final  dispo- 
sition of  the  islands.  A general  interest  was 
taken  in  the  Philippine  question,  but  it  was 
overshadowed  by  the  operations  in  the  West 
Indies,  then  regarded  as  of  supreme  importance. 
The  Philippines  were  far  away  and  the  Ameri- 
can people  knew  little  about  them.  Mr.  Dooley’s 
charge  to  Mr.  Hennessy  that  “ ’t  is  not  more  thin 
two  months  since  ye  larned  whether  they  were 
islands  or  canned  goods,”  might  have  been 
brought  against  the  great  majority  of  the  Ameri- 
can people.  We  had  heard  of  Manila  hemp 
(which  does  not  grow  near  Manila)  and  Manila 
tobacco  (most  of  which  is  grown  more  than  a 
hundred  miles  from  Manila),  and  that  was  about 


54 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


.the  limit  of  our  information.  It  was  many 
months  before  Mr.  Dooley  was  able  to  describe 
the  Philippines  for  us  as  “ islands,  an  issue  and 
a public  nuisance.” 

Occasionally  some  little-noticed  comment  was 
heard,  to  the  effect  that  we  should  retain  a coal- 
ing-station in  the  islands.  Now  and  then  some 
one  suggested  that  we  should  establish  a protec- 
torate over  them.  A few  said  something  about 
keeping  them.  The  situation  was  distinctly 
tentative.  People  were  waiting  to  hear  more. 
Meanwhile,  even  then,  trouble  was  brewing  on 
the  islands  themselves.  The  cloud  was  “no 
bigger  than  a man’s  hand,”  but  it  was  the 
nucleus  of  the  storm  which  broke  some  seven 
months  later.  I assume  that  the  Filipinos  be- 
lieved, and  had  been  led  to  believe,  that  the 
Americans  intended  no  permanent  occupation 
or  retention  of  the  Philippine  Islands.  In  the 
beginning  they  trusted  the  Americans,  believing 
that  American  purposes  and  plans  were  wholly 
altruistic.  It  took  not  many  days  to  introduce 
an  element  of  doubt  and  distrust.  The  Ameri- 
can commanders  treated  Filipino  officials  with  a 
businesslike  curtness  and  a military  imperious- 
ness which  was  wholly  new  in  their  experience. 
Troop-ship  after  troop-ship  arrived  in  Manila 
Bay.  Ever  fresh  demands  were  made  that  the 
Filipino  troops  move  a little  farther  away  to 
make  more  room  for  the  arriving  thousands  of 
America’s  soldiery.  What  was  the  need  of  all 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR  55 


these  troops  ? This  was  the  question  raised  by 
the  little  brown  men.  What  were  they  for? 
Whom  were  they  going  to  fight  ? Spain’s  weak- 
ened and  broken  remnant  of  an  army  was  shut 
up  in  Manila.  The  Filipinos  held  nearly  nine 
thousand  Spanish  prisoners.  With  the  help  of 
those  great  war-ships  in  the  bay,  without  the  aid 
of  a single  American  soldier,  the  wiry  little  men 
of  Aguinaldo’s  regiments  could  easily  take  Ma- 
nila at  any  time.  All  they  wanted  was  a few 
arms,  and  those  had  been  supplied  by  the  Amer- 
ican navy,  imported  from  China  and  captured 
from  their  enemies.  Why,  then,  all  these  thou- 
sands of  brawny  American  fighting-men  ? 

Thus  the  little  brown  men  reasoned  among 
themselves.  Doubt,  suspicion  and  distrust  of 
the  American  pui-pose  grew  stronger  and 
stronger.  They  were  used  to  little  else,  in  their 
past  history,  than  duplicity  and  bad  faith.  Sus- 
picion grows  readily  in  such  minds.  Most 
unhappily  for  them  and  for  us,  little  was  done 
to  allay  it  and  much  was  done  to  increase  it. 
This  feeling  culminated  at  the  siege  of  Manila. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  the  Filipinos  were  rudely 
crowded  out  of  that  which  they  had  hoped  to 
share— both  the  victory  and  the  spoils.  It  is 
alleged  against  them  that  they  wanted  to  loot  the 
city.  V ery  likely.  Such  had  been  their  training 
under  the  Spaniards.  Then,  too,  it  is  to  be  re- 
membered that  they  are  not  the  only  army  in  the 
world  which  is  given  to  a penchant  for  loot. 


56 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


From  this  time  on  relations  became  more  and 
more  strained  between  the  two  forces.  More 
and  more  the  Filipinos  began  to  doubt  the  reali- 
zation of  those  hopes  and  aspirations  for  which 
American  officials  were,  beyond  a doubt,  largely 
responsible.  The  alliance  business  seemed  to  be 
about  over  and  the  Filipino,  who  did  not  under- 
stand American  ways,  felt  that  he  had  been 
used  while  he  was  wanted  and  thrown  away 
when  the  work  was  done.  He  felt  that  he  was 
thrust  outside  and  the  door  shut  in  his  face. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  the  military  comman- 
ders sent  to  the  Philippines  in  those  early  days 
should  not  have  been  men  of  a different  type. 
General  Anderson  was  the  first  to  arrive,  a sol- 
dier brusque  and  imperious  after  the  fashion 
of  men  whose  life  for  forty  years  has  consisted 
largely  in  giving  orders.  The  life  habit  was 
strong  upon  him,  and  he  sent  orders  to  Agui- 
naldo  such  as  he  would  send  to  colonels  of  his 
own  regiments.  General  Emilio  Aguinaldo  y 
Famy  may  or  may  not  have  overestimated  the 
dignity  which  attached  to  his  position  as  com- 
mander-in-chief  of  the  Philippine  forces,  but  he 
was  not  pleased  with  being  ignored  in  the  mili- 
tary operations,  called  upon  to  furnish  horses, 
carabao  and  forage  for  his  allies,  and  ordered  to 
move  his  troops  from  place  to  place  to  make 
room  for  the  soldiers  from  America. 

General  Merritt  was  the  ranking  officer  after 
his  arrival  on  July  25.  It  is  an  open  secret  that 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  TEE  WAR  57 


he  was  wholly  out  of  harmony  with  his  sur- 
roundings. He  wanted  to  go  home,  hoped  and 
expected  to  go  home  at  an  early  date.  Gleneral 
Merritt  has  been  one  of  the  ablest  generals 
in  the  American  service,  but  he  failed  utterly 
as  an  administrator  in  the  Philippine  Islands. 
General  Greene’s  work  was  ably  done,  but  his 
position  was  a secondary  command.  In  that 
work  he  displayed  a broader  tact  and  finer  di- 
plomacy than  did  either  of  his  associates  and  it 
is  possible  that  trouble  might  have  been  avoided 
had  he  been  in  supreme  command.  It  has  been 
very  truly  said  that  “ America’s  great  need  in 
those  early  days  in  the  Philippines  was  a soldier 
who  had  also  the  qualities  of  a statesman.”  We 
have  such  men  in  the  army  and  it  is  a pity  that 
one  of  them  was  not  in  charge  of  the  Philippine 
expedition.  In  this  lack  lies  one  of  the  immedi- 
ate causes  of  the  war,  and  a measure  of  responsi- 
bility rests  with  America  for  its  occurrence. 

Another  feature  presents  itself.  Even  in 
those  early  days,  little  bickerings  and  a growing 
dislike  for  each  other  began  to  be  manifest 
among  the  ranks  of  both  armies.  I heartily  con- 
cede all  the  fighting  qualities  of  the  American 
enlisted  man.  I have  seen  him  on  the  fighting- 
line. But  I cannot  compliment  him  as  a diplo- 
mat. Particularly  in  relations  with  such  people 
as  our  armies  have  encountered  in  our  new  pos- 
sessions—in  Porto  Rico,  in  Cuba  and  in  the 
Philippines— he  fails  to  shine.  He  carries  the 


58 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


innate  sense  of  an  Anglo-Saxon  race  superiority 
and  he  often  manifests  it  in  a most  offensive 
way.  I speak  from  my  own  observation  during 
two  years  of  almost  continuous  life  with  the 
American  army.  The  great  mass  of  the  soldiers 
are  of  a rather  rough-and-tumble  class,  hearty, 
boisterous,  and  quite  too  much  disposed  to  re- 
gard those  whom  we  have  encountered  in  our 
“ expanding  ” as,  in  their  own  language,  either 

“ niggers  ” or  “ Dagos.” 

This  has  been  a fruitful  source  of  trouble.  It 
has  caused  resentment  and  bitter  feeling.  The 
many  soldier-men  who  go  their  way,  mind  their 
own  business  and  do  their  duty  pass  unnoticed. 
The  rowdy  and  the  bully,  loud-mouthed,  aggres- 
sive and  offensive,  give  to  these  people  the  im- 
pression of  the  whole.  The  Filipino  resented 
the  American  way  of  taking  complete  charge  of 
the  situation  in  a country  which  he  felt  was  his, 
and  it  is  wholly  probable  that  he  often  showed 
it.  The  brawny  American  pushed  the  little  man 
off  the  narrow  sidewalk  in  Manila.  Very  likely 
the  little  man  expectorated  on  the  big  American. 
Very  likely,  also,  the  little  man  got  a kick  or  a 
cuff  for  doing  so.  That  sort  of  thing  does  not 
tend  toward  friendly  international  relations.  In 
General  Otis’s  report  covering  operations  from 
September,  1899,  to  May,  1900,  he  states  that  he 
desires  to  correct  a moderately  prevalent  opinion 
that  war  with  the  insurgents  was  caused  by  the 
attitude  or  conduct  of  our  troops  in  Manila, 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR  59 


unless  it  was  due  to  the  failure  of  our  men  to 
resent  insult  and  so  to  encourage  the  Filipinos 
in  a belief  in  American  cowardice.  I think  the 
general  would  better  have  left  that  out,  unless 
he  intended  it  as  a joke.  There  is  a world  of 
humor  in  the  idea  of  the  long-suffering,  patient 
and  forbearing  American  trooper  turning  the 
“other  cheek  also.” 

Probably  the  majority  of  our  officers  in  the 
regular  army  abhor  war  because  they  know 
what  it  means.  They  know  that  it  means  dead 
men,  wounded  men,  sick  men.  They  know  that 
it  means  an  old  classmate  bowled  over  by  a shell 
or  a bullet , a warm  friend  with  an  empty  sleeve 
for  the  rest  of  his  life,  an  associate  gone  out  with 
dysentery  or  typhoid.  It  may  mean  their  own 
call.  Daring,  enduring  and  unflinching  when  war 
comes,  I still  believe  that  few  of  them  have  any 
love  for  it.  With  the  volunteer  and  the  new  man 
it  is  otherwise.  Some  picture  war  as  a schutzenfest 
—a  kind  of  military  picnic.  They  are  the  ones 
who  grumble  at  their  quarters  and  their  rations. 
Some  see  in  it  a chance  for  a little  tin  glory, 
when  they  return  to  be  hailed  as  heroes  by  their 
friends  and  companions.  Some  go  from  purely 
patriotic  motives,  from  a sense  of  duty  to  their 
country.  To  go  to  war  and  see  no  fighting  is, 
to  the  majority,  a humiliation,  if  not  a disgrace. 

At  the  outset,  enlistment  was  for  the  war  in 
Cuba.  Few  had  their  thoughts  turned  west- 
ward to  the  distant  Philippines.  But,  Cuba  or 


60 


the  Philippines 


the  Philippines,  they  enlisted  for  a fight,  hoped 
for  a fight,  and  many  did  not  hesitate  to  say — I 
have  heard  it  often  from  their  own  lips — that 
they  did  not  intend  to  go  home  without  having 
seen  a fight.  The  reports  sent  in,  officially,  from 
Manila  during  the  early  summer  of  1899  indi- 
cated the  probability  of  an  early  ending  of  hos- 
tilities in  the  Philippines.  I have  seen  the  look 
of  delighted  satisfaction  on  the  faces  of  hundreds 
of  new  arrivals  who  had  left  San  Francisco  fear- 
ing that  all  would  be  over  before  they  arrived 
out,  when  they  heard  the  news,  on  landing,  that 
there  was  still  ample  chance  for  a “ scrap.”  This 
belligerent  attitude  on  the  part  of  our  soldiery 
is  admitted  by  all  fair-minded  observers.  Some 
even  glory  in  it.  In  the  presence  of  any  possi- 
ble enemy  this  attitude  becomes  a mass  of 
inflammable  material,  the  ready  cause  of  a 
conflagration. 

In  that  attitude  the  American  soldiers  were 
not  alone  to  blame.  With  the  development 
of  the  situation,  the  Filipino  soldiers  became, 
perhaps,  equally  culpable,  except  that,  as  the 
stronger  and  the  wiser,  a greater  moral  responsi- 
bility rested  with  the  Americans  for  the  preser- 
vation of  peace  and  the  maintenance  of  friendly 
relations. 

General  Otis,  in  his  official  report,  asserts  the 
capture,  at  Tarlak,  of  documentary  proof  that 
Aguinaldo,  prior  to  his  arrival  in  Manila,  had 
resolved  to  use  the  American  forces  to  further 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR  61 


his  own  ends,  and  then  to  “ drive  them  out  hv 
the  sword.”  In  view  of  the  facts  that  at  that 
time  there  existed  no  purpose  on  the  part  of  the 
American  people  to  hold  the  islands,  that  his 
own  associates  on  the  commission  have  asserted, 
in  their  report,  that  it  was  not  until  some 
months  later  that  there  11  first  arose  the  idea  of  a 
national  independence,”  and  that  the  support- 
ing evidence  is  not  produced,  the  statement  is 
somewhat  remarkable. 

Rest  the  responsibility  where  it  may,  the  fact 
stands  that  there  was  a continually  increasing 
strain  on  the  relations  of  two  military  forces 
that  stood  face  to  face  along  a line  extending 
for  some  twenty  miles  around  the  city  of  Manila. 
Both  sides  threw  up  intrenchments.  General 
Otis  states  that  America  is  the  only  nation  in 
the  world  which  would  have  permitted  these 
warlike  preparations  on  the  part  of  the  Filipinos ; 
but  would  not  the  intrenching  by  his  own 
troops  and  his  insistence  upon  American  occu- 
pation of  blockhouses  and  the  most  important 
points  of  strategic  value,  be  naturally  construed 
by  the  Filipinos  as  a threatening  attitude  which 
necessitated  defenses  upon  their  part?  Free 
passage  to  and  from  the  city  was  denied  to  the 
Filipinos  and  in  various  ways  restrictions  were 
imposed,  the  meaning  of  which  they  did  not 
comprehend.  It  is  wholly  easy  to  see  how  they 
might,  as  they  doubtless  did,  interpret  the  neces- 
sarily strict  and  sometimes  apparently  high- 


62 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


handed  processes  of  military  law  into  an  attitude 
of  predetermined  aggression. 

Still  another  factor,  and  one  of  the  most  seri- 
ous, enters  into  the  situation.  The  Filipinos, 
flushed  with  the  success  which  had  attended 
their  operations  throughout  the  islands  and 
ardent  as  so  many  of  them  then  were  for  the 
day  of  their  national  independence,  not  only 
failed  to  understand  the  continued  presence  of 
a large  body  of  troops,  but,  as  well,  they  failed 
to  understand  why  America  did  not  announce 
her  policy  in  regard  to  the  islands.  Some  of  us 
have  done  a little  puzzling  over  that  subject  on 
our  own  account.  They  were  kept  in  a state  of 
uncertainty,  and  doubt  and  suspicion  of  the  in- 
tentions of  the  American  administration  grew 
from  day  to  day.  Their  complaint  was  against 
the  officials.  Nearly  a year  later,  Filipinos  who 
were  prominently  connected  with  their  cause 
told  me  in  most  positive  terms  that  their  faith 
in  the  “ great  American  people  ” was  unshaken. 
They  asserted  their  belief  and  their  confidence 
that  when  the  American  people  should  know 
and  understand  them  and  their  aspirations,  their 
wrongs  would  be  righted.  It  is  that  idea  which 
lies  at  the  root  of  their  interest  in  the  American 
election.  They  believe  that  American  official- 
dom has  done  them  wrong,  and  they  look  to  the 
“great  American  people,  who  are  a just  and 
honest  and  noble  people,”  to  set  them  right. 

With  the  developments  of  the  autumn  of  1898 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR  63 


the  increasing  strain  upon  the  relations  contin- 
ued. The  idea  of  permanent  hold  upon  the 
islands  appeared  to  strengthen  in  the  United 
States.  The  commission  sat  in  Paris,  and  on 
December  10,  the  treaty  was  signed  under  which 
the  Philippine  Islands  were  definitely  ceded  by 
Spain  to  the  United  States.  It  was  ratified 
on  February  10,  1899.  The  Filipino  saw  in  this 
a threatened  death-blow  to  his  aspirations  for 
national  independence.  On  December  21,  Presi- 
dent McKinley  sent  to  the  Secretary  of  War  the 
following  letter  of  instructions.  It  was  duly 
forwarded  to  General  Otis,  then  serving  as  gov- 
ernor-general in  the  Philippines. 

Sir  : The  destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleet  in  the 

harbor  of  Manila  by  the  United  States  naval  squadron, 
commanded  by  Rear-Admiral  Dewey,  followed  by  the 
reduction  of  the  city  and  the  surrender  of  the  Spanish 
forces,  practically  effected  the  conquest  of  the  Philip- 
pine Islands  and  the  suspension  of  Spanish  sover- 
eignty therein.  With  the  signature  of  the  treaty  of 
peace  between  the  United  States  and  Spain  by  their 
respective  plenipotentiaries  at  Paris  on  the  10th  in- 
stant, and  as  the  result  of  the  victories  of  American 
arms,  the  future  control,  disposition  and  government 
of  the  Philippine  Islands  are  ceded  to  the  United 
States.  In  fulfilment  of  the  right  of  sovereignty  thus 
acquired  and  the  responsible  obligations  of  govern- 
ment thus  assumed,  the  actual  occupation  and  admin- 
istration of  the  entire  group  of  the  Philippine  Islands 
becomes  immediately  necessary,  and  the  military  gov- 
ernment heretofore  maintained  by  the  United  States  in 
the  city,  harbor  and  bay  of  Manila  is  to  be  extended 
with  all  possible  despatch  to  the  whole  of  the  ceded 
territory. 


64 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


In  performing  this  duty  the  military  commander  of 
the  United  States  is  enjoined  to  make  known  to  the 
inhabitants  of  the  Philippine  Islands  that  in  succeed- 
ing to  the  sovereignty  of  Spain,  in  severing  the  former 
political  relations  of  the  inhabitants,  and  in  establish- 
ing a new  political  power,  the  authority  of  the  United 
States  is  to  be  exerted  for  the  security  of  the  persons 
and  property  of  the  people  of  the  islands  and  for  the 
confirmation  of  all  their  private  rights  and  relations. 
It  will  be  the  duty  of  the  commander  of  the  forces  of 
occupation  to  announce  and  proclaim  in  the  most  pub- 
lic manner  that  we  come  not  as  invaders  or  conquerors, 
but  as  friends,  to  protect  the  natives  in  their  homes,  in 
their  employments,  and  in  their  personal  and  religious 
rights.  All  persons  who,  either  by  active  aid  or  by 
honest  submission,  cooperate  with  the  government  of 
the  United  States  to  give  effect  to  these  beneficent  pur- 
poses will  receive  the  reward  of  its  support  and  pro- 
tection. All  others  will  be  brought  within  the  lawful 
rule  we  have  assumed,  with  firmness  if  need  be,  but 
without  severity  so  far  as  may  be  possible. 

Within  the  domain  of  military  authority,  which 
necessarily  is  and  must  remain  supreme  in  the  ceded 
territory  until  the  legislation  of  the  United  States  shall 
otherwise  provide,  the  municipal  laws  of  the  territory, 
in  respect  to  private  rights  and  property  and  the  re- 
pression of  crime,  are  to  be  considered  as  continuing  in 
force  and  to  be  administered  by  the  ordinary  tribunals 
so  far  as  practicable.  The  operations  of  civil  and 
municipal  government  are  to  be  performed  by  such 
officers  as  may  accept  the  supremacy  of  the  United 
States  by  taking  the  oath  of  allegiance,  or  by  officers 
chosen  as  far  as  may  be  practicable  from  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  islands. 

While  the  control  of  all  the  public  property  and  the 
revenues  of  the  state  passes  with  the  cession,  and  while 
the  use  and  management  of  all  public  means  of  trans- 
portation are  necessarily  reserved  to  the  authority  of 
the  United  States,  private  property,  whether  belonging 
to  individuals  or  corporations,  is  to  be  respected  except 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR  65 


for  cause  duly  established.  The  taxes  and  duties  here- 
tofore payable  by  the  inhabitants  to  the  late  govern- 
ment become  payable  to  the  authorities  of  the  United 
States,  unless  it  be  seen  fit  to  substitute  for  them  other 
reasonable  rates  or  modes  of  contribution  to  the  ex- 
penses of  government,  whether  general  or  local.  If 
private  property  be  taken  for  military  use,  it  shall  be 
paid  for  when  possible  in  cash  at  a fair  valuation,  and 
when  payment  in  cash  is  not  practicable,  receipts  are  to 
be  given. 

All  ports  and  places  in  the  Philippine  Islands  in  the 
actual  possession  of  the  land  and  naval  forces  of  the 
United  States  will  be  opened  to  the  commerce  of  all 
friendly  nations.  All  goods  and  wares  not  prohibited 
for  military  reasons  by  due  announcement  of  the  mili- 
tary authority  will  be  admitted  upon  payment  of  such 
duties  and  other  charges  as  shall  be  in  force  at  the 
time  of  their  importation. 

Finally,  it  should  be  the  earnest  and  paramount  aim 
of  the  military  administration  to  win  the  confidence, 
respect  and  affection  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  Philip- 
pines by  assuring  to  them  in  every  possible  way  that 
full  measure  of  individual  rights  and  liberties  which  is 
the  heritage  of  free  peoples,  and  by  proving  to  them 
that  the  mission  of  the  United  States  is  one  of  benevo- 
lent assimilation,  substituting  the  mild  sway  of  justice 
and  right  for  arbitrary  rule.  In  the  fulfilment  of  this 
high  mission,  supporting  the  temperate  administration 
of  affairs  for  the  greatest  good  of  the  governed,  there 
must  be  sedulously  maintained  the  strong  arm  of  au- 
thority to  repress  disturbance  and  to  overcome  all 
obstacles  to  the  bestowal  of  blessings  of  good  and 
stable  government  upon  the  people  of  the  Philippine 
Islands  under  the  free  flag  of  the  United  States. 

(Signed)  William  McKinley. 

This  document  of  December  21  was,  to  the 
Filipinos,  another  straw  upon  the  camel’s  back. 
Point  after  point,  act  after  act,  tended  to  con- 


66 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


vince  them  that  the  United  States  was  but  the 
successor  of  Spain,  their  ruler  and  perhaps  their 
tyrant.  With  or  without  due  justification, 
wisely  or  unwisely,  they  prepared  for  war. 
None  save  the  narrowest  of  considerations  can 
wholly  condemn  them  for  the  step.  War  broke 
out  on  February  4,  1899.  It  came  without  im- 
mediate expectation  from  either  side.  It  is 
probable  that  the  Filipinos,  quite  pluckily  on 
the  whole,  had  meditated  and  prepared  for  an 
attack  at  some  not  far  distant  date.  But  the 
fact  that  it  was  not  scheduled  for  that  night  is 
proved  by  ample  and  unquestionable  evidence. 
The  first  shot  was  fired,  by  a picket  of  the  Ne- 
braska regiment,  at  a Filipino  who  did  not  halt 
when  challenged. 

As  this  work  is  not  intended  as  a war  history, 
I omit  the  details  of  the  fighting  which  followed. 
The  ultimate  success  of  the  stronger  power  was 
practically  assured  from  the  beginning,  though 
even  at  this  date,  more  than  a year  and  a half 
from  the  time  when  Private  Grayson  shot  at  the 
unresponsive  Filipino,  the  end  is  not  clearly 
visible. 

Soon  after  the  outbreak  of  hostilities,  the  com- 
mission appointed  by  the  President  appeared  on 
the  islands.  The  commission  was  authorized  to 
discuss  and  to  investigate,  but  not  to  determine. 
It  had  no  definite  policy  to  announce,  no  bind- 
ing promises  or  assurances  to  give.  It  returned 
in  the  autumn  to  submit  a report  in  which  state- 


IMMEDIATE  CAUSES  OF  THE  WAR  67 


ments  were  made  which  are  not  admitted  by 
many  whose  experience  on  the  islands  was  of 
both  wider  scope  and  longer  duration  than  that 
of  the  commission. 

In  this  attempt  to  analyze  the  immediate 
causes  of  the  war,  I admit  the  seeming  advocacy 
of  the  Filipino  cause.  There  are  those  who  will 
dispute  both  argument  and  statement.  There 
are  also  many  who  will  support  them.  The 
verdict  remains  for  the  historian. 


V 

MIDSUMMER  OF  1899 


The  opinion  of  an  army  officer— The  midsummer  situation 
— Filipino  fighters— American  heroism  and  fortitude— 
Pseudo-activity  in  Manila— Military  success  more  apparent 
than  real — Custom-house  and  post-office — Schools — An 
unsatisfactory  balance-sheet. 

DURING-  the  latter  part  of  July,  1899,  the  fol- 
lowing letter  was  placed  in  my  hands  for 
publication  by  a well-known  officer  of  high  rank 
in  the  United  States  army  serving  in  the  Philip- 
pines. I was  glad  enough  to  get  it,  as  the  opin- 
ions of  such  men  are  of  value  and  are  seldom 
obtainable.  The  writer  says : 

Barnum  once  said,  “ There  is  nothing  the  American 
people  enjoy  so  much  as  being  humbugged,”  and  it  is 
certainly  true.  The  reports  and  statements  about  the 
situation  in  the  Philippines  which  we  read  in  papers 
from  the  United  States  cause  us  to  doubt  the  evidence 
of  our  senses.  We  have  been  here  since  last  summer. 
We  went  through  the  almost  bloodless  campaign 
against  Manila— with  our  allies  at  our  backs— and  the 
triumphal  entry  into  the  city,  and  a few  months  later 
had  the  pleasure  of  fighting  over  the  same  road,  this 
time  driving  our  allies  out  of  the  city  and  its  defenses. 
Then  since  March  25  we  have  been  fighting  pretty 
G8 


MIDSUMMER  OF  1899 


69 


steadily,  fighting  at  one  place  or  another  most  of  the 
time,  onr  force  probably  averaging  abont  25,000  men, 
or  20,000  effectives ; and  what  has  been  the  result  that 
we  know  of  up  to  this  time  ? 

We  have  lost  by  wounds  and  death  fully  1000  men, 
and,  including  the  sick,  have  some  4000  in  hospi- 
tals. We  have  always,  or  almost  always,  been  able  to 
drive  the  Filipino  troops  out  of  the  towns  or  works  we 
have  attacked,  but  as  we  have  of  late  months  pushed 
out  to  some  distance  from  our  lines  to  make  such 
attacks,  we  have  had  to  fall  back  each  time  to  our  own 
lines ; this  because  our  forces  are  too  weak  to  hold 
advance  points  and  to  guard  our  base — Manila. 

In  effect,  we  have  advanced  our  lines,  against  a stub- 
born foe  and  in  the  face  of  great  difficulties,  about 
thirty  miles.  All  that  men  could  do  with  such  an  in- 
ferior force  and  in  the  face  of  tropical  seasons  has 
been  done.  Now  we  are  at  about  the  end  of  our  tether. 
To  conquer  these  islands  will  take  at  least  75,000  men. 
So  far,  their  losses  have  probably  been  less  than 
ours.  We  know  what  our  losses  are  in  a fight,  and  we 
get  a pretty  good  idea  of  the  enemy’s,  as  we  usually 
remain  for  the  time  being  in  possession  of  the  field. 
The  reports  published  in  America  underrate  our  losses 
and  vastly  overestimate  the  enemy’s.  We  have  always 
had  to  attack  them  in  a chosen  and  fortified  position. 
The  odds  are  all  against  us. 

Again,  the  enemy  can  supply  their  losses  at  once. 
With  their  armed  troops  they  always  have  half  as  many 
again  who  accompany  them  to  relieve  their  troops  of 
labor,  and  whenever  a man  falls,  one  of  these  bolo 
[sword  or  large  knife]  men  takes  his  place.  These  na- 
tives can  march  all  day  in  the  heat  of  a tropical  sun, 
with  a handful  of  rice  in  their  knapsack  for  food,  and 
sleep  on  the  ground  in  those  terrible  rains  without  the 
slightest  injury.  The  Tagal  tribe  alone  numbers  about 
four  hundred  thousand  people.  The)"  have  been  fight- 
ing for  the  greater  part  of  three  hundred  years,  off  and 
on.  That  indicates  what  kind  of  people  they  are.  Yet 
the  world  is  led  to  believe  that  we  can  easily  subjugate 


70 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


those  islands  (at  present  we  have  only  a very  small 
part  of  one  of  them)  with  an  army-corps,  or  about 
thirty  thousand  men. 

Every  officer  of  experience  with  whom  I have  talked 
has  placed  the  number  of  troops  needed  at  between 
seventy-five  and  one  hundred  thousand  men.  Thirty 
thousand  men  will  have  to  be  reinforced  by  many 
more  thousands  if  they  are  left  to  perform  this  great 
task.  In  the  meantime  we  will  lose  thousands  every 
year  by  disease— men  who  will  break  down  if  they 
don’t  die  or  have  to  be  sent  away. 

Another  point.  How  are  these  troops  to  be  relieved 
by  others  ? The  medical  authorities  all  state  that  white 
troops  cannot  remain  in  this  climate  more  than  two  or 
three  years  at  farthest ; and  now  the  whole  of  the  United 
States  army  is  abroad  except  half  a dozen  regiments. 

There  is  one  more  point  to  be  considered.  Now  that 
we  have  burst  our  bounds  and  gone  in  for  conquest  of 
foreign  territory,  we  must  he  prepared  to  hold  what  we 
have  taken  against  any  foreign  foe.  For  this  we  must 
have  a large  regular  army.  It  must  be  a trained,  dis- 
ciplined force,  always  available.  There  is  no  other 
possible  solution  of  tliis  difficult  problem.  If  we  would 
not  doom  our  little  regular  army  to  destruction,  and 
court  dishonor,  we  must  face  this  matter  boldly  and 
act  promptly. 

My  own  views  of  the  situation  at  tliat  time 
are  outlined  in  the  following  letters  written  soon 
after  my  arrival.  In  re-reading  them  for  publi- 
cation here,  I see  no  changes  which  I would  make, 
and  I am  struck  by  the  fact  that  their  dates 
might  quite  as  well  be  those  of  a year  later,  so 
little  has  the  situation  materially  altered. 

“ Manila,  August  4,  1899. 

“ When  a civilian  essays  comment  upon  mili- 
tary matters,  it  is  the  customary  and  therefore 


MIDSUMMER  OF  1899 


71 


proper  thing  for  his  hearers  or  his  readers  to 
charge  him  with  presumption.  Yet  it  may  he 
permissible  for  a civilian  to  formulate  and  sub- 
mit a consensus  of  the  opinions  of  military  men. 
That  course  is  a safe  one  and  I shall  follow  it. 
After  numerous  conversations  with  men  who 
have  spent  weeks  and  months  on  the  advance- 
line,  I remark  that  the  opinions  of  such  men  seem 
to  be  widely  at  variance  with  the  opinion  of 
General  Otis,  who  has  never  yet  been  to  the  front 
at  all. 

“ The  United  States  is  fighting  an  unknown 
number  of  little  brown  men  out  in  the  Philip- 
pine Islands.  Prom  the  standpoint  of  resources, 
of  men,  of  equipment,  of  military  knowledge,  it 
is  a contest  between  a giant  and  a pygmy.  Yet 
the  pygmy  has  maintained  his  fight  for  six 
months,  and  many,  whose  opinion  is  of  weight 
and  value,  assert  that  the  little  brown  man  is 
stronger  to-day  than  at  any  time  since  the  strug- 
gle began.  If  the  army  of  these  little  brown  men 
is  so  insignificant  as  to  be  unworthy  of  political 
recognition,  a mere  handful  of  insurgents  to  be 
crushed  out,  why  has  not  the  giant  crushed  them  ? 
If  they  be  a formidable  force,  a nation,  a people 
in  arms  against  another  people  who  seek  to  con- 
quer them,  where  is  the  national  disgrace  to  the 
United  States  in  treating  with  them  for  an  adjust- 
ment of  their  relations  and  an  end  to  hostilities  ? 

“ It  is  beyond  all  question  that  the  American 
soldiers  have  borne  the  miseries  of  tropical  cam- 


72 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


paigning  with  most  commendable  fortitude,  and 
that  in  fighting  they  have  maintained  the  repu- 
tation of  the  nation  as  a fighting  people  when  a 
fight  comes  their  way.  It  is  true  that  there  have 
been  no  great  battles,  but  a hot  little  engagement 
and  a charge  on  the  trenches  are  quite  as  sharp 
a test  of  nerve  and  courage  as  a field  like  Chicka- 
mauga  or  Gettysburg.  The  prolongation  of  the 
war  against  the  little  brown  men  is  in  no  way 
chargeable  to  lack  of  courage  or  fighting  quality 
on  the  part  of  the  men  in  the  ranks  or  on  the 
part  of  the  men  who  command  and  lead  them 
in  the  field. 

“ A certain  kind  of  heroism  is  displayed  by  our 
opponents.  Their  method  of  fighting  is  rather 
that  of  the  Indian  or  the  guerrilla.  They  fight 
from  cover  of  trench  or  thicket.  Driven  from 
one  cover,  they  seek  another.  Their  firing  is  of 
the  poorest,  and  usually  one  of  the  safest  places 
in  an  engagement  is  the  American  advanced  fir- 
ing-line. The  reports  which  are  sent  to  the 
United  States  always  show  the  Filipino  loss  to 
be  exceedingly  heavy,  while  the  American  loss 
is  exceedingly  light.  The  loss  is  usually  given 
in  the  ratio  of  about  twenty  to  one.  The  twenty 
is  guesswork.  But  when  the  whole  thing  is 
counted  up  and  the  American  loss  by  disease 
is  taken  into  consideration,  there  is  some  doubt 
whether  the  advantage  lies  so  heavily  with  the 
Americans. 

“ That  the  war  may  cease  should  be  the  prayer 


MIDSUMMER  OF  1899 


73 


of  every  thoughtful  man.  That  unless  there  be 
a change  in  the  method  of  its  prosecution  its 
end  cannot  be  foreseen,  is  the  opinion  of  all  the 
men  whom  I have  met  here  who  have  practical 
knowledge  of  the  conditions  of  the  line.  A skir- 
mish here  and  a skirmish  there,  the  engagement 
that  results  in  the  occupation  of  a town  or  vil- 
lage which  is  almost  immediately  abandoned  at 
the  cost  of  another  engagement  for  its  reoccupa- 
tion later  on,  the  driving  of  the  Filipinos  from  a 
field  without  following  up  the  advantage  gained, 
is  the  present  method,  and  it  serves  no  purpose 
save  a continuation  of  hostilities.  The  Filipino 
is  given  time  to  establish  himself  behind  new 
defenses,  or  he  returns  to  occupy  the  old  ones. 
Yet  the  reports  go  in  of  successful  victories,  ac- 
companied by  the  assertion  that  ‘the  situation 
is  well  in  hand,’  and  ‘ the  war  will  be  over  in  ten 
days.’ 

“ In  six  months  the  forces  of  the  United  States 
have  moved  northward  some  forty  miles,  and 
eastward  and  southward  rather  less  than  the 
half  of  that.  Beyond  a point  ten  miles  or  so  to 
the  northward,  our  lines  are  barely  more  than 
threads,  consisting  of  a few  garrisoned  towns 
and  a series  of  outposts.  San  Fernando  is  occu- 
pied by  the  advanced  force  operating  in  the  north- 
ward directiom  These  advanced  posts  are  kept 
on  an  almost  constant  tension  from  the  dropping 
fire  which  may  come  at  any  time  from  a hidden 
foe.  Killed  or  wounded  on  outpost  is  no  infre- 


74 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


quent  record.  All  this  have  we  accomplished  in 
six  months,  resisted  by  a force  of  little  brown 
men  poorly  equipped  and  poorly  conditioned. 
Surely  it  is  no  very  creditable  record. 

“Months  ago  General  Lawton  said  that  it 
would  need  one  hundred  thousand  men  to  end  the 
war  in  the  Philippines.  Again  and  again  has 
the  same  statement  been  made  by  military  men 
in  the  field  here  in  the  islands.  The  men  who 
are  in  the  field  are  the  men  who  know  what  is 
wanted,  and  they  know  it  far  better  than  a man 
who  sits  at  a desk  in  Manila  directing  the  move- 
ments of  thirty  thousand  troops,  while  at  the 
same  time  he  guides  and  supervises  the  civil 
administration  of  a city  of  three  hundred  thou- 
sand people  and  a score  or  two  of  towns  and 
villages  outside.” 


“ Manila,  August  16,  1899. 

“On  August  13,  1898,  the  American  navy 
bombarded  the  fortifications  of  Manila  while  the 
American  army  attacked  and  entered  the  city 
itself.  One  year  later,  on  August  12  and  13, 
1899,  there  was  fighting  between  the  Americans 
and  the  Filipinos  within  ten  miles  of  the  city, 
which,  for  twelve  months,  has  been  under  Ameri- 
can control. 

“ What  has  been  accomplished  within  the  past 
year  in  the  Philippines?  There  are  those  who 
quote  a commercial  activity  iu  Manila  as  a sign 
of  a new  era  in  Philippine  prosperity.  Those 


MIDSUMMER  OF  1899 


75 


who  do  so  mistake  a shadow  for  a substance. 
Business  in  Manila  is  active,  but  it  is  a wholly 
abnormal  activity.  It  is  created  by  the  presence 
of  thousands  of  American  soldiers  who  have 
money  to  spend.  It  is  a wholly  factitious  activ- 
ity, terminable  by  their  withdrawal  to  the  States 
or  their  distribution  through  the  country.  The 
departments  of  the  American  commissary,  the 
quartermaster  and  ordnance,  are  furnishing  em- 
ployment to  thousands  of  Chinese  laborers.  The 
quartermaster’s  department  has  recently  occu- 
pied a warehouse  in  the  rear  of  the  hotel  in  which 
I am  staying.  For  the  last  four  days  hundreds 
of  Chinese  bearers  with  their  shoulder-poles  have 
been  busy  carrying  materials  of  many  kinds  to 
this  warehouse.  Back  and  forth  they  go  in  an 
endless  stream.  If  that  sort  of  thing,  and  much 
more  of  similar  kind,  be  business,  then  Manila 
is  busy.  But  it  is  all  no  more  than  a feverish 
activity,  and  no  sign  of  a sound  prosperity.  Of 
the  latter  I can  see  no  indication  whatever.  Pro- 
duction and  commerce  are  both  in  a state  of 
disturbance  and  temporary  decay.  This  is  a 
pessimistic  view,  but  not  the  view  of  a pessimist. 
It  is  a fact. 

“ There  are  those  who  report  the  city  of  Manila 
as  enjoying  a period  of  social  and  civic  order 
unknown  before  in  its  history.  Such  an  assump- 
tion is  based  upon  ignorance  of  the  normal  con- 
ditions of  Oriental  cities.  Leaving  comparisons 
and  coming  to  facts,  it  is  to  be  noted  that  peace- 


76 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


able  Manila  requires  the  protecting  services  of 
thousands  of  American  soldiers.  It  is  regarded 
as  necessary  to  oblige  all  people,  citizens  and 
soldiery,  to  retire  to  their  various  abodes  at  8 : 30 
p.m.  Twice  within  the  last  ten  days  have  the 
guards  been  doubled,  while  soldiers  slept  on  their 
arms  in  anticipation  of  a threatened  uprising. 
A Spanish  newspaper  was  suppressed  for  daring 
to  say  that  the  streets  of  the  city  were  less  well 
kept  under  American  than  under  the  former 
administration. 

“Military  success  in  the  island  is  far  more 
apparent  at  a distance  than  it  is  close  at  hand. 
The  ‘heroic  bravery’  of  the  American  troops 
has  led  to  a series  of  ‘ glorious  victories.’  Thus 
runs  the  tale„  The  heroic  bravery  is  undeniable. 
The  soldiers  have  marched  over  weary  miles 
under  broiling  sun,  have  marched  through  knee- 
deep  mud  in  long  stretches  of  rice-fields  and  have 
charged  intrencliment  and  breastwork  with  a grit 
and  a courage  which  have  made  them  worthy  of 
the  highest  honor.  But  what  of  these  ‘ glorious 
victories’?  Wherein  lies  the  ‘glory’  of  killing 
‘ niggers  ’ ? It  seems  to  take  very  little  nowadays 
to  make  a ‘ glorious  victory.’  The  process  seems 
to  lie  in  the  marching  of  well-fed,  well-armed, 
brawny  Americans,  supported  by  all  the  re- 
sources of  the  United  States,  against  a force 
which,  though  often  numerically  greater,  is  al- 
ways in  all  other  ways  vastly  inferior ; in  driving 
the  enemy  from  his  trenches  and  his  towns ; and 


MIDSUMMER  OF  1899 


77 


then,  usually,  the  abandonment  of  the  place  cap- 
tured by  a ‘ glorious  victory  ’ with  a minimum  of 
casualties.  It  quite  suggests  the  old  lady’s  job 
of  sweeping  back  the  sea,  or  the  great  military 
move  of  marching  up  the  hill  and  then  marching 
down  again.  There  are  towns  here  which  have 
been  ‘ captured  ’ again  and  again,  each  time  with 
a ‘ glorious  victory.’  To-day  it  is  unsafe  for  an 
American  to  go  alone  even  ten  miles  from  the 
city  of  Manila  in  any  direction.  On  August  12, 
1899,  a military  reconnaissance  ten  miles  north- 
east of  the  city  cost  the  Americans  five  men  killed 
and  fourteen  wounded  in  a contest  with  in- 
trenched Filipinos.  Had  the  Filipinos  an  officer 
of  the  type  of  the  Cuban  Antonio  Maceo,  a con- 
siderable number  of  American  soldiers  would  fail 
to  get  as  much  sleep  as  a soldier  needs. 

“There  are  regular  army  officers  here  who 
have  seen  much  service  in  fighting  Indians  on 
the  Western  frontier.  Many  of  them  do  not  re- 
gard the  military  problem  as  one  of  any  great 
difficulty.  A comparatively  small  body  of  troops, 
so  long  as  it  included  an  ample  cavalry  force  and 
proper  transportation  service,  would  have  little 
difficulty  in  effecting  a very  thorough  disintegra- 
tion of  the  main  bodies  of  the  Filipino  army. 
Behind  that  there  stands  the  need  of  a large  army 
for  purposes  of  garrisoning  and  holding  that 
which  the  attacking  column  secured.  The  spe- 
cial difficulty  of  the  objection  to  the  plan  now 
followed  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  seeks  to  cover 


78 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


too  wide  a territory  with  an  inadequate  number 
of  troops.  . If  more  troops  come  they  should  be 
accompanied  by  a military  commander  of  all  the 
forces  in  the  island.  He  should  be  a man  who 
would  sometimes  get  out  to  the  front  and  see  for 
himself  the  conditions  under  which  his  troops 
must  fight.  He  should  be  one  whose  time  and 
interest  were  not  occupied  by  questions  of  gam- 
bling Chinos,  cock-fighting  Filipinos,  and  super- 
fluous dogs. 

“ The  customs  service  is  a cause  of  much  com- 
plaint. The  former  high  rates  are  still  main- 
tained, and  as  the  collector,  Colonel  J.  D.  Miley, 
is  an  officer  of  the  regular  army,  the  importer 
finds  that  the  old  system  of  gifts  and  ‘ cahoots ? 
no  longer  serves  in  getting  goods  through  the 
custom-house  by  fraudulent  methods.  The  rate, 
however,  is  excessive  and  should  be  reduced  as 
it  was  in  Porto  Kico  and  Cuba.  It  is  probable 
that  such  a reduction  would  result  in  an  in- 
creased revenue.  The  post-office  also  is  a cause 
of  dissatisfaction  through  the  increase  in  postal 
rates.  A local  paper  risks  the  censor  and  com- 
ments as  follows : ‘ A foreign  letter  now  costs  the 
citizen  five  cents  gold.  During  the  Spanish 
regime  the  stamp  on  foreign  letters  was  five 
cents  Mexican  or  two  and  a half  cents  gold. 
Surely  the  government  of  the  United  States, 
which  prides  itself  on  carrying  the  banner  of  the 
advance-guard  of  civilization  and  progress  among 
all  nations,  is  not  so  hard  pushed  that  it  has  to 


MIDSUMMER  OF  1899 


79 


resort  to  means  to  coin  money  which  even  pov- 
erty-stricken Spain,  with  her  depleted  treasury, 
never  did.’  Under  Spanish  rule  newspaper  pub- 
lishers mailed  their  papers  to  subscribers  at  one 
twentieth  of  a cent  per  paper ; it  now  costs  them 
ouq  cent  per  paper. 

“ Something  has  been  done  toward  an  exten- 
sion of  the  old  school  system  and  some  forty-two 
hundred  pupils  are  now  in  attendance  in  Manila 
schools.  This  is  probably  about  oue  fifteenth  of 
the  children  of  school  age.  A system  has  been 
formulated  for  municipal  and  town  government, 
but  in  the  present  state  of  things  the  island  has 
about  as  much  use  for  it  as  a hen  has  for  a tooth- 
pick. The  sectarian  missionary,  with  Sunday- 
schools  and  other  religious  work,  followed  the 
army  in  the  West  Indies.  That  sort  of  thing  has 
barely  made  its  appearance  in  the  Philippines. 

“ On  the  whole,  it  would  take  one  of  vastly 
hopeful  and  cheerful  temperament  to  find  much 
iu  the  experience  of  the  last  twelve  months  in  the 
Philippines  that  was  gratifying  or  encouraging. 
General  Otis  is  forced  to  confess  the  error  in  his 
judgment  that  the  war  would  ‘be  over  in  ten 
days,’  that  he  had  ‘ the  situation  well  in  hand,’ 
and  that  he  had  a sufficient  force  to  establish 
peace  and  order,  I saw  much  that  was  open  to 
criticism  in  the  methods  employed  in  Porto  Rico 
and  in  Cuba.  Had  I been  through  the  Philippine 
experience  first,  I have  no  doubt  that  I should 
have  regarded  both  the  former  as  little  short  of 


80 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


marvels  of  progress  in  good  government.  It  is 
hard  to  see  that  any  material  or  permanent  ad- 
vance has  been  made  in  the  Philippines  as  a 
result  of  twelve  months  of  American  occupation. 
Still,  we  shall  probably  lift  them  into  civilization 
in  due  time,  if,  meanwhile,  we  do  not  decide  that 
it  is  necessary  to  civilize  them  by  the  Krag- 
Jorgensen  method.  By  the  present  system  and 
under  the  present  management,  the  outlook  is 
but  a dismal  one.” 


VI 


TEE  NEWS  AND  TEE  CENSORSEIP 

Lessened  activity— The  protest  of  the  correspondents— Its 
effect  in  America— The  story  of  the  protest— Private  letter 
of  a correspondent— A mysterious  order  from  the  War 
Office— Its  effect  in  Manila— Difficulty  of  news-getting— 
Experience  of  Manila  editor— A note  from  the  censor. 

MIDSUMMER  of  the  year  1899  brought  a 
kind  of  breathing-space  in  the  military 
operations.  General  Otis  had  declared  that  the 
rainy  season  would  neither  hamper  nor  binder 
the  movements.  Partly  because  of  the  rains 
and  partly  from  other  causes,  notably  the  neces- 
sity for  the  return  of  the  volunteer  troops  and 
their  replacement  by  fresh  material,  there  was  a 
cessation  of  the  general  activity  throughout  the 
islands.  At  this  time  no  little  excitement  was 
created  in  the  United  States  by  the  publication 
of  the  so-called  round-robin  of  the  news  corre- 
spondents stationed  in  the  Philippines.  The 
text  of  the  message  was  as  follows : 

The  undersigned,  being  all  staff  correspondents  of 
American  newspapers  stationed  in  Manila,  unite  in  the 
following  statement : 

We  believe  that,  owing  to  official  despatches  from 
81 


82 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Manila  made  public  in  Washington,  the  people  of  the 
United  States  have  not  received  a correct  impression  of 
the  situation  in  the  Philippines,  hut  that  these  de- 
spatches have  presented  an  ultra-optimistic  view  that  is 
not  shared  by  the  general  officers  in  the  field. 

We  believe  the  despatches  incorrectly  represent  the 
existing  conditions  among  the  Filipinos  in  respect  to 
internal  dissension  and  demoralization  resulting  from 
the  American  campaign,  and  to  the  brigand  character 
of  their  army. 

We  believe  the  despatches  err  in  the  declaration  that 
“ the  situation  is  well  in  hand,”  and  in  the  assumption 
that  the  insurrection  can  be  speedily  ended  without  a 
greatly  increased  force. 

We  think  the  tenacity  of  the  Filipino  purpose  has 
been  underestimated,  and  that  the  statements  are  un- 
founded that  volunteers  are  unwilling  to  engage  in  fur- 
ther service. 

The  censorship  has  compelled  us  to  participate  in 
this  misrepresentation  by  excising  or  altering  uncon- 
troverted statements  of  fact  on  the  plea,  as  General 
Otis  stated,  that  “they  would  alarm  the  people  at 
home,”  or  “have  the  people  of  the  United  States  by 
the  ears.” 

Specifications : Prohibition  of  hospital  reports ; sup- 
pression of  full  repoi’ts  of  field  operations  in  the  event 
of  failure ; numbers  of  heat  prostrations  in  the  field ; 
systematic  minimization  of  naval  operations ; and  sup- 
pression of  complete  reports  of  the  situation. 

As  stated  by  the  “ Review  of  Reviews,”  “ This 
protest  had  a profound  effect  upon  public  opin- 
ion throughout  the  country,  and  greatly  stirred 
up  officialdom  in  Washington.”  There  were 
those  who  implicitly  believed  the  statements 
made  and  who  upheld  the  correspondents  in 
their  course.  There  were  those  who  sneered  at 
them  as  carping  and  disgruntled  boys  who  were 


THE  HEWS  AX I)  THE  CEXSORSHIP  83 


dissatisfied  because  they  were  not  permitted  to 
run  the  whole  business.  In  this  connection  it  is 
interesting  to  note  how  accurately,  almost  line 
for  line,  the  seemingly  pessimistic  yet  wholly 
truthful  view  held  by  these  gentlemen  has  been 
indorsed  by  the  facts  of  later  development. 
Those  whom  I was  wont  to  style  the  “ cheerful 
enthusiasts”  were  at  that  time  predicting  the 
early  dissolution  of  the  Filipino  forces  and  a 
speedy  ending  of  the  war.  Some  were  even 
planning  for  a return  to  the  United  States.  No 
one  of  the  responsible  correspondents  of  my 
acquaintance,  and  I knew  them  all,  held  any 
such  view.  And  now,  fifteen  months  later,  the 
war  is  still  on.  So  are  the  predictions  by  the 
“ cheerful  enthusiasts  ” of  its  speedy  ending. 

The  question  of  press  censorship  is  one  of  no 
easy  determination ; yet  it  might  well  be  con- 
tended that,  subject  only  to  the  limitation  of 
giving  “ aid  or  comfort  to  the  enemy,”  the  right 
of  the  American  people  to  the  fullest  possible 
information  regarding  important  affairs  which 
concern  the  American  people,  both  as  individu- 
als and  as  a nation,  would  seem  to  be  un- 
questionable. 

I arrived  in  Manila  on  July  17.  Upon  my 
arrival  I made  it  my  immediate  business  to  in- 
vestigate the  conditions  under  which  news 
matter  was  sent,  the  influence  upon  it  of  the 
authorities  and  the  effects  of  the  censorship.  I 
found  the  news-senders  in  a state  of  outspoken 


84 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


protest  against  the  limitations  imposed  upon 
them.  The  situation  had  culminated,  a few 
days  prior  to  my  arrival,  in  a meeting  of  the 
leading  representatives  of  the  American  press. 
The  matter  was  fully  and  carefully  discussed. 
Some  of  those  present  urged  the  withdrawal  of 
the  entire  body  from  the  island,  with  notifica- 
tion to  their  home  offices  that,  owing  to  the 
restrictions  to  which  they  were  subjected,  they 
could  not  feel  that  they  were  properly  discharg- 
ing their  duty  to  their  employers  and  the  public. 

This  proposition  was  rejected,  and  the  ques- 
tion was  decided  by  the  preparation  of  the  fore- 
going protest,  to  be  forwarded  through  three 
different  channels  to  insure  its  arrival  for  gen- 
eral publication  in  the  United  States.  It  is  to 
be  remarked  that  the  statement,  in  its  accepted 
form,  was  drafted  by  men  representing  publi- 
cations which  support  the  administration  at 
Washington.  It  was,  therefore,  no  anti-admin- 
istration document  designed  to  hamper  or  to 
criticize  unduly  the  Washington  authorities. 
The  step  thus  taken  was  no  trifling  matter,  nor 
was  it  taken  hastily.  The  futility  of  verbal 
protest  to  the  authorities  had  been  proved  by 
weeks  of  experience.  Each  man  had  his  daily 
fight  with  the  censor  and  frequent  expostula- 
tions with  the  governor-general.  The  corre- 
spondents were  impelled  to  the  extreme  and 
perhaps  unprecedented  measure  through  a 
sense  of  duty  to  the  American  people.  It  was 


THE  NEWS  AND  THE  CENSORSHIP  85 


also  personally  due  to  them  that  their  position 
be  rightly  set  before  the  reading  public.  The 
paper  prepared,  the  next  step  was  its  forward- 
ing. Like  all  other  telegraph  news  matter  from 
Manila,  it  must  be  approved  and  passed  by  the 
censor  before  being  accepted  by  the  cable  com- 
pany. His  passage  of  so  seditious  (?)  a docu- 
ment upon  his  own  responsibility  was  wholly 
out  of  the  question,  and  the  matter  was  laid 
before  the  governor-general,  who  constituted 
the  court  of  last  resort  in  such  matters— in 
Manila. 

After  reading  the  paper,  that  functionary 
requested  the  presence  of  one  of  its  signers. 
The  man  thus  summoned  represented  an  admin- 
istration paper,  and  there  was,  perhaps,  a hope 
in  .General  Otis’s  mind  that  he  might  be  led  to 
retract.  The  signers  decided  that  a committee 
would  be  better,  not  from  any  doubt  of  the  man 
sent  for,  who  had  the  entire  confidence  of  all, 
but  rather  to  back  him  up  in  an  interview  which 
promised  to  be  stormy ; so  four  of  their  number 
waited  on  his  Excellency.  It  is  to  be  remem- 
bered that  all  of  these  men  had  been  selected 
and  sent  out  by  competent  authority  at  home. 
They  had  been  chosen  because  of  their  special 
fitness  for  the  work  given  them.  It  did  not 
seem  to  be  recognized,  but  they  represented  a 
power  which  can  make  or  unmake  govern ors- 
general. 

Ushered  into  the  presence  of  General  Otis, 


86 


TEE  PHILIPPIXES 


they  were  greeted  by  the  following,  which, 
though  given  from  memory  by  one  of  the  com- 
mittee, are  approximately  the  words  of  the 
speaker : 

“You  have  served  a paper  upon  me — a most 
extraordinary  document.  Are  you  aware  that 
this  constitutes  a conspiracy  against  the  govern- 
ment ? My  first  thought  was  to  put  you  all  off 
the  island.  My  second  thought  is  to  summon  a 
general  court  martial  and  have  you  tried  for 
conspiracy.” 

The  members  of  the  group  smiled.  Through 
many  previous  experiences  they  had  become 
somewhat  hardened  to  the  threat  of  possible 
deportation.  Permission  to  forward  the  mes- 
sage was,  of  course,  flatly  refused.  But  the 
Manila  authorities  have  no  jurisdiction  over  the 
cable-office  in  Hongkong,  to  which  point  a mes- 
senger was  sent  to  forward  the  despatch. 

It  was  seldom  that  the  truth  or  the  accuracy 
of  the  matter  submitted  by  correspondents  was 
denied.  The  refusal  was  based  upon  grounds 
of  expediency,  and  no  secret  was  made  of  the 
distinct  intention  to  give  a certain  color  to  all 
matter  sent  by  telegraph  from  the  Philippine 
Islands.  Such  matter  must  support  the  local 
and  Washington  administration,  right  or  wrong, 
in  all  their  acts.  It  must  suppress  anything  and 
everything  which  was  in  any  way  discreditable 
to  the  American  army.  It  must  avoid  all  that 
would  tend  to  create  an  impression  at  home 


THE  HEWS  AND  THE  CENSORSHIP  87 


that  the  army  was  anything  other  than  fat, 
healthy,  happy  and  contented. 

A mistake  was  made  by  these  gentlemen  in 
their  failure  to  support  their  cablegram  by  an 
explicit  statement  of  their  charges  in  detail. 
Some,  if  not  all,  of  them  wrote  personal  letters 
to  their  proprietors,  and  one  or  two  of  these 
letters  were  given  to  the  public.  I quote  from 
that  of  Mr.  R.  M.  Collins,  the  local  chief  of  the 
Associated  Press  service: 

The  censorship  enforced  during  the  war  and  before 
the  beginning  of  it  was,  according  to  newspaper  men 
who  had  worked  in  Japan,  Turkey,  Greece,  Egypt  and 
Russia  in  war-times,  and  in  Cuba  under  the  Weyler 
regime  and  during  our  war,  so  much  more  stringent 
than  any  hitherto  attempted  that  we  were  astonished 
that  the  American  authorities  should  countenance 
it  and  were  confident  public  opinion  would  be  over- 
whelmingly against  it  if  its  methods  and  purposes 
became  known. 

For  a long  time  we  submitted  to  the  censorship  be- 
cause of  appeals  to  our  patriotism  and  a feeling  that 
we  might  be  accused  of  a lack  thereof  if  we  made  any 
trouble  for  the  American  authorities  here. 

But  when  General  Otis  came  down  in  the  frank  ad- 
mission that  it  was  not  intended  so  much  to  prevent 
the  newspapers  from  giving  information  and  assistance 
to  the  enemy  (the  legitimate  function,  and  according 
to  our  view  the  only  legitimate  one,  of  a censorship), 
but  to  keep  the  knowledge  of  conditions  here  from  the 
public  at  home,  and  when  the  censor  had  repeatedly 
told  us  in  ruling  out  plain  statements  of  undisputed 
facts,  “ My  instructions  are  to  let  nothing  go  that  can 
hurt  the  administration,”  we  concluded  that  protest 
was  justifiable. 

Otis  had  gained  the  idea  from  the  long  submission 


88 


TEE  PHILIPPINES 


by  the  newspaper  men  to  his  dictation  that  it  was  a 
part  of  the  duty  of  the  governor-general  to  direct  the 
newspaper  correspondents  as  he  did  his  officers.  Much 
of  the  censorship  was  conducted  by  him  personally,  the 
censor  sending  a correspondent  to  the  general  with  any 
despatches  about  which  he  had  doubts. 

In  this  way  the  entire  American  press  was  made  the 
personal  organ  of  Otis ; we  were  compelled  to  send 
nothing  but  the  official  version  of  all  events  and  con- 
ditions, even  when  the  official  view  controverted  the 
opinions  of  the  great  mass  of  the  officers  in  the  field 
and  the  intelligent  residents,  and  was  a falsification  of 
events  which  passed  before  our  eyes. 

In  this  way  every  fight  became  a glorious  American 
victory,  even  though  every  one  in  the  army  knew  it  to 
have  been  substantially  a failure,  and  we  were  drilled 
into  writing,  quite  mechanically,  wholly  ridiculous  esti- 
mates of  the  numbers  of  Filipinos  killed. 

About  the  middle  of  June,  I wrote  a conservative 
review  to  the  effect  that  every  one  here  was  convinced 
that  it  would  be  impossible  to  end  the  war  during  the 
rainy  season  and  for  some  time  thereafter,  unless 
heavy  reinforcements  were  sent. 

The  censor’s  comment  (I  made  note  of  it)  was:  “Of 
course  we  all  know  that  we  are  in  a terrible  mess  out 
here,  but  we  don’t  want  the  people  to  get  excited  about 
it.  If  you  fellows  will  only  keep  quiet  now  we  will 
pull  through  in  time  without  any  fuss  at  home.” 

He  took  the  review  to  General  Otis,  who  said : 

“ Tell  Collins  that  if  he  will  hold  that  for  a week  or 
ten  days  he  will  thank  me  for  not  letting  him  send  it.” 
When  I went  to  see  him  he  repeated  the  same  old 
story  about  the  insurrection  going  to  pieces,  and  hinted 
so  portentously  about  having  wonderful  things  up  his 
sleeve  that  I almost  believed  him.  The  other  men  had 
practically  the  same  experience. 

So,  after  waiting  a month  for  the  general’s  predic- 
tions to  materialize,  we  decided  to  send  the  statement 
we  had  framed  without  changing  it,  as  the  conditions 
had  not  changed. 


THE  NEWS  AND  THE  CENSORSHIP  89 


The  attempt  to  hold  the  newspapers  by  the  throat 
was  so  unusual  that  unusual  action  seemed  to  be  justi- 
fied and  demanded.  As  a matter  of  form  we  took  the 
message  to  the  censor.  His  comment  was  practically 
the  same  that  he  had  made  on  my  message.  He  did 
not  question  the  accuracy  of  the  statement  of  condi- 
tions, but  said : “ This  is  just  the  sort  of  matter  the 
censorship  is  intended  to  suppi*ess.” 

He,  of  course,  took  it  to  Otis,  who,  in  turn,  sent  the 
messenger  requesting  Davis  of  the  New  York  “Sun” 
to  go  and  see  him,  doubtless  thinking  that  as  he  had 
treated  the  “ Sun  ” as  his  organ,  and  its  correspondents 
being  under  obligations  to  him  for  special  favors,  he 
could  work  them  to  give  up  the  plan.  Thompson  said 
he  thought  Collins  and  McCutcheon  should  go  also. 
A committee  was  chosen— Davis,  McCutcheon,  Bass 
and  I. 

When  we  were  ushered  into  Otis’s  room  he  said  with 
some  anger : 

“ Gentlemen,  you  have  served  an  extraordinary  paper 
upon  me ; you  accuse  me  of  falsehood.  This  consti- 
tutes a conspiracy  against  the  government.  I will 
have  you  tried  by  a general  court  martial  and  let  you 
choose  the  judges.” 

We  knew  from  experience  with  threats  to  “ put  us  off 
the  island”  that  there  was  nothing  to  be  frightened 
about,  and  also  knew  that  all  officers  who  would  be  on 
a court  martial  would  know  we  told  the  truth.  Three 
hours  of  exceedingly  plain  talk  followed. 

Dealing  with  the  specifications,  we  said  that  the 
hospital  officers  refused  to  give  us  any  information 
as  to  the  number  of  sick,  on  the  ground  that  he  had 
instructed  them  to  withhold  such  facts. 

His  reply  was  that  the  hospitals  were  full  of  per- 
fectly well  men  who  were  shirking  and  should  be 
turned  out.  To  send  home  figures  of  the  numbers  in 
hospitals  would  be  entirely  misleading. 

In  the  matter  of  prejudice  against  the  navy,  it  was 
stated  on  the  part  of  the  correspondents  that  all  were 
compelled  to  change  their  accounts  of  the  taking  of 


90 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Iloilo,  to  make  it  appear  that  the  army  had  done  the 
work  with  immediate  assistance  from  war-ships,  and 
that  only  a few  houses  were  burned.  The  unques- 
tioned facts  told  in  the  original  stories  were  that  the 
soldiers  did  not  land  until  three  hours  after  the  marines 
had  raised  the  flag  and  chased  the  insurgents  out. 

General  Otis  explained  that  the  navy  was  so  anxious 
for  glory  that  it  disobeyed  instructions  by  landing  be- 
fore the  proper  time,  etc.,  although  the  correspondents 
could  not  have  been  permitted  to  send  that  explanation 
had  they  known  it,  and  were  forced  to  give  in  a false 
account. 

Davis  said : “ When  I returned  to  Manila  I asked 
what  I would  be  permitted  to  send,  and  you  told  me 
all  facts,  news  about  military  operations  not  helpful  to 
the  enemy,  and  my  opinions  as  opinions.” 

General  Bates  was  present  throughout  the  interview. 
At  the  close  General  Otis  turned  to  him  and  asked : 

“ What  would  you  do  with  these  gentlemen,  general  ?” 
Bates  promptly  replied  : “ I would  do  what  I said.” 
“Court-martial  them?”  Otis  asked. 

“No;  let  them  send  what  you  promised— the  facts 
and  opinions  as  opinions,”  Bates  said. 


These  statements  of  the  news- gatherers  may 
have  created  an  interest,  though  they  effected 
little  or  no  change  in  the  system.  But  they 
appear  to  have  led  up  to  a somewhat  curious 
incident— the  announcement,  purporting  to  be 
official,  from  Washington  that  the  Manila  cen- 
sorship had  been  abolished,  when,  in  fact,  no- 
thing of  the  kind  had  been  done.  Four  months 
after  the  appearance  of  the  round-robin,  and 
two  months  after  the  announcement  that  the 
censorship  had  been  abolished,  I sent  the  follow- 
ing letter  to  the  paper  which  I represented. 


THE  NEWS  AND  THE  CENSORSHIP  91 


“Manila,  November  26,  1899. 

“ Manila  cables  more  news  matter  to  the  world 
in  an  hour  than  she  receives  from  the  world  in 
a week.  We  get  our  news  of  the  doings  else- 
where chiefly  from  American  papers  from  four 
to  six  weeks  old.  For  the  last  three  weeks  the 
mails  have  been  sadly  deficient,  for  some  reason. 
We  had  received  letters  and  papers  dated  up  to 
the  5th  of  October;  then  came  two  or  three 
weeks  of  utter  vacancy.  On  November  23  the 
Newport  and  the  Tartar  arrived  with  mail ; but 
in  some  marvelously  interesting  way  the  post- 
office  department  or  the  quartermaster’s  depart- 
ment, or  some  other  department,  had  succeeded 
in  losing,  mislaying,  or  otherwise  disposing  of 
a collection  said  to  include  five  hundred  sacks. 
At  any  rate  the  mail  dating  from  October  5 to 
October  18  has  not  shown  up.  It  will  probably 
come  straggling  along  in  a week  or  two.  Mail 
matter  for  fifty  thousand  Americans  who  are 
ten  thousand  miles  from  home  is  a trivial  thing, 
anyway.  Frequency,  continuity  and  regularity 
are  of  little  importance. 

“In  that  which  did  come  yesterday  some  of 
us  got  what  is  technically  known  as  a ‘jar.’ 
It  was  quite  interesting  for  correspondents  to 
get  letters  congratulating  them  upon  the  simpli- 
fication of  their  work  as  a result  of  the  abolition 
of  the  censorship.  It  was  pleasant  to  read  in 
month-old  newspapers  that  Washington  had 
announced  that  Otis  had  asked,  on  July  26,  for 


92 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


permission  to  do  away  with  censorship  of  press 
matter,  and  that  on  September  9 that  office 
had  been  abolished. 

“ Two  questions  arise : Is  it  the  fact  that  Wash- 
ington has  made  such  an  announcement,  and,  if 
so,  in  what  way  is  so  astounding  a falsehood  to 
be  accounted  for?  No  intimation  of  any  such 
change  has  been  made  to  correspondents  here 
at  any  time.  My  letters  have  oidy  reported  a 
marked  relaxation  in  the  strictness  of  the  official 
supervision,  but  to-day,  as  at  all  times  hereto- 
fore, no  cable  message — news  or  commercial  — 
goes  from  Manila  until  it  has  been  submitted  to 
the  official  censor.  Excisions  are  less  frequent 
than  they  were  three  months  ago,  but  there  has 
been  no  time  when  they  have  not  been  made. 
The  wires  are  not  open,  and  they  have  not  been 
open.  The  position  is  not  easily  reconciled  at 
this  end.  It  would  seem  that  either  reputable 
publications  have  been  led  into  a mysterious 
blunder,  or  that  there  had  been  a deliberate  and 
unpardonable  attempt  to  deceive  the  American 
public  by  a direct  falsehood.  I state  the  facts 
as  they  are  at  this  end.  Captain  Greene,  on 
November  26,  is  still  the  official  censor.  All 
cable  matter  must  be  submitted  to  him  and 
approved  by  him  before  it  will  be  accepted  at 
the  cable-office.  Alterations  and  excisions  are 
still  made,  though  on  very  much  broader  lines 
than  formerly.  The  exact  state  of  the  case  at 
the  other  end  we  do  not  know. 


THE  NEWS  AND  THE  CENSORSHIP  93 


“Moreover,  there  is  here,  in  some  parts,  a 
double  censorship.  While  in  Iloilo  recently,  I 
wished  to  cable  a news  item  to  the  representa- 
tive of  the  Associated  Press  in  Manila.  Pre- 
senting my  matter  at  the  office  in  Iloilo,  I was 
told  that  it  must  be  passed  upon  by  the  local 
military  authorities  before  they  could  send  it. 
In  Manila  it  was  again  examined  before  it  could 
go  to  the  United  States.  The  notably  interest- 
ing point  was  that  the  matter  was  from  Jolo, 
from  which  point  I had  just  come,  and  covered 
affairs  about  which  neither  the  authorities  at 
Iloilo  nor  at  Manila  knew  anything  at  all.  My 
statements  were  of  things  I knew,  but  they 
must  be  passed  upon  by  people  who  did  not 
know.  No  excision  was  made,  and  General 
Hughes,  at  Iloilo,  told  me  that  he  was  glad  to 
see  the  despatch,  and  that  he  read  it  for  the 
information  it  contained  rather  than  from  any 
other  motive. 

“ The  correspondent  in  the  Philippines  to-day 
encounters  a difficulty  which  is  perhaps  even' 
more  serious  than  the  censorship.  He  cannot 
send  matter  if  he  has  none  to  send.  With  any 
concentration  of  affairs  or  operations,,  or  with 
any  number  of  such  centers,  news-getting  is  a 
comparatively  simple  process.  It  consists  of 
either  being  personally  on  the  ground  or  of 
being  competently  represented.  With  matters 
in  their  present  state,  the  work  is  endlessly 
complicated  and  difficult.  The  troops  are  scat- 


94 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


tered,  and  there  is  activity,  and  possibly 
important  activity,  in  a dozen  different  and  far 
separated  localities.  Iloilo  is  in  a turmoil  of 
‘scraps.’  The  vicinity  of  Irnus  is  restless  and 
occasionally  active.  News  comes  that  a scrap 
is  on  at  San  Mateo.  General  MacArthur  is 
resting  in  headquarters  at  Tarlak,  which,  a few 
days  ago,  was  the  Filipino  capital.  His  troops 
are  scattered,  and  some  one  or  more  of  his  com- 
mands may  be  in  a scrap  at  any  time.  Law- 
ton  and  Wheaton  are  scouring  a country  away 
beyond  telegraph-wires,  very  much,  I believe, 
to  their  satisfaction.  The  last  heard  from 
Young  was  that  he  was  up  in  the  vicinity  of 
San  Fernando  de  la  Union,  ‘hot-foot’  on  the 
trail  of  Aguinaldo  and  two  or  three  days  away 
from  a telegraph-wire.  Then  there  is  little 
Calamba,  quiet  just  now,  but  ever  a smoking 
little  pocket  volcano.  And  there  are  Cebu  and 
Negros  and  Jolo  and  Zamboanga,  to  say  nothing 
of  the  doings  of  the  navy  and  the  establishment 
and  processes  of  civil  government  in  Manila 
and  sundry  other  places. 

“ All  this,  and  a few  other  things,  the  Ameri- 
can public  expects  to  find  on  its  breakfast-table, 
or  served  for  its  digestion  after  the  evening 
meal.  Patrick  remarked  that  no  man  could  be 
in  more  than  one  place  at  a time,  ‘barrin’  he 
was  a flea.’  Yet  the  news-gatherer  is  expected 
to  be  in  all  these  places,  or,  at  least,  in  close 
touch  with  them.  Offers  of  seven  dollars  Mexi- 


THE  NEWS  AND  THE  CENSORSHIP  95 


can  are  made  for  an  astral  body  which  one 
could  project  from  place  to  place  and  see  and 
hear  what  is  going  on  at  all  these  many  differ- 
ent places. 

“For  reports  from  some  of  these  points  the 
correspondents  are  mainly  dependent  upon  the 
official  reports  at  headquarters.  That  is  some- 
thing of  a rub.  It  is  easier  to  get  things  past  a 
censor  than  it  is  to  get  things  out  of  a censor. 
The  spirit  which  prompts  to  censorship  finds 
its  best  hold  in  being  itself  the  sole  source  of 
information.  It  is  far  easier  for  the  censor  to 
take  from  me  something  that  I have  than  it  is 
for  me  to  get  something  out  of  him  that  he  does 
not  see  fit  to  give  me.  There  is  very  little 
which  does  not,  sooner  or  later,  get  around  to 
the  newspaper  man.  There  is  not  a great  deal 
of  any  special  importance  which  he  does  not 
get,  and  often  with  surprising  promptness.  The 
channels  which  lead  to  newsdom  are  many  and 
various.  But  when  the  main  pipe  runs  only 
into  the  Manila  ayuntamiento,  it  often  becomes 
a matter  of  some  difficulty  to  get  a satisfactory 
tap  on  it.  There  may  have  been  a half-dozen 
scraps,  but  if  the  censor  should  see  fit  to  post 
on  his  bulletin  a notice  stating  that  there  was 
no  news,  and  decline  to  be  interviewed  on  the 
plea  of  occupation,  the  news-man  is  up  against 
a wall,  and  there  he  must  stay  until  some  one 
who  loves  him  more  than  the  censor  does  gives 
him  a kindly  1 tip  ’ or  a story.” 


96 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


Three  weeks  later  I forwarded  another  letter 
upon  the  same  subject,  though  it  dealt  with 
another  feature.  That  read  as  follows : 

“Manila,  December  16,  1899. 

“ The  matter  of  the  Manila  censorship  is 
beginning  to  get  a trifle  musty,  perhaps,  but  I 
submit  herewith  a new  and  somewhat  interest- 
ing feature  of  that  institution.  It  is  not  only 
the  press  matter  cabled  to  the  States  which 
has  been  affected.  All  the  local  publications 
here  have  been  under  the  club.  They  are  not 
allowed  to  say  anything  which  criticizes  or 
reflects  upon  the  doings  or  the  policy  of  either 
the  administration  in  Washington  or  the  local 
authorities  here.  Many  Manila  newspapers 
are  sent  to  the  United  States.  Readers  there 
assume  them  to  be  an  accurate  reflection  of 
affairs  in  the  island.  As  a matter  of  fact,  they 
are  nothing  of  the  kind.  All  are  flavored  to  suit 
the  official  palate,  colored  to  please  the  powers 
that  be. 

“The  Manila  ‘Times’  is  far  and  away  the 
leading  American  paper  here.  It  is  well  and 
cleanly  gotten  up  and  is  edited  by  a man  who 
knows  his  business.  Its  editor  has  seen  nearly 
thirty  years  of  journalism  in  the  Orient  and 
was  for  a considerable  time,  prior  to  his  coming 
to  Manila,  the  editor  of  the  Hongkong  ‘ Tele- 
graph,’ a widely  known  publication. 

“ Upon  the  receipt  of  the  news  by  mail  and 


THE  NEWS  AND  THE  CENSORSHIP  97 


the  home  papers  that  the  censorship  had  been 
abolished  some  six  weeks  before  any  one  here 
had  heard  a word  about  it,  Editor  Cowan  of  the 
‘Times’  prepared  the  subjoined  article  for  his 
editorial  page.  Its  publication  was  prohibited 
by  the  censor,  whose  reply  to  the  editor  is 
appended.” 

ABOLITION  OF  THE  CENSOEATE 

The  New  York  “ Sun  ” and  other  papers  publish  a 
Washington  despatch  of  October  9 announcing,  on 
the  authority  of  Adjutant-General  Corbin,  that  the 
censorate  in  Manila  has  been  abolished  by  General 
Otis. 

This  is  very  remarkable,  for  the  censorate  is  in  fact 
not  abolished  yet,  nor  ever  has  been.  Some  explana- 
tion is  due  from  the  authorities.  The  people  of  the 
United  States  may  have  been  more  or  less  acquiescent 
in  the  continuance  of  the  censorate,  but  will  certainly 
not  acquiesce  in  the  official  assurance  of  its  abolition 
while  it  continues  in  full  force.  How  the  erroneous 
statement  could  have  been  made  it  is  difficult  to  under- 
stand. The  enemies  of  the  administration  will  very 
readily  understand  it  in  their  own  way  and  make  the 
most  of  it.  It  is  undoubtedly  a mistake  of  serious 
nature,  and  should  be  rectified  promptly,  so  as  to  mini- 
mize the  harm  done.  For  this  was  no  casual  remark 
on  trivial  topics;  it  was  (according  to  the  “Sun’s” 
despatch  from  Washington)  Adjutant-General  Corbin’s 
official  answer  to  complaints  about  the  censorate.  Whe- 
ther General  Corbin  had  misunderstood  what  General 
Otis  told  him,  or  whether  all  the  newspapers  conspired 
to  misunderstand  General  Corbin,  we  cannot  say ; but 
if  he  did  not  tell  them  what  they  say  he  did,  he  should 
have  taken  steps  to  protect  himself  from  misrepresen- 
tation on  such  an  important  question.  The  people  of 
the  United  States  will  be  disposed  to  feel  that  they 


98 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


have  been  deliberately  deceived,  unless  something  is 
done  promptly  to  put  the  matter  in  a good  light. 

With  all  due  respect,  we  are  strongly  of  opinion  that 
the  time  has  now  arrived  when  the  military  govern- 
ment of  the  Philippines  can  conveniently  cease  to 
trouble  about  what  the  newspapers  say  or  do  not  say, 
in  Manila  or  elsewhere.  For  a long  time  we  have  had 
our  own  opinion  about  the  censorate,  but  in  certain 
circumstances  it  was  our  duty  to  loyally  support  the 
administration  in  spite  of  having  contrary  views  our- 
selves. We  do  not  think  it  is  our  duty  to  do  so  any 
longer,  and  we  respectfully  urge  the  authorities  to 
accept  the  view  that  there  is  now  no  longer  any  justi- 
fication whatever  for  a censorate.  The  military  neces- 
sity which  existed  before  is  certainly  non-existent  now, 
and,  outside  of  military  necessities,  if  we  have  to  sub- 
mit to  a censorship  for  any  other  purpose,  we  will  only 
submit  under  protest.  If  censors  are  necessary  in  war, 
critics  are  necessary  in  peace.  Should  criticism  go 
beyond  legitimate  bounds,  there  are  civil  courts,  and 
there  is  no  further  excuse  for  a military  censorate. 
Martial  law  may  be  still  desirable  in  such  matters  as 
police  regulations,  curfew,  etc.,  but  not  in  regard  to  the 
press — especially  after  the  adjutant-general  has  de- 
clared that  the  censorate  was  abolished. 

The  censor’s  determination  of  this  matter  is 
indicated  in  the  following  reply.  It  will  be  no- 
ticed that  it  is  dated  December  2,  nearly  three 
months  subsequent  to  the  alleged  abolition  of 
the  censorship.  It  will  also  be  noticed  that 
Captain  Greene  still  signed  himself  “ Censor,” 
and  that  he  admitted  that  the  institution  was 
“ distasteful  to  the  public.”  The  reply  reads : 

Editor  Manila  “ Times  ” : Upon  what  the  statement 
as  to  the  abolition  of  censorship  was  based  is  unknown. 

Your  conclusions  as  to  the  further  continuance  of 
the  censorship  justified  as  a military  necessity  are  all 


THE  NEWS  AXE  THE  CENSORSHIP  99 


wrong.  In  the  matter  of  urging  this  abolition  you  are 
guilty  of  an  interference  in  matters  entirely  beyond 
your* knowledge.  You  can  rest  assured  that  as  far  as 
"the  authorities  here  are  concerned,  the  censorship,  as 
distasteful  to  them  as  to  the  public,  will  not  continue 
longer  than  in  their  judgment  is  absolutely  necessary. 

Very  truly, 

Greene, 

December  2,  1899.  Censor. 

It  is  hardly  to  be  denied  that  both  cable  news 
and  official  reports  failed  to  present  the  situa- 
tion as  it  really  was.  The  wisdom  of  presenting 
a doleful  picture  may  be  called  in  question, 
although  conditions  might  fully  warrant  such  a 
presentation.  I can  personally  testify  to  some 
of  the  results  of  trying  to  tell  the  truth  about 
such  situations.  ' I became  the  target  for  the 
scornful  tongue.  I was  called  a “ Little  Ameri- 
can.” Now  I can  sit  back  and  chuckle  over  the 
reflection  of  how  much  wiser  in  our  day  and 
generation  were  the  newspaper  correspondents 
than  those  official  accounts  which  reported  the 
“ situation  well  in  hand,”  and  predicted  that  the 
war  would  be  “ over  in  ten  days.”  The  misfor- 
tune for  the  American  people  seems  to  have 
been  that  the  official  reports  outweighed  the 
correspondent’s  stories. 

Covering  the  situation  to  a later  period,  I 
quote  a letter  from  one  of  the  leading  corre- 
spondents in  Manila : 

Manila,  April  15,  1900. 

The  Manila  editors  and  the  correspondents  of  Ameri- 
can newspapers  here  are  hoping  that  the  arrival  of  the 
Civil  Commission  will  result  in  a reform  of  the 


100 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


present  censorship  methods.  Cable  despatches  an- 
nouncing the  appointment  of  the  commission  were 
received  by  two  of  the  Manila  newspapers,  but  the 
censor  forbade  them  to  print  this  news.  He  has 
asserted  that  he  suppresses  only  news  “inimical  to 
the  interests  of  the  military  government.”  Frequent 
friction  arose  between  the  correspondents  and  the  pre- 
vious censor,  while  the  Scliurman  Commission  was  here, 
over  messages  relating  to  the  commission,  and  there 
was  sometimes  much  trouble  in  getting  through  news 
which  the  commission  had  given  out  for  publication. 

The  editors  of  the  local  newspapers  complain  bitterly 
and  unanimously  that  the  censorship  as  it  is  managed 
inflicts  upon  them  wholly  needless  hardships  and  great 
financial  loss.  The  only  Filipino  paper  which  sup- 
ported the  American  administration  has  suspended 
publication  on  account  of  the  censorship,  and  the 
editor  of  the  oldest  and  most  respectable  and  friendly 
Spanish  journal  announces  that  he  intends  to  close  his 
business  and  leave  Manila,  because  it  is  impossible  to 
publish  a newspaper  under  the  restrictions  imposed  by 
the  present  government. 

The  editors  argue  that  the  publication  of  newspapers 
which  support  the  government’s  policy,  as  all  of  the 
Manila  papers  do,  is  an  enterprise  that  should  be  en- 
couraged rather  than  harassed,  that  they  pay  almost 
prohibitive  rates  to  secure  cable  despatches,  that  they 
are  served  by  reputable  and  conservative  press  agen- 
cies, and  that  their  own  financial  interests  lead  them  to 
instruct  their  correspondents  not  to  throw  away  money 
on  cable  despatches  which  could  not  be  published.  They 
argue  that  no  correspondent  could  possibly  foresee  that 
such  news  as  labor  strikes  or  the  appointment  of  a 
commission  to  the  Philippines  would  be  considered 
inimical  to  the  interest  of  the  government,  and  that, 
moreover,  the  news  which  comes  to  them  is  not  sup- 
pressed, but  merely  postponed,  because  the  Filipinos 
receive  the  leading  newspapers  from  the  United  States 
and  read  them  with  the  greatest  care. 


VII 

TEE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 

The  early  autumn  of  1899— The  campaign  in  the  north— 
Hardships  of  the  troops— Filipino  movements— Continu- 
ance of  hostilities— The  pursuit  of  Aguinaldo— Indications 
for  the  future  — Filipino  money  — Spanish  prisoners— 
Thanksgiving  day  in  the  Philippines— Merry-making  under 
difficulties— What  some  of  us  were  thankful  for. 

THE  months  of  August,  September  and  Octo- 
ber, 1899,  saw  the  return  of  all  the  volunteer 
troops  serving  in  the  Philippines  and  their  re- 
placement by  an  increased  number  of  regulars 
and  what  may  be  called  volunteer-regulars. 
Only  a notably  small  percentage  of  the  volun- 
teers from  the  State  regiments  reenlisted  for 
further  service.  No  extensive  movements  took 
place  during  these  months.  A few  petty  engage- 
ments occurred,  but  such  movement  as  there 
was  consisted  chiefly  in  taking  position  for  the 
larger  movement  which  was  to  follow.  While 
the  following  letters,  written  at  the  time,  do  not 
enter  into  closely  detailed  description  of  the  fight- 
ing and  mention  only  a few  of  the  numerous 
engagements,  they  are  fairly  indicative  of  the 

101 


102 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


whole.  They  also  reflect  the  general  situation 
as  it  was  at  that  period. 

“Manila,  November  24,  1899. 

“There  is,  at  the  present  time,  a disintegra- 
tion of  the  northern  division  of  the  Filipino 
army.  Presumably  it  is  general  and  permanent. 
There  remains,  however,  the  possibility  of  an 
unexpected  cohesiveness  which  may  yet  bring 
some  considerable  portion  of  it  together  again. 
Here  and  there  one  hears  the  expression  of  belief 
that  ‘ this  thing  is  about  over,’  followed  by  opti- 
mistic views  of  the  immediate  submission  of  bel- 
ligerent Filipinos  and  their  early  return  to  quiet 
and  peaceful  industry.  But  such  an  outcome  is 
barely  more  than  hopeful  guesswork.  It  may 
or  may  not  be  realized,  and  there  are  strong  pos- 
sibilities against  it. 

“ About  October  1,  General  Wheaton  was  re- 
lieved of  his  command  at  Angeles,  and  summoned 
to  Manila  for  some  purpose  which  was  supposed 
to  be  absolutely  secret  and  somewhat  mysterious. 
After  a day  or  two  of  investigation  and  survey, 
the  news  correspondents  reached  a fairly  estab- 
lished conclusion  that  Wheaton  was  to  organize 
and  command  an  expedition  to  Dagupan.  Manila 
headquarters  sought  to  keep  this  all  hidden  from 
the  news-men,  so  that  they  should  not  interfere 
with  great  military  plans  by  telegraphing  them 
to  the  United  States.  It  so  happens  that  the 
whole  plan  was  published  in  America,  on  infor- 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


103 


mation  from  Washington,  long  before  General 
Wheaton  was  called  to  Manila. 

“ During  the  latter  part  of  September  General 
Young  was  sent  to  San  Fernando,  where  his  bri- 
gade of  cavalry  was  gradually  assembled.  Again 
the  newspaper  men  did  some  fairly  good  guess- 
ing, while  Manila  sought  to  keep  them  in  the 
dark,  and  Washington  gave  the  whole  thing 
away.  General  MacArthur  was  at  Angeles  with 
his  command.  Thus  there  began  the  three-jawed 
combination  crushing-machine  whose  operation, 
within  the  last  two  weeks,  has  taken  the  Ameri- 
can army  into  the  territory  previously  held  by 
the  Filipinos,  and  scattered,  temporarily  or  per- 
manently, the  northern  division  of  the  Filipino 
army.  With  the  dispersion  of  that  army  there 
has  come  Aguinaldo’s  withdrawal  into  the  moun- 
tains to  the  northward.  That  is  it  is  now  as- 
sumed on  such  evidence  as  has  been  obtained, 
that  the  mountains  of  Nueva  Vizcaya  were  the 
point  to  which  he  was  moving.  The  jaws  of 
the  crusher  failed  to  be  an  accurate  fit,  and  Senor 
Aguinaldo  is  understood  to  have  slipped  out 
between  the  eastern  set. 

“ The  movement  is  only  comprehensible  by 
reference  to  a map.  Young’s  column,  attended 
by  Division  Commander  Lawton  and  consisting 
largely  of  cavalry,  the  Third  and  the  Fourth,  was 
to  constitute  a long  extended  arm  or  jaw.  It 
moved  northeast  from  San  Fernando,  via  Aryat, 
Cabiao  and  San  Isidro,  to  about  Cabanatuan, 


104 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


thence  northward  to  about  San  Jose,  and  north- 
westward to  effect  a junction  with  the  shorter  arm 
of  Wheaton’s  column  moving  from  the  head  of 
Lingayen  Gulf  eastward.  While  this  was  going 
on,  MacArthur  was  to  move  northward  from  An- 
geles, via  Bamban  and  Tarlak,  along  the  line  of 
the  railroad,  to  crowd  out  the  Filipinos  and  con- 
nect with  any  American  force  which  might  come 
down  from  the  north.  None  came,  and  Mac- 
Arthur rode  through  the  country  with  little 
or  no  resistance,  the  Filipinos  dividing,  some 
to  the  east  and  some  to  the  west,  as  he  ad- 
vanced. 

“ Unless  one  could  know  with  accuracy  the 
number  of  troops  on  sick  report  and  on  special 
duty,  it  would  be  impossible  to  state  the  number 
of  effective  troops  engaged  in  this  three-column 
movement.  General  Wheaton  has  the  Thir- 
teenth and  Thirty-third  Infantry,  General  Law- 
ton  has  the  Third  and  Fourth  Cavalry,  under 
General  Young,  and  the  Thirty-fourth  Infantry, 
two  battalions  of  the  Twenty-fourth  (colored), 
part  of  the  Twenty-second,  the  Thirty-fifth  and 
three  hundred  Macabebe  scouts.  MacArthur  has 
the  Ninth,  Twelfth,  Seventeenth,  Thirty-sixth, 
two  battalions  of  the  Twenty-fifth  (colored)  and 
some  of  the  Third  Artillery.  Behind  and  south 
of  all  this  is  the  Sixteenth  guarding  the  railroad 
track,  and  the  Third  in  garrisons  in  the  Candaba 
country.  Without  counting  the  two  latter,  there 
should  be  upward  of  ten  thousand  effective  fight- 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


105 


ing-men  engaged  in  the  breaking  up  of  the  Fili- 
pino army  and  the  pursuit  of  AguinaldOo 

“ A considerable  number  and  the  most  active 
portion  of  these  troops  are  beyond  telegraphic 
communication.  Reports  are  meager  and  infre- 
quent. The  commands  are  broken  up  and  scat- 
tered over  a territory  approximating,  roughly, 
one  hundred  miles  square.  Many  of  them  are 
living  on  the  country,  and  for  many  of  them 
hospital  and  transportation  service  are  impos- 
sible. Occasional  tales  drift  in  of  severe  hardship, 
of  forced  marches  over  horribly  rough  and  muddy 
country  under  burning  sun.  There  are  rumors 
of  sick  men  dropping  by  the  wayside  or  being 
left  in  native  villages  where  their  fate  is  uncertain. 
It  may  all  be  greatly  exaggerated,  but  the  known 
conditions  of  the  country  and  the  weather  leave 
plenty  of  ground  for  fearing  that  more  or  less  of 
it  is  only  too  true.  There  is  more  reliable  foun- 
dation for  stories  of  men  who  are  shoeless,  and 
of  men  whose  clothes  have  been  torn  to  shreds 
in  forcing  a way  through  the  thickets  and  jungles. 
A tale  has  come  of  men  reduced  to  a uniform 
consisting  only  of  a cartridge-belt  and  a breech- 
clout.  There  is  little  room  for  doubt  that  some 
of  the  troops  are  seeing  some  very  rough  cam- 
paigning, and  it  is  wholly  probable  that  the  casu- 
alty and  sick  list  will  be  considerable,  though 
the  loss  in  battle  or  from  Filipino  bullets  will 
probably  be  slight.  Some  have  been  drowned 
in  fording  streams  and  some  are  missing.  All 


106 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


this  is  to  be  expected.  The  troops  are  not  up 
there  for  a picnic  or  a rabbit  hunt. 

“ The  question  is  whether  that  which  has  been 
dispersed  will  stay  dispersed,  or  whether  there 
will  be  a reassembling  for  further  resistance.  Is 
it  the  end  of  hostilities,  or  an  incident  in  the 
course  of  hostilities  ? Quien  sabef  Movements 
on  a smaller  scale  heretofore  have  been  but  in- 
cidents. The  scattered  opposition  returns  and 
the  game  goes  on. 

“ I sent  a letter,  I think  under  date  of  October 
19,  in  which  I commented  upon  the  sweep  which 
was  made  on  the  south  line,  under  command  of 
General  Schwan.  The  opposing  force  in  that 
vicinity  was  but  little,  if  any,  smaller  than  that 
which  has  now  been  dispersed  in  the  north.  It  is 
true  that  the  northern  department  was  the  focus 
of  the  Filipino  organization,  the  center  of  that 
which  they  claim,  with  more  or  less  of  reason, 
as  a government.  But  that  mid-October  disper- 
sion in  the  south  was  of  brief  duration.  Within 
two  weeks  there  were  stories  of  a reassembling. 
Within  four  weeks  it  was  reported  that  matters 
on  the  south  line  were  getting  very  uneasy. 
Within  six  weeks  more  or  less  of  desultory  firing 
was  going  on  in  the  vicinity  of  Imus.  It  is 
now  reported  by  American  scouts  that  a body  of 
Filipinos,  variously  estimated  in  the  thousands, 
has  gathered  within  that  very  territory  which 
was  said  to  have  been  so  thoroughly  cleaned  out 
in  October.  If  I remember  rightly,  my  comment 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


107 


upon  that  dispersion  instituted  a parallel  be- 
tween such  dispersions  and  the  Jerseyman’s  dis- 
persion of  the  mosquitos  which  annoyed  him. 
This  new  aggregation  is  said  to  occupy  a stronger 
position  than  the  old  one. 

“Word  came  a day  or  two  ago  of  another 
massing  ten  or  twelve  miles  to  the  northeast  of 
Manila,  in  a several  times  conquered  territory. 
The  importance  and  seriousness  of  these  assem- 
blages are  political  rather  than  military.  They 
are  not  composed  of  drilled  and  equipped  sol- 
diers. They  are  the  people  of  the  vicinity,  the 
peasantry  of  the  country,  with  perhaps,  and 
probably,  some  nucleus  of  regular  Filipino  mili- 
tary organizations.  The  cheerful  enthusiast  who 
asserts  the  early  end  of  the  war  now  sees  in  them 
restless  bands  of  robbers,  the  vicious  and  the 
criminal  classes.  My  own  observation  is  to  the 
contrary,  and  I find  support  in  my  views  from 
scores  of  army  officers  whose  time  is  spent  at  the 
front.  These  are  general  officers,  field  officers  and 
line  officers,  whose  duties  take  them  and  keep  them 
among  the  people  and  the  homes  of  the  people 
whom  they  are  fighting.  The  formidable  gather- 
ings in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  Manila  are  made 
up  largely  from  the  people  of  the  neighborhood. 
The  special  significance  of  it  all  lies  in  the  fact  that 
so  large  a percentage  of  these  bodies  are  the  people 
who  have  been  where  they  could  see  and  where 
men  have  experienced  what  is  commonly  called 
‘ the  beneficent  influence  of  American  rule.’ 


108 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


“ The  cheerful  enthusiast  asserts  the  immense 
improvement  in  Manila,  in  Bakoor,  Imus,  Mala- 
bon  and  all  the  surrounding  cities  and  towns. 
He  talks  of  municipal,  social  and  financial  im- 
provement and  advantage  beyond  anything 
known  or  dreamed  of  in  the  Spanish  days.  Yet, 
within  a twenty-five-mile  radius  of  Manila,  with 
all  these  alleged  advantages  staring  them  in  the 
face,  there  are  thousands  of  Filipinos  who  are 
blind  to  them  and  who  assemble  in  front  of  the 
American  lines  to  resist  advance  and  to  harass 
occupation.  The  contention  that  civil  govern- 
ment is  making  headway  may  hold  in  the  case  of 
individuals,  but  it  does  not  seem  to  hold  with 
the  masses.  This  city  is  full  of  conflicting  re- 
ports. Juan  Jose  comes  in  with  a tale  of  Filipino 
dissatisfaction  with  the  government  and  the  pro- 
cesses of  the  insurgents.  He  has  a tale  to  tell 
of  suffering,  disaffection,  disgust  and  desertion 
among  the  Filipino  ranks.  He  is  followed  by  Jose 
Juan,  who  reports  the  country  as  standing  by 
Aguinaldo,  whose  forces  he  reports  as  well  armed, 
equipped,  fed  and  contented.  The  only  definite 
thing  about  it  all  is  its  indefiniteness ; the  only 
certain  thing  its  uncertainty. 

“ My  own  impression  is  that  the  trouble  is  far 
from  being  over,  unless  it  find  determination  in 
righteous  American  legislation.  I give  that  as 
an  impression,  not  as  a conviction.  I discount 
the  opinion  of  any  man  who  has  a conviction 
about  it  either  way.  In  the  long  run,  the  Fili- 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


109 


pino  cause  is,  of  course,  hopeless  as  against  the 
power  of  the  United  States.  Wisdom  cries  aloud 
to  them  to  desist,  to  submit.  But  there  are 
sundry  human  attributes  which  even  these  ‘ sav- 
ages’ possess  that  arise  to  drown  the  voice  of 
wisdom.  There  are  such  things  as  patriotism, 
prejudice,  hatred,  superstition  and  various  other 
qualities,  worthy  and  unworthy,  which  lead  men 
to  fight  and  impel  them  to  continue  fighting.  A 
general  realization  of  hopelessness  may  lead  to  an 
early  collapse  of  the  insurrection.  Other  influ- 
ences may  lead  to  its  continuation.  Aguinaldo’s 
death  or  capture  might  end  it.  That  very  death 
or  capture  might  stimulate  it. 

“ There  is  a further  consideration.  There  are 
those  who  assert  the  ending  of  the  war  would  be 
achieved  by  the  suppression  of  the  Tagal  tribe, 
whose  territory  is  the  immediate  vicinity  of  Ma- 
nila. I can  see  no  sound  warrant  for  any  such 
assertions.  I can  but  regard  them  as  over-opti- 
mistic, though  the  possibility  of  their  correctness 
should  be  admitted.  There  is  some  significance 
in  the  fact  that  outside  of  Manila  Bay  there  is 
no  port  on  the  two  thousand  or  more  miles  of 
Luzon’s  coast  which  is  open  to  American  en- 
trance except  by  force.  San  Fernando  de  la 
Union,  two  hundred  miles  or  so  to  the  north  on 
the  west  coast,  is  hostile.  So  is  Yigan,  one  hun- 
dred miles  or  more  farther  northward.  Aparri, 
on  the  north  coast,  the  gateway  of  the  vast  and 
fertile  valley  of  Cagayan,  is  also  hostile.  Little 


110 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


or  nothing  is  known  of  our  probable  reception  in 
any  part  of  that  long  peninsula,  five  hundred  or 
more  miles  in  length,  that  extends  away  to  the 
southeast  and  includes  the  provinces  of  Tayabas, 
northern  and  southern  Camarines,  Albay  and 
Sorsogom  Cavite,  Batangas  and  Laguna  prov- 
inces are  unfriendly,  and  beyond  them  no  Amer- 
ican soldier  has  yet  set  foot.  The  territory  over 
which  we  have  been  fighting,  the  vicinity  of 
Manila  and  the  Manila-Dagupan  valley,  is,  per- 
haps, the  most  favorable  in  all  Luzon  for  military 
operations ; the  Cagayan  valley  is  not  generally 
unlike  it ; but  aside  from  these  two  regions,  the 
vast  extent  of  the  island  is  wild,  rough,  moun- 
tainous, a region  in  which  a small  band  of  de- 
termined natives  may  easily  play  the  mischief 
with  an  invading  force  greatly  their  superior. 

“ The  1 war  ’ in  the  Philippines  practically 
ended  last  spring— in  the  north  at  Calumpit,  in 
the  south  at  Zapote  River.  Hostilities  have  con- 
tinued, but  it  has  been  a chase  whose  operations 
have  depended  wholly  upon  American  aggres- 
siveness. It  has  been  made  a proud  boast  that 
the  Americans  have  won  every  engagement. 
Speaking  generally,  that  is  a fact.  Speaking 
literally  and  particularly,  it  is  a— well,  a tara- 
diddle. All  worthy  boasters  to  the  contrary 
notwithstanding,  official  or  unofficial,  American 
commands  have  a number  of  times  been  forced 
to  fall  back  in  the  face  of  resistance  from  the 
enemy.  But,  speaking  generally,  the  Americans 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


111 


have  gone  ahead  whenever  and  wherever  they 
saw  fit,  with  little  resistance,  since  the  days  of 
those  two  fights  last  May  and  June. 

“ Some  time  ago,  I wrote  that  I looked  for  little 
or  no  more  of  organized  resistance  to  American, 
advance.  I believe  the  ‘war’  is  over,  has  been 
for  some  time.  How  long  hostilities  may  con- 
tinue is  wholly  another  matter  and  is  beyond  the 
predictions  of  any  man.  Some  of  the  guesses 
and  not  well-founded  opinions  will  find  reali- 
zation, for  all  sorts  of  views  are  represented.  The 
successful  ones  will  then  assert  their  superior 
wisdom  and  pose  as  Solomons  and  other  pro- 
phets, whereas  it  will  be  but  the  fortuitous  out- 
come of  a narrow  observation.  I have  my  own 
opinion,  but  I admit  that  if  it  comes  out  right  it 
will  be  only  a lucky  guess.” 

“ Manila,  December  18,  1899. 

“ The  last  month  has  marked  a very  decided 
change  in  the  military  situation  in  Luzon. 
American  troops,  well  armed,  fed  and  equipped, 
have  scoured  the  northern  districts  and  scat- 
tered their  puny  opponents.  A battalion  of  the 
Twenty-fourth  (colored)  crossed  the  divide  and, 
striking  a confluent  of  the  Rio  Grande  de  Caga- 
yan, followed  its  course  via  Bayambong,  Ilagan 
and  Tuguegarao,  to  the  river’s  mouth  at  Aparri, 
on  the  north  coast  of  Luzon.  Another  body  of 
troops,  under  the  personal  command  of  Briga- 
dier-General Young,  followed  northward  along 


112 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  west  coast  of  the  island  to  Yigan.  At  Can- 
don,  Major  March  with  his  force  turned  eastward, 
via  Cervantes  and  Cayan,  to  the  crest  of  the  cen- 
tral cordilleras.  Another  force,  mainly  from  the 
Twenty-fifth  (colored),  moved  westward  from  the 
vicinity  of  Tarlak,  crossed  the  Zambales  Moun- 
tains, and  came  upon  the  coast  at  Iba,  from  which 
place  they  marched  southward  to  Subig. 

“ While  these  larger  movements  were  in  prog- 
ress, other  bodies  of  troops,  large  and  small, 
occupied  towns  and  swept  through  the  provinces 
of  Tarlak  and  Pangasinan.  Comparatively  little 
resistance  was  encountered  by  any  of  the  moving 
troops,  northward,  westward  or  locally.  I wrote 
some  two  months  ago  that  all  organized  resis- 
tance to  American  advance  was  probably  at  an 
end.  My  prediction  seems  to  have  been  fulfilled. 
The  American  loss  from  bullets  has  been  quite 
insignificant  considering  the  number  of  troops 
engaged  and  the  extent  of  the  operations.  The 
Filipino  loss  from  the  same  cause  has  probably 
been  less  than  has  been  reported. 

“ General  Young’s  movement  has  been,  sup- 
posedly, a chase  on  the  trail  of  Aguinaldo,  who, 
wherever  he  may  be,  is  a fugitive.  There  seems 
no  very  strong  reason  to  doubt  that  Young’s  party 
was  actually  on  the  trail  of  the  Filipino  leader, 
though  there  are  those  who  assert  that  Aguinaldo 
got  away  into  the  southern  provinces  and  that  the 
man  whom  Young  was  chasing  was  only  a blind, 
an  impersonator,  sent  out  for  the  purpose  of 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


113 


misleading  the  Americans  concerning  the  real 
whereabouts  of  the  man  they  wanted.  Captain 
Bachelder’s  battalion  of  the  Twenty-fourth  ap- 
pears to  have  gone  off  on  an  exploring  expedi- 
tion very  much  upon  its  own  responsibility.  A 
wholly  reliable  authority  tells  me  that  they  had 
no  instructions  for  their  somewhat  spectacular 
escapade.  Fortunately,  it  has  turned  out  all 
right,  thus  making  it  a brilliant  military  manceu- 
ver  redounding  to  the  credit  of  the  authorities. 

“ The  troops  engaged  in  these  expeditions  have 
seen  some  hard  service  marching,  particularly 
among  the  mountains.  Excellent  roads  were 
found  along  the  west  coast,  but  the  passages 
across  the  mountains  were  made  by  narrow  trails 
with  the  troops  in  single  file.  Field  rations  were 
carried  where  they  could  be  obtained  and  trans- 
ported by  means  of  pack-ponies  and  native 
bearers.  Supplies  were  supplemented  by  such 
provisions  as  the  country  afforded.  In  many 
cases  these  were  but  scanty,  as  the  hill-country 
is  sparsely  settled  and  such  people  as  are  found 
there  are  indifferent  producers.  Clothes  and 
shoes  suffered  greatly,  and  many  a man  was 
barefooted  and  ragged  enough  before  the  trip 
was  finished.  But  a 1 glorious  victory  ’ has  been 
scored,  and  the  ‘ end  ’ is  predicted  by  the  san- 
guine. 

“ That  an  end  must  come  sometime  is  a fore- 
gone conclusion.  Which  end  has  really  come  is 
a more  dubious  question.  A friend  of  mine  here, 


114 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


a major  in  rank,  spends  a good  many  useless 
hours  in  trying  to  convince  me  by  argument  that 
from  this  time  on  the  Filipinos  will  fall  over  each 
other  in  their  rush  to  come  in  and  give  up  their 
arms  and  become,  by  some  process  which  I can- 
not at  all  understand,  excellent  American  citi- 
zens, peaceable,  industrious,  loyal  and  patriotic. 
He  claims  that  everybody  thinks  so,  whereas  I 
can  find  no  one  else,  among  those  whose  time  is 
spent  out  in  the  country  among  the  people,  who 
has  such  an  idea.  That  many  will  be  glad  to 
resume  their  old  accustomed  life  and  will  now 
do  so  is  unquestionable.  I have  disputed  the 
probability  of  any  wide-spread  anarchy  to  follow 
even  so  crude  a government  as  might  be  operated 
by  Filipinos  in  a wholly  independent  state.  My 
argument  has  rested  upon  the  very  fact— for  I 
believe  it  to  be  a fact — that  these  people  are 
normally  a peaceful  race  who  prefer  the  domes- 
ticity and  quiet  of  home  life  to  the  turmoil  and 
misery  of  war  in  any  shape.  Therefore  I be- 
lieve that  many  will  now  go  home  and  go  to 
work. 

“ That  their  return  to  home  and  industry  will 
mean  any  love  for  America  and  the  American 
flag,  anything  more  than  an  enforced  acceptance 
of  the  rule  of  a stronger  power,  I do  not  believe. 
Until  there  has  been  a clear  demonstration  to  the 
contrary,  American  government  will  be  accepted 
by  the  majority  of  Filipinos  only  as  the  successor 
of  Spanish,  the  same  in  intent  and  object.  I 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


115 


still  hold  the  opinion  ‘which  I have  held  and 
expressed  in  the  past — that  the  form  of  govern- 
ment here  is  of  little  concern  to  the  great  major- 
ity of  the  islanders.  Those  in  the  larger  centers 
are  more  affected  and  well  comprehend  the  differ- 
ence between  good  and  bad  government,  justice 
and  injustice,  freedom  and  oppression.  They 
have  property  or  property  interests  upon  which 
taxes  may  be  levied.  Even  the  daily  life  of  the 
laborer  in  a city  or  a large  town  may  be  made  a 
subject  of  revenue,  as  it  has  been.  Away  from 
these  centers  the  life  is  little  more  than  an  exis- 
tence, easily  maintained  and  indifferent  to  the 
rule  of  a central  government.  Aguinaldo,  Amer- 
ica or  Beelzebub  might  be  governor  in  Manila ; 
thousands  throughout  the  island  would  neither 
know  nor  care,  so  long  as  they  were  left  to  the 
life  of  their  preference.  They  have  little  which 
could  be  taxed,  want  little  and  have  less.  They 
live  in  a phase  of  Pig’s  Paradise,  in  which  they 
probably  find  as  much  of  that  kind  of  happiness 
and  content  which  they  want  as  does  the  major- 
ity of  the  human  race. 

“ As  a political  organization  the  Filipino  gov- 
ernment, what  there  was  of  it,  practically  exists 
no  longer.  It  is  denied  by  partisans  that  there 
ever  was  any  such  government,  and  not  a little 
of  ridicule  has  been  heaped  upon  Aguinaldo’s 
portable  capital.  But  it  is  an  undeniable  fact 
that  there  was  a very  good  attempt  at  a form  of 
government.  It  was  formally  organized ; it  gov- 


116 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


erned  districts,  maintained  an  army,  acted  under 
a written  constitution  and  sought  recognition 
from  other  powers.  It  was  duly  recognized  and 
supported,  heartily  and  willingly,  by  many  thou- 
sands. Others  accorded  it  but  a half-hearted 
recognition,  some  objected  to  it  and  many  were 
indifferent. 

“ To-day  it  is  scattered.  Its  leader  is  a fugi- 
tive and  some  of  its  cabinet  are  held  as  prison- 
ers by  the  American  forces.  Some  of  its  records 
are  hidden  or  destroyed,  some  are  in  the  hands 
of  Americans.  Among  the  seizures  by  the 
Americans  was  a considerable  amount  of  paper 
money  issued  by  the  Filipino  government.  I 
have  seen  no  bills  save  those  of  one  peso.  They 
are  crudely  printed  on  common  paper  and 
ornamented  by  a geometrical  combination  of 
type,  such  as  brackets,  asterisks  and  the  like, 
like  that  found  on  the  stands  of  a job-printing 
office.  All  of  the  wording  is  Spanish,  Upon 
both  ends  of  the  back  of  the  bill  is  the  notifica- 
tion that  counterfeiting  will  be  castigado  con 
todo  el  rigor  cle  la  ley  (punished  with  all  the 
rigor  of  the  law).  A notification  on  the  back  of 
the  paper  states  that  this  bill  (billete)  will  be  re- 
deemed by  the  Filipino  Republic  and  received  in 
payment  of  taxes  ( contribu clones ),  customs  duties 
( derechos  de  aduana)  and  all  general  obligations. 
The  back  also  shows,  in  large  type  formed  of 
what  might  have  been  made  for  printing  quar- 
ter-notes in  music  sheets,  ‘ Republica  Filipina,’ 


TIIE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


117 


and  in  small  type,  ‘ El  Presidents  de  la  Repub- 
lica,  Emilio  Aguinaldo,’  and  ‘El  Presidente  del 
Consejo  de  Gobierno,  Pedro  A.  Paterno,’  A 
useless  inscription  appears  at  the  base,  on  right 
and  on  left,  Papel  moneda  (paper  money).  The 
face  of  the  bill  reads : 

REPUBLICA  FILIPINA 
Papel  Moneda 
de 

UN  PESO  $ 1 $ 

Ley  30  Noviembre,  1898—24  Abril,  1899 
El  Delegado  del  Gobierno 

“As  a political  organization  the  Republica 
Filipina,  set  up  as  the  revolutionary  government 
in  Cavite  during  the  month  of  June,  1898,  may 
be  said  to  have  gone  out  of  business.  It  exists 
to-day  only  as  scattered  fragments  with  no 
central  directing  head.  How  much  of  life  force 
remains  in  the  fragments  none  can  say.  My 
own  belief  finds  support  in  the  views  of  many  of 
the  army  officers  in  the  field,  that  enough  life 
is  left  to  keep  the  United  States  interested  for 
some  time  to  come.  Whether  right  or  wrong  in 
the  idea,  I have  felt  that  there  were  many  in  the 
Filipino  army,  and  many  who  were  contributing 
to  the  support  of  that  army,  who  were  imbued 
with  an  idea  of  patriotism.  The  type  may  be 
crude,  the  idea  mistaken,  but  there  was  the  idea, 
and  patriotism  dies  hard  and  kicks  while  it  dies. 


118 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


The  last  list  of  Americans  killed  and  wounded 
may  be  many  a day  distant. 

“ The  same  process  of  dispersion  which  has 
been  effected  in  Panay  and  in  northern  Luzon 
is  projected  for  the  territory  to  the  south  of 
Manila.  It  has  been  in  the  air  for  three  or  four 
weeks  and  will  probably  take  shape  within  the 
next  few  days.  The  result  will  be  a repetition 
of  the  story  of  the  northern  campaign.  Head- 
quarters will  officially  report  movements,  bat- 
tles, glorious  victories  and  jubilant  receptions 
tendered  to  the  Americans.  But  the  battles  will 
be  skirmishes,  the  victories  a conquest  of  the 
weak  by  the  strong,  and  many  a man  who  cries, 
* Yivan  los  Americanos  ! ’ will  do  so  with  his  lips 
only.  Headquarters  may  telegraph  what  it  will  of 
cordiality  and  friendliness  extended  to  the  advan- 
cing American  army.  The  truth  is  that  these 
people  do  not  yet  love  the  Americans,  and  none 
save  the  ultra-optimistic  and  those  who  have  a 
purpose  to  serve  will  say  that  they  do. 

“ One  effect  of  this  wide-spread  movement  in 
the  north  lias  been  the  release,  estimated  to  date, 
of  between  four  and  five  thousand  Spanish  pris- 
oners who  had  been  held  by  the  Filipinos,  For 
two  weeks  Manila  has  been  full  of  them.  Some 
have  gone  on  board  ship  en  route  for  Spain,  but 
more  are  coming  to  take  their  places.  There 
were  probably  twenty-five  hundred  of  them  in 
the  city  some  days  of  last  week.  Many  stories 
have  been  told  during  the  last  few  months  of  the 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


119 


terrible  hardships  endured  by  these  men  during 
their  captivity,  of  suffering,  of  privation  and 
of  cruelty  at  the  hands  of  the  Filipinos.  All  that 
may  be  true,  but  I have  seen  a good  many  thou- 
sands of  Spanish  soldiers  in  Cuba  and  in  Porto 
Rico,  and  I have  seen  none  who  looked  any  bet- 
ter fed,  any  more  physically  sound,  than  these 
same  released  prisoners.  Here  and  there  one 
sees  a sick  man.  Sick  men  are  common  enough, 
Heaven  knows,  in  the  well-fed  American  army. 
Many  of  them  are  dirty  and  ragged.  Even 
among  more  civilized  nations  it  is  not  a common 
custom  to  turn  prisoners  of  war  into  peripatetic 
sign-boards  for  tailoring  establishments.  But 
the  long-drawn-out  complication  concerning 
these  men  is  now  settled.  At  least  two  thirds  of 
those  who  still  survive  are  now  released,  and  the 
rest  soon  will  be.  A Spanish  commission  is  here 
providing  for  their  immediate  support  and  their 
imperative  needs.  Each  man  gets  a big  loaf  of 
bread  every  day,  and  is  at  liberty  to  drink  all  the 
water  he  wants  from  the  city  hydrants.  A por- 
tion of  the  money  due  them  for  military  service 
is  also  paid  them.  Many  are  reclothed,  though 
I do  not  know  at  whose  expense.  The  move- 
ment also  effected  the  release  of  a number  of 
Americans  who  had  been  held  as  prisoners  by 
the  Filipinos.” 

“Manila,  December  1,  1899. 

“ The  necessity  of  paying  some  attention  to 
Thanksgiving  day  in  the  Philippines  has  been 


120 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  occasion  of  one  point  of  discussion,  whether, 
so  far  as  the  Philippines  were  concerned,  the  peo- 
ple of  America  should  celebrate  a day  of  thanks- 
giving, or  one  more  after  the  pattern  of  the  old- 
time  New  England  day  in  April,  set  apart  as  ‘ a 
day  of  fasting,  humiliation  and  prayer.’ 

“ With  the  exception  of  the  newly  arrived  regi- 
ments, whose  outfit  seems  to  consist,  in  about 
equal  parts,  of  military  impedimenta  and  military 
enthusiasm,  I have  not  seen  many  American 
exiles  in  the  Philippines  who  are  in  any  danger 
of  wearing  out  the  knees  of  their  trousers  through 
spending  hours  in  an  attitude  of  reverent  thank- 
fulness. I was  chatting  with  a man  in  the  morn- 
ing. He  hailed  from  Concord,  New  Hampshire. 
‘ Well,’  he  said,  ‘ I thank  the  Lord  that  I ’m  alive. 
I don’t  know  that  there  is  much  else.’  The  talk 
drifted  into  turkey,  mince-pie,  sleighing,  shag- 
barks,  and  empty  chairs  around  the  table,  until 
the  tears  began  to  come  in  the  man’s  eyes,  and  I 
switched  the  talk  into  another  channel.  There 
were  jollity  and  uproariousness  in  the  Philippines 
on  Thanksgiving  day,  but  there  were  also  many 
a wet  eye  and  many  a hungry  heart. 

“ The  day  was  observed,  officially,  by  an  order 
suspending  all  save  necessary  routine  duties  for 
the  troops.  To  many  it  was,  and  could  be,  no 
other  than  an  ordinary  day.  The  whole  north 
line,  numbering  a force  of  some  ten  thousand 
men,  is  little  more  than  one  huge  seouting-party. 
Some  of  the  troops  are  in  quarters  in  towns  and 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


121 


villages;  many  are  out  ‘hunting  niggers’  in 
wild,  rough  country,  tired,  worn  and  footsore. 
There  are  thousands  in  the  reserve  and  field 
hospitals.  Wherever  it  was  possible  the  day  was 
recognized.  Some  dined  on  turkey  and  chickens ; 
some  dined  on  ‘ slum.’  Some,  in  Manila,  drank 
properly  iced  champagne  in  toasts  to  the  dear 
ones  at  home.  Some  out  on  the  line  drank 
ration  coffee  out  of  a tin  cup,  and  had  some 
reason  to  be  thankful  that  they  had  even  that. 

u Among  the  thankful  in  Manila  few  had  more 
reason  for  thankfulness  than  the  many  Spanish 
soldiers  whose  release  from  Filipino  captivity 
has  been  effected  by  the  recent  movements  of 
the  American  army.  Within  the  last  few  days 
these  men  have  been  much  in  evidence  on  Manila 
streets.  In  the  case  of  many,  perhaps  of  most, 
their  appearance  belies  their  stories.  They  are 
full  of  harrowing  tales  of  privation  and  hard- 
ship, but  the  majority  of  them  appear  to  be  rea- 
sonably plump  and  hearty.  Even  had  they  been 
stall-fed,  it  is  hardly  to  be  expected  that  they 
would  entertain  any  very  kind  feeling  for  their 
captors  and  jailers.  Undoubtedly  they  have 
had  no  easy  time,  though  such  suffering  as  they 
have  endured  is  probably  due  rather  to  the  in- 
ability of  the  Filipinos  to  entertain  them  with 
more  than  a pittance,  than  to  any  vicious  or  in- 
human desire  on  the  part  of  the  Filipinos  to 
cause  suffering  among  them.  But  after  months 
of  captivity,  these  men,  having  suffered  much  or 


122 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


little,  have  sure  ground  for  a large  measure  of 
thankfulness  in  their  release  and  the  prospect 
of  an  early  return  to  home  and  friends. 

“ The  causes  of  Filipino  thankfulness  are  less 
evident  and  the  matter  is  more  complex.  Be- 
yond a doubt,  many  of  them  are  not  at  all 
thankful.  Long-cherished  hopes  of  a larger  life 
in  which  their  manhood  should  receive  fuller 
recognition  are  being  shattered  by  a stronger 
power  than  their  own.  They  may  mistake  the 
real  purpose  of  that  power ; that  purpose  may  be 
hidden  from  their  eyes  by  the  mistakes  of  blun- 
dering agents ; but  many  of  those  hopes,  whether 
grounded  in  fact  or  in  fancy,  bear  the  stamp,  at 
least,  of  honesty  and  sincerity.  To-day  those 
hopes  are  broken  and  those  who  held  them  are 
not  thankful. 

“ There  are  Filipinos  who  are  thankful,  not 
that  the  American  army  is  triumphant,  not  that 
the  Stars  and  Stripes  float  over  them  and  offer 
them  vague  and  uncomprehended  promises  of 
peace  and  prosperity,  but  thankful  that  they 
can  see  the  beginning  of  the  end  of  a hopeless 
struggle  of  weak  against  strong.  It  has  been  a 
struggle  in  which  many  took  no  part,  for  the 
outcome  of  which  many  cared  little  or  nothing. 
That  which  the  cheerful  enthusiast  asserts  to  be 
active  friendship  for  the  Americans  is,  in  reality, 
usually  no  more  than  a passive  indifference  to 
the  power  which  rules.  Some  time  ago,  in  an- 
swer to  assertions  that  American  withdrawal 


THE  NOVEMBER  DISPERSION 


123 


from  the  Philippines  would  leave  the  islands  to 
hopeless  destruction  and  bloody  anarchy,  I urged 
my  disbelief  in  any  such  condition.  I contended 
then,  as  I do  to-day,  for  my  belief  that  the  great 
mass  of  the  people— a naturally  peaceable  and 
domestic  people,  too  greatly  lacking  in  mental 
and  physical  energy  to  be  other  than  peaceful — 
wished,  more  than  all  else,  to  live  their  quiet, 
lazy,  home  life,  free  from  strife  and  political 
turmoil.  These  are  more  or  less  thankful  that, 
after  a few  weeks  or  a few  months,  there  will 
come  an  end  to  that  which  has  disturbed  the  life 
they  prefer  to  lead  and  into  which  they  have 
plunged  or  have  been  dragged  by  their  friends 
and  their  kinsfolk. 

“My  personal  state  was  complex.  I pleased 
myself  with  a conviction  that  there  would  be  no 
necessity  for  me  to  stay  here  much  longer  and 
I felt  thankful.  But  I was  not  thankful  for  an 
interference  with  my  immediate  plans.  I have 
made  two  unsuccessful  attempts  to  get  ashore 
on  the  island  of  Mindanao.  I had  arranged 
for  a third  attempt  and  success  was  assured. 
A transport  carrying  the  Thirty-first  Infantry 
was  to  have  sailed  for  that  island  on  Thanks- 
giving day.  I planned  to  go  on  her.  But  the 
ship  ran  into  a fog  of  that  huge  and  omnipotent 
manana  which  affects  the  Philippines  as  it  did 
the  West  Indies,  and  her  sailing  was  postponed. 
I was  obliged  to  return  and  eat  turkey  and 
drink — cold  tea — at  the  Oriente,  for  which  mercy 


124 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


I was  not  thankful.  We  are  to  go  to-morrow— 
or  perhaps  the  day  after.  I hope  to  be  able  to 
offer  my  readers  something  of  interest  about 
that  vast  but  little  known  island.  There  may  be 
a fight  there,  but  there  should  be  none.  If  there 
comes  a conflict,  I believe  it  will  be  chargeable 
to  the  conduct  of  Americans  rather  than  to  the 
actions  of  the  Moro  or  the  Sulu  people.  I am 
only  afraid  of  the  behavior  of  the  American  rank 
and  file.  The  Moros  are  not  a good  people  to 
offend,  and  I shall  be  duly  thankful  if  the  new 
garrisons  on  Mindanao  duplicate  the  experience 
of  the  old  garrisons  in  Jolo.” 


VIII 

INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION 

Disturbed  conditions — Establishing  military  districts— Situa- 
tion in  Manila — A problem  in  the  south— Inaccurate  in- 
formation—The  business  condition— Misleading  statements 
—A  “humane  war”— Early  days  of  1900— Robber  bands 
— An  unsatisfactory  situation — A general  summary — A 
gloomy  outlook. 

IN  the  following  letters  I described  the  ineffec- 
tiveness of  the  dispersion  of  the  northern 
department  of  the  Filipino  army.  At  the  time 
of  their  publication  they  contradicted  much  that 
was  being  said  and  written  about  the  situation. 
To-day  I believe  they  will  find  a more  ready 
acceptance  as  a fairly  accurate  statement.  The 
story  of  this  dispersion  in  the  north,  in  its  pro- 
cesses and  its  results,  is  practically  the  story  of 
the  dispersion,  at  the  beginning  of  1900,  of  the 
army  in  the  south.  Names,  dates  and  commands 
are  changed,  but  the  stories  are  essentially  alike. 

“ Manila,  December  27,  1899. 

“ I have  greatly  wished  that  it  were  possible 
for  me  to  give  my  readers  some  fuller  accounts 

125 


12G 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  descriptions  of  the  Filipino  land  and  the 
Filipino  people.  But  the  ‘ times  are  out  of  joint,’ 
and  one  must  either  offer  an  incomplete  or  a dis- 
torted skeleton.  Nothing  of  importance  is  gained 
by  accompanying  the  troops  on  their  long  ‘hikes’ 
into  the  interior,  and  yet  one  cannot  make  ex- 
cursions without  the  troops. 

“ These  military  expeditions  have  brought,  of 
course,  much  new  and  valuable  information  as 
one  of  their  results.  Most  of  the  information, 
however,  is  distinctly  topographical  and  of  spe- 
cial value  only  for  special  purposes.  It  has  been 
ascertained  that  excellent  roads  are  to  be  found 
for  a considerable  distance  along  the  west  coast, 
and  that  the  passage  across  the  hills,  from  the 
valley  of  the  Rio  Grande  de  Pampanga  to  the 
valley  of  the  Rio  Grande  de  Cagayan,  is  wild, 
rough  and  exceedingly  difficult.  Something, 
too,  has  been  learned  concerning  the  people. 
But  throughout  a large  part  of  the  area  cov- 
ered by  the  American  trooi^s  a great  majority  of 
the  inhabitants  fled  their  villages  and  houses, 
some  in  fear  and  some  in  uncertainty  of  what 
was  in  store  for  them.  Such  conditions  are  un- 
favorable for  the  study  of  humankind  and  vil- 
lage life  in  Luzon. 

“ Comparatively  little  that  was  new  has  been 
learned  regarding  commercial  or  industrial  pos- 
sibilities. It  was  already  known  that  rice-grow- 
ing for  domestic  consumption  is  an  industry 
general  throughout  the  lowlands,  while  a greater 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  TEE  DISPERSION  127 


or  less  quantity  of  upland  rice  is  grown  in  the 
hills.  It  was  known  that  the  finest  tobacco  in 
the  islands  is  grown  in  the  provinces  of  Caga- 
yan and  Isabella,  the  eastern  half  of  the  north- 
erly end  of  Luzon,  with  the  western  provinces  of 
Union  and  Abra  as  second  and  the  central  prov- 
ince of  Nueva  Ecija  as  third  in  the  list  of  to- 
bacco-producing regions.  The  expeditions  of 
Young  and  Bachelder  through  those  districts 
have  brought  no  new  and  important  information 
along  commercial  lines.  The  sugar  and  the  hemp 
districts  have  also  been  knoym ; so  has  the  gen- 
eral location  and  condition  of  the  people.  Little 
of  change  has  occurred  since  the  time  of  the  con- 
ditions described  by  Mr.  Foreman  and  little  more 
is  known  concerning  the  people  than  was  known 
at  that  time. 

“ Special  interest,  of  course,  settles  upon  pres- 
ent conditions  and  the  probabilities  of  the  im- 
mediate future.  I have  already  said,  in  other 
letters,  that  much  of  all  anticipation  of  days  to 
come  is  purely  guesswork.  One  important  step 
has  just  been  taken  in  Luzon.  Two  new  mili- 
tary districts  have  been  created.  Under  the 
existing  state  of  affairs,  and  that  is  what  must 
be  faced,  the  step  is  doubtless  a wise  one.  The 
developments  of  the  situation  through  which  we 
have  blundered  seem  to  make  processes  which 
are  tantamount  to  imperialism  a necessity. 
Having  embittered  and  antagonized  a people,  we 
must,  until  they  can  be  weaned  to  other  views, 


128 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


hold  and  control  them  vi  et  armis.  The  military 
districting  is  well  because  it  is  a step  in  a definite 
system  which  can  be  extended. 

“ The  Sixteenth  United  States  Infantry,  under 
command  of  Colonel  Hood,  has  been  sent  to 
Aparri,  on  the  north  coast.  Colonel  Hood  has 
been  placed  in  charge,  as  military  governor,  of  a 
district  which  includes  the  provinces  of  Cagayan, 
Isabella  and  Nueva  Vizcaya.  This  covers  the 
territory  drained  by  the  Rio  Grande  de  Cagayan, 
one  of  the  richest  and  most  fertile  sections  of 
Luzon.  Garrisons  will  be  placed  at  points  along 
the  river,  at  Tuguegarao,  Ilagan,  Bayambong 
and  some  lesser  points.  Aparri,  the  military 
headquarters  for  the  district,  is  the  gateway  and 
almost  the  only  outlet  to  all  these  miles  of  fertile 
land.  Along  the  eastern  coast  extends  a moun- 
tain range  sloping  sharply  to  the  sea,  with  no 
desirable  or  even  possible  harborage  along  its 
base.  Except  in  the  time  of  floods,  which  make 
its  passage  highly  dangerous,  the  Cagayan  River 
is  navigable  for  cascos  and  native  boats  for 
some  two  hundred  miles.  The  products  of  all 
that  valley  go  down  the  river  for  shipment  from 
Aparri.  Colonel  Hood  is  instructed  to  1 establish 
civil  government  in  the  towns  within  his  com- 
mand’ upon  the  same  general  plan  as  that  pro- 
vided for  the  towns  along  the  railroad,  Malolos, 
Polo,  Calumpit  and  others. 

“ That  is  the  tenor  of  General  Orders  No.  69, 
and  General  Orders  No.  70  is  like  unto  it,  reading 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  129 


as  follows : 1 Brigadier- General  S.  B.  M.  Yonng 
is  appointed  military  governor  of  the  provinces 
of  northwestern  Luzon,  to  wit : those  of  Abra, 
Bontoc,  Benguet,  Lepanto,  Ilocos  North,  Ilocos 
South,  and  Union,  with  headquarters  at  Yigan. 
The  troops  at  his  disposal  will  consist  of  the 
Third  Cavalry  and  the  Thirty-third  Volunteer 
Infantry.  All  others  in  that  section  of  country 
will  be  sent  to  Dagupan  for  disposition  under 
orders  from  these  headquarters. 

“ ‘ Permanent  stations  will  be  established  at 
San  Fernando  (de  la  Union),  Yigan  and  Laoag, 
with  such  outposts  and  subposts  as  may  be 
necessary  for  the  protection  of  the  inhabitants 
and  the  administration  of  public  affairs. 

“ ‘ General  Young  will  establish  civil  govern- 
ments in  the  various  towns  within  the  limits  of 
his  command  in  accordance  with  General  Orders 
No.  43  of  August  8 last,  from  the  headquarters  of 
the  department  and  corps.  He  will  establish, 
through  the  appointment  of  officers  and  details 
of  assistants,  the  customs  and  internal-revenue 
offices  necessary  for  public  administration,  which 
will  be  conducted  as  prescribed  in  general  orders 
issued  from  this  office  and  the  specific  regula- 
tions issued  from  the  customs  and  internal-rev- 
enue offices  at  Manila. 

Customs  officers  will  be  appointed  for  the 
coast  towns  of  Laoag,  Yigan  and  San  Fernando, 
and  internal-revenue  officers  for  the  more  im- 
portant coast  and  interior  towns.  Those  ap- 


130 


TEE  PHILIPPINES 


pointed  for  customs  duties  can  also  perform  the 
duties  of  internal-revenue  officers  at  their 
respective  stations. 

“ ‘ The  chief  officers  of  customs  and  internal 
revenue  at  Manila  will  transmit  immediately  to 
the  headquarters  of  General  Young,  for  the  gui- 
dance of  officers  whom  he  may  appoint  to  the 
positions  indicated,  letters  of  instruction,  circu- 
lars and  orders  relating  to  their  respective 
departments,  and  which  may  be  necessary  for 
these  appointees  to  acquaint  themselves  with 
a knowledge  of  their  respective  duties. 

“ 1 It  is  desired  that  speedy  arrangements  he 
made  that  the  ports  of  Laoag,  Yigan  and  San 
Fernando  may  he  opened  for  the  coasting  trade 
hy  January  1 next. 

“ ‘ By  order  of  Major-General  Otis. 

“ ‘ Thomas  H.  Barry, 
Assistant  Adjutant- Genera V 

“ This  provides  for  the  military  districting  of 
some  two  fifths  of  the  island  of  Luzon,  including 
as  it  does  all  the  country  down  to  a line  drawn 
eastward  from  the  head  of  Lin  gay  en  Gulf.  Be- 
tween that  line  and  Manila  there  are  seven  prov- 
inces— Pangasinan,  Zamhales,  Tarlak,  Nueva 
Eeija,  Pampanga,  Bulacan  and  Bataan— which 
are  now  in  American  hands.  The  provinces  of 
Principe  and  Infanta,  on  the  east  coast,  have  not 
yet  heen  entered  by  American  troops.  Such 
points  as  have  heen  held  in  Morong  province 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  TEE  DISPERSION  131 


have  all  been  abandoned  and  we  now  have  no 
troops  in  that  district.  These  bring  a line  down 
to  the  parallel  of  Manila.  In  this  region  between 
the  parallel  of  Manila  and  that  of  the  head  of 
Lingayen  Gulfjj  American  occupation  does  not 
necessarily  mean  peace  and  American  control. 
The  same  is  the  case  in  the  northern  districts. 
‘ Scrapping’  goes  on  almost  continually.  Five 
petty  engagements  are  reported  as  having 
occurred  yesterday.  The  only  real  difference 
which  exists  between  these  and  the  4 battles  ’ of 
former  days  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  other  fellows 
are  now  officially  styled  ‘ bandits  ’ and  ‘ robbers  ’ 
instead  of  ‘ insurgents  ’ and  1 rebels.’  They  used 
to  be  Tweedledum  and  now  they  are  Tweedledee. 

“ Manila,  from  which,  according  to  the  report 
of  the  commission,  4 all  danger  of  an  uprising 
had  long  since  passed  away’;  Manila,  where, 
according  to  the  report  of  the  commission,  peace, 
law  and  order  dwell  and  reign  supreme ; Manila, 
the  city  of  great  commercial  activity  according 
to  the  commission,  has  received  an  addition  to 
her  force  of  protection  and  defense.  Ten  com- 
panies of  the  Fourteenth  Infantry  have  been 
brought  in  from  their  post  at  Bakoor  and  added 
to  the  strength  of  the  provost  guard;  so,  too, 
have  two  batteries  of  artillery  recently  brought 
from  Honolulu.  Colonel  Williston,  provost  mar- 
shal-general, believes  that  the  disintegration  of 
the  Filipino  army  in  the  north  is  likely  to  send 
into  the  city  a large  number  of  those  who  were 


132 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


formerly  ‘ insurgents,’  but  who  are  now  ‘ bandits  ’ 
and  ‘robbers.’  He  regards  their  presence  as  a 
menace  and  has  asked  an  addition  to  the  forces 
under  his  command. 

“ Thus  the  greater  part  of  Luzon  north  of 
Manila  has  had  a sort  of  tentative  clearing  up. 
It  is  not  entirely  clear  and  the  days  of  recon- 
struction will  be  punctured  with  more  or  less 
minor  eruptions.  An  unsolved  problem  lies  in 
the  country  southward  of  the  city.  I have  ex- 
pressed disbelief  of  any  further  massed  or  well- 
organized  resistance  on  the  part  of  the  Filipinos ; 
but  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  possibilities  in 
Cavite  province  are  such  as  to  warrant  some 
idea  of  a fight  that  will  go  beyond  anything  seen 
in  the  islands  since  the  opening  days  of  the  con- 
flict last  February.  It  will  probably  have  been 
determined  before  this  can  appear.  I am  more 
inclined  to  look  for  a continuance  of  the  same 
tactics  employed  in  the  north— a brief  resistance 
and  a scattering,  lightning  change  from  the 
fighting  insurrecto  into  the  peaceful  amigo , 
reorganization  into  guerrilla  bands,  and  annoy- 
ance whenever  it  becomes  possible.  This  guer- 
rilla annoyance  is  likely  to  prove  more  active 
and  more  serious  in  Cavite  province  than  else- 
where in  the  islands.  What  Santiago  province 
was  to  Cuba,  Cavite  province  has  been  and  is 
to  Luzon— the  seat  of  many  insurrections.  The 
Spaniards  were  never  able  to  stamp  out  the 
resistance  to  their  authority.  An  officer,  who 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  133 


probably  knows  more  of  the  situation  there 
than  does  any  other  American,  said  to  me 
recently : 1 Every  man  out  there  is  an  insurgent, 
and  they  are  fighting  for  liberty.’  The  condi- 
tions of  the  country  are  most  favorable  for 
guerrilla  warfare.  It  is  a region  of  hills,  swamps, 
bamboo  jungles  and  steep-banked  creeks. 
Whether  or  not  there  be  enough  of  a fight  there 
to  warrant  the  description  of  it  as  a ‘battle,’ 
Cavite  province  is  quite  sure  to  be  the  scene  of 
a prolonged  and  active  trouble. 

“ Beyond  that  region  lies  the  long  strip  of 
little-known  and  wholly  unessayed  country 
stretching  away  to  the  southeast.  The  mass  of 
the  people  there  can  hardly  feel  very  kindly 
toward  the  Americans.  The  district  includes 
the  finest  hemp  country  in  the  islands,  and  the 
American  blockade  has  paralyzed  their  industry. 
But,  unless  the  area  be  made  a retreat  by  the 
fighting  insurgents,  comparatively  little  resis- 
tance may  be  expected. 

“Much  of  the  country  is  in  a disturbed  and 
uncertain  state.  There  is  almost  no  part  of 
Luzon  through  which  an  American  can  travel 
in  safety  without  a military  escort.  I am  aware 
that  such  a statement  does  not  harmonize  with 
the  trend  of  the  report  of  the  commission, 
which  seems  to  be  accepted  as  a statement  of 
facts  from  which  there  is  no  appeal.  Out  here, 
I have  yet  to  meet  a man  who  has  been  here  for 
any  length  of  time,  in  the  army  or  the  navy,  a 


134 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


news-correspondent  or  a merchant,  who  regards 
that  report  as  either  competent  or  accurate,  or 
even  a fair  statement  of  the  situation.  At  any 
rate,  it  is  not  a good  time  to  study  either  the 
country  or  its  people,  and  there  is  little  to  be 
said  or  learned  which  wTould  be  of  permanent 
value  in  a consideration  of  our  new  citizens.” 

“Manila,  December  29,  1899. 

“ One  of  the — to  me — astonishing  things  in 
the  Philippines  is  the  arrival  here  of  intelligent 
men,  who,  after  a few  days’  stay,  confess  to  find- 
ing a state  of  things  which  is  in  no  way  in  accord 
with  their  preconceived  ideas.  Within  the  last 
eighteen  months,  acres  of  matter  have  been 
written  and  printed  describing  the  Philippine 
Islands  and  the  conditions  existing  in  them. 
The  principal  result  would  seem  to  be  either 
confusion  or  error. 

“Naturally  there  are  many  views.  No  two 
men  see  a country  or  a condition  from  precisely 
the  same  standpoint ; individual  temperament 
enters  as  a factor.  No  one  man  is  or  can  be 
absolutely  right;  probably  few  are  absolutely 
wrong.  Each  tells  wdiat  he  sees  as  he  sees  it. 
Few  have  trained  or  developed  powers  of  obser- 
vation, and  still  fewrer  have  the  faculty  of  intel- 
ligibly describing  the  things  they  see.  None, 
unless  it  be  their  editors,  realize  this  more  fully 
than  news-men  and  correspondents.  They  are 
often  dependent  upon  others  for  their  stories  of 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  135 

happenings  and  are  sought  by  hundreds  who 
think  they  have  a story  to  tell  of  something 
which  they  have  seen  or  done,  but  whose 
obliquity  of  vision  is  often  remarkable. 

“Not  long  since,  an  army  officer  brought  me 
a story  that  he  had  written  and  which  he 
wished  to  have  accepted  by  some  magazine.  It 
described  things  in  the  midst  of  which  he  had 
lived  for  six  months.  He  described  the  boats 
used  by  people  in  a certain  portion  of  the  Philip- 
pines. He  spoke  of  them  as  crude  and  clumsy 
dugouts,  hollowed  from  logs.  A few  of  them 
are  such,  but  nine  tenths  of  the  boats  of  that 
vicinity  are  the  lightest,  most  graceful  things 
imaginable;  they  are  often  beautifully  carved. 
The  huge,  clumsy  dugouts  had  caught  his  atten- 
tion ; the  others,  though  there  were  infinitely 
more  of  them,  he  had  not  noticed.  He  spoke  of 
the  women  of  a certain  tribe  as  wearing  a loose 
jacket.  In  buying  costumes,  male  and  female, 
of  those  people,  the  only  thing  I could  not  get 
was  a woman’s  jacket;  this  was  because  each 
one  was  made  for  the  woman  who  wore  it  and 
was  made  skin-tight. 

“Not  only  are  the  observant  and  descriptive 
faculties  lacking  or  undeveloped  in  most  men ; 
the  deductive  and  analytical  are  almost  equally 
so.  People  come  here  and  are  amazed  at  the 
business  condition.  They  have  read  and  heard 
that  business  in  Manila  was  active  and  promis- 
ing endlessly.  The  commission,  or  rather  two 


136 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


fifths  of  it,  reported  it  to  be  so  when  they  left. 
Exploiters  arrive  to  find  it  stagnant  and  un- 
healthy, dependent  wholly  upon  the  abnormal 
and  temporary  conditions  of  military  occupa- 
tion. The  reports  upon  which  they  had  re- 
lied were  drawn  by  men  of  incompetent  deduc- 
tive and  analytical  powers.  A multiplicity  of 
small  shops,  a crowd  of  shoppers  and  a throng 
upon  the  streets  are  mistaken  for  commercial 
activity.  There  is  physical  activity  in  it,  and, 
to  some  extent,  there  is  financial  activity,  but  it 
' is  superficial  and  dependent  upon  unstable  con- 
ditions. Ask  those  who  are  here  for  business 
purposes.  They  will  say  that  trade  is  purely 
local,  the  country  is  not  open  and  it  will  be 
some  time  yet  before  normal  conditions  of 
country  trade  will  be  restored.  They  dare  not 
buy  for  import  because  of  the  vagueness  and 
uncertainty  of  the  cost  of  goods  laid  down  here. 
Tariffs,  taxes,  freights,  exchange,  are  all  factors 
and  are  yet  indeterminate.  A few  are  here  who 
are  making  some  money ; they  import  beer  for 
American  consumption. 

“ Men  and  officers  of  newly  arriving  regiments 
get  here  to  find  that  most  of  their  dreams  of 
glorious  war  and  triumphant  victory  look  much 
bigger  under  a quarter  of  a column  of  ‘spread 
head’  than  they  do  in  the  island  of  Luzon. 
They  find  that  most  of  their  work  is  monotonous 
and  dreary  garrison  duty,  with  perhaps  an  occa- 
sional 1 hike  ’ which  has  far  more  to  offer  in  the 
way  of  mud  and  perspiration  than  it  has  in  the 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  137 


way  of  glory  or  distinction,  or  even  excitement. 
In  spite  of  all  that  has  been  written,  many  are 
rather  surprised  to  find  that  the  enemy  is  still 
within  fifteen  miles  of  Manila.  They  have  read 
of  long  marches  into  the  far-away  interior  and 
have  lost  sight  of  the  fact  that  Mr.  Filipino  is 
still  in  very  considerable  force  sitting  on  the 
side-door  steps  and  the  back  fence. 

“ More  or  less  of  these  mistaken  views  are 
comparatively  simple  of  explanation.  They  are 
due  to  facts  of  omission  and  to  sins  of  com- 
mission. The  competent  observers  who  are 
writing  regularly  and  exhaustively  are  few  in 
number.  The  news-men  and  the  official  reports 
send  in  their  records  of  events  and  incidents; 
but  their  functions  are  limited  to  those  pro- 
cesses. Such  records  are  not,  and  are  not  in- 
tended to  be,  explanatory  or  comprehensive; 
that  department  is  left  to  the  mail-correspon- 
dents, whose  work  appears  in  the  particular 
papers  for  which  they  write  and  only  reaches  a 
wider  circulation  through  the  copying  of  excerpts 
by  exchanges.  Of  such  men  there  is  but  a lim- 
ited number  here.  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico  had 
many  1 special  correspondents,’  some  trained  and 
competent,  and  many  who  were  far  from  be- 
ing so.  But  cheap  men  could  be  placed  there 
cheaply  on  transports  and  many  were  sent  out. 
The  Philippines  are  another  matter  and  the 
‘ specials  ’ who  really  come  under  that  category 
are  few  in  number. 

“ Aside  from  these  there  is  what  might  be 


138 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


styled  a semi-official  class,  having  a semi-official 
status  in  the  office  of  one  or  more  papers,  and  a 
third  class,  which  consists  of  men,  soldiers  or 
civilians,  who  were  coming  out  here  and  who 
have  been  requested  by  editors  to  send  back 
an  occasional  letter.  The  third  class  probably 
is  the  most  numerous  and  finds  a wide  circle  of 
readers.  The  misfortune  is  that  their  work  is 
often  quite  unreliable  through  their  lack  of 
opportunity  for  observation  and  their  untrained 
perceptions.  Of  this  group  is  the  soldier-corre- 
spondent. There  are  exceptions,  of  course,  in 
this  group,  but  they  are  few. 

“ I say  that  I am  astonished  at  the  ignorance 
and  inaccuracy  of  idea  on  the  part  of  many  who 
come  out  here.  When  I look  over  a good  deal 
of  the  printed  matter  that  comes  back  here  I 
sometimes  wonder  that  people  know  as  much 
as  they  do,  and  that  they  are  not  even  further 
from  the  truth  than  they  are.  Even  those  who 
presumably  speak  with  authority  do  their  share 
of  misleading.  Let  me  quote  a bit  and  analyze 
upon  the  subject  of  a question  which  is  often 
asked.  In  a speech  made  in  Chicago  on  No- 
vember 15,  Professor  Dean  C.  Worcester  made 
the  following  statement : 

“ ‘ I hear  it  said,  if  only  a small  fraction  of 
the  Philippine  population  is  in  arms  against  us 
and  if  the  great  majority  of  the  people  are  ready 
to  accept  American  sovereignty,  why  is  it  that 
we  are  compelled  to  send  a great  army  to  the  isl- 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  TEE  DISPERSION  139 


ands  ? I answer,  first,  because  we  are  waging  the 
most  humane  war  in  history.  If  it  were  simply 
a matter  of  killing,  we  should  not  need  so  large 
an  army.  Two  regiments  of  troops  could  go 
where  they  chose  in  the  island  of  Luzon  to-day 
and  kill  to  their  heart’s  content  without  serious 
risk.  It  is  because  'we  are  attempting  to  pro- 
tect the  peaceable  inhabitants  from  the  depre- 
dations of  the  lawless  that  we  require  so  large 
a force.’ 

“ It  is  true  that  ‘ only  a small  fraction  of  the 
Philippine  population  is  in  arms  against  us,’ 
but  the  statement  is  wholly  misleading.  The 
numerical  strength  of  the  Filipino  army  is  not 
accurately  known,  and  cannot  be  determined, 
because  many  of  their  fighters  are  not  enrolled 
as  soldiers.  They  are  the  peasants  who  wield  a 
hoe  in  the  rice-fields  to-day  and  use  a gun  or  a 
bolo  on  the  figliting-field  to-morrow.  The 
actual  Filipino  fighting  force  is  greatly  beyond 
the  variously  estimated  armed  soldiery.  The 
estimates  vary  from  thirty  to  sixty  thousand 
men,  some  armed  with  guns  and  some  with 
bolos.  Assuming  even  the  maximum  as  the 
true  estimate,  it  is  but  ‘ a small  fraction  of  the 
population.’  So  is  the  United  States  sending  a 
small  army  against  them;  sixty-five  thousand  is 
but  a ‘ small  fraction  ’ of  seventy-five  million. 
But  we  do  not  hear  much  about  ‘our  small 
army  in  the  Philippines.’  One  usually  sees 
it  alluded  to  as  a ‘ large  army.’  Professor 


140 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Worcester  may  say  that  the  Filipino  army  never 
reached  the  figures  given  above.  For  our  mili- 
tary credit  we  would  best  make  that  army  as 
big  as  possible — on  paper. 

“ He  says,  and  it  is  an  official  assertion  which 
he  is  quoting,— his  own,  I believe:  ‘The  great 
majority  of  the  people  are  ready  to  accept 
American  sovereignty.’  I note  that  he  uses  the 
term  ‘ American  sovereignty.’  Are  these  people 
quite  so  ready  to  accept?  Are  they  not  rather 
resigned?  The  officers  who  are  out  in  the 
field  and  in  garrisons  in  towns,  the  soldiers  who 
are  on  outposts,  those  who  come  most  closely 
in  contact  with  these  readily  acquiescent  people 
tell  a different  story.  These  people  do  not  love 
the  Americans,  do  not  welcome  them.  A few, 
a very  small  fraction  may  accept  the  American 
authority  from  reasoning  or  from  selfishly  politic 
motives.  The  majority  have  been  antagonized 
and  embittered.  We  are  decidedly  unwelcome 
to  the  most  powerful  influence  here,  the  brother- 
hoods of  the  church. 

“He  says  again,  ‘We  are  waging  the  most 
humane  war  in  history.’  That  humane  war  has 
already  cost  us  one  full  regiment  of  American 
soldiers  killed  and  dead  from  wounds  and  dis- 
ease, and  fully  three  regiments  of  men  maimed, 
crippled,  diseased  and  broken  down.  Thou- 
sands of  Filipinos  have  fallen— not  as  many  as 
the  official  reports  indicate,  but  still  thousands. 
A war  that  kills  five  thousand  men  on  both 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  141 


sides,  maims,  cripples  and  breaks  down  ten 
thousand  and  causes  endless  misery  to  countless 
thousands  more,  is  a curious  variety  of  humane 
war.  If  it  really  be  humane  war,  one  might  say, 
a la  Mr.  Dooley,  ‘ Abase  humane  war ! ’ 

“ Again,  1 two  regiments  of  troops  could  go,’ 
etc.  For  the  last  three  days  twenty-five  hun- 
dred American  soldiers  under  command  of 
Colonel  Lockett  have  been  operating  within 
twenty-five  miles  of  Manila,  just  beyond  San 
Mateo,  where  General  Lawton  was  killed.  They 
are  not  killing  ‘to  their  heart’s  desire,’  nor  can 
they  do  so.  Probably  there  is  no  1 serious  risk  ’ 
in  an  engagement,  of  about  equal  numbers,  in 
which  an  American  major-general  is  killed  and 
a casualty  list  of  a score  is  reported.  If  Pro- 
fessor Worcester  holds  to  his  idea,  he  might 
come  back  here  and  take  a little  trip,  just  for 
rest  and  recreation,  attended  by  two  regiments, 
down  through  the  provinces  of  Cavite  and  Ba- 
tangas.  If  only  two  regiments  are  sent  on  that 
expedition,  I do  not  think  I shall  go  with  it.  I 
have  an  average  nerve,  perhaps,  but  that  ‘ hike  ’ 
will  be  a more  ‘ serious  risk  ’ than  I want  to  take 
with  the  professor’s  ‘ two  regiments.’  I notice 
that  it  took  a three-column  movement  to  break 
up  the  Tarlak  business.  Any  one  caring  to  look 
over  the  reports  of  the  operations  will  find  the 
regimental  numbers  of  some  fourteen  different 
regiments  given  as  taking  part  in  it.  The  fight- 
ing was  going  on  at  the  very  time  that  Professor 


142 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Worcester  was  talking— and  there  were  more 
than  two  regiments  in  it. 

“ The  professor  fails  again  and  again  in  his 
logic.  His  argument  really  is  that  three  thousand 
troops  can  suppress  the  insurrection,  but  it  will 
take  sixty-two  thousand  to  police  the  island. 
That  is  not  the  view  which  the  military  author- 
ities have  had  of  it  for  the  last  nine  months. 
If  it  is,  then  our  troops  have  been  mishandled 
and  frightfully  wasted. 

“ Some  day  the  American  people  will  get  a 
full  and  clear  perception  of  the  Philippine 
Islands  and  their  people,  and  will  know  and 
understand  all  that  has  been  done  here.  I can 
only  think,  from  the  attitude  of  many  of  the 
later  arrivals  and  from  their  own  acknowledg- 
ments, that  much  is  still  unknown  and  much 
more  is  inaccurately  known.  I have  no  wish  to 
be  personal,  but  Professor  Worcester’s  argument 
is  too  palpably  weak  and  too  fair  a specimen  of 
much  of  that  kind  of  thing  for  one  to  hesitate 
in  using  it  as  an  illustration.” 


“ Manila,  January  8,  1900. 

“ Those  who  assume  that  the  disintegration 
of  the  Filipino  army  and  the  disorganization  of 
the  Filipino  government  are  an  immediate  pre- 
lude to  an  era  of  peace  and  prosperity  are  quite 
sure  to  find  their  ideas  disputed  by  facts.  I 
have  no  wish  to  stand  as  a prophet  of  ill  omen, 
as  a painter  of  troubles  to  come,  but  there  is 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  143 


mncli  in  tlie  immediate  future  of  the  Philippine 
Islands  which  it  will  be  well  for  thoughtful 
Americans  to  understand.  Rightly  or  wrongly, 
wisely  or  unwisely,  the  United  States  seems  to 
be  here  to  stay,  and  in  the  hands  of  the  Ameri- 
can people  lies  the  future  of  the  island  peo- 
ple. From  much  that  I see  and  hear,  I can 
only  believe  that,  blinded  by  many  motives  pa- 
rading under  different  names,  the  people  of 
America  fail  to  realize  the  grave  responsibility 
that  rests  upon  them  and  have  little  clear 
knowledge  of  many  momentous  questions  that 
confront  them. 

“ Hostilities  are  not  yet  over.  There  remains 
a considerable  territory  which  has  not  been 
essayed,  and,  despite  the  assertions  officially 
made,  I have  little  doubt  that  the  next  two  or 
three  months  will  duplicate  the  last  two  or  three. 
For  political  reasons  it  has  been  desirable  to 
announce  the  end  of  the  ‘ war.’  I have  already 
indulged  in  the  rash  statement  that  the  ‘ war  ’ 
ended  months  ago.  Stress  is  laid  upon  the  dis- 
solution of  the  organized  government  and  vari- 
ous American  officials  are  casting  such  reflections 
as  they  can  upon  the  ability  and  the  honesty  of 
the  man  Aguinaldo.  It  has  been  asserted  that 
when  he  got  into  the  northern  provinces  he 
would  be  among  a people  who  were  hostile  to 
him  and  who  would  aid  in  his  capture,  if  they 
did  not  kill  him  themselves.  This  has  not 
proved  to  be  the  case  and  Aguinaldo,  wherever 


144 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


lie  may  be  to-day,  appears  from  th^  best  military 
evidence  obtainable  to  have  made  liis  way  in 
safety  through  a considerable  territory  and  per- 
haps even  through  the  American  lines.  One 
thing  is  certain : he  is  still  the  idol  of  thousands 
of  Filipino  people. 

“ One  fact  is  to  be  kept  clearly  in  mind.  We 
have  to  deal  with  a people  who  have  been 
antagonized,  and  who,  though  many  may  seem 
to  submit,  are  by  no  means  reconciled.  The 
idea  so  strongly  emphasized,  which  has  wide 
circulation, — that  we  were  opposed  by  only  a 
single  tribe  and  but  a part  of  that, — should  now 
be  well  understood  as  a fallacy.  Sixty  or  sev- 
enty thousand  men  are  not  needed  to  crush  a 
small  local  revolt.  The  idea,  so  boldly  but  illogi- 
cally  advanced  by  Professor  W orcester,  that  the 
troops  are  needed  only.for  the  protection  of  those 
who  are  friendly  to  us  against  hordes  of  robber 
bands,  bears  its  own  refutation  in  its  manifest 
absurdity.  It  is  quite  certain  that  the  savage 
tribes  of  the  hills  have  taken  little  or  no  part  in 
any  of  the  operations  of  the  ‘war’  and  that  it  is 
not  they  who  constitute  these  alleged  ‘bandits’ 
and  ‘ robber  bands.’ 

“ There  is  and  has  long  been  here,  as  there 
was  in  Cuba,  a somewhat  numerous  criminal 
class.  They  are  here  known  as  ladrones , tiili- 
sanes  and  babaylanes.  But  these  are  not  names 
of  savage  tribes,  nor  do  they  commonly  ap- 
ply to  members  of  those  tribes.  Professor 


IXEFFICIEXC  Y OF  THE  DIFFER  SI  OX  145 


Worcester’s  statement  would  warrant  a belief 
that  the  population  of  the  islands  consisted  of  a 
few  little-known  savages,  a few  peaceful  Fili- 
pinos who  were  friendly  to  the  American  peo- 
ple, and  a great  horde  of  the  criminal  element 
for  the  restraint  of  which  a force  of  sixty  thou- 
sand American  soldiers  was  a necessity.  In  his 
book  on  the  islands  he  several  times  mentions 
the  tulisanes  of  Negros  and  Mindoro.  In  what 
I believe  is  his  only  reference  to  these  people 
in  Luzon,  he  makes  this  statement  (page  457) : 
‘ Tulisanes  seldom  go  where  there  is  any  danger 
of  getting  hurt.’  Yet  we  are  now  asked  to  believe 
that  the  opposition  to  the  United  States  con- 
sists of  a huge  aggregation  of  cowardly  criminals 
and  ex-criminals,  and  that  sixty  thousand  men 
are  necessary  to  resist  them  and  protect  the 
peaceable. 

“ The  reason  for  this  presentation  of  the 
situation  I do  not  know.  I can  only  infer  that 
it  is  political  and  that  an  effort  is  being  made 
to  hide  the  blunders  of  the  administration  and 
its  agents  under  a condition  which  will  not 
be  analyzed  by  casual  readers  and  superficial 
thinkers.  But  ‘ bandits  ’ do  not  live  in  villages, 
nor  do  ‘ bandits  ’ and  ‘ robbers  ’ go  about  in  bands 
numbering  hundreds,  building  intrenchments 
and  using  artillery.  Names  make  little  differ- 
ence, perhaps,  but  if  names  be  used  as  a cloak 
for  the  purpose  of  diverting  public  attention 
and  for  conveying  a wrong  impression,  it  should 


146 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


be  announced  that  the  name  is  but  a title  given 
to  a certain  thing,  and  the  thing  itself  clearly 
defined. 

“ Some  two  or  three  months  ago  I predicted 
that  there  would  be  no  definite  surrender  of  the 
Filipino  army,  that  it  was  probable  that  there 
would  be  no  further  organized  resistance,  and 
that  little  more  would  be  heard,  officially,  of 
‘ rebels,’  or  1 insurgents,’  or  ‘ insurrectos.’  Thus 
far  my  predictions  have  been  verified,  though 
there  is  just  now  a possibility  that  some  more 
or  less  serious  resistance  will  be  encountered  in 
the  movement  now  beginning  on  the  south  line. 
Presumably,  everything  is  quiet  in  the  north. 
That  is  the  fact— with  limitations.  Things  are 
quiet  within  our  lines  by  reason  of  a strong 
force  to  make  and  keep  them  so.  Outside  those 
lines  it  is  not  easy  to  report  the  condition.  It 
is,  however,  certain  that  our  scouting-parties 
are  in  almost  constant  movement  and  that 
many  petty  engagements  occur  which  are  not 
of  sufficient  importance,  in  themselves,  to  be 
worth  reporting.  The  ‘ quiet  ’ of  that  country 
is  one  of  alert  watchfulness,  numerous  expedi- 
tions and  frequent  encounters.  Reports  come, 
too  frequently,  of  American  soldiers,  operating 
in  small  squads,  losing  one  or  more  of  their 
number ; of  attacks  on  supply-trains ; of  individ- 
ual soldiers,  on  duty  or  straggling  through  the 
country,  being  caught  and  sometimes  killed. 
Many  of  the  people  throughout  that  region  are 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  147 

undoubtedly  returning  to  their  homes  and  their 
industries;  but  it  does  not  surely  follow  that 
they  are  doing  so  permanently  or  contentedly, 
or  that  they  are  not  part  and  parcel  of  the  fre- 
quent local  attacks,  where  such  attacks  can  be 
safely  made.  In  these  little  attacks  the  Ameri- 
cans are  not  always  successful.  They  are  some- 
times overpowered  by  numbers  and  forced  to 
fall  back  with  losses. 

“ It  is  somewhat  curious  that  so  much  of  the 
country  in  which  the  ‘ war  ’ is  ended  and  the 
organized  government  destroyed  should  be  call- 
ing for  additional  troops,  or  that  commanding 
officers  should  regard  their  commands  as  of 
insufficient  strength  for  the  work  they  have  to 
do.  Thus  both  General  Young  and  Colonel 
Hood,  recently  appointed  as  military  governors 
of  extensive  districts,  may  be  able  to  garrison 
some  of  their  towns  and  cities,  but  who  is  to 
protect  the  peaceful  agriculturists  against  the 
devastating  ‘robber  bands’?  Even  the  now 
pacified  Panay,  and  Negros  with  its  1 smoothly 
working  civil  government,’  required  a new  regi- 
ment a few  days  ago,  and  the  Forty-fourth  was 
sent  down.  That  gives  to  the  now  peaceful 
islands  of  Panay,  Negros  and  Cebu  a garrison 
of  five  regiments,  the  Sixth,  Eighteenth,  Nine- 
teenth, Twenty-sixth  and  Forty-fourth,  and  one 
battalion  of  the  Twenty-third.  The  area  of 
their  occupation  is  somewhat  less  than  that  of 
the  combined  districts  of  General  Young  and 


148 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


Colonel  Hood.  Hood  has  the  Sixteenth  and 
Young  has  the  Thirty-third  and  Third  Cavalry. 
Negros  is  a very  peaceful  island  under  its  new 
American  government,  but  there  are  ‘bandits’ 
enough  there  to  make  a fair  number  of  troops  a 
necessity  and  to  be  able  to  make  a little  row 
every  now  and  then. 

“ The  commercial  situation  is  unsatisfactory 
to  the  merchants  and  the  church  situation  is 
unsatisfactory  to  the  people.  This  is  all  a dole- 
ful picture,  but  it  is  far  nearer  to  being  an 
accurate  one  than  the  official  reports  of  ‘all 
serene.’  I meet  few  here  who  do  not  look  for 
a continuance  of  hostilities.  I do  not  say  of 
‘ war.’  War  died  long  ago.  Hostility  lives  and 
will  live  until  the  United  States  shall  demon- 
strate their  purpose  to  give  these  people  that 
which  they  now  withhold.  Where  is  the 
promised  relief  from  oppression,  that  release 
from  exaction,  that  dismissal  of  obnoxious  mo- 
nastic orders,  those  concessions  demanded  from 
Spain  by  the  Filipinos  in  July,  1897,  and  for 
which  they  were  then  fighting  and  have  been 
fighting  since?  In  what  has  the  United  States 
bettered  their  condition  and  what  has  the 
United  States  given  to  them  save  those  promises 
that  Spain  had  given  to  them?  Spanish  laws, 
Spanish  tariffs,  the  obnoxious  friars,  are  all  con- 
tinued and  the  Filipino  regards  the  American 
as  the  successor  of  Spain. 

“ The  future  hangs  on  that  too  long  delayed 


INEFFICIENCY  OF  THE  DISPERSION  149 


action  of  Congress.  Months,  probably  years, 
will  elapse,  and  a new  order  must  arise  before 
there  will  be  eradicated  from  the  Filipino  mind 
the  idea  that  the  American  is  no  more  his  friend 
than  was  the  Spaniard.  Until  that  shall  be 
done,  America  may  look  to  the  necessity  of  a 
large  military  force  in  the  islands,  continued 
disturbance  and  a repetition  of  the  experiences 
of  Spain. 

“ Much  has  been  said  and  written  by  ‘ patriots  ’ 
and  ‘great  Americans’  about  the  necessity  of 
thrashing  these  people  for  the  purpose  of  divert- 
ing the  ridicule  of  other  nations,  of  vindicating 
the  honor  of  the  flag  and  of  demonstrating  the 
valor  of  American  soldiers.  Does  it  not  seem 
as  if  those  points  had  been  sufficiently  well  cov- 
ered so  that  America  could  afford  to  be  just  and 
generous  toward  its  opponents,  the  little  brown 
men  of  Luzon  ? ” 


IX 

PROGRESS  OF  THE  WAR 

Occupation  of  Luzon — Extent  of  American  influence— 
Apathy  of  the  ignorant  peasantry— Professional  criminals 
—Misguided  patriots  — Dangers  of  travel  — Diplomatic 
policy  advisable— Unthinking  optimism  dangerous. 

MY  departure  for  South  Africa,  soon  after 
February  1,  1900,  ended  my  work  in  the 
Philippines.  During  my  stay  in  the  Transvaal, 
I heard  no  word  of  the  developments  in  the 
Philippines.  While  in  Hongkong,  en  route  to 
South  Africa,  I sent  back  a letter  from  which  I 
extract  the  following.  On  returning  to  the 
United  States  in  September,  and  reviewing  the 
records  of  our  experiences  in  the  Philippines 
subsequent  to  my  leaving  them,  I was,  more 
than  by  all  else,  impressed  by  the  fact  that  so 
many  of  my  letters  might  have  been  written, 
with  almost  equal  appropriateness,  at  any  time 
within  those  months.  This  letter  might  have 
been  written  on  September  12  just  as  well  as 
on  February  12 : 


150 


PROGRESS  OF  THE  WAR 


151 


“ Hongkong,  February  12,  1900. 

“With  the  exception  of  the  southern  half  of 
the  eastern  coast  and  the  central  strip  of  the 
southeastern  peninsula,  the  island  of  Luzon  is 
now  nominally  occupied  by  the  American  forces. 
I say  1 nominally  occupied,’  because  a considera- 
ble area,  particularly  the  northern,  is  but  thinly 
garrisoned  and,  so  far  as  I can  learn,  American 
influence  extends  only  about  as  far  as  a Krag 
will  throw  a bullet.  The  occupation  is  unques- 
tionably a forcible  one.  The  stories  of  cordial 
welcome  to  the  troops,  of  festivities  and  enter- 
tainments, have  some  foundation  in  fact,  but 
they  are  generally  misleading. 

“ There  are  Filipinos  who  are  tired  of  war  and 
there  are  those  who  have  never  been  keenly 
desirous  of  war.  There  are  the  passively 
indifferent,  the  stolid  and  the  timid.  These 
more  or  less  cordially  welcome  anything  which 
presents  a possibility  of  quieter  conditions  under 
which  they  can  go  on  with  the  dull  and  petty 
round  of  life  to  which  they  have  been  accus- 
tomed and  which  they  very  much  prefer.  As 
one  becomes  used  to  physical  pain  and  it 
becomes  endurable,  so  do  such  limited  lives  as 
those  of  many  of  the  Filipino  peasantry  become 
more  or  less  callous  to  political  tyranny  and 
oppression.  Some  become  roused  to  a measure 
of  activity  by  a hope  of  better  things,  but  the 
fever  soon  passes  and  they  sink  into  the  usual 
helpless  apathy  and,  out  of  policy,  seek  to 


152 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


ingratiate  themselves  with  a new  ruler  in  whom 
they  see  little  or  no  improvement  over  the  old. 

“ There  remain  two  classes.  Officially,  we 
hear  little  of  one  and  much  of  the  other.  There 
are  the  veritable  bandits,  the  ladrones  and  tuli- 
sanes,  who  may  be  called  professional  criminals. 
The  class  has  existed  for  years  in  the  islands 
and  has  held  a recognized  status.  It  is  made 
up  of  men  of  criminal  tendencies,  depredators 
and  sometimes  murderers.  It  is  impossible  even 
approximately  to  estimate  their  number,  but 
they  are  not  to  be  counted  by  thousands.  They 
may  number  some  hundreds,  but  it  is  probable 
that  comparatively  few  of  them  are  encountered 
by  the  American  forces.'  They  prey  upon  their 
own  people  and  upon  the  estate-holders  as  they 
always  have.  Their  number  has  undoubtedly 
been  augmented  by  the  disturbed  conditions 
of  the  life  of  the  island. 

“ The  other  group  consists  of  those  who  have 
been  and  still  should  be  called  ‘ insurrectos,’ 
‘rebels,’  ‘insurgents,’  or  any  other  term  which 
fits  their  particular  operations.  I am  not  sure 
that  the  inconvenient  title  of  ‘misguided  patri- 
ots ’ would  not  be  “the  most  fittingly  descriptive. 
As  an  army  of  such,  the  Filipino  organization  is 
disintegrated  and,  to  some  extent,  disbanded. 
But  the  greater  number  of  those  who  consti- 
tuted that  army,  though  many  have  returned  to 
their  homes  and  taken  up  some  part  of  their 


PROGRESS  OF  THE  WAR 


153 


normal  life  liabits,  still  retain  their  guns,  and 
the  best  information  available  leads  me  to  an 
assurance  that  they  keep  in  very  general  touch 
with  each  other  throughout  the  island.  Many 
of  the  islanders  are  subdued,  but  it  is  not  at  all 
established  that  they  are  pacified.  The  evi- 
dence is  strongly  in  favor  of  wide-spread  dis- 
satisfaction, with  some  unsuccessful  effort  at 
concealment  of  the  real  feeling. 

“ The  headquarters  view  is,  as  it  always  has 
been,  an  optimistic  one.  I do  not  find  it  well 
supported  by  the  facts.  Old  residents  tell  me 
that  five  years  ago,  and  back  of  that,  one  might 
travel  in  entire  safety  throughout  the  islands, 
meeting  cordial  and  respectful  courtesy  every- 
where. There  was  but  a minimum  of  danger 
from  bandits  or  anybody  else.  To-day  I find 
few  army  officers,  no  matter  what  their  view  of 
the  question  and  the  situation,  who  do  not 
advise  strongly  against  travel  through  any  part 
of  the  islands  without  ample  military  escort. 
The  American  troops  are  still  energetically 
scouting  throughout  a wide  area  and  the  reports 
of  attacks  on  outposts  and  pack-trains  and 
scouting-parties  are  still  frequent.  My  letters 
of  the  past  months  have  indicated  just  this  con- 
dition and  the  probability  of  its  indefinite  con- 
tinuance unless  it  finds  solution  through  other 
than  military  processes. 

u The  final  solution  is  undoubtedly  nearer  than 


154 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


it  was  six  months  ago,  but  I have  urged  my 
belief  that  the  full  determination  of  the  matter 
lay  along  political  or  diplomatic  lines  rather 
than  through  any  channel  of  military  operations. 
I see  no  reason  yet  to  change  my  views.  I be- 
lieve that  an  indefinite  continuance  of  the  pres- 
ent policy  can  have  no  other  meaning  than  an 
equally  indefinite  continuance  of  more  or  less 
active  hostilities.  The  proposal  to  constitute, 
by  military  edict,  all  who  do  not  accept  and 
accede  to  the  military  terms  a class  of  outlaws 
to  be  shot  or  hanged  by  scouting-parties  com- 
manded by  more  or  less  irresponsible  junior  and 
non-commissioned  officers,  is  a proposition 
which  is  almost  as  brutal  as  it  is  un-American. 

“Whether  the  Filipino  resistance  to  Ameri- 
can occupation  has  been  an  effort  toward  a direct 
end,  that  of  national  independence,  or,  as  I 
believe  it  has  been,  but  a means  toward  an  end, 
that  of  relief  from  political  and  monastic  tyranny, 
abuse  and  oppression,  there  has  been  resistance 
and  it  has  had  an  aim  and  purpose.  It  has 
affected  hundreds  of  thousands,  and  many  thou- 
sands have  given  property  and  life  for  the 
accomplishment  of  some  more  or  less  clearly 
defined  and  understood  end.  It  is  beyond  the 
bounds  of  reasonable  assumption  to  hold  that 
such  a people  would  at  once  cease  their  struggle 
and  extend  a loving  and  honest  welcome  to 
their  conquerors.  It  is  equally  unreasonable  to 
claim  that  a man  who  was  yesterday  a patriot, 


PROGRESS  OF  THE  WAR 


155 


whether  clearly  intelligent  or  blindly  led  by 
others,  should  become  to-day  a member  of  the 
criminal  class,  an  outlaw  to  be  shot  or  hanged 
on  sight. 

“ After  seven  months  of  experience,  observa- 
tion and  investigation  in  the  islands,  it  is  my 
contention  that  the  adjustment  of  the  trouble 
here  can  be  effected  only  through  diplomatic 
and  political  channels.  I believe  that  this  is  as 
true  to-day  as  it  was  months  ago,  and  I believe 
that  it  was  as  true  then  as  it  is  now.  The  Fili- 
pino people  want  something,  that  is  evident. 
They  are  not  fighting  and  dying  for  the  fun  of 
it,  or  for  the  excitement  they  find  in  the  simple 
fact  of  an  armed  resistance.  Their  desires  are 
legitimate  from  the  standpoints  of  humanity, 
civilization  and  democracy.  I believe  that  the 
United  States  may  make  up  its  mind  to  a more 
or  less  active  row  out  here  until  these  people 
get  something  more  than  vague  assurances  that 
when  they  stop  ‘kicking’  they  will  get  some- 
thing which  somebody  else  thinks  is  good  for 
therm” 


With  this  chapter  I leave  the  story  of  our 
military  operations  in  the  Philippines.  We 
have  been  fighting  for  eighteen  months.  The 
account  of  any  one  month  is  the  account  of 
almost  any  other  month.  The  end  is  not  yet, 
and  competent  observers  are  frank  to  say  that 
they  cannot  see  the  end.  Optimism  is  a far 


156 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


more  satisfactory  state  than  pessimism;  but  if 
a thinking  pessimism  realizes  a serious  situation 
and  faces  its  facts  while  an  unthinking  optimism 
fails  to  do  either,  I shall  prefer  to  be  ranked 
with  the  pessimists,  though  naturally  gifted 
with  a fairly  cheerful  disposition. 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE 


A lesson  in  geography— Areas  of  principal  islands— Geology 
of  the  Philippines — Volcanoes — Earthquakes — Climate — 
Philippine  zones— Philippine  races  and  tongues— Distri- 
bution of  population  — The  Tagal  language  — Filipino 
character— Cleanliness  of  the  Filipinos— Apparel— Buyo- 
chewing— A musical  race— The  savages. 


EOGRAPHICALLY  the  Philippine  archi- 


pelago is  said  to  consist  of  anywhere  from 
six  hundred  to  twelve  hundred  islands.  A vari- 
ation of  a few  hundred,  either  way,  from  the 
actual  number  is  a matter  of  no  importance; 
there  are  too  many  of  them  anyway,  and  the 
majority  are  quite  valueless  and  practically 
uninhabitable.  This  variation  in  the  estimates 
arises  from  the  fact  that  hundreds  of  them  are 
small,  un suited  for  human  habitation  or  for  cul- 
tivation, miasmatic  and  without  potable  water. 
Writers  and  chartographers  fail  to  agree  upon 
those  which  should  or  should  not  be  counted. 

Taken  together  with  the  waters  which  sur- 
round them  and  are  included  within  their  outside 
boundary  lines,  they  extend  over  an  area  embra- 


158 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


cing,  roughly,  some  300,000  square  miles  of  the 
earth’s  surface.  Their  actual  land  area  is  given 
by  Domann’s  map  of  1882  as  114,356  square 
miles.  The  table  of  areas  of  the  larger  islands 
stands  as  follows : 


Luzon  . . . 

Sq.  Miles. 

. 40,024 

Bohol  . . . 

Sq.  Miles. 

. . 1,496 

Mindanao  . . 

. 37,256 

Masbate  . . 

. . 1,211 

Negros  . . . 

. 4,670 

Sulu  Group  . 

. . 948 

Panay  . . . 

. 4,633 

Busuanga 

. . 416 

Palawan 

. 4,576 

Marinduque . 

. . 348 

Samar  . . . 

. 4,367 

Tablas  . . 

. . 327 

Mindoro  . . 

. 3,934 

Burias . . . 

. . 190 

Leyte  . . . 

. 2,716 

Sibuyan  . . 

. . 159 

Cebu  .... 

. 2,413 

Ticao  . . . 

. . 121 

This  list  includes  all  of  the  principal  islands  of 
the  archipelago  and  leaves  an  average  area  of 
about  three  and  three  quarter  square  miles  for 
each  of  the  rest  of  them.  Some  are  named  and 
some  are  not.  Had  Mr.  Venus  been  a trader  in 
islands  instead  of  a manipulator  of  bones,  he 
would  probably  have  grouped  the  lot  under 
the  sweeping  classification  of  u Islands,  warious.” 
They  range  from  little  ones  of  the  size  of  a door- 
mat up  to  those  which  are  as  large  as  a back 
yard.  The  area  of  the  whole,  large  ones  and 
small  ones,  is  practically  the  equivalent  of  that 
of  New  York  State  and  New  England  combined. 
Just  wliat  percentage  of  that  area  possesses  any 
value  whatever  for  productive  or  grazing  pur- 
poses can  be,  at  present,  no  more  than  mere 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  159 


guesswork.  There  are  productive  sections, 
some  of  them  richly  so  and  capable  of  high 
development.  Some  of  these  areas  are  extensive, 
like  the  valley  which  lies  between  Manila  and 
Dagupan  in  Luzon,  but  they  are  to  be  classed 
generally  as  “patchy.”  The  wild  roughness  of 
the  interior  mountain  districts  bars  the  greater 
portion  of  their  area  from  any  possibility  of 
fruitfulness  in  any  department. 

Geologically  the  islands  are  difficult  of  explo- 
ration by  reason  of  the  dense  covering  of  vegeta- 
tion, living  and  decomposed,  which  hides  the 
telltale  rocks.  The  evidence  of  volcanic  force 
is  clearly  manifest  and  volcanoes,  extinct  and 
active,  are  numerous.  Active  volcanoes  are 
found  throughout  the  islands.  Monte  Cagua 
(3910  feet),  in  the  north  of  Luzon,  keeps  fairly 
active  as  a smoker.  Taal,  forty-five  miles  south 
of  Manila,  is  one  of  the  show-places  of  the  region. 
It  is  geologically  notable  from  the  fact  that 
its  altitude  of  850  feet  makes  it  one  of  the  lowest 
volcanoes  in  the  world.  It  stands  in  the  middle 
of  Lake  Bombon,  and  it  and  its  smoking  summit 
are  often  visible  from  the  deck  of  steamers  run- 
ning to  the  southern  islands.  It  has  had  various 
times  of  special  and  sometimes  dangerous  ac- 
tivity, though  none  of  them  are  of  very  recent 
occurrence;  but  it  is  certainly  not  dead  and 
stands  as  a not  very  assuring  neighbor. 

Probably  the  busiest  and  most  destructive  of 
Philippine  volcanoes  is  the  Mayon,  in  the  prov- 


160 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


ince  of  Albay,  in  Luzon.  It  lias  been  in  active 
eruption  a number  of  times  within  the  present 
century  and  even  within  the  last  ten  years  has 
been  the  cause  of  hundreds  of  deaths  and  the 
destruction  of  a vast  amount  of  property.  Can- 
laiian,  in  Negros,  is  occasionally  active.  Mindanao 
has  a collection  about  which  comparatively  little 
is  known. 

Earthquakes  are  a possibility  at  any  time. 
Some  of  these  have  been  widely  destructive  to 
life  and  property.  Little  jars  are  of  frequent 
occurrence  and  pass  unnoticed  save  by  the  seis- 
mometer at  the  Jesuit  observatory  in  Manila. 
The  years  1874  and  1880  were  times  of  special 
energy  and  continuance.  I encountered  nothing 
during  my  stay  that  was  at  all  fearful.  We  had 
a little  shake  one  evening  which  sent  many  peo- 
ple running  into  the  streets,  frightened  the  ladies 
in  the  hotel  and  set  many  things  rattling  and 
swinging. 

No  general  statement  can  be  made  with  any 
accuracy  concerning  climate.  The  distance 
from  Babuyanes,  at  the  north,  to  Bongao,  at  the 
south,  is  about  the  equivalent  of  that  between 
New  Orleans  and  Milwaukee.  It  does  not  get 
as  cold  at  Babuyanes  as  it  does  in  Milwaukee, 
though  it  does  not  get  much  hotter  at  Bongao 
than  it  does  in  New  Orleans.  As  Manila  is  the 
point  of  special  center  and  interest,  I quote  the 
figures  given  at  that  point.  Three  seasons  are 
recognized.  For  lack  of  better  terms,  though 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  161 

two  of  the  three  are  not  wholly  fitting,  these  are 
known  as  the  cold,  the  hot  and  the  wet.  Mean 
temperatures  are  given  as  follows : cold  season, 
72.32° ; hot  season,  87.26° ; wet  season,  84.56°. 
November,  December,  January  and  February 
are  included  in  the  first  group;  March,  April, 
May  and  June  form  the  second;  and  the  re- 
maining months  the  third. 

But  thermometric  records  convey  little  idea 
of  heat  conditions.  Speaking  broadly,  one  is 
safe  in  saying  that  Manila  is  a hot  place  and 
that  Iloilo  is  a hotter  one.  Yet  I have  seen  as 
perfect  days  in  Manila  as  I have  seen  anywhere 
in  the  world.  My  personal  opinion,  based  on 
experience,  is  that  one  may  live  in  Manila  with 
as  little  of  discomfort  as  will  be  experienced  in 
most  other  places,  provided  one  does  certain 
things  and  refrains  from  certain  other  things. 
One  should  dress  for  the  climate,  avoid  all  forms 
of  over-exertion,  particularly  at  midday,  avoid 
over-drinking  and  keep  on  the  shady  side  of  the 
street. 

The  Philippine  Archipelago  should  be  divided, 
as  it  almost  divides  itself,  into  three  distinct 
districts  or  zones.  Luzon  constitutes  the  north- 
ern zone;  the  Yisayan  group,  Panay,  Negros, 
Cebu,  Bohol  and  their  neighbors  constitute  the 
central  zone ; while  Mindanao,  Palawan  and  the 
Sulu  Archipelago  form  the  southern.  The  Ta- 
gals  dominate  the  northern  zone,  the  Yisayans 
the  central,  and  the  so-called  Moros  the  south- 


162 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


ern.  The  Tagals  and  the  Visayans  may  unite 
against  a common  enemy,  but  there  is  little  of 
harmony  between  them  in  their  ordinary  mutual 
relations.  With  the  Moros  neither  of  these  has 
anything  in  common.  They  are  of  more  distinct 
Malay  type  and  of  other  religious  faith.  The 
Tagal  and  the  Yisayan,  though  not  to  be  called 
industrious,  do  some  work.  That  can  hardly  be 
said  of  the  Moros,  whom  Spain  was  never  able 
to  bring  under  either  its  political  or  its  religious 
influence.  Scattered  throughout  the  islands 
from  northern  Luzon  to  southern  Mindanao, 
there  are  semi-isolated  tribes  who  survive,  in 
full  or  in  partial  blood,  from  the  aborigines. 
Just  what  percentage  of  the  population  of  the 
archipelago  these  form  cannot  be  accurately 
stated,  through  lack  of  acceptable  census 
returns.  Spanish  sovereignty  in  the  Philip- 
pines has  never  been  complete ; in  fact,  full  dom- 
ination extended  over  a comparatively  limited 
area,  while  little  more  than  nominal  sovereignty 
covered  the  major  portion.  Over  a consider- 
able territory  and  over  a considerable  number 
of  people  it  had  little  or  no  authority.  A nota- 
ble percentage  of  the  islanders  lived  after  their 
own  manner  and  under  their  own  laws,  which 
were  established  tribal  customs  rather  than  any 
process  that  may  be  called,  in  strictness,  law. 

It  is  said  that  there  are  more  than  eighty 
different  tribes,  each  presenting  distinct  traits 
by  which  it  is  distinguishable  from  all  others. 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  163 


They  are  scattered  over  the  various  islands  of 
the  group  and  represent  gradations  from  the 
best  of  the  Tagals  and  Visayans,  among  both 
of  which  tribes  there  are  more  than  a few  men 
of  high  intelligence,  wealth  and  broad  culture, 
down  to  the  barely  more  than  animal  Negritos, 
the  wild  Malays  and  the  warlike  Igorrotes. 
The  Negritos  are  generally  regarded  as  the 
surviving  remnants  of  the  aborigines. 

Ethnological  differentiation  of  these  tribes 
is  almost,  if  not  quite,  impossible.  Here  and 
there  may  be  found  individuals  and  groups 
representing  distinct  races.  There  is  distinct 
representation  of  Chinese,  Malay,  Negrito  and 
perhaps  a few  others.  The  great  mass  of  the 
population  of  the  islands  is  probably  best 
grouped,  ethnologically,  under  the  head  of 
mongrel.  Cross-breeding  by  selection  is  pro- 
ductive, undoubtedly,  of  the  best  types  of  life, 
whether  in  men,  animals  or  fruit-trees.  Pro- 
miscuous cross-breeding  and  in-breeding  among 
lower  types  result  in  almost  inevitable  deteri- 
oration. Animalism  breeds  downward.  Civili- 
zation breeds  upward.  Probably  few  places  in 
the  world  present  a degree  of  complex  hybridi- 
zation rivaling  that  of  the  Philippine  Islands. 
Few  writers  on  the  country  have  ever  at- 
tempted analysis  of  the  origin  of  the  various 
tribes. 

Probably  the  most  numerous  and  widely 
spread  are  the  Tagals  and  the  Visayans.  Min- 


164 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


danao,  the  great  island  to  the  southward,  and 
the  Sulu  Archipelago  have  a population  which 
is  divided  between  natives,  half-breeds  and  a 
tribe  or  race  known  as  Moros,  said  to  have  come 
from  Borneo  about  the  time  of  the  first  Spanish 
settlement  in  Zamboanga. 

It  has  not  been  the  custom  of  the  Spaniards 
to  make  accurate  census  reports  concerning 
their  island  dependencies,  either  here  or  in  the 
West  Indies.  Such  information  as  they  have 
obtained  regarding  the  Philippine  people  has 
come  rather  through  ecclesiastical  than  through 
official  channels.  When  I was  there  that  source 
of  information  was  not  cheerfully  opened  to 
wandering  newspaper  correspondents.  No  reli- 
able tabulation  of  any  of  the  tribes  is  obtainable. 
It  is  even  somewhat  doubtful  whether  such  a 
thing  be  in  any  way  possible. 

Some  attempt  has  been  made  to  classify  them 
philologically,  but  the  results  are  not  to  be 
regarded  as  remarkably  accurate.  Tims  in  five 
of  the  northern  provinces  the  Tagal  is  the  com- 
mon language  of  some  six  or  eight  hundred 
thousand  people.  In  the  southeastern  provinces 
of  Luzon,  down  in  the  Camarines  section,  some 
three  hundred  and  twenty-five  thousand  or  more 
of  people  are  given  as  speaking  Yicol,  a term 
which  I do  not  find  in  the  works  of  either  Fore- 
man or  Worcester,  neither  of  whom  appears  to 
have  made  any  extensive  researches  in  that 
vicinity.  In  Manila  the  population  is  conglom- 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  165 


erate,  -ethnologically  and  philologically.  The 
city  probably  includes  upward  of  two  hundred 
thousand  that  may  be  classed  as  Tagals  by  blood 
or  by  affiliation.  There  are  one  hundred  thou- 
sand or  so  of  Chinese  and  Chinese  half-castes. 
There  are  a few  thousand  foreigners  and  a good 
many  thousand  mestizos  and  other  half-breeds, 
besides  many  whose  pedigree  is  wholly  in- 
definite. 

Tagal  is  also  a common,  though  not  exclusive, 
language  in  some  six  or  seven  other  provinces 
whose  population  approximates  a half-million, 
and  it  forms  a less  common  tongue  in  many 
others.  I have  been  unable  to  obtain  anything 
which  I could  accept  as  a reliable  statement  of 
the  numbers  of  the  Tagal  tribe.  Estimates  and 
calculations  are  at  variance,  ranging  from  one 
and  a half  to  three  millions,  with  a probability  of 
the  former  figure  being  more  nearly  correct  than 
the  latter.  This  is  the  tribe  which  is  incorrectly 
given  as  “ the  only  one  in  revolt.”  The  fact  is 
that  the  insurgent  army  is  not  made  up  wholly 
of  Tagals,  and  there  are  many  Tagals  who  are 
not  in  revolt.  Some  of  them  are  classed  as 
“ amigos.”  But  the  amigo  is,  at  best,  an  uncer- 
tain sort  of  creature,  and  it  is  wholly  probable 
that  the  mass  of  Tagal  people  are  in  passive,  if 
not  in  active,  sympathy  with  their  own  kind. 

The  Yisayans,  or  rather  those  speaking  Visa- 
yan,  probably  number  not  far  from  two  million. 
The  Ilocanos  probably  come  third,  with  a half- 


166 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


million  or  more.  These  figures  are  little  more 
than  mere  guesswork ; they  are  not  to  be  taken 
as  even  approximately  accurate.  Following 
these  tongues,  though  not  in  the  order  given, 
are  the  Pampangan,  Pangasinan,  Igorrote, 
Itanes,  Idayan,  Gaddan,  Dadaya,  Apayao,  Mala- 
neg,  Tinguian,  Ibanag,  It'ugao,  Ibilao,  Ilongote, 
Zambal,  Aeta,  Cebuano,  Panayano,  Manobo, 
Coyuro,  Agutaino,  Calamiano,  and  very  likely  a 
few  score  of  others,  without  counting  the  yelping 
of  hundreds  of  thousands  of  cur  dogs  and  the 
moans  of  the  repulsive  carabao.  It  is  not  to  be 
understood  that  these  are  all  distinct  languages. 
Some  of  them  are  distinct,  others  partly 
so.  Most  of  them  are  dialects,  though  suffi- 
ciently different  to  be  practically  unintelligible 
to  those  of  other  groups.  There  are  certain 
common  words  which  are  much  the  same  in 
many  of  them,  and  Spanish  words  have  been 
adopted  to  some  extent  by  a number. 

In  the  Tagal  language  one  notices  the  great 
preponderance  of  the  vowel  a and  the  consonants 
m and  n.  It  is  evidenced  in  the  following, 
which  probably  few  American  Sunday-school 
children  will  recognize  as  the  Lord’s  Prayer, 
but  that  is  what  it  is : 

“ Ama  namin  sung  ma  sa  langit  ca,  sambahin 
ang  nagla  mo.  Xapa  sa  amin  ang  cahavian  mo. 
Sundin  ang  loob  mo  aqui  sa  lupa  para  nang  sa 
langit.  Bigyan  mo  cami  ngaion  nang  amin 
canin  sa  arao  aras  [daily,  or,  from  day  to  day]. 


TEE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIE  PEOPLE  167 


Patavarin  mo  cami  nang  aming  manga  otang 
pava  nang  pagpapatravar  namin  sa  nangag  caca 
otang  sa  amin.  At  hovag  mo  earning  ipahlntolot 
sa  tocso  at  iadya  mo  cami  sa  dilan  masama  ” 

This  ends  with  the  sixth  petition  and  omits 
the  ascription.  It  will  be  seen  that  out  of  the 
hundred  and  twenty-eight  vowels  which  occur, 
eighty  are  «,  against  forty-eight  of  all  the 
others.  A little  more  than  a quarter  of  the  con- 
sonants are  n,  one  seventh  are  m,  and  one  eighth 
g.  I take  this  from  a Spanish  work,  and  as  w 
does  not  occur  in  the  Spanish  alphabet,  it  natu- 
rally does  not  occur  in  a Spanish  rendering  of 
Tagal.  There  is  little  Tagal  literature,  but 
there  are  newspapers,  some  entirely  and  some 
partly  printed  in  Tagal. 

The  present  is  not  at  all  a favorable  time  for 
the  study  of  Filipino  character  or  Filipino  ways 
of  life.  Taken  en  masse  the  Filipinos  are  in 
an  abnormal  mood.  Broadly,  they  are  either 
engaged  in  efforts  to  adjust  themselves  to  new 
and  unfamiliar  conditions,  or  they  are  striving 
to  nullify  those  conditions.  Because  of  this, 
the  Filipino  who  comes  under  the  observation 
of  the  visiting  American  is  not  rightly  to  be 
accepted  as  the  typical  man  of  the  island. 

Another  point  also  arises.  The  view  of  the 
individual  observer  is  affected  by  his  own  tem- 
perament and  mental  habit. 

The  Filipinos  cut  a telegraph-wire,  run  pro- 
visions through  the  American  lines  and  fire 


168 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


upon  American  outposts  from  the  concealment 
of  bamboo  jungles.  A calls  them  cowards,  das- 
tards and  tricksters ; B asserts  their  cleverness 
in  adopting  the  only  system  of  warfare  by  which 
they  can  hope  to  score  any  measure  of  success. 
A thinks  the  Filipinos  a dirty  lot  because  their 
domestic  environment  so  often  suggests  the 
imperative  need  of  a revision  in  its  methods  of 
sanitation ; B thinks  them  a cleanly  race  be- 
cause he  notices  so  many  of  them  bathing. 

This  matter  of  cleanliness  is  one  of  the  incon- 
sistencies of  Filipino  character.  Their  houses 
and  surroundings  may  be  on  the  verge  of  filthi- 
ness, but  they  are,  as  a very  general  rule,  most 
careful  in  their  attention  to  personal  ablutions. 
Again  there  comes  a curious  inconsistency. 
They  will  bathe  in  the  muddy  Pasig  and  in  the 
canals  of  the  city  and  its  vicinity.  Some  of  these 
canals  are  but  little  better  than  sewers;  they 
are  usually  foul  in  appearance  and  often  un- 
speakably offensive  in  smell.  American  methods 
are  strenuously  seeking  to  change  the  custom  of 
former  days,  but  these  sluggish,  muddy-bot- 
tomed  channels  are  still  made  the  receptacle  of 
a considerable  amount  of  offal  and  refuse.  Yet 
these  people  bathe  in  them  regardless  of  their 
doubtful  composition. 

The  Pasig  is  a less  notably  offensive  bath-tub ; 
yet  it  is  the  main  system  into  which  the  canals 
discharge  by  tide-water,  and  the  stream  itself  is 
often  a rich  compound  of  alluvial  matter.  Its 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  169 


special  advantage  lies  in  its  dilution  by  reason 
of  its  volume.  The  morning  bath  along  the 
river-front  is  one  of  the  interesting  sights  of 
Manila.  Few  visitors  see  it  because  of  the  early 
hour  of  the  performance.  I should  not  have 
seen  it  myself  had  I not  been  obliged  to  get  on 
board  a steamer  one  morning  at  a most  unholy 
hour.  Both  sexes  bathe  together,  but  there  is 
no  immodesty  about  it.  All  are  at  least  as  fully 
garbed  as  the  bathers  at  Coney  Island  or  Rocka- 
way.  It  is  a common  enough  sight  to  see  a 
native  wash  his  feet  and  limbs  in  a street  pud- 
dle, and  some  one  or  more,  male  or  female,  old 
or  young,  will  usually  be  seen  taking  more  or 
less  of  a bath  at  the  hydrants  in  the  outlying 
wards  of  the  city.  Except  in  the  case  of  children, 
the  bath  is  often  taken  with  but  slight  change 
in  apparel.  The  men  who  bathe  thus  publicly 
are  not  customarily  overdressed  anyway.  The 
ladies  come  from  their  houses  in  the  vicinity, 
wearing  a single  garment  secured  under  the 
arms  and  above  the  bust.  The  bath  is  taken  by 
pouring  basins  of  water  over  the  head  and 
shoulders.  This  finds  variation  in  a home  bath 
by  fetching  the  water  instead  of  going  to  it.  I 
have  seen  women  sitting  in  a tub  set  on  the 
ground  in  front  of  their  houses,  garbed  as  de- 
scribed, and  pouring  and  rubbing  with  manifest 
satisfaction. 

The  beach  along  the  shore  of  Ermite  and 
Malate,  the  southern  extension  of  the  city,  is 


170 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


another  well-frequented  bathing-spot.  There  is 
little  swimming.  Many  Filipinos  can  swim  and 
some  are  powerful  swimmers.  I have  seen  men 
from  the  cascos  in  the  Pasig  plunge  into  a very 
strong  current,  for  the  purpose  of  carrying  a 
line  to  some  boat  or  to  the  shore,  one  or  two 
hundred  feet  away.  But  for  bathing  they  prefer 
to  wade,  splash  and  pour.  Children  take  readily 
to  the  process.  But  the  water  is  warm  and  even 
the  sea  water  lacks  that  invigorating  snap  which 
comes  from  a dip  or  a plunge  in  more  northerly 
waters.  The  houses  of  the  better  classes  are 
supplied  with  bathing  facilities,  usually  the 
shower-bath,  though  occasionally  the  tub. 

Another  evidence  of  personal  cleanliness  is  in 
the  apparel.  Even  among  the  poorer  classes 
there  is  a noticeable  neatness  of  garb.  Across 
the  street  that  runs  beside  the  hotel  at  which 
I stayed  there  was  a large  cigar  and  cigarette 
factory.  Most  of  the  employees  were  women. 
They  were  of  all  ages,  from  girls  of  ten  or  twelve 
to  women  of  forty  or  more.  In  New  York  their 
pay  would  make  them  an  object  for  the  efforts 
of  a variety  of  philanthropic  organizations. 
They  used  to  file  past  my  windows  on  their  way 
to  and  from  their  work.  I never  saw  one  whose 
gauzy  camisa  and  panuela,  print  skirt  and  tapis 
showed  any  great  need  of  the  laundry.  There 
may  be  a measure  of  shabbiness,  though  even 
that  is  most  unusual,  but  it  is  quite  uncommon 
to  see  the  Filipinos  dirty. 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  171 


I did  not  find  either  Porto  Ricans  or  Cubans 
to  be  faithful  church  attendants.  The  Filipinos 
are  remarkable  for  their  fidelity  in  that  respect 
and  Sunday  and  various  feast-days  are  times  of 
a kind  of  dress-parade.  The  best  of  garments 
and  the  most  of  jewelry  belong  to  the  church 
service,  and  one  notes  preeminently  the  white- 
ness of  the  masculine  clothing  and  the  spotless- 
ness of  the  feminine.  The  dresses  of  the  women 
(I  should  call  them  gowns  if  I were  certain  of 
the  range  of  that  term)  are  of  all  imaginable 
colors  and  combinations  of  colors,  from  entire 
black  to  plaids  of  red,  green  and  yellow.  That 
applies  to  the  skirt.  The  tapis,  which  may  be 
called  the  Filipino  overskirt,  is  usually  of  some 
black  cloth. 

Except  in  the  case  of  the  more  wealthy,  the 
stocking  of  the  Filipino  woman  is  almost  exclu- 
sively a religious  institution.  Most  of  them  wear 
the  peculiar  shoe  of  the  country,  the  chinela , al- 
ways on  the  street.  Few  wear  stockings  except 
on  Sunday  or  on  days  of  church  feasts.  All  do 
not  wear  them  then;  many  cannot  afford  even 
that  much.  But  a pair  of  black  stockings  is  to 
a Filipino  woman  very  much  what  a pair  of  kid 
gloves  is  to  an  American,  except  that  the 
American  glove  is  in  more  common  and  general 
use  than  the  Filipino  stocking.  One  of  the 
notable  points  about  Filipino  women  is  their 
modesty.  Their  standard  of  dress  and  demeanor 
is  not  as  ours  is,  but  I am  not  sure  that  their 


172 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


modesty  is  not  of  a truer  type  than  the  Ameri- 
can. It  is  certainly  more  honest,  less  self-con- 
scious and  perhaps  less  prudish. 

There  are  few  better  ways  in  which  to  study 
the  customs  of  any  people  than  by  spending  an 
hour  or  two  in  their  markets.  I continually 
noted  marked  differences  between  the  customs 
of  this  bit  of  Spain’s  former  possessions  and 
those  of  her  possessions  in  the  West  Indies.  In 
Porto  Rico  the  market  is  virtually  closed  at 
noon.  In  Manila  it  is  a busy  spot  throughout 
the  day.  It  is  a market  and  a restaurant.  One 
may  sit  down  to  a dinner,  in  courses,  of  the  most 
unattractive  messes  imaginable.  He  may  buy, 
as  scores  of  the  natives  appear  to  be  doing  all 
the  day  long,  little  bowls  of  “chow”  in  any 
number  of  varieties.  He  may  buy  a little  slab 
of  slimy,  sticky-looking  paste,  of  the  type  known 
as  clulce  (sweet),  wrapped  in  a piece  of  banana- 
leaf,  thereby  courting  almost  certain  indiges- 
tion and,  from  the  general  appearance  of  the 
stuff,  possible  death. 

The  prevalence  of  dirt  and  flies  around  the 
average  Filipino  market  causes  one  to  wonder 
that  the  death-rate  of  the  island  is  not  any 
number  of  times  greater  than  it  is.  Apparently 
no  part  of  an  animal  killed  for  market  is  thrown 
away.  Everything  is  bought  up  and  exposed 
for  sale,  exposed  also  to  flies  and  the  heated  and 
humid  air,  in  the  markets  patronized  by  the 
swarming  thousands  of  the  poorer  classes.  Fish 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  173 


is  a staple  diet  and  a variety  is  offered.  In  the 
markets  of  the  masses  the  fish-venders  may  be 
seen  squatting,  not  sitting,  before  their  broad,  flat 
baskets  of  fish,  large  and  small,  fresh,  stale, 
smoked  or  dried.  The  vegetables  are  of  more 
attractive  appearance,  in  considerable  variety, 
though  usually  small  in  size  through  lack  of 
proper  cultivation.  Many  of  the  vegetables  are 
familiar  to  American  eyes ; so  are  many  of  the 
fruits. 

In  the  markets  one  will  see  piles  of  a wholly 
unfamiliar  article.  It  does  not  look  like  a fruit ; 
neither  has  it  quite  the  appearance  of  a nut.  It 
is  an  oval  affair  some  two  and  a half  inches  in 
length,  its  skin  battered  and  fibrous.  There  is 
nothing  attractive  about  it  in  either  appearance 
or  smell,  yet  it  is  practically  indispensable  to  the 
Filipino  of  the  lower  classes  and  equally  so  to 
many  of  the  better  class.  They  call  it  buyo. 
Properly  it  is  the  areca-nut,  which,  when  its 
kernel  is  separated  from  the  husk  and  wrapped 
in  the  betel-leaf  coated  with  a bit  of  lime,  is  even 
dearer  to  most  Oriental  peoples  than  chewing- 
tobacco  is  to  many  who  are  supposed  to  be  their 
white  superiors.  In  the  same  vicinity  will  be 
seen  the  venders  of  the  betel-leaf,  while  others 
prepare  the  combination  in  packets  suitable  for 
an  individual  “ chew.”  Its  use  will  also  be  illus- 
trated immediately  at  hand,  and  the  bright  red 
stains  which  may  be  seen  everywhere  about  are 
accounted  for.  The  nuts  are  brought  from  the 


174 


THE  PHILIPPINE  8 


country  in  large  boat-loads,  and  the  betel-leaves 
are  brought  in  fresh  almost  daily.  The  Moros 
of  Sulu  are  even  more  vigorously  addicted  to 
buyo  than  are  the  Filipinos.  One  rarely  meets 
a Moro  man  whose  sash  does  not  hold  a small 
metal  box  of  Chinese  make,  stored  with  his 
almost  indispensable  buyo. 

The  Chinaman,  both  as  a merchant  and 
laborer,  plays  a prominent  part  in  all  the  life 
of  Manila.  His  shops  and  his  stores  may  be 
seen  anywhere  where  trade  is  to  be  had, 
though  certain  thoroughfares,  like  the  Calle 
Rosario  and  Calle  Santo  Cristo,  are  almost  dis- 
tinctly his  own.  Industry  is  his  habit,  but 
thrift  appears  to  be  his  nature.  He  wastes 
nothing,  and  one  can  but  wonder  what  on  earth 
can  ever  be  done  with  the  stacks  of  seemingly 
useless  rubbish  that  may  be  seen  heaped  up 
in  the  dingy  shops  of  some  of  the  dealers  in  the 
things  which  even  a poverty-stricken  Filipino 
would  throw  away.  If  “Waste  not,  want  not,” 
be  a true  saying,  its  logical  conclusion  must  be 
that  there  is  no  such  thing  in  the  world  as  a 
Chinaman  who  “ wants  ” anything. 

One  may  see  a phase  of  Filipino  life  on  the 
Escolta  and  the  Luneta,  but  it  will  be  largely 
the  life  of  a class.  To  see  the  life  of  the  masses 
one  does  well  to  go  into  the  crowded  and  dingy 
streets  of  the  Tondo  district.  It  is  not  a pleas- 
ant place,  and  it  does  smell  horribly ; but  there 


THE  ISLANDS  AXE  THEIR  PEOPLE  175 


are  more  Filipinos  there  than  there  are  on  the 
Escolta,  and  they  are  probably  more  repre- 
sentative. 

Statements  concerning  illiteracy  in  the  Philip- 
pines are  apt  to  be  greatly  misleading.  There 
are  tribes  among  which  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
either  literature  or  education.  If  the  whole 
population  be  considered,  the  percentage  of  illit- 
eracy is  undoubtedly  high.  In  Manila  the  per- 
centage would  be  quite  low;  so  would  it  in 
many  other  of  the  principal  cities  and  towns. 
Considering  only  those  tribes  which  would  in- 
clude, like  the  Tagal  and  the  Yisayan,  those 
who  are  furthest  advanced  in  the  ways  of  civili- 
zation, and  assuming  that  such  represent  from 
one  half  to  two  thirds  of  the  island  people,  the 
percentage  of  illiteracy  would  probably  be  very 
much  lower  than  that  of  either  Cuba  or  Porto 
Bico,  and  perhaps  below  that  of  the  negroes  of 
the  Southern  States. 

The  Filipinos  are  distinctly  a musical  lot.  A 
native  boy  will  make  some  kind  of  an  instru- 
ment out  of  a piece  of  bamboo  or  an  old  tomato- 
can  and  then  play  a very  sweet  tune  on  it. 
They  are  particularly  fond  of  concerted  music, 
and  gather  in  little  companies  for  musical  even- 
ings. The  ear  appears  to  be  quick  and  accurate 
and  tunes  are  readily  caught  up.  While  I was 
there,  one  was  quite  likely  to  be  wakened  in  the 
morning  by  a shrill  boyish  whistling  of  “ March- 


176 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


ing  through  Georgia”  or  “Hot  Time.”  The 
street-hoys  whistled,  indiscriminately,  Spanish 
marching  tunes  and  American  bugle-calls. 

Ethnologically,  the  typical  Filipino  is  described 
as  of  small  stature,  slender  frame,  brownish-yel- 
low color,  symmetrical  skull,  prominent  cheek- 
bones, nasal  bridge  low,  nostrils  prominent, 
eyes  narrow,  mouth  large,  with  lips  full  but 
not  thick,  chin  short  and  round,  hair  smooth, 
straight  and  thick. 

The  number  of  those  who,  for  want  of  a more 
accurate  term,  are  called  “ savages  ” is  quite  a 
matter  of  guesswork.  With  them,  as  yet,  the 
United  States  has  come  into  contact  very  little. 
It  is  assumed  that  the  aborigines  are  represented 
in  a decadent  people,  variously  estimated  at 
from  ten  to  twenty-five  thousand  in  number, 
found  in  scattered  groups  throughout  the  islands. 
They  are  known  as  Aetas  or  Negritos  (little 
negroes).  They  are  of  small  stature,  about  four 
feet  eight  inches  in  height,  quite  black,  with  close 
and  tightly  curling  hair.  They  are  dying  out, 
and  though  interesting  as  a race  type  have  no 
important  place  in  American  experience,  politi- 
cally or  socially.  They  are  inoffensive  and 
rather  cowardly.  Other  tribes  are,  in  the  main, 
the  result  of  intermixture  of  other  races  with 
the  Aetas.  The  Malay,  the  Siamese,  the  Chinese, 
the  Japanese  and  the  Spaniard  are  indicated 
among  many  of  them.  One  group  is  known  as 
the  Igorrote-Chinese.  The  Tinguanes  of  the 


THE  ISLANDS  AND  THEIR  PEOPLE  177 

northwestern  coast  are  of  a different  and  higher 
type.  Some  of  these  tribes  will  doubtless  accept 
American  rule  with  entire  indifference  and  make 
no  trouble  so  long  as  they  are  not  unduly  dis- 
turbed. Others  may,  at  times,  make  things  rather 
interesting. 


XI 

PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES 

Some  general  reflections— Gold-hunting— Real  wealth  of  the 
islands — Sugar,  tobacco  and  hemp — Philippine  commerce 
— Lumber  possibilities— Possibilities  in  imports— Railways 
in  Luzon — The  Philippines  as  a field  for  young  men— 
Chances  for  the  cap italist— Hemp  industry  and  its  pro- 
cesses— Manila  wood-workers — Mining  a speculation. 

THE  Spaniards,  after  tlieir  decorative  fash- 
ion, had  a way  of  applying  to  all  their 
tropical  and  subtropical  possessions  such  titles 
as  “ Gem,”  “ Pearl,”  and  words  of  that  kind.  A 
few  centuries  ago  they  girdled  the  world  with  a 
jeweled  zone.  If  I am  not  in  error,  the  Philip- 
pines were  the  “ Pearl  of  the  Orient.”  It  is  a 
“real  pretty”  name  — “La  Perla  de  la  Oriente.” 
For  centuries  the  world  has  been  led  to  believe 
in  the  immense  wealth,  the  marvelous  and  end- 
less fertility  of  these  islands.  It  has  become  a 
settled  conviction,  and  that  fact  has  undoubtedly 
been  a potent  influence  with  those  Americans 
who  have  clamored  most  loudly  for  the  posses- 
sion of  the  Philippines.  Had  they  been  as  bar- 
ren as  Greenland  little  would  have  been  heard 

178 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AXD  INDUSTRIES  179 


of  the  policy  of  expansion  concerning  this  part 
of  the  world ; the  Pearl  might  have  gone  to  any 
one  who  wanted  it. 

That  wealth  or  property  lies  in  availability, 
rather  than  in  possession,  is  a proposition  which 
few  will  deny.  Robinson  Crusoe,  possessing  an 
island  and  sundry  doubloons  and  “pieces  of 
eight,”  indulged  in  some  very  sapient  comment 
upon  this  general  principle.  He  would  have 
swapped  the  whole  outfit  for  a Cape  Ann  dory 
with  a leg-o’-mutton  sail. 

That  many  of  the  islands  are  potentially  valu- 
able is  unquestionable.  But  there  is  little  in 
that  fact  which  makes  them  in  any  way  unique ; 
the  same  may  be  said  of  a very  large  area  of 
the  surface  of  the  earth.  It  is,  moreover,  a well- 
known  fact  that  the  great  wealth  of  the  world 
has  come  in  but  limited  measure  from  the  spots 
which  are  regarded  by  many  as  those  of  great- 
est fertility  and  productiveness.  Much  of  the 
world’s  wealth  has  come  from  brain  and  brawn 
contending  with  adverse  natural  conditions. 
Sterile  New  England,  with  its  long  period  of 
cold  and  snow,  has  done  infinitely  more  for  the 
world’s  wealth  and  well-being  than  has  sun- 
kissed  Cuba.  Barren  and  rocky  Sweden  lias 
added  more  to  the  world  than  has  fertile 
Turkey. 

Where  nature  is  bountiful  man  is  lazy.  A 
basic  proposition  in  political  economy  is  that 
man  will  gratify  his  needs  and  his  wants  with 


180 


TEE  PEILTPPIXES 


the  least  possible  outlay  of  energy.  Beyond  that 
nature  herself  raises  a barrier  which  has  never 
yet  been  thrown  down.  She  has  established  a 
physical  law  in  those  regions  of  her  greatest 
lavishness.  In  those  countries  upon  which  she 
showers  her  wildest  and  richest  profusion  of 
fruit  and  plant  and  root,  she  says  to  man, 
“ Thou  shalt  not.”  To  exercise  in  the  tropics 
the  industry  and  restless  energy  of  New  Eng- 
land, of  Ohio,  Illinois  and  Minnesota,  means 
physical  deterioration,  if  not  death.  The  native 
Filipino  can  work  in  the  flooded  rice-paddy 
under  a burning  sun ; the  American  cannot. 

The  probability  of  American  colonization  in 
the  islands  is  very  remote.  Even  were  it  possi- 
ble to  endure  the  exertion,  the  American  cannot 
and  will  not  compete  with  the  native  in  matter 
of  wages  or  in  profit  obtainable  from  small  hold- 
ings. The  wealth  of  the  few  may  be  profitably 
invested  here,  if  labor  conditions  can  be  success- 
fully controlled.  It  is  hard  to  see  where  the 
many  will  derive  any  benefit  whatever  from  the 
possession  of  the  islands.  It  will,  of  course,  be 
contended  that  the  market  for  American  prod- 
ucts will  be  extended,  and  thus  the  American 
wage-earner  be  benefited  indirectly.  This  may 
be  admitted,  but  there  are  a number  of  facts 
which  greatly  modify  the  general  proposition. 

Much  the  same  experience  was  encountered  in 
Cuba.  Enthusiasts  came  out  in  shiploads— and 
enthusiasts  returned  in  shiploads.  Some  went 


PEILIPPIXE  TRAPP  AXT)  IXDUS TRIPS  181 

home  disappointed,  decrying  the  whole  outlook : 
others,  dazzled  by  appearances  through  which 
they  did  not  seek  to  penetrate,  returned  to  paint 
Cuban  rainbows  for  the  edification  of  their 
friends.  There  also  was  the  curling  lip.  In 
time  these  countries  will  be  both  buyers  and 
sellers  far  beyond  their  present  average;  but 
their  development  will  be  normal  and  gradual. 

In  the  Philippines  again  one  finds  the  enthu- 
siast. He  is  less  abundant  than  in  the  West 
Indies,  because  it  costs  a pretty  penny  to  come 
out.  My  experience  has  been  that  the  greater 
the  enthusiasm  and  the  deeper  the  conviction, 
the  less  there  is  of  actual  cash  behind  it.  It 
is  usually  some  other  fellow’s  money  that  the 
enthusiast  wants  to  invest — less  a reasonable 
percentage  for  his  services  in  the  transaction. 
One  of  the  most  positive  of  the  tribe  among 
those  I met.  in  the  Orient  now  draws  a weekly 
stipend  from  the  proprietor  of  a bar-room. 

Much  has  been  said  of  mining  possibilities  in 
the  Philippines.  Gold,  silver  and  gems  are  said 
to  be  there  in  soul-satisfying  quantities.  Some 
excellent  authorities,  through  several  centuries 
of  time,  have  asserted  their  belief  in  the  mineral 
wealth  of  the  islands.  I do  not  know  why  gold 
should  not  be  there  in  vast  quantities.  It  has 
been  found  abundantly  in  Australia,  in  Mexico 
and  in  California,  and  these  places  are  only  six 
or  eight  thousand  miles  away.  That  gold  has 
not  yet  been  found  in  quantities  in  the  Philip- 


182 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


pines,  and  mines  developed,  does  not  argue  it 
to  be  non-existent.  The  special  puzzle  in  my 
mind  is  this:  The  Spaniards  have  been  a gold- 
hunting nation  for  some  four  hundred  years. 
They  have  struck  pay-gravel  in  many  places. 
It  seems  a bit  curious,  if  gold  be  as  abundant 
in  the  Philippines  as  some  persons  claim  it  to  be, 
that  these  keen  gold-hunters,  who  would  rather 
gamble  or  hunt  for  gold  than  raise  corn  and  pota- 
toes, should  not  have  got  on  a very  hot  trail  after 
it  years  ago.  Still,  it  may  be  there,  and  many  a 
man  will  probably  “ go  broke  ” in  hunting  for  it. 

The  real  wealth  of  the  islands  lies  in  what 
will  grow  out  of  their  soil  and  not  in  what  lies 
under  it,  just  as  the  wealth  of  California  and 
Australia  lies  in  their  ranches,  their  vineyards 
and  their  orchards.  Thus,  far  the  leading  com- 
mercial products  of  the  Philippines  have  been 
hemp,  tobacco  and  sugar  for  export,  with  rice 
for  domestic  consumption.  There  was  a time 
when  rice  was  exported  to  some  extent ; but  it 
is  now,  and  has  been  for  many  years,  an  article 
of  import,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  islands 
are  capable  of  a very  large  rice  crop.  Sugar 
and  tobacco  culture  are  both  capable  of  almost 
endless  extension.  But  thus  far  I have  been 
unable  to  see  any  marked  advantage  for  Ameri- 
can investors  in  sugar.  The  estimated  cost  of 
production  is  below  that  of  the  cost  in  Cuba, 
but  the  difference  in  freight  rates,  even  on  raw 
sugar,  would  almost  certainly  bar  the  Philippine 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  183 


product  from  competition  with  the  Cuban  in  the 
largest  market  in  the  United  States,  and  have 
little  or  no  advantage  over  the  Hawaiian  prod- 
uct on  the  Pacific  coast. 

The  extension  of  the  tobacco  industry  does 
not,  apparently,  depend  upon  the  production. 
Philippine  leaf  has  long  been  in  the  market.  It 
is  no  experiment.  Its  obstacle  would  seem  to 
be  the  taste  of  the  smokers.  It  has  not  thus 
far  proved  a popular  flavor,  and  there  is  little 
reason  to  look  for  any  radical  change,  unless  it 
arise  from  the  fact  that  American  soldiers  sent 
to  the  island  smoke  it  because  they  can  get 
nothing  else.  Many  will  get  used  to  it  and  per- 
haps come  to  like  it,  so  that  they  will  continue 
its  use  after  their  return  to  the  States. 

In  one  product,  and  as  yet  only  one,  the 
Philippines  lead  the  world.  Nowhere  else  has 
it  yet  been  found  possible  to  produce  a quality 
of  hemp  to  rival  that  grown  in  some  of  the 
Philippine  Islands. 

Yet  the  hemp  industry  is  not  one  of  any  stu- 
pendous proportions,  nor  is  it  one  which  is 
capable  of  indefinite  extension.  The  possibili- 
ties of  production  endlessly  outstrip  the  proba- 
bilities of  consumption,  and  this  fact  must  be 
taken  into  consideration  by  those  who  con- 
template investment  in  the  Philippines.  Thus 
far  little  or  no  use  has  been  found  for  hemp 
fiber  save  in  the  line  of  twine  and  cordage, 
although  it  probably  has  some  possibilities  in 


184 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  line  of  woven  cloths  for  special  purposes. 
These,  under  different  and  suitable  treatment  of 
the  fiber  from  its  initial  stages  onward,  may  yet 
be  developed,  though  there  are  no  immediate 
indications  of  any  possible  product  which  could 
compete  in  price  and  suitability  with  fabrics 
obtained  from  other  materials. 

The  annual  output  of  Manila  hemp,  using  that 
term  to  cover  the  product  of  the  various  islands, 
may  be  taken,  roundly,  as  a hundred  thousand 
tons,  which  is  probably  a fair  average  of  varying 
yearly  crops.  Its  value,  in  the  Manila  market, 
varies  according  to  grades  of  quality  and  the 
market  supply  on  hand  and  in  sight.  The  range 
is  from  forty-five  dollars  per  ton  for  low  grades 
in  full  market,  to  one  hundred  dollars  per  ton 
for  high  grades  in  short  market.  The  average 
total  value  of  the  product  may  be  taken  as, 
approximately,  eight  million  dollars.  Unless 
new  uses  can  be  found  for  the  material,  any 
very  great  increase  in  product  would  only  tend 
to  a reduction  in  price,  by  which  it  could  be 
brought  into  competition  with  materials  now 
used  as  a substitute  at  lower  figures.  The  loss 
would  thus  lie  with  the  producer,  unless  he  were 
saved  by  mechanical  processes  which  would 
lessen  the  producing  cost. 

The  methods  now  employed  in  growth  and 
manipulation  are  of  the  crudest.  The  plant 
from  which  the  material  is  obtained  belongs  to 
the  plantain  or  banana  family.  In  appearance 


PEILIPPIXE  TRADE  AXD  IXDESTRIES  185 


it  bears  a close  resemblance  to  the  source  of  the 
fruit  of  the  push-cart.  It  sends  up  a stout  trunk, 
or  stalk,  which  reaches  its  maturity  in  three  or 
four  years.  The  petioled  stalk  will  run  from  six 
to  eight  inches  for  an  average  diameter,  and  is 
crowned  with  the  long,  massive  and  arching 
leaves  which  are  now  familiar  through  illustra- 
tions. The  general  structure  of  the  corn-stalk 
will  serve  as  a suggestion  for  that  of  the  stem 
of  the  Musa  textilis,  though,  of  course,  very 
much  smaller.  There  is  the  central  body  of 
pith,  surrounded  by  filaments  embedded  in  a 
sappy,  vegetable  matter.  The  filaments  consti- 
tute the  hemp  of  commerce  and  their  extraction 
from  their  surroundings  constitutes  the  process 
of  hemp  production. 

Probably  much  the  greater  percentage  of 
hemp  is  obtained  by  a cooperative  system  in 
which  the  landowner  gets  a big  income  for 
doing  nothing,  while  the  peasant  gets  very  little 
for  doing  about  as  much  or  as  little  as  he  feels 
disposed  to  do.  From  first  to  last  the  work  is 
done  along  primitive  lines.  The  cutting  is  done 
with  a single  stroke  of  the  bolo,  the  local  knife, 
which  corresponds  to  the  Cuban  machete.  It 
is  a tool  in  peace  and  a weapon  in  war.  The 
fallen  stalk  is  stripped  of  the  fiber-bearing 
petioles,  which  are  cut  into  ribbons  of  five  or  six 
inches  in  width  and  of  the  length  determined 
by  their  growth.  The  next  succeeding  process 
is  the  one  in  which  there  is  demanded  the  genius 


186 


TIIE  PHILIPPINES 


of  the  inventor  to  devise  an  instrument  or 
chemical  process  by  which  the  sappy  vegetable 
matter  may  be  separated  from  the  fiber  without 
injury  to  the  latter.  Under  the  present  system, 
a rude  trestle  is  constructed,  supporting  a knife 
secured  by  a hinge  at  one  end,  while  the  other 
is  operated  by  the  upward  pull  of  a flexible  stick 
acting  as  a spring,  whose  force  is  counteracted 
by  attachment  to  a treadle  controlled  by  the 
foot  of  the  worker.  Thus  by  graduated  release 
and  pressure  the  operator  regulates  the  bearing 
force  of  the  knife  and  overcomes  inequalities 
of  thickness  in  the  petiole  upon  which  he  is 
working. 

The  effecting  of  an  economy  in  this  depart- 
ment is  of  greater  difficulty  than  is  apparent  to 
the  casual  observer.  The  obstacles  to  be  over- 
come are  mechanical,  chemical  and  economic. 
There  might  be  little  difficulty  in  the  construc- 
tion of  a machine  that  would  adjust  itself 
automatically  to  the  varying  thickness  of  the 
petiole  and  the  varying  tensile  strength  of  the 
fiber,  but  it  should  also  be  an  affair  of  ready 
portability  and  simplicity.  It  must,  too,  be  free 
from  danger  of  that  discoloration  of  the  sensi- 
tive fiber  to  which  it  is  excessively  liable  and 
which  lowers  its  market  value.  It  must  also  be 
able  to  compete  with  the  absurdly  low  rate  of 
wages  at  which  the  native  is  willing  to  work. 
At  present  a reasonably  diligent  laborer  may 
earn,  as  his  share  under  the  cooperative  system 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  187 


of  cutting  on  the  land  of  a proprietor,  a matter 
of  three  or  four  dollars  a week.  But  he  will  be 
better  satisfied  to  work  a little  and  loaf  a good 
deal  with  a return  of  a dollar  and  a half.  He 
probably  will  do  no  more  work  while  any  por- 
tion of  the  sum  remains. 

The  denuded  fiber  is  then  dried  and  is  ready 
for  the  market.  Local  buyers  usually  purchase 
this  product  in  the  small  lots  in  which  it  is 
offered  and  dispose  of  it  to  agents  of  the  Manila 
business  houses.  These  houses  are  chiefly  Eng- 
lish, and  although  the  United  States  is  a large 
purchaser,  it  makes  its  purchases  at  second  hand. 
The  enthusiastic  American  says  that  this  will 
soon  be  changed  and  all  the  business  go  through 
American  hands.  This  may  be,  but  the  enthu- 
siast is  disposed  to  overlook  such  a little  diffi- 
culty as  the  fact  that  the  trade  is  in  the  hands 
of  old  established  houses,  who  know  the  busi- 
ness, know  the  people  with  whom  they  have  to 
trade,  and  have  their  equipment  and  connec- 
tions. It  would  be  no  easy  matter  to  effect  a 
change. 

One  may  not  be  particularly  astonished  that 
hemp  should  be  grown  and  treated  by  primitive 
methods,  but  it  is  somewhat  surprising  to  see  it 
treated  in  Manila  warehouses,  for  export  ship- 
ment, by  a system  which  dates  back  to  Archi- 
medes and  Egypt.  The  material  arrives  in  the 
small  rough  bundles  in  which  it  is  packed  by 
the  peasant.  It  is  sorted  and  weighed  out  in 


188 


THE  miLIEPIXES 


lots  of  two  hundred  and  eighty  pounds  weight 
in  each,  for  baling.  These  lots  are  stowed  in 
roughly  made  cribs  and  are  then  trampled  down 
under  the  feet  of  a couple  of  active  men  who 
jump  and  dance  upon  it  until  the  suitable  quan- 
tity is  in  the  crib.  The  outfit  is  then  moved 
under  a rude  screw-press,  operated  by  four  men 
who  stand  upon  a platform  and  turn  the  screw 
by  capstan-bars.  This  effects  a partial  compres- 
sion. The  crib  is  then  moved  to  a second  and 
more  powerful  press,  also  a screw  operated  by 
capstan-bars.  This  affair  is  worked  by  some 
twenty  or  thirty  men.  When  this  gang  has 
reduced  the  mass  to  the  prescribed  size,  it  is 
bound  with  bamboo  withes,  the  screw-pressure 
is  released,  the  crib  knocked  away,  and  the  bale 
of  hemp  is  ready  for  marketing  and  shipment. 
There  may  be  some  special  reason  for  treating 
the  fiber  in  this  wav,  but  unless  there  be  such 
reason  the  process  could  be  greatly  simplified 
and  facilitated  by  any  one  of  a number  of 
American  compressors. 

Up  to  a certain  point  hemp-raising  presents 
opportunities  for  investment;  but  it  is  no  sure 
thing  and  obstacles  to  success  present  them- 
selves. Typhoons  may  blow  down  the  plants 
and  destroy  them,  and  the  labor  question,  as  in 
all  other  fields  here,  presents  its  own  difficulty 
for  the  planter  or  landowner. 

Like  Sea  Island  cotton  and  Yuelta  Abajo 
tobacco,  it  stands  almost  without  competition 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  189 


for  particular  uses.  Sisal  may  take  its  place  for 
certain  purposes  and  wire  rope  lias  been  per- 
manently substituted  for  it  for  many  other  pur- 
poses, but  there  is  no  immediate  probability  of 
Manila  hemp  being  crowded  out  of  the  market. 
Its  culture  and  development  by  improved  me- 
chanical processes  is  probably  the  most  encour- 
aging of  all  the  Philippine  industries. 

The  labor  question  is  one  of  exceeding  seri- 
ousness. The  American  cannot  work  in  the  Phil- 
ippines, and  the  native  will  not  labor  with  that 
degree  of  regularity  and  diligence  on  which 
commercial  and  industrial  success  so  largely 
depends.  The  industrious  Chinaman,  in  com- 
bination with  American  brains  and  American 
capital,  could  readily  turn  the  islands  into  a bee- 
hive of  production  and  profitable  industry ; but 
it  is  most  unlikely  that  those  of  the  present 
generation  will  live  to  see  that  combination 
played. 

The  wealth  of  the  Philippines  is  potential. 
Its  increase  and  development  depend  upon  fac- 
tors which  are  not  readily  available  and  not 
readily  controlled.  There  is  room  for  capital  if 
it  can  secure  labor  to  go  with  it.  The  man  of 
small  means  will  do  better  in  either  Cuba  or 
Porto  Rico,  and  he  will  do  quite  as  well  at 
home  as  he  will  in  either  one  of  them,  unless  he 
possesses  some  exceptional  qualifications  for 
the  life  of  a tropical  colonist. 

The  total  value  of  the  imports  of  the  Philip- 


190 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


pine  Islands  is  given,  for  normal  years,  at  an 
average  of  about  twenty  million  dollars  annu- 
ally. As  the  dollar  of  the  Philippines  is  of  sil- 
ver and  represents  a fluctuating  value  when 
compared  with  the  dollar  in  gold,  the  only  way 
of  obtaining  an  accurate  estimate  of  the  gold 
value  of  the  imports  would  be  by  the  conversion 
of  the  silver  into  the  gold  at  the  particular  date 
of  each  entry.  Up  to  1892  an  average  might  be 
struck  which  would  give  the  silver  a value  of 
about  eighty  cents  on  the  dollar.  Since  that 
time  it  has,  of  course,  been  much  under  that. 
The  years  preceding  1892  may  be  taken  as  a fair 
representation  of  normal  commercial  conditions 
and  the  gold  value  of  imports  at  that  time  may 
be  set  at  not  far  from  sixteen  million  dollars. 

I believe  this  to  be  an  outside  estimate  and  it 
is  probably  ample  enough  to  cover  a large  share 
of  those  irregularities  practised  here  by  im- 
porters, as  in  all  of  the  Spanish  custom-houses 
of  my  experience.  In  dealing  with  figures  of 
this  kind  one  encounters  in  the  Philippines  the 
same  difficulties  found  in  Cuba  and  in  Porto 
Rico.  Consular  reports  and  published  statistics 
are  all  at  variance,  sometimes  widely  so.  This 
may  be  accounted  for,  to  some  extent,  by  the 
fluctuations  of  silver  values,  and  perhaps  some- 
what by  consular  efforts  to  reconcile  import 
values  in  Spanish  ports  with  the  accounts  of 
export  values  from  the  port  of  shipment.  At 
all  events,  be  the  Philippine  import  trade  ten, 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  191 


fifteen  or  twenty  millions,  it  must  needs  be 
vastly  augmented  before  it  becomes  a business 
that  is  worth  any  very  great  commercial  struggle 
or  any  very  heavy  national  outlay.  It  merely 
approximates  the  import  business  of  the  little 
island  of  Porto  Bico  with  its  one  tenth  of  the 
Philippine  population. 

Enthusiasts  have  already  determined,  on 
paper,  that  the  islands  are  to  constitute  a desir- 
able market  for  some  of  the  surplus  products 
of  America.  Enthusiasm  and  a knowledge  that 
the  population  of  the  Philippines  is  generally  es- 
timated at  some  seven  or  eight  millions  are  an  in- 
adequate working  basis  for  the  decision  of  trade 
possibilities  here.  Unquestionably,  the  trade  of 
the  islands  can  be,  and  under  new  and  better 
conditions  will  be,  greatly  increased.  But  the 
average  American  leaves  certain  factors  out  of 
his  calculations.  It  is  not  usually  the  business 
man  with  goods  to  sell  who  reasons  after  that 
manner.  It  is  likely  to  be  the  man  who  knows 
but  little  of  commercial  processes  and  difficul- 
ties ; it  is  the  man  who  thinks  that  commercial 
transactions  consist  of  four  routine  processes — 
displaying  samples,  taking  orders,  receiving 
payment  and  making  a consequent  and  inevi- 
table profit.  The  man  with  the  goods  to  sell  sees 
it  all  in  another  light.  He  sees  such  minor 
contingencies  as  heavy  expenses  in  soliciting 
trade,  sharp  competition  in  prices  and  the  pos- 
sibility of  bad  debts. 


192 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


The  heaviest  item  of  Philippine  importation 
has  been  cotton  goods,  including  both  white  and 
prints.  Of  this  trade  the  United  States  has  as 
yet  obtained  a share  which  is  entirely  insignifi- 
cant-less than  one  third  of  one  per  cent,  of  the 
whole.  Spain  and  Great  Britain  have  held  the 
rest.  There  seems  little  probability  of  any  great 
change  in  that  department,  within  the  next  ten 
years  at  any  rate.  Article  4 of  the  Paris  Treaty 
reads  as  follows:  “For  the  period  of  ten  years, 
counting  from  the  exchange  of  ratifications  of 
this  treaty,  the  United  States  will  admit  Spanish 
ships  and  merchandise  into  the  Philippine  ports 
with  the  same  conditions  as  the  ships  and  mer- 
chandise of  the  United  States.”  England  must 
share  the  same  privilege,  under  the  “ most 
favored  nation  ” clause.  Some  grades  of  Ameri- 
can cotton  goods  may  find  an  increased  market, 
but  the  encouragement  is  trivial. 

Cotton  is  the  common  material  of  the  native 
costume,  whether  it  be  for  the  breech-clout  of 
the  semi-savage  or  the  more  elaborate  get-up  of 
the  Tagal  or  the  mestizo.  Linen  finds  a limited 
sale  and  woolen  a very  limited  market.  Native- 
made  fabrics  of  very  light  and  open  texture,  like 
the  pina  muslin  and  the  coarser  jusi,  find  wide 
usage.  To  supplant  these  in  the  native  garb 
would  involve  a revolution  in  native  fashions. 
That  will  probably  occur  at  about  the  same 
time  that  the  Ethiopian  changes  his  skin. 

Nor  is  the  market  for  flour  one  of  great  en- 


PHILIPPIXE  TRADE  AXD  IXDUSTRIES  193 


couragement.  The  mass  of  the  people  are  either 
semi-savage  or  impecunious  agriculturists.  A 
poor  man  who  can  raise,  by  his  own  industry, 
all  the  rice  that  is  needed  for  his  family,  is 
hardly  likely  to  squander  any  great  sum  in  the 
purchase  of  wheat  flour.  Eice  is  one  of  the 
staple  foods  of  the  masses.  The  islands  should 
raise,  and  in  the  past  have  raised,  it  for  export. 
Of  late  years  they  have  imported  large  quantities 
annually,  nearly  one  half  of  the  supply  in  fact. 
In  competition  with  native-grown  and  Eangoon 
and  Cochin  China  rice,  the  Louisiana  product 
can  have  no  chance.  At  the  present  time  rice 
is  selling  at  what  is  regarded  as  a very  high 
figure  by  reason  of  the  disturbed  conditions  and 
their  interference  with  local  production.  Saigon 
rice  is  quoted  at  four  dollars  and  a half  to  five 
dollars  (Mexican)  per  picul.  This  is  equivalent 
to  a little  more  than  one  and  three  quarter  cents 
the  pound  (American  money).  Quotations  on 
native  rice  are  fluctuating  at  all  times,  but  their 
ruling  in  normal  times  is  quite  below  this  figure. 
Even  free  of  duty,  wheat  flour  could  hardly  be 
laid  down  in  the  Philippines  at  double  the  cost 
of  rice.  Yet  some  flour  trade  will  undoubtedly 
be  developed. 

Coal  finds  some  use,  principally  for  consump- 
tion by  steam- vessels,  coasters  and  others.  Bar- 
iron  finds  a;  small  market,  and  there  is  some 
field  for  corrugated  iron  for  roofing  and  siding. 
The  old-fashioned  Spanish  tile  has  been  found 


194 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


dangerous  in  times  of  earthquakes  and  the  cor- 
rugated, galvanized-iron  sheets  are  used  instead. 
In  the  rural  districts  the  thatched  nipa  hut  will 
probably  hold  its  own  for  many  years  to  come. 
Lumber  is  found  in  amply  sufficient  quantities, 
and  a moderate  number  of  mills,  with  a capacity 
of  from  twelve  to  fifteen  thousand  feet  per  day, 
would  probably  find  a profitable  return  for  a cap- 
ital of  twenty  thousand  dollars.  Wide  currency 
has  been  given  to  reports  of  the  vast  extent  of 
forests  of  hard  wood,  which  offer  flattering  in- 
ducement to  lumbermen.  So  far  as  I know,  these 
reports  all  come  from  men  who  have  never  been 
in  the  lumber  business.  I have  not  been  in  it 
myself,  but  I spent  a number  of  years  in  suffi- 
ciently close  touch  with  it  to  learn  that  heavily 
wooded  hillside  and  valley  do  not  always  mean 
a profit  for  sawmills.  Wood  there  is,  and  much 
of  it,  but  its  possibilities  of  commercial  exploita- 
tion are  for  the  determination  of  expert  timber- 
hunters  and  men  who  have  “made  sawdust.” 
The  immediate  demand  for  our  Pacific  coast 
timber  is  not  likely  to  be  extensive. 

Kerosene  oil  is  one  of  the  heavy  exports  of  the 
United  States  to  the  East.  China  is  a heavy 
buyer  and  the  Philippine  trade  is  capable  of 
extension.  Its  lines  of  limitation  occur  in  the 
increase  of  electric  lighting  in  cities  and  in  the 
more  economic  use  of  the  locally  produced 
cocoanut-oil,  which,  though  it  does  not  produce 
a dazzling  glare,  serves  the  native  purpose  well 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  195 


enough.  There  is  also  the  matter  of  competition 
with  the  Baku  oil.  This  may  be  eliminated  by 
the  adjustment  of  “spheres  of  influence”  be- 
tween the  Baku  people  and  the  Standard  Oil 
Company. 

There  are  also  limitations  in  other  and  general 
lines,  which  will  only  be  affected  by  the  gradual 
development  of  what  are  regarded  as  steps  in 
civilization.  Some  market  may  ultimately  be 
found  for  rugs,  but  carpets  are  inherently  objec- 
tionable for  various  reasons.  I should  say  that 
ninety-five  per  cent,  of  the  people  now  go  bare- 
footed, though  many  of  them  have,  and  some- 
times use,  the  locally  made  sandals,  of  various 
patterns  and  material.  The  custom  of  going 
barefooted  finds  its  reasons  in  both  comfort  and 
economy  and  it  will  probably  be  many  years 
before  Lynn  and  Brockton  will  find  it  necessary 
to  run  overtime  in  order  to  keep  up  with  their 
Philippine  trade.  It  is  seldom  that  one  sees  a 
woman  wearing  a hat.  Some  men  go  bare- 
headed, some  wear  a twisted  cloth  and  some 
wear  hats;  but  the  hats  are  of  all  sorts  and 
kinds,  from  umbrella-like  structures  from  China 
to  a variety  of  locally  made  straws.  A modest 
trade  is  found  in  the  cities  in  the  sale  of  felts 
and  funny  little  “billycocks.”  Rubber  coats 
and  mackintoshes  are  uncomfortably  hot,  but 
there  ought  to  be  a good  market  for  ponchos, 
as  there  already  is  for  umbrellas. 

Beef  and  mutton  come  in  refrigerator-ships 


196 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


from  Australia.  Beef  is  quoted  at  about  twenty 
cents  per  pound,  American  money.  Grand 
Rapids  might  place  a moderate  amount  of  furni- 
ture, and  Chicago  should  find  market  for  lard 
and  butterine.  Soap  is  either  of  local  manufac- 
ture or  of  Spanish  importation.  Some  paint  is 
required,  but  the  bamboo  hut  and  the  nipa 
shack  limit  the  paint-market.  Bicycles  are 
useless  until  there  are  better  roads.  Saddles 
and  harness  of  local  make  will  undersell  the 
imported.  The  native  does  not  drink  much 
whisky,  and  the  islands  produce  their  own 
tobacco.  Beer — well,  as  for  beer,  we  must  wait 
and  see  the  results  of  American  education. 

In  thus  briefly  summarizing  the  Philippine 
demand  for  various  staples,  I fail  to  see  just 
where  there  is  room  for  the  enormous  increase 
in  commerce  which  some  assert  will  be  the  im- 
mediate result  of  American  occupation.  No 
nation  changes  its  customs,  its  habits,  its  needs 
or  its  desires,  simply  by  a change  of  government. 
Political  processes  may  facilitate  economic  pro- 
cesses, but  development  of  races  comes  by 
degrees.  South  Africa  and  the  Western  States 
have  grown  rapidly,  because  they  were  peopled 
by  those  who  brought  their  own  standard  of 
human  needs  and  wants  to  the  new  land  which 
they  were  to  occupy.  Filipino  life  must  be 
revolutionized  before  great  change  can  come  in 
its  possibilities  as  a market  for  American  prod- 
ucts. Local  industry  must  be  stimulated  and 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  197 


local  production  must  be  increased.  The  people 
must  have  money  to  spend  and  they  must  greatly 
increase  the  range  of  things  for  which  they  wish 
to  spend  it.  Generations  of  so  primitive  and 
simple  a life  as  that  of  the  Filipinos  and  habits 
formed  under  a life  which  presents  itself  under 
the  easiest  and  simplest  of  conditions  are  not 
liable  to  sudden  and  radical  alteration  simply 
as  a result  of  new  political  conditions. 

Philippine  trade  conditions  will  be  developed 
and  improved.  That  is  inevitable.  But  I can 
see  no  ground  upon  which  to  rest  any  beliefs  or 
hopes  that  the  mere  flying  of  the  American  flag 
will  immediately  change  customs  and  natures 
which  are  the  result  of  three  centuries  of  Span- 
ish rule  and  the  effect  of  life  under  a tropical 
sun.  New  life  must  come  in  or  the  old  life  be 
awakened  to  new  motive  and  new  purpose,  to 
wholly  new  accomplishment,  before  any  “ boom  ” 
may  be  expected  in  the  Philippine  Islands. 

I believe  that  there  is  but  one  wise  view  to 
take  of  the  Philippine  Islands  as  a field  for  com- 
mercial exploitation.  That  view  is  the  strictly 
conservative.  To  the  sanguine  and  the  enthusi- 
astic this  seems  pessimistic ; but  enthusiasm  is  a 
poor  working  basis  for  commercial  enterprise. 
It  is  supposed  to  be  a patriotic  sort  of  thing  to 
paint  these  islands  in  glowing  colors  as  a place  of 
endless  value,  of  untold  wealth.  But  patriotism 
is  patriotism,  and  business  is  business.  Too 
much  of  general  confidence  is  placed  in  the 


198 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


statements  of  men  whose  business  judgment  is 
not  competent,  though  they  may  be  good  law- 
yers or  soldiers,  or  successful  politicians.  Does 
some  reader  come  back  at  me  and  say  that  the 
business  judgment  of  a correspondent  is  equally 
questionable?  I was  a newspaper  man  pro  tern. 
My  training  and  experience  have  been  in  com- 
mercial lines  for  twenty-five  years. 

The  basis  of  industrial  development  in  any 
country  is  facility  of  transportation  and  eco- 
nomical distribution.  Luzon  has  one  hundred 
and  thirty  miles  of  railroad,  running  northward 
from  Manila  to  Dagupan,  through  a richly  fertile 
valley.  Thus  far  it  has  been  a failure  as  an 
investment.  Sixty  miles  of  the  southern  end 
traverse  a low-lying  and  often  swampy  coun- 
try,  which  diking  and  ditching  turn  into  pro- 
ductive rice-fields.  The  rice  is  for  home 
consumption,  and,  in  spite  of  the  miles  and  miles 
•of  cultivation,  the  production  is  barely  more 
than  half  of  the  consumption  throughout  the 
islands.  Northward  of  the  rice  area  of  this  val- 
ley there  is  a higher  ground  with  a considerable 
production  of  sugar.  From  here  northward 
sugar  and  tobacco  are  the  productive  crops,  with 
rice  for  local  consumption. 

The  Manila-Dagupan  Valley  is  drained  south- 
ward into  Manila  Bay  by  the  Bio  Grande  de 
Pampanga,  and  northward  by  the  Agno  River 
into  Lingayen  Gulf.  These  streams  are  naviga- 
ble, except  in  very  dry  seasons,  by  the  native 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  199 


crafts  used  for  river  freighting.  The  territory 
to  the  northward  is  a point  of  discussion  by 
many  who  wish  they  had  money  enough  to  build 
a railroad  up  the  west  coast  to  Laoag  and  from 
there  eastward  across  the  mountains  to  Aparri. 
Others  go  further  and  extend  their  line  south- 
ward, along  the  course  of  the  Bio  Grande  de 
Cagayan,  to  cross  the  divide  somewhere  in  the 
vicinity  of  Caranglan,  and  tap  the  present  line 
at  about  Calumpit,  via  the  valley  of  the  Eio 
Grande  de  Pampanga.  That,  on  a map  and  in 
a speculator’s  mind,  would  make  a very  pretty 
loop-line  between  five  and  six  hundred  miles  in 
length.  Of  course  it  would  be  quite  desirable 
to  have  a few  branches,  some  to  run  up  tributary 
valleys  and  one  to  touch  the  east  coast  at  Baler. 
A thousand-mile  railroad  would  probably  be 
about  the  proper  thing. 

Such  a road  would  traverse  and  open  up 
many  thousands  of  square  miles  of  fertile  terri- 
tory. But  there  is  another  side  to  it  as  a busi- 
ness proposition.  Let  us  consider  the  present- 
situation.  A very  large  percentage  of  the  arable 
land  is  already  under  cultivation  for  the  main- 
tenance of  a people  who  want  very  little,  get 
about  what  they  want  and  are  entirely  satis- 
fied with  it.  Almost  the  entire  territory  is  now 
open  to  water  communication.  For  about  one 
half  the  year  this  is  unavailable  from  lack  of 
suitable  harborage  during  the  time  of  the  mon- 
soons. But  their  products,  sugar  and  tobacco, 


200 


TEE  PHILIPPINES 


are  not  immediately  perishable  and  can  be  held 
until  shipment  is  possible.  A railroad  would 
make  shipment  possible  at  any  time. 

The  government  might  build  a railroad  for 
the  benefit  and  education  of  its  new  “savage” 
citizens,  but  the  capitalist  will  go  into  figures. 
What  will  it  cost  and  what  dividends  will  it 
pay?  The  road,  with  side-tracks  and  a few 
necessary  short  feeders,  would  not  be  much 
under  eight  hundred  miles  in  length  for  a mini- 
mum. Its  route  would  cross  two  mountain- 
ranges,  rough  in  character  and  of  considerable 
altitude,  probably  fifteen  hundred  to  two  thou- 
sand feet  at  crossing.  Innumerable  streams, 
which  during  the  times  of  rain  turn  into  tor- 
rents, would  necessitate  the  construction  of 
innumerable  strong  bridges.  Six  or  eight 
cities,  having  populations  of  from  six  to  ten 
thousands  each,  might  be  touched  along  the 
route.  Rails  and  rolling  stock  must  be  brought 
out.  Chinese  labor  could  be  used  economically 
in  grading  and  construction ; but  such  a road 
could  not  be  built  and  equipj^ed  for  less  than 
$25,000  per  mile,  probably  would  not  be  so  built 
and  equipped  at  less  than  $40,000  and  might  go 
up  to  $60,000.  Here  is  an  almost  impossible 
minimum  of  $20,000,000  of  actually  invested 
capital,  with  a possible  $48,000,000  at  the  other 
end.  Who  bids  for  this  glorious  opportunity  to 
run  a railroad  through  the  greatest  extent  of 
fertile  territory  in  Luzon  ? Where  is  the  profit 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  201 

of  from  $600,000  to  $1,000,000  a year  to  come 
from  to  pay  a three-per-cent,  dividend  ? Cut  the 
proposition  in  two  and  stop  the  road  at  Aparri. 
There  still  remains  the  fact  that  unless  the  road 
be  run  for  amusement,  at  a tremendous  annual 
loss,  the  freight  rates  must  needs  be  placed  so 
high  that  shippers  could  not  afford  to  use  the 
line  at  all.  I am  not  a railroad  expert,  but 
these  are  simple  figures  and  need  no  expert 
knowledge. 

Let  us  now  look  southward  from  Manila. 
There  is  a long  and  roughly  broken  mountain- 
range  running  three  hundred  miles  or  more 
southeastward  through  Laguna,  Tayabas,  North 
and  South  Camarines,  Albay  and  Sorsogon 
provinces,  to  the  Straits  of  San  Bernardino.  I 
think  I should  want  about  $100,000  per  mile  for 
that  contract.  A road  built,  winding  up  and 
down,  through  and  around  those  hills  and 
mountains,  would  give  an  opportunity  for  a trip 
that  would  be  one  continuous  dream  of  loveli- 
ness. It  would  give  a panorama  of  scenic  beauty 
beyond  description.  Hills,  mountains,  valleys, 
tropical  verdure,  gulfs,  bays,  rivers,  streams 
and  the  vast  Pacific  Ocean  would  form  a part 
of  its  advertising  capital  for  the  tourist  travel. 
But  when  that  utterly  prosaic  duffer  who  spends 
his  time  raising  the  finest  hemp  in  the  world 
wants  to  send  his  hemp  to  market,  he  would 
send  it  by  a prosaic  and  probably  dirty,  but 
economical,  cargo-boat.  His  hemp  would  not 


202 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


care  enough  about  seeing  the  scenery  to  pay  the 
necessary  rates. 

The  city  of  Manila  could  well  stand  an  im- 
provement and  extension  in  its  street-railway 
system.  The  present  murderously  overworked 
ponies  should  be  exchanged  for  trolley-wires. 
The  line  should  be  extended  southward  through 
Pasay,  Paranaque,  Las  Pinas,  Bakoor,  and  so  on 
around  to  Cavite.  It  could  be  advantageously 
extended  in  the  suburbs  in  other  directions.  A 
good  return  might  reasonably  be  expected  from 
a considerable  system.  An  adequate  service 
would  find  liberal  patronage.  But  I have  a sort 
of  idea  that  the  scheme  is  already  well  in  hand. 
A small  suburban  system  might  also  prove  a 
good  investment  in  the  vicinity  of  Iloilo.  But 
I know  of  no  other  point  in  the  islands  where 
any  railroad,  steam  or  electric,  offers  any  glaring 
attractions  to  investors. 

But  a railroad  is  by  no  means  of  vital  impor- 
tance in  the  industrial  development  of  the  Phil- 
ippines, though  it  might  be  a great  convenience 
and  a desirable  object-lesson  to  the  inhabitants. 
The  fertile  river  valleys  and  the  rich  lands  of 
the  coast-line  are  readily  accessible  by  water, 
and  water  routes  are  known  to  be  economical 
transportation  lines.  One  need  not  hesitate  to 
go  into  sugar,  or  hemp,  or  tobacco,  or  coffee,  or 
cattle,  or  anything  else,  except  timber,  in  the 
Philippines  through  trouble  or  cost  of  getting 
his  product  to  market.  I except  timber.  I 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  203 


realize  that  in  doing  so  I touch  upon  one  of  the 
Philippine  products  most  lauded  for  its  golden 
promise.  I have  heard  farmers,  and  lawyers, 
and  politicians,  and  naturalists,  and  soldiers, 
and  beer  men,  and  tobacco  men,  and  dry-goods 
men  and  one  or  two  newspaper  men,  tell  all 
about  the  timber  resources  of  Luzon  and  other 
islands.  I am  waiting  to  hear  from  some  old 
timberman  who  has  made  sawdust  in  a moun- 
tain country.  For  several  years  I was  in  pretty 
close  touch  with  some  loggers  and  sawmills  in 
the  Blue  Eidge  Mountains.  I saw  there,  as  I 
see  here,  hills  and  mountains  densely  wooded  to 
their  summits.  I saw  hundreds  of  thousands  of 
dollars  go  into  that  country.  I saw  logs  and 
boards  go  out.  I have  heard  a good  many  mill 
men  use  bad  words  over  vanishing  capital.  I 
shall  be  quite  conservative  over  the  vast  re- 
sources and  mighty  profits  of  the  timber  busi- 
ness here  until  I hear  the  testimony  of  a few  men 
whose  business  it  is  to  “ see  into  a tree,”  and 
who  can  properly  estimate  the  cost  of  cutting, 
hauling  and  a few  other  things  that  have  to  be 
done  in  the  timber  business. 

I believe  it  is  Mr.  Barrett  who  advises  young 
men  not  to  come  to  the  Philippines  for  a liveli- 
hood unless  they  have  at  least  three  thousand 
dollars  of  capital.  I would  like  to  ask  Mr.  Bar- 
rett to  publish  a list  of  all  the  names  of  the 
young  men  of  his  acquaintance  who  have  gone 
to  Ceylon,  to  Java,  to  Siam,  to  Sumatra,  to 


204 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Borneo  and  other  lands  in  that  neighborhood 
presenting  similar  conditions  to  those  found  in 
the  islands.  I would  like  to  see  that  list  checked 
off  to  indicate  the  number  of  three-thousand- 
dollar  capitalists  in  those  parts  of  the  world 
who  have  made  enough  to  pay  them  for  all  that 
they  left  behind,  and  the  number  of  those  who 
have  “ gone  broke  ” unless  they  could  draw  con- 
siderable additional  sums  from  home.  My  own 
minimum  figure  would  be  ten  thousand  dollars 
and  I would  advise  second  thoughts  even  at  that. 

With  conditions  of  equal  if  not  of  greater 
promise  in  the  West  Indies,  I do  not  think  that 
“young  men  with  three  thousand  dollars”  are 
going  out  to  the  Philippines  in  any  great  crowds. 
Those  who  do  contemplate  such  a course  should 
keep  in  mind  two  or  three  things  which  are  facts. 
Outside  of  government  positions,  salaried  situa- 
tions are  harder  to  find  than  they  are  at  home. 
Now  and  then  some  one  strikes  a speculative 
snap,  but  these  are  exceedingly  rare,  especially 
those  which  are  strictly  honest.  General  com- 
mercial business,  particularly  in  retail  lines,  is, 
like  that  of  the  West  Indies,  in  the  hands  of 
those  who  know  their  business,  their  customers, 
the  language  and  the  wants  of  the  people  far 
better  than  any  American  new-comer.  These 
merchants  can  and  will  live  in  ways  which  no 
American  with  three  thousand  dollars  would 
accept.  If  a man  gets  stranded  he  is  a long  way 
from  home  and  in  a very  deep  hole. 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  205 


The  special  opportunities  are  in  production. 
A few  lines  of  petty  manufacture  may  he  open, 
but  in  such  lines  the  young  American  is  handi- 
capped by  the  native  workman,  either  at  a trade 
or  as  proprietor  of  a small  shop.  In  lines  of 
agriculture,  in  sugar,  hemp,  coffee,  indigo, 
tobacco  and  the  like,  it  is  to  be  remembered 
that  time  is  to  be  taken  into  account.  Beyond 
the  necessary  capital  for  investment  there  must 
be  resources  upon  which  one  can  live  for  two, 
three,  four  or  five  years.  Sugar  is  wholly  out 
of  the  question  for  all  save  the  capitalist  with 
hundreds  of  thousands  at  his  command.  In 
work  on  a small  scale  in  hemp,  tobacco,  coffee, 
copra  or  any  other  local  product,  it  will  be  im- 
possible for  the  American  to  compete  with  the 
native. 

The  industrial  development  of  the  Philippines 
is  work  for  the  capitalist,  and  the  pertinent 
question  follows:  Will  the  capitalist  improve 
his  opportunities?  The  cheerful  enthusiast, 
who  seldom  has  any  money  for  investment, 
asserts  vociferously  that  under  the  benign 
shadow  of  the  starry  banner  the  Philippines 
will  at  once  begin  to  assume  the  aspect  of  a 
modern  financial  Garden  of  Eden;  that  Manila 
is  to  become,  within  a brief  decade,  the  chief 
commercial  emporium  of  the  East,  and  the 
Pacific  Ocean  a highway  thickly  dotted  with 
ships  of  trade  coming  to  and  returning  from 
these  blessed  islands.  How  absurd  this  exag- 


206 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


geration  looks  when  printed ! Yet  I have  heard 
men  urge  these  propositions.  The  preliminary 
report  of  the  commission  falls  but  little  short 
of  them  and  indicates  a lack  of  business  judg- 
ment on  the  part  of  those  who  prepared  it. 

Sound  business  develops  normally  along  nor- 
mal lines.  The  Philippines  are  new  territory  to 
Americans,  but  they  are  not  new  territory  to 
nations  that  have  known  them  and  traded 
with  and  on  them  for  decades.  England,  Spain, 
France,  Germany,  and  even  little  Portugal  and 
Holland,  have  been  in  business  in  the  Orient  for 
a number  of  years.  It  is  my  opinion  that  the 
Philippines  will  find  such  development  as  may 
come  to  them  through  foreign  rather  than 
through  American  capital.  The  investors  of 
England  and  the  Continent  must  go  abroad  for 
their  investment.  They,  and  not  the  Americans, 
have  developed  Australia  and  Borneo,  India  and 
Ceylon,  Java,  Sumatra  and  all  else  in  the  East. 

Undoubtedly  bamboo  is  the  most  important 
wood  in  the  country,  and  yet  it  is  not  a wood 
at  all.  It  is  the  material  more  used  than  any 
other  and  for  a greater  number  of  purposes.  It  is 
used  for  building  houses,  bridges,  fences,  and  for 
repairing  roads.  It  is  made  into  beds  and 
chairs  and  tables,  into  hats  and  baskets  and 
mats.  It  is  used  in  a thousand  common  and  un- 
common ways.  It  makes  a fishing-rod  or  a 
flagpole  or  the  shoulder-pole  by  which  the 
coolie  carries  his  load.  It  makes  a water-jug  or 


PHILIP  PTXE  TRADE  AXD  IXD  US  TRIES  207 


a scaffoldings  for  the  erection  of  a four-story 
building.  It  is  a provision  of  nature  for  endless 
uses  and  it  grows  in  endless  quantity,  almost 
at  every  Filipino’s  back  door,  if  it  does  not  form 
the  shade  of  his  front  door  or  a hedge  of  forty 
feet  in  height  around  his  hut. 

One  may  do  a good  bit  of  prowling  around 
the  Binondo  and  other  districts  of  Manila  with- 
out realizing  the  extent  of  the  woodworking 
industry  of  the  place.  Courses  that  were  once 
streams  through  swampy  meadow-land  are  now 
practically  canals,  muddy  and  often  sewer-like, 
through  the  wards  of  the  new  city  which  sur- 
rounds the  walls  of  old  Manila.  Certain 
stretches  of  these  canals  are  filled  with  logs, 
bound  together,  raft-like.  Piles  of  logs  upon  the 
banks  at  once  suggest  to  the  observer  the  pres- 
ence of  sawmills,  and  he  listens  for  the  buzzing 
of  the  saw  and  the  sound  of  the  moving  carriage 
as  it  runs  the  log  forward  against  the  flying 
teeth ; but  the  sounds  are  not  there.  One  looks 
for  a smoke-stack  which  will  indicate  an  engine 
and  boiler  to  drive  a saw;  but  there  is  no 
stack.  Yet  there  are  logs — sawlogs — up  to  fif- 
teen and  eighteen  inches  in  diameter  and  here 
and  there  a larger  one.  There  are  the  logs,  and 
in  large,  shed-like  buildings  there  are  boards, 
planks  and  joists.  There  must  be  a connection 
between  the  two. 

Somewhere  around  these  buildings  you  will 
find  perhaps  one,  perhaps  several,  of  those  logs 


208 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


mounted  on  trestles  some  two  feet  jin  height  and 
strongly  built.  The  log  is  held  in  position  by 
pegs  driven  down  into  the  top  of  the  trestle. 
The  log  has  been  cleaned  and  marked  with  lines. 
The  lines  are  guides  for  the  sawyers  and  the 
spaces  between  the  lines  show  the  thickness  of 
the  boards  to  be  cut.  The  sawing  is  done  by 
hand,  two  men  operating  a saw,  dragging  it 
back  and  forth.  The  saw  is  a light,  narrow 
blade  carried  in  a rectangular  oblong  frame. 
One  can  but  wonder  what  these  chaps  would 
say  to  see  an  American  double-band  sawmill  pile 
up  one  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  feet  of  lumber 
in  a day’s  work.  Board-making  is  certainly  a 
slow  job  in  the  Philippines. 

Suppose  the  wood  being  cut  to  be  cedar  for 
the  making  of  cigar-boxes.  Hundreds  of  thou- 
sands are  required  annually.  An  American 
novelty  wood-works  would  be  fitted  with  resaws, 
gang  circular  saws,  band-saws,  table-saws,  pony- 
planers  and  sandpapering-machineSo  A rapid 
and  systematic  routine  would  turn  the  log  into 
piles  of  small  pieces  of  all  the  requisite  sizes  and 
shapes  for  tops,  sides  and  ends.  Any  one  of 
scores  of  American  woodworking  concerns  would 
make  in  a few  months  all  of  the  millions  of 
cigar-boxes  that  Manila  would  use  in  years.  In 
the  Philippines  the  wood  is  all  sawed  down  by 
tedious  hand  processes,  and  one  may  see  half- 
naked  Chinamen  doing,  as  a last  process,  that 
which  the  American  would  have  done  among 


PHILIPPINE  TRADE  AND  INDUSTRIES  209 


the  first.  I stood  in  a doorway  and  watched  a 
row  of  these  chaps  at  work.  Each  sat  on  a 
sloping  bench  some  four  feet  long  and  dropping 
from  an  eighteen-inch  elevation  at  one  end  to 
about  twelve  inches  at  the  other.  Beside  each 
was  another  low  bench,  upon  which  were  little 
piles  of  pieces  sawed  down  to  the  sizes  required 
for  the  different  parts  of  a cigar-box. 

These  pieces  were  to  be  planed,  one  little 
piece  at  a time,  upon  both  sides.  The  Chinaman 
sat  at  the  upper  end  of  the  bench,  placed  one  of 
the  little  slabs  against  a chock  on  the  top  of 
the  bench  a little  way  in  front  of  him,  lifted  a 
foot  and  clapped  his  heel  upon  the  piece  to  keep 
it  in  position,  and  scraped  away  with  an  awkward 
little  plane  requiring  the  use  of  both  hands.  To 
do  this  an  arm  extended  upon  either  side  of  the 
upbent  leg,  underneath  which  the  work  was 
done.  It  was  scrape,  scrape,  scrape  until  one 
side  was  dressed,  and  then  the  slab  was  turned 
for  the  same  process  on  the  other  side.  On  the 
floor  in  another  room  sat  another  Chinaman 
putting  these  pieces  together.  From  beginning 
to  end,  it  was  all  a slow,  tedious  and  apparently 
an  expensive  process;  yet  when  one  figures 
labor  at  its  probable  cost  of  little  if  anything 
over  twenty-five  cents  per  day,  it  is  perhaps  not 
so  expensive  after  all. 

Watching  this  and  other  woodworking  pro- 
cesses, the  manufacture  of  camphor- wood  chests, 
various  articles  of  furniture  and  the  many  other 


210 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


purposes  for  which  wood  is  used  in  small  pieces, 
one  is  struck  with  the  idea  that  a novelty  wood- 
works could  hardly  fail  of  being  a highly  profit- 
able enterprise.  Yet  it  is  somewhat  doubtful  if 
it  would  be  quite  the  success  which  one  so  easily 
imagines.  It  would  involve,  at  least,  skilled  or 
half-skilled  labor  for  the  operation  of  some  of 
the  machines.  A bright  boy  quickly  learns  to 
run  wood  over  a table-saw,  but  lathework  needs 
a trained  man.  Skill  and  judgment  are  needed 
for  many  processes.  All  this,  however,  could 
be  easily  overcome.  The  more  serious  question 
would  be  the  possibility  of  getting  enough  busi- 
ness to  keep  the  place  going.  Profit  in  wood- 
working lies  in  keeping  the  machinery  active. 
The  field  is  one  of  considerable  extent  and  I 
should  be  disposed  to  advise  its  investigation  by 
a limited  number.  Cabinet-work,  store-,  office- 
and  bar-fitting,  doors,  cigar  and  other  boxes, 
and  kindred  lines,  present  some  field  for  Ameri- 
can enterprise  in  the  Philippines. 

The  possibility  of  success  in  boring  for  oil  or 
in  mining  it  is  useless  to  discuss.  What  lies 
hidden  in  the  ground  is  not  known;  what  it 
would  cost  to  get  it  out  of  the  ground  is  even 
more  indefinite.  Coal,  iron,  copper,  gold  and 
oil  are  all  found  in  the  islands.  The  possibility 
of  the  successful  exploitation  of  any  one  of 
them  is  a matter  for  practical  investigation  by 
capitalists  and  experts. 


XII 

THE  MOTION  OF  MINDANAO 

A mysterious  island— Zamboanga— The  Calle  de  la  Marina— 
American  occupation  of  Zamboanga— The  request  of  the 
people— An  official  delegation— A letter  from  a datto— 
Cottabatto— A close  shave— Davao— Datto  Mandi— Pala- 
wan— Polygamy  and  slavery — Future  relations  with  the 
Moros. 

FOUR  hundred  miles  southward  from  Manila 
there  lies  the  great  island  of  Mindanao,  vast, 
wild  and  semi-mysterious.  For  three  hundred 
years  Spain  fought  for  its  conquest  and  secured 
but  a foothold  upon  its  margin,  with  precarious 
filamentary  lines  of  occupation  toward  its  inte- 
rior along  the  courses  of  the  Rio  Grande  and 
the  Butuan  rivers.  The  recorded  history  of 
Mindanao  consists  chiefly  of  military  reports  of 
Spanish  operations,  supplemented  by  some 
accounts  of  the  efforts  of  Roman  Catholic  mis- 
sionaries to  effect  a religious  establishment. 
Spain  made  vigorous  attempts,  with  but  limited 
success,  to  colonize  the  island,  particularly  upon 
its  northern  coast,  by  emigration  from  the  Vi- 
sayan  Islands,  which  lie  at  varying  distances  of 

211 


212 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


from  twenty  to  fifty  miles  across  the  bay  to  the 
northward. 

From  the  northwestern  corner  of  the  island 
there  extends  an  arm  which,  dropping  south- 
ward, forms  the  peninsula  of  Zamboanga.  Near 
its  southern  tip,  Spain  maintained  a military 
post  established  some  two  hundred  years  ago. 
A well-built  stone  fort  stands  just  outside  the 
town.  Across  the  strait,  on  the  island  of  Basilan, 
the  port  of  Isabella  was  used  as  a naval  station, 
second  in  importance  only  to  that  at  Cavite, 
near  Manila.  Probably  owing  to  the  presence 
of  the  Spanish  garrison,  there  had  sprung  up  in 
Zamboanga  a considerable  settlement  of  Chinese, 
Tagals  and  Yisayans.  Upon  the  outbreak  of 
the  last  insurrection  the  Zamboanganians  took 
the  part  of  those  whom  they  called  their  “bro- 
thers in  the  north.”  They  also  stayed  with 
their  brethren  in  the  conflict  with  the  United 
States  later. 

The  peninsula  of  Zamboanga  is  practically  a 
range  of  hill  and  mountain,  with  small  tracts 
and  limited  areas  of  level  lands  along  the  coast. 
One’s  first  sight  of  the  land  in  sailing  southward 
from  Manila  is  in  the  vicinity  of  Point  Sindan- 
gan,  about  a hundred  miles  from  the  city  of 
Zamboanga.  From  Point  Santa  Maria,  fifty 
miles  north  of  Zamboanga,  the  course  takes  a 
vessel  quite  near  to  the  shore,  and  the  densely 
wooded  hillsides  of  the  coast,  fringed  with  the 
cocoanut-palms,  are  clearly  visible  from  the 


THE  MOB  OS  OF  MINDANAO 


213 


deck.  Rounding  Point  Botalampon,  one  enters 
the  straits  of  Basilan,  through  which  passes  the 
ocean  highway  for  ships  trading  between  China, 
Japan  and  Australia. 

Ten  miles  north  of  the  land’s  point,  the  hills 
and  mountains  drop  away  into  a broad  stretch 
of  level  land,  some  of  which  is  swamp,  while 
some  is  cocoanut-grove.  Upon  the  southwest- 
ern border  of  this  level  land  there  lies  the  old 
Spanish  town  of  Zamboanga,  settled,  I think,  in 
1635.  There  is  no  real  harbor,  anchorage  being 
made  in  a roadstead  of  strong  tide  current  and 
sheltered  from  wind  and  water  only  by  two 
small  islands,  Great  Santa  Cruz  and  Little  Santa 
Cruz.  North  of  the  town  there  used  to  be,  and 
there  soon  again  will  be,  a Moro  settlement  of 
huts  and  houses,  many  of  them  built  on  slender 
piles  out  over  the  water.  Scores  of  the  light 
and  graceful  Moro  boats  ( vintas ) are  drawn  up 
on  the  shore.  Two  piers  extend  from  the  shore 
in  front  of  the  city.  The  northerly  one  is  of 
some  pretentiousness,  built  of  masonry,  but  of 
little  practical  use  because  of  shallow  water. 
The  other  is  a rather  tumble-down  affair  of  wood 
with  a little  greater  depth  of  water  at  its  end. 

Parallel  with  the  shore  and  in  front  of  the 
houses  whose  rear  gardens  show  from  the  water- 
side, there  runs  the  principal  street  of  the  place, 
Calle  de  la  Marina,  which  will  very  likely 
some  day  be  Americanized  into  "Water  Street. 
When  the  town  is  cleared  up  it  will  be  a pretty 


214 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


street.  Zamboanga  has  the  working  foundation 
for  a most  attractive  little  place.  Through  the 
middle  of  the  Calle  de  la  Marina  runs  a little 
stream  some  twelve  or  fifteen  feet  in  width. 
Along  its  borders  are  fine  large  shade-trees,  and 
it  is  crossed  at  short  intervals  by  graceful 
bridges.  The  whole  effect  is  a pretty  picture 
and  some  of  the  bits  of  play  of  light  and  shade 
are  exceedingly  artistic.  The  street  really  runs 
from  the  fort  on  the  south  to  a point  above  the 
town,  a mile  or  more  in  length.  Inshore  from 
it  are  two  other  streets  running  parallel  with 
this,  all  being  crossed  by  others  at  right  anglers. 
Along  these  streets  are  two-storied  houses,  most 
of  them  an  upper  story  of  wood  built  upon  a 
lower  story  of  masonry. 

Behind  all  this  is  a broad  tract  which  shows 
evidence  of  having  been  burned  over.  It  was 
formerly  the  home  of  the  “ masses,”  the  people 
of  the  village.  It  was  a town  of  nipa  and  bam- 
boo huts.  At  the  time  of  the  Spanish  evacua- 
tion all  were  burned.  The  native  people  were 
at  war  with  the  Spaniards,  and  the  embarking 
Spaniards  feared  the  shots  which  might  come 
from  these  huts.  They  therefore  set  fire  to  all 
the  tents,  thus  leaving  behind  them  a clear 
space  across  which  a small  guard  could  main- 
tain a protecting  fire  while  the  main  body  and 
the  possessions  which  were  to  go  with  them 
were  moved  on  board  the  ships.  That  destroyed 
a large  part  of  the  town.  After  the  Spaniards 


THE  MOBOS  OF  MINDANAO 


215 


had  gone,  the  local  people  came  in  and  did  much 
damage  on  their  own  account  to  the  buildings 
formerly  occupied  by  the  Spanish  civil,  military 
and  religious  officials.  It  is  said  that  they 
sought  treasure  of  plate,  etc.,  which  they  thought 
the  Spaniards  might  have  hidden.  Few  build- 
ings in  the  whole  place  were  left  really  habitable 
after  both  sides  had  had  a crack  at  it. 

During  the  course  of  the  disturbances  between 
the  local  people  and  the  Spaniards,  the  Moros, 
several  thousand  in  number,  under  the  leader- 
ship of  Datto  Mandi,  had  scattered.  Mandi, 
with  the  larger  number  of  his  followers,  moved 
to  the  island  of  Sacol,  some  ten  miles  away. 
Their  village,  near  Zamboanga,  was  almost 
entirely  destroyed.  The  market  of  Zamboanga 
was  burned  to  the  ground.  The  church,  an 
unimposing  edifice  of  some  size,  was  but  little 
damaged.  Little  harm  came  to  the  leading  offi- 
cial residences.  The  walls  of  the  fort  could  not 
be  hurt,  but  most  of  its  interior  wooden  buildings 
were  knocked  to  pieces  or  burned.  When  the 
American  troops  landed  there  on  November  17, 
1899,  the  first  military  occupation,  the  place  was 
a scene  of  desolation,  a rank  and  weed-grown 
wilderness. 

The  situation  at  that  time  was  a tender  one. 
The  Moro  people  of  the  vicinity  were  friendly. 
The  Zamboanganians  were  divided  into  two  fac- 
tions, one  of  which  had  been  openly  hostile 
toward  the  Americans.  Their  leader,  Alvarez, 


216 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


■was  still  among  them,  and  many  were  hurt  and 
angry  over  the  killing  of  their  second  in  com- 
mand, Calixto.  Fortunately,  the  work  of  occu- 
pation and  the  primary  steps  of  restoration  fell 
to  the  lot  of  an  efficient  man.  Captain  Nichols 
of  the  Twenty-third  Infantry  was  sent  in  com- 
mand of  the  garrison  of  temporary  occupation. 
Through  a half-year  or  more  of  experience  in 
Jolo  he  had  gained  a clear  knowledge  of  the 
people  among  whom  he  had  come.  Some  differ- 
ences existed,  but  the  people  and  the  problem 
were  much  the  same  as  those  of  Jolo,  and  the 
differences  were  chiefly  those  of  detail.  Captain 
Nichols  is  entitled  to  great  credit  for  his  admin- 
istration of  affairs  during  those  early  days  of 
the  occupation.  He  found  a wilderness  and 
proceeded  at  once  to  make  it  a place  of  habita- 
tion. He  succeeded  so  well  that  when  I reached 
there  two  weeks  later  the  people  of  the  region 
came  and  went  freely  and  confidently;  streets 
and  parks  were  being  cleared  and  set  in  order ; 
stores  were  being  opened  and  stocked;  a rude 
market  had  started  up  on  the  site  of  the  old  one ; 
and  wholly  amicable  relations  had  been  estab- 
lished with  the  people. 

A few  days  after  his  arrival,  he  was  waited 
upon  by  a delegation  representing  the  people 
of  the  vicinity.  They  presented  the  following 
report  of  an  official  meeting  which  had  been 
held  by  the  headmen  of  the  neighboring  towns. 
All  were  represented  except  the  town  of 


TEE  MOROS  OF  MINDANAO 


217 


Mercedes,  which  had  been  the  center  of  the 
insurgent  operations  and  the  site  of  their  camp. 

EECOED  OF  PEOCEEDINGS 

In  the  town  of  Zamboanga,  the  20th  of  November, 
1899,  came  together  in  the  government  house  the 
members  of  the  local  assemblies  of  the  towns  of  the 
province,  according  to  call.  . . . 

Sehor  Nestorio  Arquiza,  being  recognized  by  the  pre- 
siding officer,  stated  that  in  his  opinion  it  would  be  to 
the  advantage  of  the  province,  its  well-being  and  its 
prosperity,  to  entreat  the  United  States  government  to 
concede  the  following  points : 

1.  The  continuation  in  the  province  of  the  Roman 
Catholic  Apostolic  religion,  professed  by  its  inhabitants. 

2.  To  l’espect  the  usages  and  customs  of  the  country, 
under  the  American  laws. 

3.  Absolute  liberty  of  lawful  commerce. 

4.  Exemption  from  all  manner  of  taxation  until  the 
province  recovers  from  the  state  of  ruin  in  which  it 
now  finds  itself,  in  consequence  of  the  calamities  which 
it  has  suffered. 

5.  Individual  security  and  the  free  use  of  armas 
blancas  (the  knives  and  weapons  of  the  country)  in  out- 
lying districts. 

6.  Consideration  for  the  rights  of  property. 

After  considering  these  propositions,  the  assembled 
delegates  adopted  them  and  gave  their  unanimous 
approval. 

The  President  then  requested  that,  in  view  of  the 
fact  that  the  American  commandant  of  the  forces  of 
occupation  wished  to  make  no  change  in  the  internal 
government  of  the  towns,  the  jefes  locales  would  con- 
tinue in  office  the  same  persons  who  have  filled  them 
heretofore,  and  who  will  in  future  be  responsible  for 
the  order  and  tranquillity  which  should  prevail  in  their 
respective  districts. 

For  the  repression  of  minor  offenses  committed  by 


218 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  inhabitants  of  any  town,  the  jefe  local  is  author- 
ized to  administer  punishment  according  to  the  Spanish 
code  now  in  force.  If  the  offense  is  grave,  the  jefe 
local  must  institute  prompt  inquiry  and  submit  the 
result  to  the  jefe  provincial,  with  the  author  or  authors 
of  the  offense,  in  order  that  the  jefe  provincial  may 
decide  as  to  the  procedure.  This  form  is  adopted 
provisionally,  pending  the  arrival  of  the  general  who 
will  be  charged  with  the  government  of  the  province. 
Unanimously  adopted.  (Copied  from  the  translation 
at  official  headquarters.) 

This  is  signed  by  Presidente  Isidoro  Midel, 
Nestorio  Arquiza,  and  all  the  jefes  locales  of 
the  province,  with  the  exception  of  the  jefe  of 
Mercedes. 

A few  days  after  the  arrival  of  General  Bates, 
he  was  waited  upon  by  a delegation  of  the  lead- 
ing officials  and  citizens  of  the  neighborhood. 
About  fifty  were  in  the  party,  which  was  headed 
by  Presidente  Midel  and  represented  a popula- 
tion of  probably  ten  thousand  in  the  immediate 
vicinity.  They  simply  called  to  pay  their 
respects,  and  the  occasion  was  wholly  informal. 
General  Bates  made  a brief  talk  outlining  the 
purposes  and  aims  of  the  new  government.  I 
watched  the  faces  of  his  hearers  during  his 
remarks.  They  were  evidently  gratified  by 
what  they  heard.  Frequently  some  one  or 
another  of  them  would  turn  to  a neighbor  and 
by  an  expressive  look  or  nod  show  his  satisfac- 
tion and  approval.  The  company  was  an  inter- 
esting one  to  watch  and  study.  The  costumes 


TEE  1I0R0S  OF  MIX!)  A KAO 


219 


were  various,  but  there  were  some  fine,  intelli- 
gent faces  at  the  upper  end  of  a number  of 
them.  One  of  the  gentlemen  called  me  aside 
and  wished  me  to  explain  privately  to  General 
Bates  that  no  reply  was  made  to  his  remarks 
and  no  general  statements  made  because  there 
were  among  them  a few  of  whom  they  did  not 
feel  wholly  certain  and  they  did  not  dare  to  talk 
with  entire  freedom. 

A few  days  previous  to  this,  a smaller  delega- 
tion had  called  and  expressed  a desire  for  an 
early  establishment  of  a parish  priest.  The 
former  incumbent  had  gone  away  during  the 
troubles  and  they  now  wanted  another.  Their 
request  was  proffered  with  a slight  hesitation, 
and  they  were  greatly  pleased  to  find  General 
Bates  ready  to  do  all  that  he  could  to 
further  their  wishes  in  the  matter.  They 
expressed  a desire  for  an  American  priest, 
though  I am  not  at  all  sure  of  their  entire  sin- 
cerity in  the  matter;  it  savors  of  a form  of 
Spanish  courtesy.  But  they  evidently  wanted 
a priest  for  services,  christenings,  marriages, 
burials  and  other  priestly  functions,  and  they 
were  told  that  some  one  would  be  installed  as 
soon  as  possible.  They  were  told  also  that 
schools  would  be  maintained  from  public  funds, 
but  that  churches  received  no  such  aid  and  must 
be  supported  by  personal  contributions.  They 
had  no  objection  to  offer  and  seemed  quite  in- 
clined to  be  satisfied  with  the  plan. 


220 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Official  relations  with,  the  Moros  are  on  a more 
concentrated  scale.  Datto  Mandi  represents  his 
people  and  acts  for  them.  He  called  one  morn- 
ing while  I was  there.  He  had  received  a letter 
from  Datto  Piang  of  Cottabatto,  a man  of 
importance  in  his  own  territory.  The  body  of 
the  letter  was  in  Spanish,  the  signature  in 
Arabic : 

Cottabatto,  December  3,  1899. 
To  Datto  Mandi  of  Zamboanga. 

My  dear  and  distinguished  Friend:  Although 

you  do  not  know  me,  I have  taken  the  liberty  of  writ- 
ing these  short  lines  with  the  sole  object  of  informing 
you  that  your  new  servant  desires  to  serve  you  in  all 
ways.  At  the  same  time  I inform  you  that  I am  wait- 
ing from  moment  to  moment  for  the  new  government 
of  North  America  to  take  charge  of  this  district,  which 
is  to-day  in  my  charge,  having  been  turned  over  to  me 
by  the  Spanish  government  when  it  evacuated  this 
point.  You  are  yourself  to-day  under  the  orders  of 
the  said  government,  and  I desire  to  be  the  same.  In 
view  of  the  above,  I hope  from  your  kind  attention  that 
you  may  say  something  to  the  American  authorities 
who  are  in  your  port,  and  from  whom  I daily  expect, 
with  anxiety,  the  sending  of  American  troops  to  this 
district,  and  to  offer  to  the  said  government  my  person 
and  all  my  people,  if  they  are  desired.  In  one  word,  I 
desire  to  be  subject  to  the  American  nation. 

(Signed)  Datto  Piang  of  Cottabatto. 

Almost  due  eastward  from  Zamboanga,  across 
the  bay  or  gulf  formed  by  the  land  contour  of 
western  Mindanao,  lies  the  village  of  Cottabatto. 
The  name  means  “the  stone  fort”  and  is  given 
because  of  the  small  Spanish  fortification  erected 


TEE  MOBOS  OF  MINDANAO 


221 


there.  The  distance  is  about  one  hundred  and 
fifty  miles  from  shore  to  shore.  The  Rio  Grande 
de  Mindanao  flows  northwestward  from  the 
inland  lakes  and  empties  at  Cottabatto  into 
Illana  Bay.  Piang  is  the  ruling  man  of  the  place 
and  vicinity,  though  his  home  is  twenty-five 
miles  up  the  river. 

Piang’s  desire  and  request  had  been  antici- 
pated. Before  his  letter  was  received  plans  had 
been  formulated  for  the  sending  of  a garrison  to 
Cottabatto.  On  the  night  of  December  10  the 
United  States  steamship  Manila  started  for  that 
place,  carrying  General  Bates  and  some  of  his 
staff.  He  went  to  pave  the  way  for  the  arrival 
of  a portion  of  the  Thirty-first  Infantry,  which 
followed  on  board  the  Churruca  the  next  morn- 
ing. There  have  been  some  interesting  spec- 
tacles out  in  the  Philippines,  but  few  have 
equaled  those  of  the  two  days’  stay  of  the  Manila 
at  Cottabatto.  Dattos  appeared  from  all  direc- 
tions. The  harbor  was  alive  with  native  canoes, 
varying  in  size  from  little  dugouts  up  to  stately 
barges  propelled  by  fifty  rowers.  At  one  time 
something  of  a row  was  imminent. 

It  appears  that  the  Datto  Piang  is  a self-made 
man.  His  case  is  an  exceptional  one,  like  that 
of  Datto  Pedro  Cuevas  of  Basilan.  It  is  said 
that  Piang  is  a Chinese  mestizo  (half-breed)  and 
that  he  was  formerly  a slave.  The  Datto  Baqui 
of  Parang-Parang,  a neighboring  village,  says 
that  Piang  is  a bad  man.  Baqui  and  Piang  are 


222 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


not  friends.  While  Baqui  was  on  board  the 
Manila , presenting  his  respects  to  the  official 
representative  of  the  new  government,  Piang 
and  his  numerous  suite  were  seen  putting  off 
from  the  shore.  Baqui’s  men  became  excited. 
Their  cutting  weapons  were  loosened  in  their 
sashes  and  the  few  who  had  guns  proceeded  to 
load  them.  The  situation  became  a bit  tender 
on  board  the  ship.  A United  States  naval  ves- 
sel is  not  an  appropriate  ground  for  the  deter- 
mination of  dattoical  rivalries;  men  who  have 
been  badly  slashed  with  heavy  sword-knives 
make  an  awful  mess  on  a ship’s  deck. 

A ship’s  officer  acted  as  master  of  ceremonies 
and  effected  a successful  division.  The  canoe 
fleet  of  one  datto  was  drawn  up  on  the  port  side 
while  the  other  was  sent  to  starboard.  Both 
dattos  being  on  board,  they,  surrounded  by  their 
men  quite  ready  for  a fight,  were  kept  on  oppo- 
site sides  of  the  ship,  while  General  Bates  took 
a hand  and  told  them  a few  things.  He  did  not 
quote  to  them  the  words  of  Dr.  Watts, — “Let 
dogs  delight  to  bark  and  bite,  for  ’t  is  their 
nature  to,” — but  he  gave  them  the  sentiments  of 
that  happy  expression  and  then  did  the  fatherly 
with  them,  and  made  them  shake  hands  with 
each  other  and  at  least  go  through  the  form  of 
a reconciliation.  Then  he  looked  very  solemnly 
at  these  two  naughty  boys  and  told  them  some- 
thing of  what  the  United  States  might  do  to 
them  if  they  did  not  behave  themselves.  One’s 


THE  MOROS  OF  MINDANAO 


223 


sense  of  the  tragic  found  food  in  the  opening. 
A strong  bit  of  humor  pervaded  the  next  chap- 
ter—General  Bates,  tall  and  dignified,  making 
those  brown  chaps  shake  hands.  Diplomacy 
triumphs  in  the  denouement — if  it  lasts. 

Among  the  petitions  and  testimonials  pre- 
sented at  Cottabatto,  one  of  the  most  important 
was  a document  of  welcome  and  acknowledge- 
ment of  American  authority.  It  closed,  after 
the  effusive  Spanish  fashion,  thus:  “We  shout 
with  all  our  hearts,  ‘ Long  live  the  American 
government,  and  may  the  God  of  heaven  guard 
it  many  years ! ’ ” 

On  the  morning  of  December  13  the  Manila 
sailed  for  Davao,  some  three  hundred  and  fifty 
miles  farther  on.  The  place  is  near  the  head  of 
the  Gulf  of  Davao,  ou  the  southeastern  side  of 
the  island.  It  is  the  most  isolated  garrison  yet 
established,  and  will  be  in  command  of  Major 
Liggett  of  the  Thirty-first.  Upon  arrival  the 
American  flag  was  seen  to  be  already  flying 
there.  The  Jolo  influence  had  reached  even 
there  and  a flag  had  been  obtained  and  raised. 
A delegation  of  the  people  extended  a hearty 
welcome.  It  was  stated  that  there  were  two 
thousand  Christians  in  the  vicinity,  and  some 
fourteen  thousand  who  were  sjioken  of  as  sal- 
vajes  (savages),  though  they  were  said  to  be 
peaceful  and  submissive  to  local  authority.  The 
“ Christians  ” are  those  of  mixed  Filipino  and 
Spanish  extraction,  Tagals,  Visayans,  etc.,  who, 


224 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


like  the  Zamboanganians,  follow  the  religion  as 
a result  of  a long  period  of  Spanish  occupation 
and  influence.  The  salvajes  are  Moro  and  native 
tribes.  There  are  said  to  be  seventeen  different 
groups  or  tribes  in  the  immediate  neighborhood, 
all  speaking  different  dialects. 

The  Spaniards  left  Davao  about  the  middle  of 
February,  1899.  After  the  evacuation  the  local 
people  made  a very  fair  shot  at  self-government. 
They  maintained  a military  police  of  thirty  men, 
one  half  of  whom  had  rifles.  Tlio  place  has  a 
church,  a school-house,  barracks  and  various 
public  and  semi-public  buildings ; there  are 
also  some  very  good  residences,  that  is,  good  for 
that  part  of  the  world.  Hemp  is  the  staple 
product  of  the  region  and  a considerable  quan- 
tity is  raised.  The  region  is  said  to  be  en- 
tirely healthful.  The  people  desire  a regular 
monthly  steamship  service,  and  the  return  of 
their  old  spiritual  adviser  and  leader,  a Jesuit 
priest. 

Leaving  Davao,  a southward  course  was 
taken,  and  then  a northward,  rounding  Cape 
San  Augustin  to  Mati,  a run  of  a hundred  miles 
or  so.  This  is  an  even  more  far-away  garrison 
than  Davao,  which  was  made  battalion  head- 
quarters, but  it  has  Davao  for  a neighbor.  Mati 
and  its  vicinity  show  about  a thousand  Chris- 
tians and  a large  but  unknown  number  of  sal- 
vajes. The  town  itself  was,  upon  the  arrival  of 
the  Americans,  in  bad  condition  and  its  build- 


THE  MOROS  OF  MINDANAO 


225 


ings  much  in  need  of  repair.  It  is  said  to  be 
generally  healthful. 

Zamboanga  is  now  the  military  headquarters 
of  the  entire  district,  and  is  unquestionably  des- 
tined, by  reason  of  location  and  natural  advan- 
tages, to  be  the  chief  seaport  and  commercial 
center  of  the  region.  It  is  one  of  the  points  of 
Spain’s  earliest  occupation  iu  the  islands  and 
has  been  the  center  of  Spain’s  many  and  fre- 
quent attempts  toward  sovereign  establishment 
on  Mindanao. 

The  Moro  people  of  Zamboanga  are  under  the 
leadership  of  the  Datto  Mandi,  a man  of  ability 
and  strong  character.  Mandi  is  a statesman. 
The  world  in  which  he  moves  and  the  com- 
munity which  he  governs  may  be  small,  yet  in 
that  world  and  community  he  manifests  those 
traits  and  characteristics  which,  in  wider  fields, 
stamp  men  as  statesmen.  It  has  been  my  good 
fortune  to  meet  him  upon  different  occasions, 
and  he  impressed  me  strongly,  as  he  has  all  of 
the  officials  who  have  come  into  contact  with  him. 
He  is,  moreover,  a gentleman.  He  may  dress  in 
the  garb  of  his  people  and  wear  the  local  turban, 
though  he  sometimes  appears  in  the  costume 
commonly  worn  by  Europeans  here ; but  what- 
ever his  clothes  may  be,  he  is  a -gentleman  of 
dignified  and  self-respecting  bearing  and  a grace 
and  courtesy  of  movement  and  demeanor  which 
many  of  white  skin  might  well  envy.  His  age  is 
probably  between  thirty- five  and  forty  years. 


226 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


The  Chinaman  is  the  merchant  of  the  region. 
His  little  shops  form  the  bulk  of  the  retailing 
business  of  the  islands,  and  he  buys  largely  of 
the  local  products  of  hemp,  copra,  sugar  and  a 
few  other  things.  A few  Tagals  and  Yisayans 
are  to  be  found  in  the  vicinity  of  all  points  of 
Spanish  garrison  occupation.  At  some  of 
those  points  this  foreign  population  forms  a 
large  percentage.  The  island  of  Palawan,  the 
long  and  narrow  stretch  of  land  which  separates 
the  China  and  the  Sulu  seas,  was  used  by  the 
Spaniards,  in  some  measure,  as  a penal  colony 
for  felons  from  the  northern  islands.  Some  of 
these  deport  ados , as  they  were  called,  were  used 
as  soldiers  and  some  became  a sort  of  quasi- 
colonist.  Naturally  they  are  an  undesirable 
element  and  may  prove  a source  of  trouble. 
That  question,  however,  is  rather  one  of  police 
than  of  politics.  They  are  far  from  the  center 
of  political  activity,  and  in  but  infrequent  com- 
munication with  that  center.  Some  of  them 
appeared  to  know  of  the  affairs  in  the  larger 
islands  and  were  in  sympathy  with  the  move- 
ment headed  by  Aguinaldo.  But  they  are  capa- 
ble of  little  resistance,  even  if  so  disposed.  They 
have  greater  capacity  for  mischief  by  and  by 
as  disturbers  of  peace  and  order. 

The  greater  number  of  the  Palawan  islanders, 
as  well  as  I could  learn  from  the  meager  details 
obtainable,  are  Malay  people  who  are  in  closer 
affiliation  with  their  race  in  Borneo  than  with 


THE  AIOROS  OF  MINDANAO  227 

those  of  the  central  archipelago.  That  fact 
introduces  to  some  extent  a feature  of  British 
influence.  Many  of  them  make  no  distinction 
between  the  newly  arrived  people  who  call 
themselves  Americans  and  those  of  longer 
acquaintance,  the  English,  whom  they  have 
learned  to  respect  and  trust.  “ These  peojDle,” 
they  say,  “ call  themselves  Americans ; but 
they  are  the  same  as  the  English,  and  to  us  they 
are  English.”  That  gives  the  United  States 
an  excellent  opportunity  to  parallel  England’s 
record  in  North  Borneo. 

Spain’s  influence  with  or  power  over  the 
people  of  these  islands  has  been  of  the  slightest, 
both  politically  and  religiously.  It  is  safe  to 
predict  the  appearance  of  many  engrossing 
problems,  and  the  Moros  will  undoubtedly  prove 
a very  interesting  people.  They  present  such 
interesting  little  questions  as  polygamy,  wife- 
purchase  and  a form  of  slavery  which  is  rather 
vassalage  or  feudalism  than  that  form  of  abso- 
lute ownership  which  was  manifested  in  the 
United  States  and  the  West  Indies.  Speaking 
exactly,  the  condition  of  many  may  not  be  de- 
scribed as  slavery,  but  it  is  a state  which  is  far 
removed  from  individual  independence.  Ap- 
parently there  is  no  discontent  or  desire  for 
any  change,  but  if  we  go  ahead  and  own  the 
Philippines,  it  may  become  necessary  to  pass 
laws  which  would  either  be  a dead  letter  there 
or,  if  enforced,  arouse  antagonism  on  the  part 


228 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  the  people.  At  any  rate,  there  is  a strong 
probability,  if  ownership  of  the  islands  be  main- 
tained, that  the  United  States  will  be  for  some 
time  denied  the  privilege  of  the  proud  boast 
that  under  her  flag  no  man  can  call  another  man 
his  own.  Commercially,  the  people  of  the  section 
are  appraised  at  a value  of  from  twenty  to  forty 
dollars  apiece.  TheMoros  hold  as  a religious  belief 
the  unpleasant  idea  that  if  they  die  in  killing 
a Christian  they  go  at  full  speed  to  a heaven  of 
delight,  where  they  are  provided  with  an  outfit 
of  sixteen  wives,  or  something  like  that.  When 
the  thirst  for  death  and  polygamy  becomes  keen, 
the  candidate  goes  through  certain  ceremonies, 
records  an  oath  with  the  pimdita,  or  priest,  and 
becomes  a juramentado.  Then  he  goes  on  the 
war-path  and  “ does  ” his  man.  If  he  gets  “ done,” 
he  receives  the  welcome  of  his  houris.  Spanish 
officials  evidently  did  not  like  the  Moros.  In 
their  official  reports  they  blackguarded  them 
awfully.  They  called  the  Moros  by  a long  list 
of  uncomplimentary  names,  such  as  liars,  treach- 
erous, superstitious,  voluptuous,  stupid  and  igno- 
rant and  dirty.  One  writer  calls  them  “an 
uncultured  people  who  should  inhabit  some 
other  planet.”  But  that  is  an  individual  opinion 
and,  consequently,  is  not  to  be  accepted  as  con- 
clusive. No  form  of  absolute  or  even  general 
self-government  is  possible  for  the  people  of 
that  section.  It  is  equally  impossible  that  they 
should  be  governed  or  in  any  way  controlled  by 


TEE  MOROS  OF  MINDANAO 


229 


Tagal,  Yisayan  or  other  native  people  or  indi- 
viduals. It  would  even  be  an  error  to  include 
them  in  a system  generally  applied  to  the  island 
group.  Religion,  race  and  past  history  join  in 
making  them  a thing  apart.  Except  in  a limited 
way,  these  people  do  not  know  and  are  not  known 
by  those  of  the  central  and  northern  islands. 

The  future  relations  of  the  United  States  with 
the  islands,  be  they  brief  or  protracted,  present 
a serious  problem  with  a simple  solution.  It 
may  become  imperative  to  separate  them  entirely 
from  the  general  Philippine  question.  To  give 
them  in  any  way  into  the  hands  of  a Filipino 
government  would,  in  all  probability,  be  tan- 
tamount to  a national  crime.  The  Filipino, 
upheld  and  guided  by  America,  may  make  a 
very  fair  shot  at  a considerable  measure  of  self- 
government.  There  is  no  question  of  his  utter 
unfitness  to  govern  another  people  so  different 
in  type,  character,  habit  and  religion  as  the 
Moro.  For  our  own  dealings  with  these  people, 
we  may  well  read  over  the  history  of  our  rela- 
tions with  the  North  American  Indian.  Guided 
by  the  mistakes,  follies  and  crimes  which  blot 
that  history,  the  United  States  may  easily  learn 
to  deal  wisely  with  a race  which,  in  not  a few 
ways,  presents  a strong  resemblance  to  the 
American  red  man. 

No  better  opinion  upon  the  subject  is  possible 
than  that  of  General  Bates.  He  knows  the 
American  Indian  through  years  of  experience. 


230 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


He  has  now  had  the  opportunity,  of  which  he 
has  taken  careful  and  thoughtful  advantage,  to 
observe  and  study  the  Moro.  He  has  noted  the 
common  people  and  has  held  numerous  confer- 
ences with  them  leaders.  He  says : “ The  chief 
requisites  for  successful  dealings  with  these 
people  are  the  maintenance  here  of  a military 
force  of  sufficient  strength  to  indicate  clearly 
superior  material  power,  and  a policy  in  which 
firmness,  absolute  justice  and  strict  fidelity  to 
promises  given  shall  govern  in  all  relations 
with  them.” 

I think  I may  say  that  during  the  time  of  my 
stay  in  the  islands  I made  a more  exhaustive  in- 
vestigation of  the  conditions  of  Moroland  than 
did  any  other  visitor.  I made  three  trips  through 
the  district,  during  all  of  which  I was  in  constant 
association  with  Major-General  John  C.  Bates, 
then  military  governor  of  the  district,  with  the 
commanding  officers  of  the  garrisons  and  with 
Captains  Sperry  and  Very,  commanding,  respec- 
tively, the  gunboats  Yorktown  and  Castine,  then 
stationed  in  those  waters.  During  that  time  I 
formed  the  distinct  impression,  and  so  reported 
it,  that  trouble  with  those  people  was  avoidable. 
I made  my  third  trip  to  the  district  on  board 
the  City  of  Peking , transporting  the  Thirty-first 
United  States  Infantry  for  garrison  duty  in  that 
department.  I am  confident  that  during  the 
voyage  I made  myself  a nuisance  by  my  persis- 
tent assertions  that  if  trouble  came  the  respon- 


THE  MOBOS  OF  MINDANAO 


231 


sibility  for  it  would  rest  with  the  soldiers  of  the 
United  States.  Trouble  has  come  and  more  and 
worse  may  be  in  store.  A well-known  corre- 
spondent, who  visited  the  islands  last  April, 
writes  as  follows : 

Another  possibility  of  danger  lies  in  the  temper  of  a 
portion  of  the  soldiers.  One  of  them,  who  was  a repre- 
sentative of  this  class,  thus  described  it.  “ Our  officers 
are  trying  to  get  along  with  these  people  without  a 
fight,”  he  said.  “We  boys  want  a scrap ; that ’s  what 
we  enlisted  for.  We  crowd  these  people  all  we  can 
when  we  get  a chance,  and  we  are  bound  to  get  them 
stirred  up  some  time.” 

General  Kobbe  is  now  in  command  of  the 
department.  It  has  been  my  good  fortune  to 
know  him  personally.  I know  him  as  a brave 
soldier  and  a kindly  and  thoughtful  gentleman. 
I know  him  as  a man  of  tact,  with  a sincere 
interest  in  and  consideration  for  those  who  are 
under  his  supervision.  I know  his  earnest 
desire  to  avoid  any  strife  with  the  people  of  his 
district.  But  if  he  is  up  against  that  American 
element  which  this  correspondent  notes  and 
which  I saw  myself,  his  efforts  and  aims  are 
almost  hopeless.  The  Twenty-third  United 
States  Infantry,  officered  by  men  of  the  regu- 
lar army,  occupied  the  island  of  Jolo  for  nearly 
a year,  among  the  most  turbulent  of  the  Moros 
and  within  a few  miles  of  the  residence  of  the 
sultan.  Up  to  the  time  of  my  departure  in 
February,  1900,  and,  so  far  as  I can  learn,  up  to 


232 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


the  time  of  their  own  departure,  all  trouble  was 
avoided  and  relations  were  those  of  peace  and 
mutual  respect.  The  work  in  that  department 
is  for  men  of  the  regular  army  who  have  known 
and  dealt  with  the  American  Indian.  I am  fully 
aware  that  Major  Brett  was  recalled  from  his 
command  at  Cottabatto ; but  I know  Brett, 
and  I know  that  his  mistake  was  an  error  of 
judgment  arising  from  the  kindness  of  his 
heart  and  his  keen  desire  to  prevent  a fight,  and 
not  from  any  purpose  or  desire  to  provoke  one. 
As  a general  principle,  none  but  men  trained  in 
relations  with  the  American  Indian  should  be 
assigned  for  duty  among  the  Moros.  Mobile 
there  their  special  aim  should  be  to  keep  their 
troops  well  in  hand.  The  Twenty-third  suc- 
ceeded admirably  in  Jolo  and  Siassi. 


XIII 


THE  3I0R0S  OF  SULU 


Our  Mohammedan  people— Spanish  garrisons— Jolo— A city 
of  trees  and  flowers — A stroll  among  the  people— Moro 
weapons — Bargaining  for  curios— A coffee  estate— The 
datto  and  the  deserters— The  datto  as  a witness— All 
Americans  look  alike  to  him— A good-natured  people— 
The  universality  of  child-nature— A Moro  trader— Love  of 
color — Boats  and  blacksmiths — Island  fruits — Pearl  fish- 
eries—The  religious  question— The  sultan. 


.MOST  due  south  of  Manila  and  distant  a 


little  more  than  five  hundred  miles,  there 
lies  a little  island  named  Sulu,  or,  in  the  Span- 
ish, Jolo  (pronounced  ho-lo'),  which  gives  its 
name  to  the  minor  archipelago  of  which  it  is  a 
part.  The  island  itself  does  not  amount  to  much. 
It  is  a spot  in  the  sea,  some  thirty  miles  in  length 
from  east  to  west,  with  a maximum  width  of 
twelve  miles.  The  archipelago  of  Sulu  numbers 
about  one  hundred  and  forty  islands,  one  half 
of  which  are  uninhabited.  It  is  said  to  have 
been  occupied  during  the  early  years  of  the  six- 
teenth century  by  a Borneo  chief  who  fled  after 
a defeat  by  his  brother  in  a contest  for  suprem- 


233 


234 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


acy.  The  new-comers  brought  their  Moham- 
medan religion  with  them,  and  it  has  lived  and 
dominated  almost  absolutely  throughout  the 
intervening  years.  Jesuits,  Dominicans  and 
others,  all  backed  by  the  official  and  military 
arm  of  Spain,  have  sought  foothold  there,  with 
only  the  slightest  measure  of  success.  The 
island  of  Jolo  is  the  headquarters  of  the  Sulu 
sultanate. 

Although  politically  dominating  some  portion 
of  the  islands  of  the  Sulu  group,  the  sultan  is 
rather  the  spiritual  head  of  the  Mohammedans 
of  the  region  than  the  political  ruler.  The  great 
island  of  Mindanao  gives  him  no  political  alle- 
giance and  some  of  the  lesser  islands  yield  him 
little  or  none.  The  island  of  Sulu  has  a popu- 
lation of  about  a hundred  and  twenty  thousand. 
The  people  of  this  and  the  neighboring  islands 
are  decidedly  a fighting  lot.  The  men  are  em- 
phatically opposed  to  labor  in  any  form.  Their 
religious  fanaticism  has  been  the  cause  of  fre- 
quent trouble  to  Spain  in  her  relations  with 
them.  Their  attitude  has  been  one  of  impla- 
cable hostility  to  and  hatred  of  the  Christian. 

For  centuries  the  islands  were  a hotbed  of 
piracy.  The  followers  of  the  sultan  ravaged  the 
coasts  and  ruled  the  seas  of  the  vicinity.  It  was 
only  upon  the  introduction  of  steam-vessels  that 
the  Spanish  authorities  were  at  all  able  to  cope 
with  these  vigorous  and  vicious  sea-robbers. 
Not  until  1860,  when  a strong  force  of  steam- 


THE  MOB  OS  OF  SELF 


235 


gunboats  was  sent  out  against  them,  was  piracy 
stamped  out.  At  no  time  in  the  history  of  the 
islands  has  Spain  exercised  more  than  a nominal 
sovereignty  over  these  people. 

Throughout  the  Mussulman  territory,  which 
includes  Mindanao,  Palawan,  and  the  islands  of 
the  Sulu  archipelago,  Basilan,  Jolo,  Tawi  Tawi 
and  the  rest,  the  tribal  system  prevails.  The 
tribes,  headed  by  chiefs,  or  clattos,  recognize  the 
spiritual  supremacy  of  the  sultan,  whose  position 
is  hereditary.  Their  relations  with  each  other 
are  amicable  or  otherwise  just  as  it  happens  at 
any  particular  time.  The  relations  of  the  United 
States  with  these  people  are  not  unlikely  to  be 
greatly  similar  to  its  relations  with  the  Indians 
of  North  America.  Some  tribes  may  be  friendly, 
but  it  is  quite  probable  that  the  hatchet  will  be 
buried  in  a very  shallow  place  and  very  near  at 
hand.  Much  will  depend  upon  the  vigor  dis- 
played by  the  nation  and  the  missionary  societies 
in  efforts  to  civilize  and  Christianize  them.  The 
process  will  not  prove  locally  popular. 

Maibun,  on  the  south  coast,  is  the  official  city 
of  the  island  of  Jolo.  It  is  a dirty  and  rather 
insignificant  little  place,  but  it  is  the  home  of 
the  sultan.  Jolo,  on  the  northwest  coast,  is  the 
chief  city  of  the  island.  In  a way,  Jolo  is  an 
accident.  The  Spanish  General  Arolas  was  sent 
to  the  place  as  a sort  of  compromise  between  a 
reward  of  merit  and  a punishment  for  political 
offense.  He  could  not  well  be  ignored,  yet  had 


236 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  audacity  to  be  of  outspoken  republican  ten- 
dencies; therefore  he  was  sent  to  govern  Jolo. 
He  found  the  city  wholly  conventional,  from  the 
Sulu  standpoint,  in  construction  and  dirt.  It 
held  a Spanish  garrison  and  was  surrounded  by 
a kind  of  bamboo  stockade.  Arolas  was  a really 
remarkable  man,  particularly  for  a Spaniard. 
He  possessed  strong  force  of  character,  energy 
and  ideas.  Virtually  banished  to  Jolo,  he  pro- 
ceeded to  convert  it  into  the  gem  spot  of  all  the 
Spanish  colonies.  He  turned  a filthy  coast  vil- 
lage into  a beautiful  park. 

In  front  of  the  city  lies  a bay,  formed  by 
adjacent  islands,  with  good  anchorage  and  gen- 
erally safe  harborage.  Along  the  shore  runs  a 
low  sea-wall,  with  sentry-boxes  on  corners  and 
in  angles.  From  about  the  middle  of  the  wall 
a gated  pier  extends  seaward,  with  a signaling- 
tower  at  its  outer  end.  The  bamboo  stockade 
has  been  replaced  by  a brick  wall  of  some  eight 
feet  in  height,  built  upon  a rock  and  concrete 
base  some  three  feet  in  height.  The  wall  is 
liberally  perforated  with  perpendicular  slits  for 
rifle  use  in  case  of  assault.  Sentry-towers  stand 
at  the  corners  and  boxes  occur  along  the  wall. 
The  inclosure  thus  formed  is  irregular,  though 
angular  in  its  shape.  Its  greatest  length  is 
about  fifteen  hundred  feet  and  its  greatest 
width  seven  hundred  and  fifty.  The  ends  are 
narrower  than  the  middle,  by  reason  of  an  area 
of  made  land  which  extends  into  the  bay. 


THE  MOROS  OF  STJLTJ 


237 


The  streets  are  all  laid  at  right  angles,  are  of 
good  width  and  heavily  shaded  with  palms  and 
other  trees.  Among  these  are  many  of  the  bril- 
liant red-flowering  flamboyant , which  is  also 
found  in  extensive  use  along  roadways  in  the 
West  Indies.  Running  inshore  from  the  pier  is 
a broad,  shaded  plaza.  Small  parks,  a mass  of 
foliage  and  blossom  crossed  by  paths,  occur  at 
frequent  intervals.  The  road-beds  are  sand,  and 
upon  both  sides  gutters  of  concrete  provide  for 
the  discharge  of  rain-water  by  an  easy  gradient 
to  the  shore.  Most  of  the  buildings  are  of 
wood,  two  stories  in  height  and  of  good  though 
not  elaborate  construction.  The  upper  stories 
serve  as  the  residences  of  the  merchants  who 
occupy  the  ground  floors  for  commercial  pur- 
poses. Hemp-bundling  and  copra-drying  indi- 
cate a moderate  export  trade.  The  city  has 
running  water  supplied  from  a near-by  stream, 
good  in  quality  and  ample  in  supply.  Near  as 
it  is  to  the  equator,  almost  exactly  upon  the 
sixth  degree  north  latitude,  there  is  nothing  of 
uncomfortable  heat.  The  nights  are  entirely 
comfortable  for  sleeping,  and  mosquitos  are 
not  seriously  troublesome.  I have  found  it  a 
charming,  a fascinating  place.  There  are  many 
little  restaurants,  but  no  hotel  or  anything  that 
takes  the  place  of  one.  Not  many  civilians 
have  yet  visited  the  place.  The  few  who 
have  arrived  have  been  cared  for  by  the  courte- 
ous officers  of  the  Twenty-third  United  States 


238 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Infantry,  to  -whom  I gladly  acknowledge  myself 
deeply  indebted  for  an  endless  number  of  de- 
lightful courtesies ; their  hospitality  and  kindly 
attention  have  known  no  limit. 

But  charming  as  the  place  itself  undoubtedly 
is,  its  chief  interest  centers  in  the  people  of  the 
vicinity  more  than  in  the  people  of  the  city. 
Exclusive  of  the  American  military  garrison, 
the  population  of  Jolo  (the  city)  is  about  twelve 
hundred.  Of  these  all  save  a few  are  Chinese. 
Only  a limited  number  of  the  natives  have  been 
allowed  residence  within  the  walls.  The  Span- 
iards evidently  distrusted  them  and  feared  them. 
One  day  two  army  officers  and  I took  a walk 
into  the  country.  I asked  if  it  had  been  the 
custom  of  Spanish  officers  to  do  that  sort  of 
thing.  I was  told  that  no  Spanish  officer  ever 
went  more  than  a few  rods  from  the  city  walls 
without  a strong  military  escort.  We  were 
totally  unarmed.  We  visited  two  villages, 
watched  the  people  at  their  work,  sat  down  with 
them  and  made  such  efforts  to  talk  with  them 
as  we  could  in  a few  words  of  their  language 
and  a few  more  of  Spanish.  We  laughed  and 
joked  with  them,  played  with  the  children  and 
had  the  very  j oiliest  kind  of  a time  together. 
We  were  gone  for  some  four  hours,  and  there 
was  no  minute  of  it  that  was  not  filled  with 
interest.  To  see  the  people  one  must  go  to  their 
homes  and  villages.  A limited  number — one 
hundred  from  the  land  side  and  fifty  from  the 


THE  MOROS  OF  SULU 


239 


water  side— are  allowed  to  enter  tlie  city  daily 
for  purposes  of  trade.  This  is  the  continuance 
of  a Spanish  law  and  does  not  seem  to  be  at  all 
resented.  They  are  accustomed  to  it  and  accept 
it.  But  there  are  always  enough  of  the  Moros 
about  the  streets  of  the  little  city  to  add  much 
to  its  attractiveness  by  their  brilliantly  varie- 
gated garments. 

The  special  center  of  interest  has  been  the  lan- 
ceria , a little  square  structure,  roofed  but  not 
sided,  a few  rods  behind  the  city  on  the  road  to 
the  inland  gates.  In  Spanish  days,  and  the  cus- 
tom is  continued  under  the  American  rule,  no 
Moro  was  allowed  inside  the  walls  wearing  his 
weapon.  Exception  occurred,  and  continues,  in 
the  case  of  the  vigilantes , or  native  police,  in  the 
town.  Every  Moro  man  carries  his  weapon  at  all 
times.  So  do  many  of  the  women  and  children. 
The  weapons  are  swords,  or  knives,  variously 
known,  according  to  the  shape,  as  the  Jcris,  the 
barong,  the  campilan , the  bangkong , etc.  They 
correspond  to  the  bolo  of  the  Filipino  and  the 
machete  of  the  Cuban,  except  that  their  pur- 
pose is  more  generally  warlike.  The  Spaniards 
obliged  every  Moro  who  desired  to  enter  the 
city  to  deposit  his  weapon  at  this  lanceria,  ten 
rods  or  so  outside  the  gate.  Upon  going  away 
the  knife  was  resumed.  A dead-line  was  indi- 
cated between  the  gate  and  the  lanceria , and 
any  Moro  crossing  that  while  wearing  his  knife 
was  shot  without  question  or  parley.  The 


240 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


armed  Moro  would  not  be  allowed  to  pass  the 
guard  at  the  gate  to-day,  though  he  probably 
would  not  be  shot  at  the  dead-line ; but  they  do 
not  seem  to  try  any  experiments  on  it. 

This  lanceria,  or  spear  market,  as  it  is  now 
termed,  has  become  a trading-spot  for  curios 
and  souvenirs.  The  American  thirst  for  the 
odd  and  the  curious,  and  the  American  readiness 
to  spend  money,  have  appealed  to  these  people, 
and  the  trade  in  Irises  and  barongs  has  run  into 
thousands  of  dollars  already.  It  is  beginning 
to  establish  an  industry.  A notable  percentage 
of  those  now  offered  are  newly  brought  from 
the  quaint  little  blacksmiths’  shops  in  which 
they  are  made  to  meet  the  new  demand.  I con- 
fess to  being  a well-developed  kris  fiend  myself ; 
but  all  of  mine  are  old  ones,  the  weapon  of  the 
country  that  has  been  worn  in  the  sash  of  the 
native. 

Trading  for  these  things  is  an  interesting 
process,  though  not  a novel  one.  It  is  an  old 
process  of  bargaining.  The  novice  gets  well 
roasted ; the  old  hand  lies  low  and  watches  out 
for  bargains.  A Hebrew  clothes-dealer  will  give 
one  an  experience  of  just  the  same  character, 
but  there  is  much  less  of  fun  in  that  case  than 
there  is  when  the  seller  is  a dirty,  betel-chewing 
Moro,  dressed  in  the  picturesque  garb  of  his 
country.  The  articles  offered  are  the  knives  of 
various  shapes  and  patterns,  spears  of  various 
shapes,  native  bridles,  native  hats  and  embroi- 


TEE  MOROS  OF  SULTJ 


241 


dered  cloths.  Even  at  the  prices  asked,  any  of 
them  would  be  cheap  enough  from  an  American 
standpoint;  but  a judicious  indifference  to  the 
article  desired,  coupled  with  an  offer  of  about 
one  half  of  the  seller’s  price,  will  probably  secure 
it  after  due  time.  Old  coats  of  mail  are  also  an 
occasional  offer.  The  price  varies  from  about 
three  to  ten  dollars  American,  according  to  the 
condition  and  the  decoration  of  the  coat.  The 
knives  range  from  two  to  twenty  dollars  Ameri- 
can. The  arrival  of  a steamer,  which  is  not  a 
frequent  occurrence,  is  the  signal  for  an  increase 
and  a stiffening  of  prices ; it  announces  a fresh 
crop  of  Americans  with  mucho  dinero. 

The  Chinese  trader  and  workman  of  Jolo  is 
just  what  he  is  elsewhere— patient,  stolid  and 
industrious.  He  will  make  me  a suit  of  white 
cotton  drill  at  three  dollars  American,  and  a 
pair  of  white  canvas  Oxford  shoes  for  an 
American  dollar.  The  cost  of  living,  of  clothing 
and  probably  of  the  conveniences  of  life  in  Jolo 
will  not,  perhaps,  for  a long  time  be  as  low  as 
they  are  to-day.  The  most  immediate  result  of 
American  occupation  in  all  the  places  of  my 
experience  has  been  an  enhancement  of  the  cost 
of  living.  In  the  West  Indies  the  native  mind 
soon  acquired  an  idea  of  Americano , muclw 
dinero.  The  Moro  already  believes  that  an 
American,  if  he  spends  the  last  cent  in  his 
pockets,  need  only  go  to  his  house  or  on  board 
his  ship  and  get  money  to  any  extent. 


242 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


To  the  eastward  of  Jolo  are  two  coast  'villages, 
built  partly  on  shore  and  partly  on  posts  over 
the  water.  Their  chief  industry  appears  to  be 
fishing — fresh  fish  for  the  Jolo  market  and  dried 
fish  for  the  general  inland  market.  I should 
not  be  believed  if  it  were  possible  for  me  to 
describe  some  of  the  fish  which  I saw  brought 
into  the  village  of  Busbus.  Color-drawings  of 
them,  if  colors  could  reproduce  their  rainbow  and 
opalescent  tints,  would  be  pronounced  by  most 
to  be  the  fancy  sketches  of  a fertile  imagination. 
The  variety  vTas  great,  and  the  coloring  of  many 
was  marvelous  and  often  exquisitely  beautiful. 
The  boats  used  for  fishing  are  exceedingly 
graceful  in  structure,  long,  very  narrow  and 
often  showing  fantastic  carvings  at  bow  and 
stern.  Without  the  buoyant  support  of  the 
projecting  outriggers  they  could  hardly  be  kept 
upright  on  a mill-pond. 

Some  three  or  four  miles  west  of  the  city  an 
experiment  is  being  made  in  coffee-raising  on 
an  extensive  scale.  Of  the  quality  of  the  berry 
I am  unable  to  speak,  as  none  was  to  be  had 
that  was  in  condition  for  use;  but  I saw  some 
seventy  acres  of  coffee-trees  of  most  vigorous 
and  healthy  growth.  They  were  not  shaded  as 
is  the  West  Indian  custom,  but  were  set  out  like 
an  orange-grove.  Coffee  usually  requires  a 
third  or  a fourth  year  for  its  maturity.  I was 
assured  by  its  owner  that  this  grove  was  but 
from  a year  and  nine  months  to  two  years  and 


THE  MOEOS  OF  STJLJJ 


243 


three  months  old.  On  tree  after  tree  the 
branches  bowed  to  the  ground  with  the  weight 
of  the  berries  along  the  stems.  Many  branches 
broke  down  entirely,  and  many  a tree  had  fallen 
prostrate,  broken  and  partly  uprooted  from  its 
top  weight.  The  father  of  the  present  proprie- 
tors, the  Messrs.  Schuck,  set  out  a much  smaller 
grove  some  twelve  or  thirteen  years  ago,  but  it 
became  neglected.  Many  of  the  trees  were  still 
there,  and  I saw  them  standing  in  the  heart 
of  a dense  tropical  jungle,  trees  of  twenty  feet 
in  height,  with  trunks  of  six  and  eight  inches 
diameter.  They  were  still  in  full  bearing,  but 
useless  from  the  difficulties  of  picking  from  such 
a height.  There  are  evidently  remarkable  pos- 
sibilities in  coffee-growing  in  Jolo  Island.  The 
expense  of  marketing  and  the  market  value  of 
the  product  are  not  yet  well  determined. 

The  Moros  have  their  distinct  language,  but 
as  yet  there  is  no  Moro- American  or  Moro-any- 
thing-else  dictionary. 

The  only  serious  objection  which  I can  find  to 
Jolo  is  its  distance  from  New  York.  Could  the 
island,  together  with  about  three  miles  of  its  sur- 
rounding atmosphere,  be  towed  up  to  the  en- 
trance to  New  York  harbor,  it  would  be  a pos- 
session of  endless  value.  But  that  would  cost 
the  place  the  greater  part  of  its  special  charms. 
The  picturesque  and  dirty  Moro  would  exchange 
his  multicolored  turban  for  a “ dicer,”  his  kris  for 
a walking-stick,  and  probably  essay  tight  boots, 


244  TEE  PHILIPPINES 

liigli  collars  and  a red  necktie.  That  would 
spoil  him. 

Jolo  gave  me  two  or  three  interesting  experi- 
ences which  illustrated,  each  in  its  way,  some- 
thing of  the  life  and  character  of  the  people  of 
the  vicinity.  One  matter  in  particular  was 
suggestive.  Three  American  soldiers  deserted 
from  the  garrison  at  Siassi.  The  leader  of 
the  trio  was  a man  who  enlisted  in  the  Philip- 
pines, where  he  had  been  living  for  some 
years.  He  spoke  both  Spanish  and  Tagal.  He 
seems  to  have  induced  two  of  his  comrades  to 
desert,  and  they  started  for  some  unknown 
point  with  some  unknown  purpose  as  their 
object.  They  took  their  guns  along  with  them, 
hired  a native  boat  and  went  to  sea,  sailing  north- 
ward. Somewhere  near  Jolo  they  were  capsized, 
losing,  so  they  claim,  their  guns  and  outfit.  They 
were  rescued  by  some  of  the  people  of  Datto 
Jokainin’s  tribe  and  taken  to  that  chief,  who 
turned  them  over  to  the  garrison  at  Jolo. 

While  I was  in  the  place  the  case  came  up  for 
examination.  Jokainin  and  some  of  his  people 
were  summoned  as  witnesses.  At  the  prelimi- 
nary examination  Jokainin  persisted  in  answer- 
ing questions  which  were  put  to  some  of  his 
attendants.  He  was  told  that  that  would  not 
do;  each  witness  must  answer  for  himself.  A 
little  bickering  over  the  point  led  to  Jokainin’s 
leaving  the  room  in  indignation,  asserting  that 
his  word  was  doubted,  that  he  was,  in  effect, 


THE  MOBOS  OF  SULU 


245 


charged  with  lying.  They  are  not,  I believe,  a 
lying  people.  Shrewd  and  not  over-scrupulous 
in  trade  they  certainly  are,  but  I think  I am 
right  in  crediting  them  with  notable  fidelity  to 
words  seriously  spoken,  to  promises  given  and 
assurances  made.  To  lie  to  the  datto  appears 
to  be  a crime.  In  the  streets  of  Jolo  one  sees 
quite  frequently  a certain  Moro,  a petty  ruler  in 
the  near-by  village  of  Busbus.  The  lower  part 
of  his  face  is  always  hidden  in  a cloth  muffler. 
If  the  muffler  be  displaced  one  sees  that  the 
man’s  mouth  is  cut  from  its  corners  far  back 
into  the  cheek.  He  lied  to  the  datto,  and  the 
opening  in  his  face  was  made  large  enough  to 
allow  the  passage  of  the  truth.  Jokainin’s  men 
had  told  him  what  they  knew  of  the  case  of  the 
deserters;  he  believed  that  they  had  spoken 
truth;  his  replies  to  questions  submitted  were 
therefore  competent  and  correct,  and  he  saw  no 
reason  why  they  should  not  be  accepted.  That 
it  was  hearsay  evidence  made  no  difference  to 
him.  When  it  was  declined  he  felt  that  his 
word  was  doubted,  and  resented  what  he 
thought  a disbelief  of  his  wrord.  Offended  at 
that,  he  marched  out,  followed  by  his  attendants. 

He  was  mollified  after  a little,  and  returned 
for  further  examination.  I do  not  know  just 
what  he  thought.  Sometimes  he  seemed  puz- 
zled, sometimes  amused.  The  forms  of  our 
court  procedure  were  new  to  him  and  some  of 
them  evidently  struck  him  as  ridiculous.  Some 


24G 


THE  PHTLIPPIXES 


appealed  to  that  sense  of  humor  which  is  a Moro 
characteristic.  At  times  he  smiled  in  amuse- 
ment, at  times  he  laughed  heartily. 

The  Court.  What  is  your  name  ? 

Answer.  My  name?  Jokainin.  Why  do  you 
ask  that?  You  all  know  my  name. 

The  Court.  Where  do  you  live  ? 

Answer  (with  a hearty  laugh).  You  know 
where  I live.  You  have  all  been  out  there. 

Of  course,  each  of  the  deserters  had  a separate 
trial.  When  the  same  questions  of  name,  resi- 
dence, etc.,  were  repeated  in  the  second  and 
third  trials,  the  witness  was  somewhat  puzzled. 
“ Why  do  you  ask  me  what  you  already  know 
and  that  which  I have  already  told  you  but  a 
few  minutes  ago?”  was  the  substance  of  his 
answer.  Of  a truth,  the  ways  of  the  heathen  be 
sometimes  more  direct  than  our  ways.  If  they 
lie  to  their  chief,  their  mouths  are  enlarged.  If 
he  is  reasonably  satisfied  that  an  offender  is 
guilty,  the  chief  orders  the  removal  of  the  crim- 
inal’s head  without  fuss  or  loss  of  time.  The 
system  has  merit  of  its  own  kind. 

Another  point  came  up  in  the  same  case. 
There  are  few  Americans  who  can  readily  iden- 
tify any  particular  Asiatic,  All  Chinos,  all  Japs, 
all  Malays,  all  Filipinos  look  alike  to  most 
Americans.  There  was,  therefore,  a rather  sug- 
gestive idea  in  Jokainin’s  reply  to  the  question, 
“Do  you  recognize  the  accused?”  “No.” 
“No?  Why,  you  brought  him  in  here.”  “I 


THE  MOB  OS  OF  SELF 


247 


brought  three  soldiers  here,  but  all  Americans 
look  alike  to  me.”  A few  he  could  individualize. 

There  is  one  thing  about  these  people  which  I 
greatly  like.  They  can  laugh.  They  seem  cjuite 
a cheerful  and  jolly  lot.  Taken  generally  the 
Tagals  seem  a solemn  race.  The  Visayan  is  a 
bit  more  cheerful  than  the  Tagal.  The  so-called 
Moro  grins,  chuckles  and  roars.  One  of  the 
lieutenants  of  the  Twenty -third  had  three 
monkeys  and  a little  puppy  as  household  pets. 
One  day  they  were  all  out  in  the  park  adjoining 
the  house.  Twenty  or  thirty  Moros  stood  about 
with  the  American  soldiers  watching  the  antics 
of  the  animals.  A Tagal  group  might  have 
grinned  a little.  These  fellows  yelled  and 
shrieked  in  the  heartiest  of  enjoyment.  Their 
glee  was  audible  for  a couple  of  blocks. 

They  laugh  easily  and  evidently  appreciate  a 
certain  form  of  joke.  If  I went  to  the  sword 
and  spear  market  and  spent  every  penny  in  my 
pockets,  declining  further  purchase  on  the  score 
of  no  mas  diner o , that  was  a joke.  It  was  an 
absurdity  to  them;  it  was  ridiculous.  They 
did  not  believe  me.  They  had  their  laugh,  felt 
of  my  pockets  and,  if  they  discovered  no  weight 
or  clink  of  coin,  sobered  down  for  a moment. 
They  realized  that  I had  spoken  the  truth. 
They  do  not  laugh  at  that.  But  they  laughed 
again  when  they  told  me  to  go  to  my  house  or 
my  ship,  where  I or  any  other  American  could 
get  dinero  in  endless  quantity. 


248 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


During  a visit  to  Jolo,  I strolled  out  to  a 
near-by  coast  village  in  company  with  two 
officers  of  the  army.  We  were  doing  a little 
trading  for  curios  and  quite  a crowd  was 
around  us.  I felt  a touch  on  my  arm  and  looked 
down  to  see  a small  brown  urchin  of  six  or  seven 
years,  naked  as  on  the  day  he  was  born.  He 
held  up  a little  common  shell  which  he  had 
picked  up  from  the  sand.  It  was  a pretty  thing, 
but  as  common  as  a beach  pebble.  I took  it 
and  examined  it  carefully  and  seriously.  The 
proceeding  caught  the  interest  of  the  crowd  and 
everything  became  quiet  while  they  watched  to 
see  what  I would  do.  After  my  examination  I 
propounded  the  customary  question,  “ Pela  in 
ini?”  (Sulu  for  “How  much  is  this?”)  The 
child  did  what  most  American  children  would 
have  done.  He  hung  his  head,  stuck  his  thumb 
in  his  mouth  and  dug  a hole  in  the  sand  with  his 
toe.  I renewed  my  examination  and  at  last 
said,  “Mariao”  (Sulu  for  “Good”  or  “All 
right  ”).  I drew  out  a big  copper  cent  and  gave 
it  to  the  lad,  who  again  did  just  what  an  Ameri- 
can boy  would  probably  have  done.  He  grabbed 
the  coin  and  scooted  for  home  as  hard  as  he 
could  go.  That  was  a joke.  The  crowd  saw  it 
and  yelled  with  delighted  laughter.  I like  these 
people  for  the  way  they  laugh. 

While  I was  there  the  Moro  whom  I regard 
as,  of  all  the  Moros,  the  most  extortionate 
trading  rogue,  got  an  idea  that  I was  in  the 


TEE  MO  EOS  OF  SULU 


249 


market  for  attractive  cloths  of  native  make. 
He  was  right  enough.  My  expenditures  over- 
drew my  salary  and  mortgaged  my  future,  but  I 
have  a pile  of  gorgeously  glowing  fabrics  that  is 
a feast  to  my  eyes  and  makes  me  an  object  of 
envy  to  all  who  see  them.  I heap  them  up,  and 
they  are  a blaze,  a bonfire,  of  reds,  greens,  yel- 
lows, purples.  They  are  a tumbled-up  rainbow. 
Probably  nothing  save  the  hemp  that  forms  a 
part  of  the  fabric  of  some  of  them  is  of  local  pro- 
duction. The  cotton  and  the  silk  are  bought 
from  the  Chinese  merchants.  But  the  cloths  are 
made  by  the  people  in  their  own  homes  and  on 
the  crudest  imaginable  looms. 

Some  cloths  are  worked  in  designs  that  are 
wholly  artistic.  Among  the  things  which  I 
bought  from  my  pet  commercial  robber  are  two 
strips  each  some  twenty  feet  long  and  thirty- 
three  inches  wide.  Lined  with  silk,  they  will 
give  me  two  sets  of  novel  and  artistic,  though 
somewhat  brilliant,  curtains  or  portieres.  One 
pair  is  a deep  orange  color,  with  crossing  lines 
of  brown.  The  other  is  an  Indian-red  ground, 
with  designs  in  silk  worked  in  three-inch 
squares.  The  designs  are  all  geometrical  and 
both  pieces  have  a broad  base  in  design  of 
artistic  pattern.  They  look  as  if  they  might  be 
fairly  expensive.  My  rascal  charged  me  fifteen 
pesos  for  one  piece  and  eight  for  the  other.  I 
paid  him  fifteen  for  both,  equal  to  seven  dollars 
and  a half,  and  the  scamp  went  away  to  chuckle 


250 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


over  liis  success  in  getting  more  than  the  market 
price.  I had  a quiet  chuckle  myself;  I would 
have  paid  his  full  price  rather  than  lose  them. 

I am  still  puzzling  in  wonder  how  it  is  that  a 
people  who  so  revel  and  wallow  in  color  can  be 
so  content  also  to  abound  in  dirt.  Their  clothes 
and  cloths  seem  always  dirty.  I think  it  was 
the  color  which  first  struck  me  about  them,  but 
am  not  wholly  sure.  It  probably  was,  as  color 
shows  farther  than  dirt.  With  the  exception 
of  some  of  the  Spanish  steamers  that  sail 
the  Philippine  waters,  I know  of  few  places 
which  are  dirtier  or  which  smell  worse  than  did 
one  of  the  houses  in  which  I watched  the  native 
women  spinning  thread  on  the  crudest  of  wheels 
and  weaving  gorgeously  brilliant  cloths  on  even 
cruder  looms. 

Here  and  there  one  finds  a progressive  chap 
who  is  learning  English.  "When  I was  in  Bongao 
in  September,  the  Datto  Tantung  was  evidently 
rather  proud  of  a few  Spanish  words  which  he 
controlled.  Now  he  is  learning  English.  While 
the  official  party  was  there  a ball  was  given,  a 
native  affair.  Tantung  was  present  in  all  his 
greatness.  During  the  dancing  some  bit  of  it 
pleased  him  and  he  expressed  his  satisfaction : 
“ Ver’  good.”  He  was  heartily  congratulated  on 
his  linguistic  attainments  by  the  American  visi- 
tors. A little  later  his  approval  was  again 
stirred,  and,  probably  in  ignorance,  he  turned 
his  enthusiasm  loose  in  a hearty  “ Goddam.” 


THE  MOBOS  OF  SELF  251 

Of  course  it  was  wicked,  but  it  was  awfully 
funny. 

The  Moros  are  in  no  way  an  industrious  race, 
yet  they  do  some  things  and  do  them  well. 
The  canoes  which  they  build  are  marvels  of 
grace  and  lightness,  finely  finished  and  often 
carved  with  no  little  of  elaboration  and  skill. 
Not  a few  of  their  larger  boats,  fit  for  a cruise 
of  considerable  distance,  show  the  same  delicacy 
and  grace  of  line  as  the  smaller  ones.  The  Moro 
blacksmith,  with  an  outfit  of  exceeding  crude- 
ness, will  turn  out  a knife  of  graceful  curving 
lines  and  smooth  finish.  The  smith  is  an  inter- 
esting man  to  watch  as  he  turns  such  bits  of 
iron,  often  only  scraps,  into  one  of  those  wicked- 
looking  krises  or  the  more  generally  serviceable 
but  less  artistic  barong.  The  shops  which  I 
have  seen  have  consisted  of  four  corner  posts 
and  a roof.  The  anvil  is  a small  block  of  iron 
set  in  the  ground,  its  surface  some  three  or  four 
inches  above  the  ground-level.  Two  or  three 
rude  hammers  of  different  weights  and  two  or 
three  pairs  of  equally  rude  tongs  appear  to  com- 
pose the  smith’s  working  outfit.  He  sits  on  the 
ground  as  he  works,  and  his  forge  is  a fire  built 
on  the  ground.  His  bellows  illustrate  one  of  the 
myriad  of  uses  to  which  the  bamboo  is  put. 
Behind  the  forge  stand  two  hollow  sections  of 
bamboo  of  eight  inches  or  so  in  diameter  and 
some  five  feet  in  height.  Sometimes  they  show 
a carved  band  around  top  and  bottom.  These 


252 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


are  connected,  underground,  by  a single  pipe 
which  reaches  into  the  bottom  of  the  fire.  Each 
tube  holds  a packed  plunger.  Upon  a properly 
elevated  seat  behind  the  tubes  there  sits  a helper 
who,  with  a plunger  in  each  hand,  pumps,  first 
right  and  then  left,  just  as  one  might  work 
two  of  those  old-fashioned  upright  churns  that 
may  still  be  seen  in  remote  necks  of  the  Ameri- 
can woods.  This  furnishes  a constant  current 
whose  force  may  be  easily  regulated  by  the 
operator  at  the  word  of  the  smith. 

The  lines  of  the  knife  are  formed  with  the 
crude  implements  and  gaged  wholly  by  the  eye. 
The  surface  is  pounded  to  as  accurate  a level  as 
can  be  obtained  by  hammering.  The  knife  is 
then  passed  on  to  other  workers,  who,  also  sit- 
ting on  the  ground,  with  endless  patience  rub 
and  rub  the  blade  upon  a large  block  of  some 
suitable  stone  which  serves  the  same  purpose  as 
our  familiar  grindstone.  It  is,  of  course,  a te- 
dious and  monotonous  process,  but  it  does  the 
work  and  time  is  no  important  matter  in  Moro 
life.  Most  of  the  handles  of  these  weapons  are 
made  by  the  Chinese.  They  are  often  of  elab- 
orate design  in  ivory,  silver  or  some  richly 
grained  and  colored  wood.  I cannot  say  how 
long  it  takes  to  make  an  ordinary  kris,  but  the 
prices  at  which  they  have  been  sold  would  indi- 
cate small  wages  for  the  workman.  I have  been 
buying  some  of  the  knives,  six  inches  or  so  in 
length,  used  by  the  betel-chewers  for  cutting 


THE  MOROS  OF  SULTJ 


253 


the  areca-nut  chewed  with  the  betel-leaf.  They 
are  worth  about  five  cents  apiece,  and  I doubt 
if  more  than  three  or  four  could  be  made  and 
finished  in  a day.  Some  are  a little  clumsy,  but 
I have  seen  none  that  was  not  graceful  in  its 
lines. 

The  Moro  is  not  a good  agriculturist.  He 
does  not  have  to  be.  Nature  gives  him  the 
greater  part  of  what  he  needs.  He  buys  much 
of  his  rice.  I have  seen  few  rice-fields  in  the 
southern  islands.  Such  as  I have  seen  pro- 
duced the  kind  known  as  mountain  or  upland 
rice.  But  he  buys  the  rice  with  some  of  nature’s 
products.  The  soil  of  these  islands  is  good  for 
vegetable-farming,  though  such  as  are  raised 
show  lack  of  proper  cultivation.  In  no  other  of 
the  tropical  countries  of  my  experience  have  I 
eaten  bananas  which  might  be  compared  with 
those  of  this  vicinity.  Two  of  the  many  varie- 
ties are  particularly  notable,  one  for  its  richness, 
the  other  for  its  delicacy  of  flavor.  The  man- 
gosteen,  deemed  by  many  the  finest  fruit  of  the 
earth,  is  here  in  abundance.  Oranges,  limes 
and  pineapples  grow  wild.  The  waters  about 
the  islands  teem  with  fish,  large  and  small,  in 
endless  variety.  Cocoanut-palms,  ylang-ylang, 
mango,  and  the  rubber-tree,  ebony  and  mahog- 
any, all  are  here  in  more  or  less  of  abundance. 
Various  trees  furnishing  some  of  the  commercial 
gums  are  also  indigenous  and  in  considerable 
numbers.  There  is  much  that  might  easily  be 


254 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


made  of  commercial  value,  but  its  development 
means  exile  from  all  for  the  sake  of  mere  gain ; 
it  means  the  possession  and  use  of  a fair  amount 
of  capital  and  the  discovery  of  a solution  of  labor 
problems.  It  is  no  land  of  sudden  fortunes  with 
speedy  return  for  the  enjoyment  of  invested 
income. 

There  are  vast  pearl  fisheries  when  pearl-fish- 
ing shall  be  made  an  open  industry.  The  shell 
of  the  oyster  in  which  the  pearls  are  found  is 
the  mother-of-pearl  of  commerce.  Its  sale 
would  constitute  the  backbone  of  a pearl  indus- 
try, with  the  gems  as  a sort  of  gambling  by- 
product.  Occasionally  there  is  a valuable  find. 
With  the  islands  free  and  safe  for  the  sportsman, 
there  is  game  for  the  hunter.  The  small  spotted 
deer  are  in  considerable  numbers  and  there  is 
plenty  of  keen  sport  for  an  enthusiastic  pig- 
sticker. There  is  also  a variety  of  bird  game. 
The  horses  of  the  island  are  generally  small,  but 
from  thirty  to  forty  dollars  (gold)  will  buy  a 
stocky,  active  and  cleanly  built  pony,  good  for 
any  weight  up  to  one  hundred  and  seventy  pounds 
and  serviceable  for  even  more  than  that. 

The  Spaniards  called  the  inhabitants  Moros, 
probably  through  some  confounding  of  them 
with  the  Moors  of  northern  Africa.  No  reason 
is  apparent  for  it,  except  that  both  are  dark- 
skinned  Mohammedans.  But  the  name  will 
probably  stick  to  them,  as  that  of  Indian  has 
clung  to  the  red  man  of  North  America. 


TEE  MOROS  OF  SULU 


255 


The  religious  question  is  a serious  one.  Mis- 
sionary work,  the  Christianizing  of  so-called 
“ heathen  ” by  means  of  sectarian  agents  sent  out 
by  Christian  organizations,  is  a work  which  is  im- 
perative in  many  American  minds  and  dear  to 
many  American  hearts.  To  intimate  a political 
necessity  for  abstaining  from  mission  work  in  any 
country  is  to  cause  many  a head  to  shake  in  sad 
disapproval.  Yet  it  is  hardly  to  be  questioned 
that  missionaries  to  the  Moros  would  at  once 
mean  a bloody  war.  Their  Moslem  fanaticism 
has  resisted  three  hundred  and  fifty  years  of 
effort  made  by  the  Jesuit,  the  Dominican,  the 
Augustinian  and  the  Franciscan,  and  it  may 
be  questioned  whether  the  average  Protestant 
missionary  is  any  wiser  in  his  day  and  genera- 
tion, whether  he  is  shrewder,  keener,  more  dip- 
lomatic, than  the  men  who  dotted  the  wilds  of 
North  America  and  the  unknown  Orient  with 
their  mission  chapels,  unsupported  by  Krags 
and  Mausers,  long  before  anything  was  heard  of 
the  “ white  man’s  burden.”  The  African  abo- 
rigine, the  Hawaiian  and  the  Fijian  may  toler- 
ate or  welcome  the  gospel  of  Christianity. 
When  it  is  spoken  to  the  Moro,  he  draws  his 
kris  and  his  barong  and  goes  on  the  war-path. 
It  will  probably  be  well  to  let  matters  get  a bit 
settled  down  there  in  Sulu,  to  let  the  people  get 
a little  measure  of  acquaintance  with  us  and  con- 
fidence in  us,  before  trying  to  change  their  reli- 
gion as  well  as  their  government. 


256 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


The  population  of  this  southern  zone  is  largely 
guesswork,  but  it  is  estimated  to  number  a mil- 
lion and  a half.  Their  nominal  head  is  the 
sultan.  He  wears  a long  string  of  names,  the 
principal  of  which  appears  to  be  Muhamed 
Kiram.  He  has  probably  never  been  so  called, 
but  for  convenience  I will  refer  to  him  as  Mr. 
Kiram.  He  is  not  a very  noble  character  and 
is  neither  greatly  loved  nor  greatly  respected  by 
his  people.  He  is,  however,  the  legitimate  ruler 
and  the  acknowledged  representative  of  the 
Mussulman  religion.  Mr.  Kiram  holds  his  posi- 
tion by  hereditary  succession  and  has  duly 
made  the  trip  to  Mecca,  which  is  a necessary 
qualification  for  the  job  of  sultan.  Nominally, 
his  domain  and  spiritual  authority  extend  over 
a part,  at  least,  of  North  Borneo ; but  the  effect 
and  influence  of  the  British  North  Borneo  Trad- 
ing Company  has  done  much  to  make  the  sul- 
tanate a figure  of  speech  rather  than  a fact  in 
that  country.  On  the  island  of  Mindanao  there 
are  two  or  three  sub-sultanates.  The  scope  of 
sultanate  power  is  not  easy  to  define.  It  is 
perhaps  best  described  as  spiritual  power  with 
political  influence  as  by-product.  Nor  is  the 
spiritual  power  at  all  absolute.  It  is  quite  a long 
way  from  it.  A certain  general  regard  for  it  is 
manifest,  though  that  regard  would  appear 
rather  as  the  effect  of  tradition  and  life  habit 
than  as  a clearly  recognized  regard  for  an  active 
principle. 


THE  MOROS  OF  SULU 


257 


The  actual  rulers  of  the  people  seem  to  be  the 
dattos,  or  chiefs,  of  the  tribes  or  clans.  The 
system  is  a sort  of  combination  of  these  two 
organizations.  Counting  a tribe  as  an  aggrega- 
tion of  people  of  the  same  race  and  language  for 
mutual  benefit  and  protection,  and  the  clan  as 
an  organization  which  involves  something  of 
the  old  patriarchal  and  family  idea,  it  will  be 
found  that  both  features  appear  in  the  Moro  life. 
The  heads  of  the  various  and  numerous  bodies 
are  the  dattos.  In  normal  process  they  consti- 
tute a Moro  nobility  and  the  rank  descends  like 
a dukedom.  Occasionally  an  outsider  fights  his 
way  into  the  circle  and  secures  recognition  and 
authority. 

In  many  ways  the  position  is  analogous  to  the 
Indian  question.  An  arrangement  with  the 
sultan  may  or  may  not  be  confirmed  and 
accepted  by  individual  dattos.  Upon  our  arrival 
at  Bongao  we  found  that  the  people  of  the  Datto 
Tantung  had  been  erecting  a stockade  for  pur- 
poses of  defense.  It  was  rumored  that  the  sul- 
tan was  to  send  a body  against  them  because  of 
their  acceptance,  without  his  definite  consent, 
of  the  overtures  made  a few  weeks  before  by 
General  Bates  as  the  representative  of  the 
United  States.  They  came  at  Mr.  Kiram  by 
saying  that  they  equally  resented  his  arrange- 
ment with  the  same  gentleman  without  consult- 
ing them.  Mr.  Kiram  might  propose  punishment, 
but  it  would  not  be  tamely  accepted.  The 


258 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Indians  had  no  such  central  authority,  but  the 
actual  leadership  of  each  group  of  Moros  lies 
with  the  datto  rather  than  with  the  sultan  and 
special  arrangements  with  individual  dattos  are 
far  more  likely  to  be  effective  and  permanent 
than  any  general  arrangement  made  with  the 
sultan. 


XIV 

IN  AND  ABOUND  MANILA 


First  impressions— A mongrel  place— Description  of  the  city 
—Vehicles— Cigars  and  cigarettes— Filipino  garments — 
Local  trade — Banking  business  in  Manila— An  awkward 
system — Theaters  and  grand  opera— A drive  in  the  suburbs 
— Ecclesiastical  barracks. 

MY  first  impressions  of  Manila  were  distinctly 
unfavorable  and  although  they  became 
somewhat  modified,  I found  nothing  in  the  place 
which  made  me  long  to  take  up  a permanent 
residence.  I arrived  from  Hongkong  and  our 
ship  was  quarantined  because  of  the  plague  at 
that  port.  The  day  after  our  arrival,  a storm 
set  in.  Within  three  days  the  rainfall  measured 
twenty-two  and  a half  inches.  To  those  whose 
experience  in  the  world  is  chiefly  limited  to  the 
towns  of  Goshen  and  Hillville  there  is  a natural 
attraction  in  any  form  of  life  which  offers  nov- 
elty. To  the  wider  observer  all  things  become 
comparative.  A Spanish  city  may  be  horribly 
dirty,  but  there  will  be  the  light  and  color  and 
architectural  lines  which  make  Seville  and  Cor- 
dova and  Barcelona  places  of  keen  interest  and 

259 


260 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


attractiveness.  Chinese  cities  may  be  dirty,  but 
in  them  one  may  revel  in  the  pleasure  of  unique 
and  picturesque  surroundings.  The  busy  work- 
men in  the  Chinese  fields,  the  sampan  life  on 
Chinese  rivers  and  the  teeming  life  of  the  streets 
of  Chinese  cities  are  stamped  with  their  own  dis- 
tinctive character.  A planter’s  house  and  the 
nipa  hut  of  the  peasant,  out  in  the  hills  and 
valleys  of  Luzon,  are  both  in  harmony  with  their 
surroundings  and  therefore  are  usually  pleasant 
to  look  upon. 

But  Manila  is  neither  this  nor  that.  It  is  a 
mongrel  place,  which  offers  little  that  is  attrac- 
tive to  either  eye,  ear  or  nose.  The  Spanish  life 
of  the  West  Indies  does  not  seem  to  be  here. 
In  normal  times  the  Spanish  population  of  the 
city  numbered  less  than  two  per  cent,  of  the 
inhabitants.  Other  white  foreign  residents 
were  in  the  ratio  of  about  one  in  a thousand. 
To-day  it  is  estimated  that  at  least  two  thirds 
of  the  Spanish  people  have  left  the  island. 

Manila  is  a double  city,  the  parts  being  dis- 
tinctly different  in  their  features.  The  two 
parts  are  divided  by  the  Pasig  River,  with  three 
bridges  to  serve  as  connecting-links.  Manila 
proper  is  the  old  walled  city  on  the  southern 
bank  of  the  river.  It  is  distinctly  ecclesiastical 
and  official.  Nearly  if  not  quite  one  third  of 
its  area  is  owned  and  occupied  by  the  church 
and  the  religious  orders.  There  also  are  the 
governor’s  palace  and,  scattered  throughout  the 


IN  AND  ABOUND  MANILA 


261 


section,  various  buildings  of  civil  and  military 
organizations.  Bather  less  than  one  half  of  the 
area  is  used  for  residential  purposes.  There 
are  a few  corner  stores,  but  no  distinctly  busi- 
ness streets.  To  the  east  of  it,  outside  the  walls, 
there  is  a section  known  as  the  Jardin  Botanico. 
Southward,  also  outside  the  walls,  lies  the  Paseo 
de  la  Luneta,  the  Central  Park  of  Manila. 
Beyond  that  lie  the  suburbs  of  Eremita  and 
Malate. 

To  the  north  of  the  river  lies  the  new  city, 
with  the  greater  mass  of  the  population  and  the 
active  business.  It  is  divided  into  districts, 
somewhat  on  the  ward  principle,  each  of  which 
has  its  distinct  title,  such  as  San  Nicolas, 
Tondo,  Binondo,  Santa  Cruz,  Quiapo,  San 
Miguel,  Sampalog,  etc.  Of  these  Binondo  is 
the  focus  of  life  and  activity.  It  is  the  trade 
center.  Here  are  the  hotels  and  the  principal 
retail  street,  the  Escolta. 

Across  the  street  that  runs  beside  the  Bi- 
nondo church,  one  enters  the  Calle  Bosario,  which 
runs  southeastward  to  the  river.  This  is  the 
street  of  the  Chinese  merchants.  The  stores  are 
little  more  than  small  and  dingy  boxes,  devoted 
mainly  to  the  sale  of  European  goods.  The  nar- 
row sidewalks  are  crowded  with  the  merchants, 
their  clerks,  the  buyers  and  the  passers-by.  The 
place  is  not  attractive  to  the  eye  and  the  nose 
suffers  violence.  Next  to  the  Escolta,  this  is  the 
chief  business  street  of  the  Philippine  Islands. 


262 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


At  right  angles  with  the  Calle  Rosario,  within 
a block  of  the  river  and  parallel  to  it,  runs  the 
Escolta.  In  some  way  I had  it  fixed  in  my  mind 
as  a broad  and  well-paved  avenue  bordered  with 
shops  filled  with  the  wares  of  the  Orient.  Alas 
for  my  dreams  ! I found  this  famous  Escolta  a 
street  of  some  thirty  feet  in  average  width  from 
wall  to  wall,  with  narrow  sidewalks  and  roughly 
paved  roadway.  American  soldiers,  natives 
and  Chinamen  jostled  and  crowded  each  other 
on  the  narrow  footway  and  the  street  was  a 
tangle  of  the  local  carriages  and  wagons.  Carr- 
omatos , calesas  and  the  quilez , which  is  a sort 
of  bobtailed  herdic,  wound  and  twisted  their 
sinuous  pathway  through  the  crowd.  These  are 
all  two-wheeled  vehicles,  drawn  by  the  native 
ponies.  These  ponies  are  rather  interesting 
beasts.  They  are  about  the  size  of  a New- 
foundland dog,  being  much  smaller,  even,  than 
those  of  the  West  Indies.  Like  those  of  the 
West  Indies,  most  of  them  are  half  starved 
and  cruelly  treated.  The  two-pony  carruage  is 
a high-toned  four-wheeler,  and,  though  less 
common,  is  well  represented  along  the  Escolta. 
So  is  the  dray,  drawn  by  a single  carabao.  The 
carabao  is,  presumably,  of  the  bovine  family; 
but  it  more  closely  resembles  an  overgrown  and 
repulsive  black  hog  with  huge,  recurving  horns. 
The  pace  of  these  animals  is  of  the  slowest  and 
their  presence  is  a serious  obstruction  to  traffic. 
Mingled  with  all  movement  of  vehicles  are  the 


IN  AND  AROUND  MANILA 


263 


Chinese  polemen  with  their  shoulder-poles  sup- 
porting baskets  or  packages  at  either  end. 
They  dodge  in  and  out  as  best  they  can,  now  on 
the  sidewalk  and  now  in  the  street,  with  an 
astonishing  dexterity  and  freedom  from  collision. 

Midway  from  the  Escolta,  a street  running 
southward  crosses  the  Bridge  of  Spain,  a struc- 
ture some  three  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length 
leading  over  the  Pasig  to  the  old  city  of  Manila. 
The  Binondo  approach  is  by  a gradient  hardly 
equal  to  that  of  Wall  Street  at  its  Broadway 
end,  yet  the  stalling  of  these  little  vehicles  is  of 
frequent  occurrence.  So,  too,  is  their  slipping 
backward  down  the  grade,  with  confusion  to 
followers  and  voluble  Filipino  profanity.  A 
wretched  tramway  helps  to  block  both  the 
bridge  and  the  Escolta.  The  cars  are  small,  but 
four  ponies,  three  men,  three  whips  and  yells 
fit  to  raise  the  dead  are  usually  needed  to  get 
the  cars  up  the  slight  rise  to  the  bridge. 

In  the  best  tobacconist’s  shop  in  the  place,  I 
called  for  the  finest  grade  of  Manila  cigarettes. 
For  a package  containing  thirty  “ coffin-nails  ” 
the  price  was  three  and  a half  cents,  American 
money.  I called  for  the  finest  and  most  expen- 
sive Manila  cigar.  An  affair  of  about  the  size 
of  a telegraph-pole  was  produced.  It  was 
wrapped  in  tinfoil  and  tissue-paper.  The  price 
was  ten  cents,  American.  The  ordinary  run  of 
cigars  sell  at  from  three  to  five  cents.  One  of  the 
leading  factories  advertises  forty-eight  brands 


264 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  sizes  at  prices  from  fifty  cents  to  five  dol- 
lars per  hundred,  the  higher  figure  representing 
its  best  grade  under  the  brand  of  “Incompara- 
bles.” But  prices  of  cigars  are  rising.  The 
cigars,  even  the  best,  are  to  be  recommended 
only  to  those  who  like  them.  They  are  usually 
so  fresh  as  to  be  spongy  and  some  are  difficult 
of  ignition. 

The  Chinese  are  the  workers  in  Manila.  They 
are  the  bearers  and  the  laborers,  the  workers  in 
wood,  iron,  cloth  and  leather.  Senor  Don  Fili- 
pino will  drive  a carruage,  a carromato  or  a 
quilez.  Some  Filipinos  will  do  manual  labor. 
Most,  however,  seem  averse  to  it. 

One  gets  an  idea  that  the  average  Filipino, 
male  or  female,  is  only  about  half  dressed,  from 
our  standpoint.  The  customary  male  body- 
covering is  only  an  undershirt.  Those  of  higher 
social  rank  and  greater  wealth  wear  also  a cotton 
shirt  or  a garment  of  gauzy  texture  of  some 
locally  made  material.  But  the  garment  will  be 
worn,  like  a coat,  in  the  full  measure  of  its 
beauty,  outside  the  trousers.  A higher  step  in 
the  social  scale  brings  the  substitution  of  the 
coat  for  the  shirt.  A Filipino  dude  with  a cane 
and  a little  billycock  hat,  a pair  of  black 
trousers  and  a gauze  shirt  worn  outside  of 
them,  is  a resplendent  spectacle,  and  he  has  the 
air  of  being  entirely  conscious  of  it. 

From  our  standpoint,  there  is  the  same  half- 
dressed  look  about  the  women  of  the  poorer 


IN  AND  ABOUND  MANILA 


265 


classes.  The  Negrito  woman  of  the  mountains 
may  use  only  a cloth  extending  from  waist  to 
knee.  The  Mangyan  woman  of  Mindoro  may 
wear  a contrivance  of  braided  rattan  which  is 
even  more  abbreviated.  These  garments  do  not 
suggest  the  half  dressed.  They  are  distinct. 
There  is  no  suggestion  of  European  costume. 
It  is  not  so  with  the  Filipino  woman  of  Manila. 
Her  garments  are  neither  dress  nor  native  cos- 
tume. Pieces  of  cloth  cover  her  from  the  waist 
downward  by  a system  which  not  infrequently 
displays  the  leg  as  high  as  the  knee-joint.  The 
shoulder-  and  body-covering  varies  in  the  num- 
ber of  articles  and  detail  of  construction.  All 
are  cut  somewhat  low  in  the  neck  and  on  a plan 
which  gives  them  a “list  to  port  or  to  star- 
board,” leaving  a shoulder  and  an  upper  arm 
wholly  bare.  In  the  upper  circles  there  is  exer- 
cised a greater  care  in  adjustment,  and  a hand- 
kerchief, folded  diagonally,  is  laid  across  the 
shoulders  and  pinned  in  front.  This  tends  to 
steady  the  outfit  and  keep  it  in  place.  The 
sleeves  are  gathered  at  the  shoulder  and  flare 
outward,  broadly  bell-mouthed,  to  a little  below 
the  elbow.  But  these  garments  are  always 
scrupulously  clean,  and  as  for  modesty  of 
demeanor,  I have  nowhere  seen  that  of  the  Fili- 
pino women  surpassed. 

John  Chinaman,  of  whom  there  are  thousands 
in  the  city,  largely  retains  the  essential  princi- 
ples of  the  garments  of  his  native  land ; but  there 


266 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


is  a wide  latitude  in  that.  The  high-class  man 
covers  whatever  he  has  beneath  it  wTith  a silken 
garment  like  a butcher’s  frock,  which  reaches 
nearly  to  his  ankles.  The  laborer  may  wear  but 
a nether  garment,  cut,  as  is  the  Chinese  fashion, 
very  full  in  the  fullest  part.  When  it  rains  he 
rolls  this  garment  as  high  on  his  legs  as  it  can 
be  made  to  roll.  His  hat  may  be  anything  from 
the  castaway  and  dilapidated  campaign  hat  of 
the  American  soldier  to  the  braided  bamboo 
“ mushroom  ” of  twenty-four  inches  in  diameter. 
A common  Chinese  costume  more  closely  re- 
sembles a suit  of  pajamas  than  anything  else. 
Sometimes  it  is  of  cotton,  sometimes  of  silk.  I 
encountered  one  of  a pale  robin’s-egg  blue  silk. 

In  point  of  size  and  appearance  of  the  stores, 
there  is  scarcely  a city  of  twenty-five  thousand 
people  in  America  that  would  not  immeasur- 
ably excel  the  Manila  outfit.  What  cannot  be 
bought  on  the  Escolta,  excepting  provisions,  is 
hardly  to  be  found  in  the  city.  Harness  and 
hardware,  dry  goods  and  diamonds,  beer,  whisky 
and  cigars,  stationery,  clothing,  drugs,  books, 
notions  and  wares  from  India,  China  and  Japan, 
all  find  representation  among  many  other  things 
along  this  short  line,  which  represents  the  aris- 
tocratic retail  trade  of  a city  of  more  than  a 
quarter  of  a million  of  people. 

The  retail  stores  for  the  masses  cover  a much 
longer  line.  They  fill  the  Calle  Kosario,  Calle 
San  Fernando  and  the  Calle  Santo  Cristo,  with 


IN  AND  ABOUND  MANILA 


267 


more  or  less  extensive  outcroppings  in  scores  of 
other  places.  These  are  the  stores  that  are 
of  special  interest  to  the  observer,  whether  his 
motive  be  idle  curiosity,  entertainment  or  special 
investigation.  The  Escolta  is  for  the  wealthy 
native  and  the  foreigner.  The  other  localities 
are  for  the  people.  Rosario  and  Santo  Cristo 
are  preeminently  the  streets  of  the  Chinese  mer- 
chants. San  Fernando  has  many  Chinese,  but 
it  also  harbors  numerous  native  proprietors. 

The  first  thing  that  one  notices  is  that  these 
stores  are  but  little  boxes  which  would  hardly 
make  an  office  for  an  American ; the  next 
thing  noticed  is  the  number  of  attendants ; and 
the  third  is  the  manifest  duplication  of  stocks 
and  their  arrangement.  The  native  stores  on 
Calle  San  Fernando  are  rather  booths  for  the 
sale  of  specialties.  They  are  little  stalls  per- 
haps six  feet  by  ten,  presided  over  by  native 
women.  A broad  platform  or  counter  bars  the 
entire  width.  Upon  these  the  venders  sit,  usually 
busy  with  embroiderv-work  when  the  counter 
is  not  in  use  for  the  display  of  goods  to  the  cus- 
tomer, who  stands  on  the  sidewalk  or  else  sits, 
comfortably  and  sociably,  on  the  counter  with 
the  vender.  It  is  to  these  native  stores  that  vis- 
itors go  to  buy  the  jusi  and  pifia  cloth  and  the 
pina  embroidery.  Their  trade  is  largely  in  those 
articles  and  they  are  patronized  by  the  native 
women,  who  purchase  from  them  their  panuelas 
and  camisas  or  the  materials  therefor.  It  is  a 


268 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


good  place  to  see  hair,  if  one  be  curious  that  way. 
The  Filipiuo  women  share  St.  Paul’s  opinion 
that  “ if  a woman  have  long  hair,  it  is  a glory  to 
her.”  On  San  Fernando  one  will  sometimes  see 
a decidedly  pretty  face,  often  crowned  by  a head 
of  hair,  uncoiled  and  unconfined,  that  demands 
a second  look  and  elicits  a “ By  Jove,  what  a 
head ! ” or  some  similar  expression.  One  may 
also  see  some  excellent  specimens  of  nature’s 
handiwork  in  dentistry,  if  the  chaffering  over 
a bit  of  pina-work  be  properly  managed.  I 
think  that  the  uninitiated  purchaser  can  save 
money  by  trading  with  a Chinaman,  though 
John  has  no  conscience  when  it  is  a matter  of 
profit;  but  it  is  a lot  pleasanter  to  be  just  a 
little  bit  swindled  by  a raven-haired,  clean  and 
neatly  clad  Filipina  maiden. 

Some  years  ago,  in  1881  I think,  an  extensive 
fire  swept  over  the  area  in  the  angle  formed  by 
the  Escolta  and  the  Calle  Rosario.  A few 
months  ago  much  of  the  space  was  still  a mass 
of  ruins.  Within  that  time  ground  has  been 
cleared  and  one-story  wooden  buildings  have 
been  run  up  to  accommodate  some  hundred  or 
more  of  these  little  shops  of  the  money-hunting 
Chinamen,  in  addition  to  the  many  hundreds 
which  existed  before.  But  the  new  ones  are  just 
like  the  old  ones.  The  stock  is  the  same — prints, 
cheap  silk  handkerchiefs,  undershirts  and  a few 
other  things.  There  is  the  same  multiplicity  of 
attendants. 


IN  AND  AROUND  MANILA 


269 


The  wholesale  trade  and  the  export  business 
are  largely  in  the  hands  of  a few  houses, 
most  of  them  English.  They  are  the  channels 
through  which  flows  an  annual  business  of 
from  six  to  seven  million  dollars’  worth  of 
hemp,  half  that  value  in  sugar,  and  enough 
of  other  commodities  to  make  a total  of  fourteen 
or  fifteen  million  dollars.  The  import  trade  is 
more  scattered.  Certain  lines  of  commodities 
come  in  through  these  same  foreign  commission 
houses,  but  a very  notable  percentage  of  wares 
comes  in  in  comparatively  small  lots  consigned 
to  the  small  Chinese  dealers. 

Manila  has  either  three  banking  institutions, 
or  two  institutions  and  a ghost— I do  not  know 
which.  These  are  the  prominent  and  acknow- 
ledged institutions  of  deposit  and  general  bank- 
ing. There  are  also  individuals  of  different 
nationalities  doing  more  or  less  private  banking. 
The  “ghost”  is  El  Banco  Espanol  Filipino, 
about  which  few  foreigners  have  any  knowledge 
save  that  of  handling  its  most  materially  objec- 
tionable currency— the  only  paper,  except  a lim- 
ited amount  of  American,  that  circulates  in 
the  islands.  I am  told  that  the  bank  is  solvent 
in  itself,  but  that,  for  greater  public  assurance 
and  security,  its  issued  notes  are  practically  guar- 
anteed by  the  English  banks. 

The  English  concerns  are  agencies,  or 
branches,  of  houses  established  in  several  cities 
of  the  Orient.  The  Chartered  Bank  of  India, 


270 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Australia  and  China  displays  its  name  in  Hong- 
kong, Shanghai,  Peking,  Han-kau,  Yokohama, 
Kobe,  Java  and  elsewhere.  The  Hongkong  and 
Shanghai  Banking  Corporation  displays  its  only 
slightly  less  imposing  signboard  in  the  same 
places,  and  in  others  such  as  Siam,  Penang, 
Singapore  and  Bombay.  Both  appear  to  be  as 
solid  as  rocks  and  there  is  no  visible  reason 
why  they  should  not  be — from  the  standpoint  of 
their  customers.  The  first-named  advertises  a 
fully  paid  up  capital  of  £800,000,  a reserve  of 
£500,000,  and  a reserve  liability  of  shareholders 
of  £800,000.  It  is  an  old  concern  with  a royal 
charter  dated  1853.  The  other  is  a newer  crea- 
tion, incorporated  in  1867,  with  paid  up  capital 
of  £1,000,000,  reserve  of  £1,100,000,  and  reserve 
liability  of  shareholders,  £1,000,000. 

Personally  I have  no  complaint  to  make  about 
these  banks,  or  the  system,  except  that  I know 
I am  “ done  ” on  every  draft  I make,  just  as  all 
others  are.  But  I have  had  none  of  the  trouble 
of  which  many  complain.  I go  to  the  bank,  pre- 
sent my  letter  of  credit,  and  a courteous  young 
man,  who  is  probably  a Spanish  mestizo,  offers 
a seat  and  asks  how  much  I want.  I name  the 
amount  and  have  no  other  word  with  him  except 
a few  remarks  of  courteous  sociability.  In  a 
moment  or  two  he  comes  to  me  with  a draft,  in 
duplicate,  upon  Brown,  Shipley  & Co.  of  London, 
upon  which  I make  as  close  an  imitation  as  I 
can  of  the  signature  upon  my  credit-letter.  He 


IN  AND  ABOUND  MANILA 


271 


goes  to  various  other  clerks  who  figure  things 
and  sign  things  and  initial  things,  and  returns 
with  the  credit-letter  and  an  order  on  the  cashier 
for  a certain  number  of  Mexican  dollars.  I pay 
him  a peseta  for  stamp  duties.  It  has  taken 
less  than  ten  minutes,  and  we  bow  and  part. 

The  amount  of  the  order  on  the  cashier  is 
variable,  though  the  drafts,  in  pounds,  may  be 
for  the  same  sum  at  different  times.  A draft, 
made  this  week,  for  £50  sterling,  may  call  for 
$492.60  Mexican,  or  it  may  call  for  less,  or  for 
$500.  The  variation  is  in  the  rate  of  exchange 
on  London  and  the  fluctuation  of  silver  value. 
I have  never  tried  to  figure  it  out;  I could  n’t. 
It  requires  an  expert.  The  novice,  or  the  vic- 
tim, whichever  he  may  be,  accepts  thankfully 
that  which  is  given  him  and  goes  away.  My 
impression  is  that  at  the  present  rate  of  silver, 
if  the  calculation  were  based  on  the  actual  quo- 
tations, I should  get  about  $520  Mexican  for 
my  £50.  In  other  words,  I am  out  from  $20  to 
$25  on  every  £100  for  which  I draw.  The  bank 
makes  it,  and  the  other  bank  would  do  the  same. 
Protest  is  useless;  one  has  no  choice.  Orien- 
tal banks  are  not  health  resorts  established  by 
their  proprietors  for  the  benefit  of  clerks  and 
managers. 

At  the  cashier’s  window  I also  find  a cour- 
teous reception.  I present  my  order  and  say 
that  I want  bills  and  not  silver.  This  is  a lie. 
I don’t  want  bills.  They  are  clumsy,  coarse, 


272 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


dirty,  unacceptable  in  all  ways  save  that  they 
are  money  and  will  buy  things.  But  they  are 
better  than  the  “ dhobie  ” dollars.  One  cannot 
carry  five  hundred  or  a thousand  silver  cart- 
wheels “in  his  inside  pocket.”  I think  that  a 
Manila  experience  has  cured  quite  a number  of 
free-silverites.  But  bills  are  scarce.  Some- 
times the  bank  has  none  at  all;  sometimes  it 
has  a few.  They  can  give  me  American  gold 
(which  is  fairly  abundant  here),  but  they  must 
charge  me  a premium  for  it.  The  Mexican  or 
dhobie  dollar  goes  in  general  trade  at  two  Mexi- 
can for  one  American.  The  bank  will  give  me, 
to-day,  $2.03  Mexican  for  one  American,  but  if 
I want  to  buy  gold,  or  get  a portion  of  my  draft 
in  gold,  they  will  give  it  me  on  a basis  of  $2.00, 
or  three  per  cent,  premium,  against  one  and  a 
half  per  cent,  if  I wish  to  sell. 

Assume  that  my  order  on  the  cashier  is  for 
$494.30.  I may  get  $250  in  the  miserable  paper, 
in  fives  and  tens.  I take  $100  in  gold,  $206 
Mexican,  and  $38.30  in  silver.  The  great  “ wad  ” 
of  bills,  printed  on  paper  as  thick  as  heavy 
wrapping-paper,  bulges  one  half  of  my  pockets 
and  the  silver  bulges  the  other  half.  I go  on 
the  streets  looking  as  though  I had  goiters  all 
over  me.  Then  I have  to  lock  the  stuff  in  my 
satchels  in  my  room.  It  has  not  yet  happened 
to  me,  but  sometimes,  in  Manila  as  elsewhere, 
thieves  do  “ break  through  and  steal.”  My  little 
bunch  of  yellow  bags  is  fairly  convenient  and 


IF  AND  AROUFD  MAFILA 


273 


compact — but.  If  I spend  it  in  a store  or  pay 
my  hotel  bill,  I lose  $3  American  on  the  $100. 
If  I take  it  to  the  bank  some  day  and  buy  Mexi- 
can with  it,  I lose  $1.50,  because  they  will  give 
me  only  $203,  whereas  I have  paid  them  $206 
in  Mexican. 

There  is  another  rake-off  for  the  bank  by 
which  the  unwary  are  sometimes  caught.  One 
pays  a visit  to  Shanghai.  He  changes  his 
good  American  gold  for  local  bills  of  the  Hong- 
kong and  Shanghai  Banking  Corporation.  He 
goes  to  Hongkong  lugging  a few  hundreds  of 
that  kind  of  currency  with  him.  Will  the  same 
concern  in  Hongkong  accept  these  bills?  Will 
anybody  to  whom  he  wishes  to  pay  money  accept 
them?  Certainly— at  a very  jolly  discount.  In 
Hongkong  Mr.  Traveler  accumulates  a load  of 
bills  issued  by  the  Hongkong  branch  of  the  same 
benevolent  institution.  Perhaps  he  has  those 
for  which  he  exchanged  his  Shanghais — at  a 
discount.  Let  him  not  take  these  to  Manila. 
He  will  there  have  to  pay  another  discount  at 
the  agency  of  the  same  bank.  He  cannot  ex- 
change them  for  Manila  bills  and  he  must 
pay  a premium  if  he  would  buy  gold  with  them. 
He  can  buy  Mexican  dollars  with  them,  dollar 
for  dollar,  and  the  Manila  value  of  these  will  be 
the  same.  But  two  or  three  hundred  silver 
dollars  are  not  handy  things  in  a trunk  or  a 
satchel,  which  may  be  lost.  They  pound  about 
as  the  trunk  is  thrown  around  and  they  make 


274 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


a satchel  as  heavy  as  a guilty  conscience.  But 
why  complain  ? 

The  real  agony  comes  in  if  one  has  more 
complicated  relations  with  local  banking  insti- 
tutions. Perkins  & Co.  of  Manila  give  me  their 
check  on  one  of  these  banks  for  $500  Mexican. 
I wish  to  remit  $100  American  to  Coats  & Co., 
my  tailors  in  New  York.  In  New  York  the 
process  would  consist  of  personal  identifica- 
tion, verification  of  the  check,  and  the  delivery 
of  the  draft  and  a cash  balance — the  work  of  a 
few  minutes.  Here  there  is  also  the  identifica- 
tion and  verification,  but  they  are  a work  of  time. 
When  the  check  is  properly  certified  by  the 
proper  functionaries,  it  is  returned  to  me  for 
presentation  to  the  cashier.  He  will  pay  the 
check,  perhaps  in  bills,  perhaps  in  silver  dollars. 
Then  I must  go  to  the  exchange  department 
and  file  a written  application  for  my  draft  on 
New  York.  I must  then  go  to  another  depart- 
ment and  pay  there  enough  of  what  I have  just 
received  from  some  other  department, — I am 
getting  mixed,  but  that  is  just  what  one  does  in 
the  bank, — but  I pay  to  somebody  the  equiva- 
lent, in  silver,  of  $100  in  American  gold,  plus 
exchange  or  minus  discount  or  something. 
Having  paid  my  money,  I go  back  to  the 
exchange  department  and  wait  until  I get  my 
draft. 

As  I prepare  to  drag  away  my  cash  balance,  I 
look  at  my  watch  and  find  that  I have  whiled 


IX  AXD  ABOUND  MANILA 


275 


away  from  an  hour  to  an  hour  and  a half  of  time, 
and  I note  also  that  I have  paid  a commission 
that  will  swell  the  dividends  of  the  bank, — I am 
too  much  mixed  up  to  compute  it  and  see  its 
amount,— and  I have  lost  enough  nerve  force  to 
run  a freight  train.  That  is  banking  in  Manila. 

Manila  has  theaters  and  a circus.  At  the 
circus  I saw  some  very  clever  riding  and  tum- 
bling by  Filipino  lads  of  from  ten  to  twelve 
years  of  age.  They  were  being  trained  and  in- 
structed by  a Japanese  professional  acrobat.  The 
Teatro  Filipino  usually  employs  foreign  talent. 
In  earlier  days  Spanish  troupes,  operatic  and 
theatrical,  were  accustomed  to  make  occasional 
trips  to  the  far  East.  Sunday  is  the  great 
theater  day,  as  it  is  in  all  Spanish  countries.  I 
was  a bit  taken  in  on  one  occasion  by  the  adver- 
tisement of  the  Teatro  Libertad.  It  proclaimed 
a “ Gran  Exito  ! Novedad  del  Dia  ! Filipinos 
no  olvidarse  ! ” Exito  means  an  “ end,”  a “ ter- 
mination,” and  its  use  in  this  connection  is  idio- 
matic. The  rest  of  it  means,  “ The  novelty  of 
the  day ! Filipinos,  do  not  forget ! ” The  bill 
went  on  to  say  (in  Spanish)  that,  on  such  a date, 
there  would  be  given  a “representation  of  the 
magnificent  Tagal  tragedy,  in  four  acts  and 
eight  pictures  (tableaux),  of  the  great  scenic 
spectacle  entitled  ‘Aida.’”  It  also  stated  that 
“because  of  the  enormous  cost  of  producing 
this  magnificent  work”  the  prices  had  been 
elevado.  Thinking  it  to  be  an  old  favorite,  I 


276 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


saved  up  my  money  and  went.  Alas ! it  was 
but  a u representation,”  mostly  in  recitation.  I 
got  my  money’s  worth,  but  I did  not  hear  the 
“ Celeste  Aida  ” by  a Tagal  tenor,  as  I had  hoped. 
I did  hear  some  good  voices  and  an  excellent 
native  orchestra. 

“Malo  camino”  (bad  road),  said  my  driver. 
The  little  phrase  carried  me  over  more  than  ten 
thousand  miles  of  land  and  water.  It  brought 
up  a vision  of  Cuban  and  Porto  Rican  coclieros 
who  had  rattled  my  bones  over  many  a malo 
camino  and  used  the  same  expression  to  inform 
me  of  what  was  but  too  evident.  And  here 
in  the  Philippines  it  crops  up  again  in  all  its 
wretched  familiarity.  It  was  only  too  true. 
Philippine  highways  are  of  two  classes,  the 
malos  caminos  and  the  muy  malos  caminos  (bad 
roads  and  very  bad  roads). 

Luzon  is  evidently  very  much  behind  even 
the  West  Indies  on  the  good-roads  question. 
Both  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico  did  have  a few  miles 
of  good  highway  radiating  from  some  of  their 
largest  cities  and  running  a few  miles  into  the 
country.  Naturally  the  roads  around  Manila 
have  fallen  into  a wretched  state  during  the  dis- 
turbed conditions  of  the  last  few  years,  but  I 
have  been  unable  to  find  signs  that  the  place 
ever  had  a highway  system.  There  are  high- 
ways which  become  fairly  passable  during  the 
dry  season,  but  which  the  wise  man  will  avoid 
during  and  after  the  rains. 


IN  AND  AROUND  MANILA 


277 


Kalookan  is,  or  was  before  tlie  war,  a village 
of  some  eight  thousand  inhabitants.  It  lies 
about  four  miles  north  of  Manila.  The  most 
noticeable  feature  of  the  route  is  the  evidence 
of  the  destructiveness  of  war.  Once  houses, 
churches  and  nipa  huts  made  the  road  to 
Kalookan  a populous  thoroughfare.  It  is  now 
an  avenue  of  ruins.  The  walls  of  stone-built 
houses  remain,  but  the  nipa  hut  leaves  no  sign 
save  the  little  plot  of  ground  baked  by  its  ashes. 
The  ruined  wall  and  the  site  of  the  lint  are  soon 
overgrown  with  vines  and  the  rank  growth  of 
tropical  weeds.  One  might  well  think  that  sev- 
eral years  had  passed  since  the  destruction 
which  had  taken  place  barely  six  months  before. 
As  I drove  along  that  Cuban  road  over  which 
Maceo  swept  with  sword  and  torch  until  hardly 
a building  was  left,  I thought  I was  looking  at  a 
picture  of  desolation ; but  it  bore  no  comparison 
with  that  of  the  Manila-Kalookan  road  after  the 
passage  of  the  American  army. 

The  country  of  the  vicinity  is  low  and  flat— 
often  marshy.  Rank  grasses,  thickets  of  flower- 
ing weeds  and  vines  and  the  dense  clusters  of 
tall  bamboo  were  relieved  by  occasional  trees. 
A wild  rankness  characterized  it  all.  Mingled 
with  the  growth  were  the  young  banana  shoots. 
The  ruined  walls  of  the  yards  of  ruined  houses 
were  a tangled  mass  of  verdure.  Destruction 
may  sometimes  become  a necessary  measure  in 
warfare,  but  as  one  sees  the  work  of  fire  in  the 


278 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


suburbs  of  Manila,  the  question  involuntarily 
arises  whether  all  of  it  was  necessary. 

A disused  tramway  follows  irpon  one  side  of 
the  highway.  It  would  certainly  be  a prosper- 
ous institution  if  all  who  now  walk  over  that 
road  were  to  pay  a nickel  for  a ride.  All  along 
there  was  formerly  a continuous  procession,  or 
rather  two,  for  the  passage  was  both  inward 
and  outward.  Some  were  buyers  and  some 
were  sellers.  The  majority  were  women  car- 
rying upon  their  heads  the  broad,  flat  basket 
common  with  the  country  people.  Most  of  the 
men  carried  the  shoulder-pole,  with  its  load 
pendant  from  both  ends.  Some  carried  rice  in 
baskets ; others,  jars  of  oil  or  other  fluids ; still 
others  carried  grass  or  fagots  in  bundles. 
Some  of  these  little  men,  both  Filipinos  and 
Chinos,  will  trot  along  under  a weight  carried 
on  these  poles  that  would  make  many  a much 
larger  American  stagger  for  a few  rods  and  then 
quit  his  job. 

Many  of  the  women  carried  umbrellas  to 
shelter  their  heads  and  preserve  their  com- 
plexions from  the  burning  sun.  The  parachute 
seemed  rather  a superfluity,  inasmuch  as  the 
diameter  of  the  basket,  which  might  be  said  to 
be  worn  on  the  head,  was  very  little  less  than 
that  of  the  umbrella.  Most  of  the  women  were 
shoeless,  though  many  carried  sandals  or  chi- 
nelas  in  the  hand  or  in  the  basket  for  service 
in  the  city’s  streets.  Many  of  the  women  were 


IN  AND  ABOUND  MANILA 


279 


smoking,  some  cigars  and  some  cigarettes.  The 
weed,  in  one  form  or  the  other,  is  almost  as  com- 
mon and  seemingly  almost  as  necessary  to  the 
feminine  inhabitant  as  to  the  masculine.  At 
frequent  intervals,  in  the  shade  of  ruined  wall 
or  thickly  leaved  tree,  enterprising  souls  con- 
ducted refreshment-stands,  if  stands  be  the 
word  to  apply  to  an  institution  where  the  wares 
are  in  flat  baskets  set  upon  the  ground,  while 
buyers  and  sellers  squat  around  on  their 
haunches.  The  Filipino  motto  is  evidently  that 
of  the  East  Indian:  “Why  sit  on  an  uncom- 
fortable chair  when  you  can  squat  so  much 
more  comfortably  ? ” 

There  is  a certain  picturesqueness  about  it 
all,  though  I should  hesitate  to  pronounce  it 
artistic.  The  brown  roadway  is  bordered  with 
the  rich  green  of  foliage  and  verdure,  while 
along  its  track  move  the  native  figures,  garbed 
in  white,  blue,  black,  red  and  yellow.  At  two 
or  three  points  along  the  way  the  road  was 
blocked,  when  I left,  for  half  its  width,  by  the 
remains  of  breastworks,  dating  perhaps  from 
the  Filipino  siege  of  Manila,  perhaps  from  the 
time  of  resistance  to  the  advance  of  the  Ameri- 
cans. Here  and  there  were  signs  of  return  to  the 
former  life.  Lightly  clad  natives  were  setting 
up  the  light  bamboo  framework  of  the  nipa  huts, 
some  tent-like  on  the  ground,  others  like 
slightly  exaggerated  bird-cages  upon  posts  five 
or  six  feet  above  ground.  No  nails  are  used. 


280 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


Bamboo  furnishes  a framework  which  is  lashed 
together  with  bamboo  cording.  The  walls  are 
usually  woven  strips  of  bamboo,  while  the  nipa 
palm  furnishes  a dense  and  massive  thatch. 
The  result  is  a well-ventilated  structure  with  a 
water-tight  roof.  But  the  whole  thing  looks  as 
if  a high  wind  would  blow  it  into  the  next  county. 

Just  what  Ivalookan  may  have  been  in  its 
palmy  days,  I cannot  say.  At  the  time  of  my 
visit  it  appeared  to  consist  of  a somewhat  bat- 
tered church,  a few  nipa  huts,  some  ruins  and 
some  railroad  sheds.  A few  houses  of  the  bet- 
ter class  remained. 

From  there  I drove  across  country  to  La 
Loma  Church,  whose  dome  showed  plainly 
two  or  three  miles  to  the  southeast.  I am 
not  yet  able  to  determine  whether  that  trip 
was  a carriage  drive  or  a sea  voyage.  The 
motion  of  the  carromato  over  the  rough  road- 
way, and  the  passage  through  long  stretches 
of  flooded  country  and  road,  gave  me  an  idea 
that  I was  voyaging  over  or  through  some 
inland  sea  in  a unique  sort  of  sailing-craft. 
Where  the  road  was  not  under  water  it  consisted 
of  deep  and  tenacious  mud.  It  was  not  at  all  a 
pleasant  trip.  Except  that  there  were,  or  rather 
once  had  been,  fewer  houses  along  the  way,  the 
route  was  much  like  that  of  the  Kalookan  road. 
Lovers  of  bonfires  had  evidently  had  a jolly  good 
time  in  burning  those  flimsy  little  huts  which 
make  the  homes  of  thousands  of  native  Filipinos. 


IF  AND  AROUND  MANILA 


281 


At  La  Loma  I found  the  Twenty-fifth  (colored) 
United  States  Infantry.  Its  headquarters  were 
distinctly  ecclesiastical,  being  established  in  the 
church.  The  building  had  been  dismantled  by 
previous  occupation  for  military  purposes,  but 
high  upon  the  wall  behind  what  had  once  been 
the  altar  hung  the  sacred  emblem  with  the  fig- 
ure of  the  crucified  Christ  looking  down  upon 
the  piles  of  stores  and  munitions  of  war.  In 
place  of  the  kneeling  worshipers  were  the  burly 
forms  of  the  black  men  of  the  Twenty-fifth; 
instead  of  chanting  voices  the  click  of  the  tele- 
graph instrument.  We  lunched  in  the  shade 
of  a tree  out  in  the  churchyard.  In  the  rough 
life  of  campaign  one  may  notice  these  in- 
congruities, but  they  soon  become  matters  of 
indifference. 


XV 

AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT 

Filipino  self-government  in  operation— Conflicting  reports— 
Journey  of  two  American  naval  officers— A tribute  to 
Aguinaldo's  government— Balls  and  receptions— Order 
and  industry— Testimony  of  Mr.  John  Barrett— American 
methods— Manila  in  August,  1899— The  civil  government 
order— American  administrators— Filipino  obstinacy— A 
provisional  city  government— San  Fernando— A Filipino 
residence— Scenes  in  a provost  marshal’s  office— The  pur- 
pose of  the  administration. 

ON  August  20,  1896,  the  never  wholly 
quenched  flame  of  rebellion  against  an 
obnoxious  rule  broke  out  afresh  in  the  Philip- 
pine Islands.  Although  interrupted  at  times, 
and  seemingly  ended  by  the  treaty  of  Biak-na- 
bato,  the  fire  still  burned,  and  it  is  now  known 
that  at  the  time  of  the  arrival  of  the  American 
army  in  Manila  in  June,  1898,  almost  the  entire 
area  of  the  Philippines,  practically  all  with  the 
exception  of  one  or  two  of  the  larger  coast  cities, 
was  in  the  hands  of  the  insurgents.  Not  only 
were  they  in  control  of  the  country ; they  were 
administering  its  political  affairs  as  well.  This 

282 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  283 


they  continued  to  do  for  the  greater  part  of  the 
island  throughout  the  following  year,  practically 
until  the  autumn  of  1899.  Up  to  that  time  the 
territory  occupied  by  the  forces  of  the  United 
States  in  the  island  of  Luzon  was  confined  to 
a very  limited  area  in  the  vicinity  of  Manila, 
with  a filamentary  extension  northward  for 
some  fifty  or  sixty  miles  along  the  Manila-Dagu- 
pan  railway.  Very  much  the  same  condition 
obtained  on  the  other  islands.  One  thing  is 
certain : although  greatly  disturbed  by  the 
conditions  of  war,  this  territory  was  under 
some  form  of  governmental  administration. 
Luzon  is  approximately  as  large  as  Ohio  and 
the  principal  islands  of  the  Yisayan  group 
cover  an  area  a little  less  than  that  of  West 
Virginia.  I leave  out  the  southern  islands, 
Mindanao  and  the  rest,  because  they  never  had 
much  government  anyway.  That  this  sixty 
or  seventy  thousand  square  miles  of  territory 
in  Luzon  and  Yisaya  is  not  inhabited  by  savages 
is  now  apparent.  Between  the  downfall  of 
Spanish  authority  and  the  American  military 
occupation  there  was  an  interim  of  more  than 
a year.  Who  governed  the  country  during  that 
time? 

Few  facts  are  known  concerning  the  adminis- 
tration during  that  period.  Conflicting  reports 
reached  Manila.  Official  headquarters  reported 
the  receipt  of  many  complaints  of  a state  of  an- 
archy. Private  sources  reported  a state  of  law 


284 


TEE  PEILirriXES 


and  order.  Personal  observation  and  investiga- 
tion was  impossible  for  foreigners.  The  latest 
wholly  reliable  information  was  obtained  by 
two  American  naval  officers,  Paymaster  W.  B. 
Wilcox  and  Naval  Cadet  L.  R.  Sargent,  who 
made  an  extended  tour  through  northern  Luzon 
in  the  autumn  of  1898.  Their  trip  was  made 
before  the  opening  of  hostilities  between  the 
Americans  and  the  Filipinos  and  after  a Filipino 
government  had  been  established  and  in  opera- 
tion for  several  months.  Mr.  Sargent’s  story  of 
their  journey  was  published  in  the  “ Outlook,” 
and  because  of  its  value  and  exceeding  interest 
I take  the  liberty  of  quoting  a review  of  it  here. 

Mr.  Sargent,  in  opening  his  article,  recalls  the 
conditions  in  October  and  November,  1898,  when 
the  journey  was  made : 

It  will  be  remembered  that  at  that  date  the  United 
States  had  not  yet  announced  its  policy  with  regard  to 
the  Philippines.  The  terms  of  the  treaty  with  Spain 
were  being  negotiated  by  our  commissioners  at  Paris, 
and  the  fate  of  the  islands  hung  in  the  balance.  In 
the  meantime,  the  native  popidation,  taking  matters 
into  their  own  hands,  had  declared  their  independence 
from  all  foreign  jurisdiction  and  had  set  up  a provi- 
sional government,  with  Aguinaldo  at  its  head.  Al- 
though this  government  has  never  been  recognized 
and,  in  all  probability,  wall  go  out  of  existence  without 
recognition,  yet  it  cannot  be  denied  that,  in  a region 
occupied  by  many  millions  of  inhabitants,  for  nearly 
six  months  it  stood  alone  between  anarchy  and 
order.  The  military  forces  of  the  United  States  held 
control  only  in  Manila  with  its  environs,  and  in  Cavite, 
and  had  no  authority  to  proceed  farther ; while  in  the 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  285 


vast  remaining  districts  the  representatives  of  the  only 
other  recognized  power  on  the  field  were  prisoners  in 
the  hands  of  their  despised  subjects.  It  was  the  opinion 
at  Manila  during  this  anomalous  period  in  our  Philip- 
pine relations,  and  possibly  in  the  United  States  as 
well,  that  such  a state  of  affairs  must  breed  something 
akin  to  anarchy.  I can  state  unreservedly,  however, 
that  Mr.  Wilcox  and  I found  the  existing  conditions  to 
be  much  at  variance  with  this  opinion.  During  our 
absence  from  Manila  we  traveled  more  than  six  hun- 
dred miles  in  a very  comprehensive  circuit  through  the 
northern  part  of  the  island  of  Luzon,  traversing  a 
characteristic  and  important  district.  In  this  way  we 
visited  seven  provinces,  of  which  some  were  under  the 
immediate  control  of  the  central  government  at  Malo- 
los,  while  others  were  remotely  situated,  separated  from 
each  other  and  from  the  seat  of  government  by  natural 
divisions  of  land  and  accessible  only  by  lengthy  and 
arduous  travel.  As  a tribute  to  the  efficiency  of 
Aguinaldo’s  government  and  to  the  law-abiding  char- 
acter of  his  subjects,  I offer  the  fact  that  Mr.  Wilcox 
and  I pursued  our  journey  throughout  in  perfect  se- 
curity and  returned  to  Manila  with  only  the  most  pleas- 
ing recollections  of  the  quiet  and  orderly  life  which  we 
found  the  natives  to  be  leading  under  the  new  regime. 

In  Ins  descriptions  of  tlie  many  towns  they 
passed  through  Mr.  Sargent  leaves  on  the  mind 
only  a picture  of  peace,  order  and  happiness 
among  a bright,  intelligent  and  ambitious  people, 
although  their  knowledge  of  the  affairs  of  the 
world  was  limited.  Quotations  from  the  article 
will  illustrate  this  effect  upon  the  reader : 

From  Nueva  Vizcaya  for  the  next  three  weeks  of 
travel  we  passed  from  one  hospitable  town  to  another 
and  enjoyed  a round  of  novel  entertainments.  Our 
route  now  carried  us  through  the  valle}r  of  the  Rio 


286 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


Grande  Cagayan— probably  tlie  largest  area  of  level 
country  in  Luzon  Island.  With  the  exception  of  the 
region  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  Manila  and  of  the 
narrow  strip  of  land  along  the  western  coast,  this 
valley,  previous  to  the  revolution,  was  the  firmest  and 
most  ancient  seat  of  Spanish  authority  on  the  island. 
Its  towns  throughout  give  evidence  of  the  labor  that 
has  been  expended  on  them.  There  are  comparatively 
few  nipa  huts  and  many  substantial  frame  buildings. 
Each  town,  moreover,  has  an  elaborate  church  and  con- 
vent, usually  built  of  brick.  Many  of  these  churches 
date  back  into  the  last  century,  one  which  I remember 
particularly  bearing  the  date  of  1780  as  that  of  its  com- 
pletion. Our  entertainment  in  the  different  towns 
varied  according  to  the  facilities  at  hand ; but  in  all 
cases  music  was  a leading  feature.  In  the  absence  of 
all  accessories,  the  village  band  would  be  called  into 
the  building  in  which  we  were  received,  and  would  play 
tune  after  tune  well  into  the  night,  while  we  conversed 
at  our  ease  with  the  village  fathers.  At  the  little  vil- 
lage of  Cordon,  which  has  a population  of  only  a few 
hundred,  we  passed  one  of  the  pleasantest  evenings  of 
our  journey.  In  this  instance  four  accomplished  little 
girls  gave  the  entertainment  its  particular  charm. 
Soon  after  our  arrival  the  entire  village  trooped  into 
the  large  room  of  the  public  building  that  had  been 
turned  over  to  our  party.  The  floor  was  cleared  for  a 
dance  and  the  band  commenced  with  a waltz. 

The  towns  of  Hagan  and  Aparri,  with  their  wealthy 
and  pleasure-loving  population,  provided  the  most 
elaborate  entertainment.  Hagan  is  the  capital  city  of 
the  tobacco-raising  province  of  Isabella  and  is  situated 
near  the  head  of  navigation  of  the  Rio  Grande  ; Aparri 
is  situated  at  its  mouth  in  the  province  of  Cagayan  and 
is  the  only  seaport  of  the  valley.  These  towns  are 
laid  out  in  regular  streets  and  have  many  squares  of 
substantial  frame  buildings.  They  have  each  a pop- 
ulation of  between  ten  and  fifteen  thousand.  We 
spent  three  days  at  Hagan  and  I think  that  it  was 
here  that  we  were  brought  into  closest  touch  with  the 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  287 


Filipino  character.  The  cultured  class,  which  I have 
spoken  of  before,  was  strongly  in  evidence ; and  I think 
that  before  leaving  we  had  discussed  views  with  nearly 
every  member  of  it.  They  all  realized  that  they  were 
passing  through  a crucial  period  in  the  history  of  their 
people  and  young  and  old  were  eager  to  acquire  all 
possible  knowledge  that  might  assist  them  to  think 
clearly  at  this  crisis.  Their  realization  of  the  gravity 
of  their  position  did  not,  however,  rob  their  character 
of  its  natural  gaiety,  nor  make  them  forget  their  duty 
as  hosts.  On  the  evening  following  our  arrival  a ball 
was  given  in  our  honor,  which  was  attended  by  all  the 
elite  of  the  town.  There  were  present  about  fifty  young 
women  and  twice  that  number  of  men.  All  were 
dressed  in  European  fashion.  The  girls  were  pleasant 
and  intelligent;  the  men  comported  themselves  in  all 
respects  like  gentlemen.  It  was  hard  to  realize  that 
we  were  in  the  very  heart  of  a country  generally  sup- 
posed to  be  given  up  to  semi-savages.  At  intervals  be- 
tween dances  many  songs  were  sung,  usually  by  one  or 
two  of  the  guests,  while  all  frequently  joined  in  the 
chorus.  The  national  hymn  was  repeated  several  times 
with  great  enthusiasm.  The  ball  lasted  until  nearly 
three  o’clock  in  the  morning  and  broke  up  with  good 
feeling  at  its  height. 

On  the  second  evening  we  were  invited  to  attend  the 
theater,  where  two  one-act  Spanish  plays  were  pre- 
sented by  the  young  society  people  of  the  town.  The 
theater  itself  had  been  constructed  by  the  villagers 
only  a few  weeks  before.  It  was  a large  bamboo  struc- 
ture, one  end  of  which  was  used  as  the  village  market, 
while  the  stage  occupied  the  other  end.  The  stage 
arrangements  were  good ; curtain,  side-scenes  and  foot- 
lights all  en  regie.  In  the  performance  of  the  play  we 
saw  our  friends— these  typical  young  Filipinos— in  a 
light  in  which  very  few  of  our  nation  have  had  an 
opportunity  to  view  them.  They  comported  themselves 
with  credit  in  a position  where  humor,  intelligence  and 
artistic  ability  were  the  requisites  of  success. 

During  our  stay  at  Ilagan  we  lived  at  the  house  of  the 


288 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


mayor.  This  building  was  of  great  size  and  was  built 
of  magnificent  hard  wood  from  the  neighboring  forest. 
One  wing,  containing  a reception-room  and  two  bed- 
rooms, was  turned  over  to  us.  The  reception-room  was 
very  large,  with  a finely  polished  floor  and  with  win- 
dows along  two  sides.  It  contained  a piano  and  a set 
of  excellent  bamboo  furniture,  including  the  most  com- 
fortable chairs  and  divans  imaginable.  There  were 
two  tall  mirrors  on  the  wall  and  a number  of  old-fash- 
ioned pictures  and  framed  paper  flowers.  . . . There 
was  one  form  of  hospitality  which  we  met  at  Hagan 
and  Aparri  that  we  would  gladly  have  avoided.  I still 
shudder  to  recall  the  stupendous  dinners  that  were 
spread  before  us  night  after  night.  The  Filipinos 
pride  themselves  on  their  cookery  and  it  is  indeed 
excellent. 

Mr.  Sargent,  in  testifying  as  to  the  drinking- 
habits  of  the  natives,  says  he  did  not  once  see  an 
intoxicated  man  on  his  journey.  He  continues : 

Our  party  proceeded  on  the  Oslo  from  Aparri  around 
the  northwestern  corner  of  the  island  and  landed  on 
the  coast  near  the  northern  end  of  the  province  of 
South  Ilocos.  From  here  we  proceeded  by  land  south- 
ward through  the  western  provinces.  During  this  part 
of  our  journey  we  were  thrown  into  closer  association 
than  previously  with  the  military  element  of  the  popula- 
tion, of  which  I hope  to  have  an  opportunity  to  speak 
further  in  a subsequent  article.  The  towns  on  the  west- 
ern coast  are  even  larger  than  those  on  the  Rio  Grande. 
Vigan,  the  capital  of  South  Ilocos,  has  a population  of 
about  twenty-eight  thousand,  and  Candon,  farther  to 
the  southward,  is  not  far  behind  this  figure.  The  mayor 
of  Candon  was  of  the  hustler  type  and  was  evidently 
on  the  ontlook  for  an  opportunity  to  “ boom  ” his  town. 
On  our  departure  he  presented  us  with  a written  de- 
scription of  its  exceptionally  desirable  location  from 
a business  standpoint.  Every  town  gave  evidence  of 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  289 


the  bitter  fighting  that  had  taken  place  between  the 
natives  and  the  Spaniards,  many  of  the  larger  build- 
ings, which  had  been  used  for  defense,  being  riddled 
with  bullet-holes.  We  no  longer  passed  from  town  to 
town  through  unsettled  stretches  of  country.  The 
fields  on  both  sides  of  the  road  were  under  cultivation, 
and  were  dotted  with  laborers,  while  on  the  road  itself 
there  were  alwa}^s  many  travelers.  The  laborers  in 
the  fields  worked  in  the  shade  of  large  screens  of  nipa- 
leaves,  which  they  carried  witji  them  from  place  to 
place. 

In  conclusion  Mr.  Sargent  says : 

I cannot  see  what  better  gage  we  can  obtain  at 
present  of  the  intelligence  and  ambition  of  the  whole 
Filipino  race  than  the  progress  that  has  been  made 
by  its  favored  members  with  the  limited  opportunities 
at  their  command.  Throughout  the  island  a thirst  for 
knowledge  is  manifested,  and  an  extravagant  respect 
for  those  who  possess  it.  I have  seen  a private  native 
citizen  in  a town  in  the  interior  exercise  a more  power- 
ful influence  than  all  the  native  officials  over  the 
minds  of  the  inhabitants,  simply  because  he  was  known 
to  have  been  educated  in  the  best  schools  at  Manila, 
and  was  regarded,  for  that  reason,  as  a superior  man. 
The  heroes  of  .these  people  are  not  heroes  of  war,  but  of 
science  and  invention.  Without  rival,  the  American 
who  is  best  known  by  reputation  in  Luzon  is  Mr.  Edi- 
son and  any  native  with  the  slightest  pretension  to 
education  whom  you  may  cpiestion  on  the  subject  will 
take  delight  in  reciting  a list  of  his  achievements. 
The  ruling  Filipinos,  during  the  existence  of  their 
provisional  government,  appreciated  the  necessity  of 
providing  public  schools  to  be  accessible  to  the  poorer 
inhabitants.  Had  events  so  shaped  themselves  as  to 
have  provided  an  opportunity  for  carrying  into  effect 
the  plans  formed  on  this  point,  it  seems  possible  that 
the  mental  plane  of  the  entire  population  might  have 
been  raised  gradually  to  a surprising  height. 


290 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Out  of  respect  to  the  statements  of  other  people, 
which  the  narrative  of  my  experience  may  seem  to 
contradict,  I wish  to  say  that  I have  found  the  native 
of  the  interior  of  Luzon  an  astonishingly  different 
character  from  the  one  ordinarily  met  in  Manila. 
Previous  to  my  journey  I regarded  those  whom  I had 
encountered  in  that  city  with  great  dislike  and  after 
my  return  I was  unable  to  overcome  that  feeling. 
They  are  not  a fair  sample  of  the  race ; and  I cannot 
expect  any  one  who  has  formed  his  judgment  on  the 
subject  merely  from  observations  of  that  type  to  ex- 
press an  opinion  similar  to  mine  as  recorded  above. 

The  experience  of  these  gentlemen  does  not 
point  to  any  very  fruitful  soil  for  wide-spread 
anarchy  such  as  sundry  alarmists  have  pictured 
as  the  result  of  Filipino  self-government. 

Mr.  John  Barrett  is  an  advocate  for  the  reten- 
tion of  the  islands,  but  his  arguments  are  based 
on  the  idea  of  the  economic  value  of  the  country 
and  not  on  pseudo-philanthropic  ideas  that  they 
should  be  retained  lest  the  natives  go  in  for  a 
general  throat-cutting.  He  has  reported  a very 
pleasant  experience  during  an  extended  tour. 
He  found  the  people  hospitable,  generous  and 
good-natured.  He  found  them  friendly.  These 
are  not  the  traits  of  “ savages  ” or  “ robber 
bands.”  They  are  the  traits  of  a somewhat  civ- 
ilized people.  He  attributes  his  happy  experi- 
ence with  them  to  the  fact  that  he  treated  them 
as  he  wished  to  be  treated.  This  is  a very  sug- 
gestive point  for  the  consideration  of  a people 
who  are  going  in  for  their  share  of  the  white 
man’s  burden, — from  commercial  or  from  any 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  291 


other  motives,— particularly  in  the  far  East. 
Regarding  the  government  established  by  Agui- 
naldo  in  Malolos,  Mr.  Barrett  says : 

u By  the  middle  of  October,  1898,  he  had  assem- 
bled at  Malolos  a congress  of  one  hundred  men 
who  would  compare  in  behavior,  manner,  dress 
and  education  with  the  average  men  of  the 
better  classes  of  other  Asiatic  nations,  possibly 
including  the  Japanese.  These  men,  whose 
sessions  I repeatedly  attended,  conducted  them- 
selves with  great  decorum,  and  showed  a know- 
ledge of  debate  and  parliamentary  law  that  would 
not  compare  unfavorably  with  the  Japanese 
Parliament.  The  executive  portion  of  the  gov- 
ernment was  made  up  of  a ministry  of  bright 
men  who  seemed  to  understand  their  respective 
positions.  Each  general  division  was  subdivided 
with  reference  to  practical  work.  There  was 
a large  force  of  under-secretaries  and  clerks, 
who  appeared  to  be  kept  very  busy  with  routine 
labor.” 

I cite  these  points,  not  to  argue  that  the  Fili- 
pinos are  immediately  capable  of  an  absolute 
self-go vernmeDt.  I introduce  them  because 

they  are  of  important  value  in  any  fair  consid- 
eration of  the  question  of  the  future  of  the  Phil- 
ippine Islands.  Nor  do  I cite  the  points  for  the 
establishment  of  any  claim  that  Filipino  govern- 
ment is  better  than  American  government. 
There  is,  however,  some  ground  for  an  argu- 
ment that  people  of  so  much  intelligence  and 


292 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


education  as  a very  large  number  of  Filipinos 
certainly  possess,  may  have  a very  fair  idea  of 
the  kind  of  government  that  is  best  suited  to 
their  needs.  Americans  naturally  seek  to  apply 
American  methods,  and  it  is  far  from  proved 
that  a system  which  suits  the  American  is 
equally  well  suited  to  the  Malay  or  the  Asiatic. 
It  does  seem  to  be  fairly  established  that  for 
more  than  a twelvemonth  the  Filipinos  main- 
tained throughout  a wide  area  a government 
that  was  quite  satisfactory  to  them. 

In  turning  now  to  the  American  establish- 
ment of  civil  governments,  I wish  to  quote  from 
a recent  letter,  published  in  “Collier’s  Weekly,” 
from  the  pen  of  Mr.  Frederic  Palmer,  who  is 
recognized  as  among  the  ablest  of  American 
newspaper  correspondents.  I have  not  the  date 
of  the  letter,  but  it  was  written  subsequent  to 
the  arrival,  in  Manila,  of  the  latest  commission, 
therefore  recently.  Mr.  Palmer  says : 

There  is  no  town  in  these  islands  where  we  have 
native  officials  of  whose  loyalty  we  are  sufficiently  cer- 
tain to  allow  them  even  to  lay  taxes  for  cleaning  the 
streets  without  the  personal  supervision  of  an  Ameri- 
can officer.  There  are  few  towns  indeed  where  taxes 
are  not  being  regularly  collected  in  secret  by  the  in- 
surgents. 

This  charge  does  not  reflect  upon  the  ability 
of  the  appointed  Filipino  officials,  but  upon 
their  loyalty  to  the  United  States.  It  merely 
argues  the  persistence  of  their  desire  for  a gov- 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  293 


eminent  of  their  own.  Mr.  Palmer’s  letter,  and 
others  which  I have  received  since  my  return, 
assure  me  that  my  own  letters,  written  a year 
ago,  might,  in  all  their  essential  features,  have 
been  written  at  the  present  time.  I quote  from 
some  of  those  letters  as  follows : 

“ Manila,  August  22,  1899. 

“ Manila  is  under  martial  law  and  no  distinct 
attempt  has  yet  been  made  for  the  establish- 
ment of  a local  civil  government.  For  the 
smaller  points  a form  has  been  drafted,  and  it 
has  even  been  asserted  that  the  measure  was 
receiving  the  warmest  support  and  most  cordial 
indorsement  of  the  citizens  of  different  places. 
The  fact  is  that  the  whole  thing  is  practically  a 
dead  letter,  ineffective  and  futile.  The  military 
authority  and  influence  so  dominate  all  depart- 
ments as  to  leave  to  civilians  little  save  a form 
of  government,  without  its  substance,  in  such 
places  as  have  accepted  the  system.  The  terms 
provided  are  as  follows,  and  are  referred  to  as 
‘ orders  ’ or  1 instructions  ’ : 

“ To  the  end  that  peace  and  tranquillity  prevail  and 
that  equality  before  the  law  be  established  ; to  impress 
proper  respect  for  property  of  whatever  kind  by  pun- 
ishing unlawful  interference  with  or  unjust  appropria- 
tion of  the  same ; to  permit  all  inhabitants  to  devote 
themselves  to  them  accustomed  civil  pursuits  and  to 
reopen  churches  and  schools ; in  fine,  to  render  life, 
property  and  individual  liberty  secure : it  is  ordered 
that  provisional  municipal  governments  be  established 
in  certain  towns  now  garrisoned  by  troops  of  this 


294 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


command  and  others  when  so  garrisoned,  viz. : the 
towns  of  Malolos,  Malabon,  Polo,  Candaba,  Meycana- 
yan,  Bulaean,  Calumpit  and  Apalit. 

“ The  commanding  officer  of  troops  in  each  town 
named  will  take  measures  at  once  to  establish  therein 
this  directed  government,  exercising  over  its  formation 
and  proceedings  immediate  supervision  and  control. 
It  will  be  organized  and  administered  in  accordance 
with  the  following  general  provisions : 

“ 1.  In  each  town  there  will  be  a municipal  council, 
composed  of  a President  and  as  many  representatives 
or  headmen  as  there  may  be  wards  [or  barrios J in  the 
town,  which  shall  be  charged  with  the  maintenance  of 
public  order  and  the  regulation  of  municipal  affairs  in 
particulars  hereinafter  named.  It  will  formulate  rules 
to  govern  its  sessions  and  order  of  business  connected 
therewith,  and  by  majority  vote  (to  be  determined  by 
the  President  in  case  of  a tie)  will,  through  the  adop- 
tion of  ordinances  or  decrees,  to  be  executed  by  the 
President,  administer  the  municipal  government ; but 
no  ordinance  or  decree  shall  be  enforced  until  it  re- 
ceives the  approval  of  the  commanding  officer  of  the 
troops  there  stationed. 

“ 2.  The  President  shall  be  elected  by  a viva  voce  vote 
of  residents  of  the  town,  approved  by  the  commanding 
officer,  and,  together  with  the  headmen  or  representa- 
tives of  the  Council,  shall  hold  office  for  one  }rear.  He 
shall  be  of  native  birth  and  parentage  and  a resident 
and  property-owner  of  the  town.  The  headmen  shall 
be  elected  by  a viva  voce  vote  of  residents  of  their  wards 
and  shall  reside  and  own  property  therein. 

“ 3.  The  President  shall  be  the  executive  of  the  Muni- 
cipal Council,  to  execute  its  decrees  issued  for  the  fol- 
lowing purposes,  viz. : to  establish  a police  force ; to 
collect  taxes  and  license  fees ; to  act  as  Treasurer  of 
public  funds,  and  to  make  disbursements  on  warrants 
of  the  Council ; to  enforce  regulations  relating  to  traffic 
and  the  sale  of  spirits;  to  establish  and  regulate  mar- 
kets ; to  inspect  live  stock  and  record  transfers  and 
brands  of  the  same;  to  perform  the  duties  formerly 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPIXO  GOYFEXMEXT  295 

belonging  to  the  lieutenant  of  paddy-fields : to  enforce 
sanitary  measures ; to  establish  schools ; to  provide  for 
lighting  the  town. 

‘i4.  The  senior  headman,  or  one  designated  by  the 
Council,  shall  be  Vice-President  of  the  same,  assistant 
to  the  President,  and  shall  be  ex-officio  Lieutenant  of 
Police. 

“ 5.  The  headman  of  a ward  is  the  delegate  of  the 
President  for  that  ward ; he  shall  take  measures  to 
maintain  order,  and  shall  have  power  to  appoint  two 
assistants. 

“ 6.  The  Council  shall  have  no  jurisdiction  in  civil 
cases,  but  on  the  application  of  parties  in  interest,  and 
their  agreement  in  writing  to  accept  the  award  of  the 
Council,  it  shall  hear  and  decide  cases  involving  prop- 
erty not  exceeding  in  value  $500. 

“ 7.  In  criminal  matters  the  President,  representing 
the  Council,  shall  make  the  preliminary  examination, 
and,  according  to  the  result,  discharge  the  prisoner  or 
transfer  him  immediately  to  the  custody  of  the  mili- 
tary authorities  for  trial  by  provost  court. 

“ 8.  The  Lieutenant  of  Police  may  arrest  or  order  the 
arrest  of  persons  violating  a city  ordinance,  disturbing 
the  peace  or  accused  of  crime ; but  no  person  shall  be 
held  in  confinement  longer  than  twenty-four  hours 
without  a preliminary  examination,  and  no  person 
shall  be  arrested  for  non-payment  of  taxes  or  for  debt. 

“ 9.  The  President  shall  render  to  the  Council  during 
the  first  week  of  each  month  a certified  account  of  cob 
lections  under  each  tax,  and  of  disbursements  made 
during  the  preceding  month.  Said  account,  having 
been  approved  by  the  Council,  shall  be  forwarded  with 
vouchers  to  the  commanding  officer  of  the  troops,  who 
shall  make  and  retain  a certified  copy  thereof. 

“ Id  Special  appropriations  shall  require  a unani- 
mous vote  of  the  Council : regular  disbursements  may 
be  made  by  ordinary  decree  on  a majority  vote. 

“11.  Whenever  the  commanding  officer  of  troops 
shall  notify  the  Council  in  writing  that,  in  his  judgment, 
a decree  issued  under  Subdivision  3 is  inadequately  exe- 


296 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


cuted,  or  shall  make  any  other  criticism  or  recommen- 
dation, the  Council  will  convene  as  soon  thereafter  as 
practicable  to  consider  his  communication,  and  shall 
make  written  reply  thereto,  which  reply,  if  he  deem  it 
insufficient,  he  shall  forward,  with  his  remarks,  through 
military  channels  to  these  headquarters. 

11 12.  The  foregoing  provisions,  tentative  in  character, 
are  subject  to  amendment,  enlargement  or  curtailment 
as  special  conditions  or  development  may  make  neces- 
sary. 

“ While  these  provisions  embody  many  emi- 
nently desirable  principles,  they  carry  a strong 
flavor  of  the  purely  temporary  and  provisional, 
and  almost  too  palpably  have  ‘a  string  tied  to 
them.’  Said  string  runs  quite  openly  into  the 
office  of  the  American  commanding  officer,  who 
may  or  may  not  be  a man  of  wisdom  and  sound 
judgment.  Perhaps  no  other  system  would  be 
at  all  feasible  under  the  circumstances,  but  this 
modified  form  of  self-government  has  not,  as 
yet,  received  any  enthusiastic  indorsement  from 
the  people.  When  the  plan  is  laid  down  to  them, 
when  they  are  told  that  they  are  to  elect  their 
own  town  or  municipal  officers,  regulate  their 
own  taxes  and  spend  the  revenue  so  acquired 
for  their  own  local  benefit,  the  theory  appeals 
to  them,  and  there  have  been  some  manifesta- 
tions of  satisfaction  and  gratitude.  But  in  its 
practice  the  plan  has  proved  less  satisfactory. 

u The  presence  of  American  troops  and  the 
effect  of  military  laws  and  operations,  as  well  as 
the  immediate  supervision  of  American  author- 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  297 


ity,  detract  from  the  sense  of  independent  opera- 
tion and  tend  to  nullify  the  whole  proceeding. 
The  town  of  Baliuag  was  cited  as  a model  of 
what  could  be  done.  A civil  government  was 
established  and  an  alcalde  elected.  An  Ameri- 
can garrison  occupied  the  place  and  gave  force 
and  direction  to  the  civil  administration.  That 
all  was  comparatively  quiet  and  orderly  was 
probably  due  to  the  fact  that  the  Filipinos  are 
not,  normally,  a riotous  or  disorderly  people, 
and  also  to  their  decided  respect  for  the  Ameri- 
can soldier  with  his  Krag.  Within  the  last 
week  it  has  developed  that  our  prize  alcalde  at 
Baliuag  was  in  active  relations  with  the  insur- 
gents, and  at  last  accounts  he  was  the  occupant 
of  a bunk  in  the  calaboose.  The  gentleman 
chosen  as  their  alcalde  by  the  people  of  Imus 
was  found  to  be  in  the  seclusion  of  the  Bilibid 
Prison,  in  Manila,  on  suspicion  of  being  an 
insurgent  spy.  The  government  of  that  town 
is,  like  all  others,  a form  rather  than  a fact. 
To-day  there  comes  the  account  of  the  arrest  of 
the  alcalde  of  San  Pedro  Macati,  who  was  also 
generally  regarded  as  a prize  lot.  It  seems  to 
be  well  established  that  he  has  used  his  official 
position  and  influence  in  furtherance  of  his 
purposes  to  make  the  village  of  which  he  was 
the  head  a central  recruiting-station  for  the  in- 
surgents. He,  together  with  four  associates, 
has  been  arrested  and  now  1 languishes  in  dur- 
ance vile.’  ” 


298 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Other  instances  of  this  political  unreliability 
on  the  part  of  the  alcaldes,  or  presidentes,  were 
reported  from  time  to  time.  It  may  be  charged 
that  their  conduct  was  wholly  dishonorable;  but 
their  argument  appeared  to  be  that  if  the  Ameri- 
cans were  foolish  enough  to  put  either  weapons 
or  opportunities  into  their  hands,  they  were 
not  foolish  enough  to  refrain  from  using  them. 
The  military  garrisons  in  these  towns  are  usu- 
ally under  the  command  of  a captain  or  a lieu- 
tenant. Many  of  them  are  young  men  of  little 
experience  in  affairs.  The  work  which  they  do 
is  their  best,  but  their  primary  interest  and  ob- 
ligation is  along  military  lines.  Very  few  of 
them  speak  the  language  of  the  country ; far  too 
few  of  them  take  that  directly  personal  interest 
in  the  people  under  their  charge  which  is  a 
prime  factor  in  all  successful  dealing  with  mem- 
bers of  this  race.  The  officer  lias  not  the  time 
nor  has  he  usually  the  qualifications  for  the 
direct  oversight  of  the  people  of  his  district. 
The  appointed  presidente  fears  to  act  on  his 
own  initiative  lest  he  offend  the  military 
authority.  He  seeks  the  best  interests  of  his 
fellows  and  often  holds  a conviction  that  he  can 
best  serve  those  interests  by  using  his  office  for 
the  promotion  of  the  cause  of  the  insurgents. 
The  commission  reported  the  success  of  these 
institutions.  A few  of  them  may  justify  their 
assertions,  but  it  is  wholly  true  that,  in  the 
greater  number  of  cases,  law  and  order  are  the 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  299 


result  of  the  presence  of  a certain  number  of 
Krag  rifles  rather  than  of  any  cooperation  of 
the  people  with  the  American  plan  of  local  self- 
government  “ with  a string  tied  to  it.” 

On  October  2,  1899,  I wrote  as  follows : 

“Thus  far  ‘benevolent  assimilation’  in  the 
Philippines  has  been  a distinct  failure.  If 
there  be  any  virtue  in  the  article  at  all,  it  must 
be  that  we  are  using  the  wrong  brand.  It  is 
quite  useless  to  attempt  to  evade  the  fact  that 
American  occupation  has  proved  most  unpopu- 
lar in  those  places  which  have  had  the  most  of 
it.  The  argument  that  a practical  illustration 
of  the  beneficent  operation  of  American  rule 
would  ‘ turn  many  unto  righteousness  ’ does  not 
seem  to  be  supported  by  experience ; still,  in  his 
blindness,  does  the  Filipino  heathen  object  to 
being  ‘subjugated,’  or  ‘assimilated,’  or  to  any- 
thing else  that  does  not  recognize  him  as  a man 
with  a modicum  of  gray  matter  in  his  cabeza. 

“ I am  well  acquainted  with  the  American 
argument  that  if  the  Filipinos  really  had  any 
brains  they  would  see  how  hopeless  is  that 
dream  of  a ‘ cause,’  how  infinitely  better  off  they 
would  be  as  subjects,  even,  of  the  great  United 
States.  I do  not  understand  that  it  is  the  inten- 
tion to  make  them  citizens.  But  the  Filipino 
does  not  realize  what  he  is  doing  by  his  refusal 
to  lay  down  his  arms  and  acknowledge  the  right 


300 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


and  the  might  of  his  new  sovereign.  He  has 
the  bad  taste  to  prefer  to  tight  rather  than  to 
submit,  and  he  does  not  assimilate  to  good 
advantage. 

“ For  fourteen  months  Manila  has  had  no 
government,  no  municipal  authority,  save  the 
American.  That  government  has  not  been  idle. 
It  has  accomplished  more  than  a little.  It  has 
displayed  a degree  of  justice  and  honesty  in 
administration  affairs  that  was  never  known 
to  the  people  of  the  city  in  other  days.  It  has 
insisted  that  they  be  cleaner  than  they  really 
want  to  be.  It  has  said  that  they  must  refrain 
from  their  favorite  but  cruel  pastime  of  cock- 
fighting.  It  has  ordered  the  killing  of  many 
wretched,  mangy  and  flea-ridden  curs.  It  has 
obliged  the  drivers  of  cabs  and  carriages  to  take 
out  licenses  and  display  the  license  number.  It 
has  done  other  things,  some  of  greater  and  some 
of  less  importance.  With  all  this  the  Filipino 
has  had  little  to  do.  His  attitude  has  been 
passive,  not  active. 

“ Yet  all  these  things  have  not  taught  this  ob- 
stinate Filipino  to  love  the  American  and  long  for 
the  American  government.  Here  in  Manila  he 
stands  as  a constant  menace  to  that  government, 
after  fourteen  months  of  benevolent  and  honest 
administration.  Of  course,  this  does  not  speak 
well  for  the  Filipino  power  of  perception,  but  I 
believe  that  an  allowance  must  be  made  for  a 
belief  which  is  prevalent  among  the  Filipinos 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  301 


that  they  are  resisting  a successor  to  Spain.  At 
all  events,  it  has  not  yet  been  made  clear  to 
them  that  they  are  fighting  a friend  and  not  an 
oppressor.  This  idea  of  American  oppression 
has  been  strongly  impressed  upon  the  Filipino 
mind  by  the  tone  of  press  and  public  speakers 
in  America,  and  by  official  orders  which  treat 
them  as  ‘ rebels  ’ and  clamor  for  their  ‘ subjuga- 
tion.’ The  charge  that  they  are  encouraged  to 
continue  their  resistance  by  a so-called  anti- 
imperialistic  press  may  carry  some  truth;  but 
it  is  not  to  be  doubted  that  their  antagonism  is 
strengthened,  their  resentment  stimulated  and 
their  attitude  sustained  by  the  vilification,  the 
abuse  and  the  clamor  for  a vigorous  and  relent- 
less war  against  them,  which  is  urged  by  too 
many  Americans  whose  knowledge  of  the  real 
character  of  the  little  brown  men  of  Luzon  is 
theoretical  rather  than  practical.  Much  has 
been  done  for  them  in  things  for  which  they  care 
but  little.  Almost  nothing  has  been  done  for 
them  along  the  lines  of  their  greatest  desires. 

“ The  new  ruler  has  perpetuated  the  offenses 
of  the  old,  has  continued  Spanish  laws  and 
Spanish  taxes.  Of  promises  for  the  future  he 
has  given  some;  of  talk  about  what  would  be 
done  in  the  future  he  has  given  much.  In  prac- 
tical result  he  has  shown  but  little.  He  has 
frowned  upon  some  long-established  customs,  has 
set  up  his  own  standards  of  right  and  righteous- 
ness and,  under  them,  has  suppressed  or  sought 


302 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


to  suppress  diversions  that  had  become  an  in- 
tegral part  of  the  life  of  the  people.  The  war 
which  is  being  waged  has  stifled  commerce, 
restricted  production  and  greatly  increased  the 
cost  of  the  necessities  of  life.  It  is  by  such 
standards  as  these  that  a people  whose  experi- 
ence with  the  world  has  been  limited,  whose 
lives  have  been  isolated,  measures  the  bane  and 
the  blessing  of  its  government.” 

The  following  letter  gives  in  some  detail  the 
processes  of  a provisional  city  government. 
Provost  Marshal  Reeve  possessed  the  advantage 
of  a good  working  knowledge  of  the  Spanish 
language,  and  he  was,  moreover,  one  of  those 
officers  who  both  could  and  did  treat  the  natives 
with  consideration  and  deal  with  them  justly 
and  fairly. 

“ San  Fernando,  October  28,  1899. 

“ My  reports  concerning  the  progress  of  civil 
administration  and  government  in  the  Philip- 
pines have  not  indicated  any  flattering  results 
of  the  methods  employed;  yet  I believe  those 
reports  to  be  fair  statements  of  facts.  It  is  not, 
however,  to  be  assumed  that  there  are  no  efforts 
and  no  results.  Something — much  or  little — of 
good  arises  from  it  all.  It  is  not  always  an 
unmixed  good,  but  some  of  the  seed  that  is  sown 
will  doubtless  result  in  a crop  of  desirable  ideas 
and  processes.  Here  in  San  Fernando  I am 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  303 


studying  a preliminary  situation,  a kind  of 
‘ stepping-stone  to  higher  things.’ 

“ San  Fernando  de  la  Pampanga,  about  forty 
miles  nearly  northwest  from  Manila,  has  been 
for  the  last  four  months  the  focus  of  much 
American  operation  and  the  center  of  more.  It 
was  the  halting-point  of  the  movement  north- 
ward which,  during  the  spring,  attracted  so 
much  of  public  attention.  After  occupying 
Malolos,  Calumpit  and  many  other  places,  the 
movement  paused  at  San  Fernando  for  about 
two  months,  and  the  town  was  made  a military 
center  and  base  of  supplies.  About  the  middle 
of  August  operations  were  continued  toward  the 
north,  and  Angelis  became  the  advanced  point 
and  military  headquarters.  The  operations  in 
the  vicinity,  in  Mexico  and  Santa  Ana  on  the 
east  and  Bacolor  and  Santa  Pita  on  the  west, 
brought  San  Fernando  fairly  well  within  the 
lines  of  American  occupation  and  made  it  rea- 
sonably safe  from  any  extensive  attack  by  the 
Filipinos. 

“ Successive  visits  to  the  place  have  enabled 
me  to  note  its  changing  conditions.  I was  here 
when  no  one  paid  any  attention  to  shots  in  the 
vicinity  and  very  little  attention  to  an  occa- 
sional stray  bullet.  I have  seen  it  as  one  of  the 
dullest  places  on  the  island,  a garrison-point 
with  a mere  handful  of  native  people.  I find  it 
now  struggling  for  a new  life,  which,  though 
feeble  as  yet,  shows  progress  upward.  A large 


304 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


section  of  the  city  is  a wreck.  The  church,  an 
imposing  and  artistic  structure  in  the  heart  of 
the  city,  the  ecclesiastical  buildings  adjoining 
it,  and  a large  area  of  the  commercial  district 
are  all  a heap  of  smoke-stained  ruins.  Wreck, 
desolation  and  that  rapid  decay  and  the  more 
rapid  hiding  of  decay  which  are  distinctive  of 
tropical  countries,  abound  upon  all  sides.  Once 
the  place  was  rich,  one  of  the  richest  on  the 
island.  It  is  in  the  heart  of  a productive  sugar 
country  and  was  the  permanent  home  of  a 
number  of  wealthy  planters.  I am  writing  this 
in  one  of  those  homes,  now  occupied  as  a mili- 
tary headquarters.  The  room  in  which  I write 
was  once  the  salon.  It  is  forty  feet  square.  Its 
ceiling  is  richly  frescoed,  its  massive  double 
doors  elaborately  carved.  Doors  open  into  a 
spacious  hall  and  into  a dining-room  in  which  a 
table  might  be  set  for  fifty  people.  Sleeping- 
rooms,  large  and  airy,  open  from  the  hall.  All 
through  there  are  frescoed  ceilings  and  carved 
doors.  It  was  not  the  home  of  a Spaniard,  but 
of  a 1 savage  ’ Filipino,  and  is  but  a fair  specimen 
of  many  of  the  same  kind  to  be  found  on  the 
island. 

“ Gradually  the  people,  exiled  by  the  distur- 
bance of  the  war,  are  coming  back  to  their  homes 
and  to  what  there  is  left  of  their  old  lives.  If 
they  come  as  non-combatants  it  is  probably  as 
much  as  can  be  said  of  them.  That  they  should 
come  as  loyal  and  loving  American  patriots,  to 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  305 


kiss  the  hands  that  have  shot  down, — whether 
under  just  and  righteous  provocation  or  no, — 
their  fathers,  their  husbands,  their  sons  and 
their  brothers,  is  a hope  only  to  be  cherished 
by  the  cheerful  enthusiast.  They  face  the 
inevitable  and  submit,  for  the  sake  of  life  and 
home,  to  the  will  of  the  stranger.  That  that 
will  is  kindly  is  more  strongly  evidenced  by  the 
real  American  heart  than  it  is  by  the  powers 
that  be.  ‘ Crush  them  into  submission,’  say  the 
powers  that  be.  ‘ Lift  them  into  grateful  appre- 
ciation of  our  motives  and  our  purposes  toward 
them,’  say  those  of  broader  humanity  and  truer 
Americanism.  ‘ They  do  not  know  the  meaning 
of  gratitude  and  interpret  kindness  as  weakness ; 
if  you  treat  them  well  they  will  stab  you  in  the 
back,’  says  the  man  who  thinks  the  dog  loves 
his  master  because  the  master  kicks  him.  He 
misses  alike  the  essential  features  of  both  dog 
nature  and  human  nature. 

“ The  Spanish  census  gave  San  Fernando  a 
population  of  some  thirteen  thousand.  Proba- 
bly a little  more  than  one  tenth  of  that  would 
be  the  figure  for  to-day.  The  place  is  far  from 
being  ready  for  that  form  of  civil  administration 
which  has  been  prescribed  for  towns  within  the 
lines  by  the  Philippine  Commission  in  Manila. 
Few  citizens  of  the  better  class  have  returned 
and  the  futility  of  placing  government  in  the 
hands  of  those  who  are  here  has  been  recognized 
by  the  commanding  officer  of  the  district,  Gen- 


306 


TEE  PHILIPPINES 


eral  John  C.  Bates.  Pending  its  occupation  by 
a larger  number  of  the  more  intelligent  and 
property-owning  classes,  a provisional  municipal 
government  has  been  established.  Provision  is 
made  for  three  different  classes  represented. 
Lieutenant  Horace  M.  Reeve  of  the  Third  United 
States  Infantry,  now  serving  as  aide-de-camp  on 
the  staff  of  General  Bates,  is  acting  as  provost 
marshal,  exercising  a general  authority  over  all 
and  a special  supervision  of  all  American  inter- 
ests. A native,  Senor  Enrique  Kerr,  has  been 
appointed  as  alcalde.  He  represents  and  directs 
the  municipal  affairs  of  the  native  people,  while 
a prominent  and  wealthy  Chinaman,  whose  long 
residence  has  led  to  his  adoption  of  a Spanish 
name,  deals  with  the  Chinese  affairs.  A brief 
set  of  general  ordinances  has  been  drafted  by 
Lieutenant  Reeve,  and  copies  of  it,  translated 
into  the  local  Pampangan  tongue,  are  posted 
conspicuously  about  the  town.  Can  the  people 
read  them?  The  percentage  of  those  who  can 
would  be  about  the  same  as  it  would  be  in  an 
American  town  with  the  notice  printed  in  Eng- 
lish. There  are  people  in  the  Philippines  who 
are  not  far  from  being  savages,  but  they  are 
away  in  the  minority.  The  general  run  of  Fili- 
pino men  may  wear  their  shirts  outside  their 
trousers,  but  the  shirt  is  always  clean,  and  the 
plan  is  a local  fashion  and  not  an  evidence  of 
ignorance  or  savagery.  In  the  abstract,  it  is 
quite  as  sensible  as  a coat-tail. 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  307 


“ This  framework  of  a municipal  government 
reads  as  follows : 

“ Office  of  the  Provost  Marshal, 

San  Fernando,  October  17,  1899. 

| REGULATIONS  for  the  citizens  of  the 
TOWN  OF  SAN  FERNANDO 

“ 1.  The  alcalde,  Senor  Enrique  Kerr,  and  the  police- 
men of  this  town  are  recognized  by  the  United  States 
authorities,  and  they  will  be  respected  and  obeyed  in 
the  discharge  of  their  duties. 

“ 2.  The  alcalde  will  render  judgment  in  cases  arising 
where  none  but  natives  or  civilians  are  interested.  He 
will  grant  licenses  to  open  shops  and  for  other  enter- 
prises, to  erect  buildings,  and  will  give  burial  permits. 

“ To  meet  civil  expenses  the  alcalde  will  levy  a mod- 
erate tax. 

“ 3.  It  is  the  duty  of  every  citizen  to  assist  in  preserv- 
ing order.  Thefts  and  other  crimes  shoidd  be  imme- 
diately reported.  Criminals  and  dangerous  characters 
should  be  reported ; citizens  who  are  aware  of  their 
presence  and  do  not  assist  in  delivering  them  to  the 
authorities  will  be  considered  accomplices  and  liable  to 
trial. 

“4.  Depredation  or  disorderly  conduct  committed 
by  persons  other  than  natives  should  be  reported  to  the 
provost  marshal. 

“ 5.  Carrying  arms  is  forbidden. 

“ 6.  Cases  of  smallpox  or  other  contagious  disease 
will  be  reported  to  the  provost  marshal. 

“7.  No  one  shall  enter  a camarine  [warehouse]  or 
vacant  house,  or  one  reserved  for  American  soldiers, 
without  a permit  from  the  provost  marshal. 

“ 8.  All  persons  are  forbidden  to  leave  their  houses 
between  7 p.m.  and  sunrise,  except  in  cases  of  going  for 
a doctor. 

“ 9.  The  occupant  of  each  house  or  building  will  keep 
the  buildings  and  yard  thoroughly  clean  ; also  the  street 
in  front  of  the  premises. 


308 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


“ 10.  No  person  will  enter  or  leave  this  town  except 
with  a pass  from  the  provost  marshal.  Passes  will  be 
given  only  in  exceptional  cases,  and  the  applicant  must 
be  vouched  for  by  the  alcalde,  or,  if  the  applicant  be  a 
Chinaman,  he  must  be  indorsed  bv  the  captain  China- 
man, Eusebio  Sarate. 

“Horace  M.  Reeve, 

First  Lieutenant,  Third  U.  S.  Infantry, 
Procost  Marshal. 

“One  important  point,  the  liquor  question, 
does  not  appear  in  these  ordinances.  There  is 
some  force  in  the  argument  under  which  it  is 
omitted.  It  is  needless,  so  far  as  the  natives  are 
concerned.  Liquor  might  he  sold,  as  it  always 
has  been,  as  openly  and  as  freely  as  any  other 
commodity,  and  no  trouble  be  given  to  either 
police  or  police-court.  America  can  teach  these 
people,  as  a matter  of  fashion,  to  wear  shoes  and 
to  tuck  their  shirts  inside  their  trousers,  but 
these  people  can  give  America  long  odds  on 
temperance.  The  police-court  records  in  Manila 
report  an  occasional  drunken  native,  but  after 
nearly  four  months  here  I have  yet  to  see  my 
first  drunken  Filipino,  or  any  Filipino  that 
showed  any  sign  of  having  ‘ changed  his  breath.’ 
The  need  of  a liquor  law  in  San  Fernando  is 
confined  to  the  soldiers  of  the  LTnited  States, 
and  the  ground  is  covered  by  a general  order 
issued  from  division  headquarters.  Under  that 
order  the  sale  of  intoxicants  is  strictly  prohib- 
ited throughout  the  territory  occupied  by  the 
division,  except  under  such  conditions  as  are 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  309 


provided  for  by  general  military  law— canteens, 
commissary,  etc.  This  covers  the  field.  The 
sale  of  the  local  vino,  a most  potent  knock-out, 
is  prohibited.  The  native  does  not  get  drunk, 
and  the  American  soldier  who  does  so  is  punish- 
able under  the  army  regulations. 

“ I spent  a very  interesting  two  hours  yester- 
day in  the  office  of  the  provost  marshal.  It  was 
the  daily  official  session.  The  alcalde  and  the 
captain  Chinaman  were  in  attendance,  each  to 
attend  the  visitors  of  his  special  department, 
though  Lieutenant  Reeve  was  the  final  authority 
in  all.  A smiling  and  obsequious  Chinaman 
approached.  He  was  the  proprietor  of  a little 
restaurant.  He  had  been  notified  by  the  cap- 
tain Chinaman  that  he  was  assessed  three  dollars 
Mexican  for  the  privilege  of  running  an  eating- 
house.  He  spoke  a good  ‘ Pidgin-Englisk,’  but 
had  not  been  able  to  understand  clearly  his  fel- 
low-countryman. He  ‘came  Hongkong  side,’ 
while  the  captain  Chinaman  ‘came  Foochow 
side,’  and  ‘ no  speak  samee.’  It  was  made  plain 
to  him  that  every  adult  male  Chinaman  in  the 
town  was  to  pay  ten  cents  Mexican  per  month 
toward  municipal  expenses,  and  that  all  mer- 
chants, store-  and  restaurant-keepers  and  ven- 
ders of  merchandise  were  subject  to  a levy  of 
three  dollars  Mexican.  He  fished  out  his  three 
dhobie  dollars,  and  wafted  himself  out  on  a 
smile  of  beautiful  blandness. 

“Natives  wanted  passes  to  go  to  Manila. 


310 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


They  did  not  get  them.  Word  had  been  sent 
out  that  Manila  had  all  the  natives  it  needed. 
Natives  wanted  passes  to  go  to  adjoining  towns 
for  all  sorts  of  reasons.  Some  wanted  to  go  out 
and  bring  their  families  back  to  their  homes  in 
the  town.  Some  wanted  to  go  out  and  look 
after  their  crops  of  sugar-cane  or  of  rice.  Some 
got  what  they  desired  and  some  did  not.  Two 
or  three  were  accommodated  with  passes  to 
go  through  the  country  to  look  up  bull-carts 
for  purposes  of  transportation  for  the  army. 
Among  them  were  some  whose  fidelity  to  the 
United  States  was  quite  doubtful.  One  appli- 
cant for  a pass  was  known  to  have  been  a lieu- 
tenant-colonel in  the  Filipino  army,  and  it  was 
not  clearly  established  that  he  had  undergone  a 
change  of  heart  when  he  changed  his  clothes  to 
come  into  town.  One  visitor  reported  that  some 
sugar  had  been  stolen  from  his  storehouse.  An- 
other reported  that  he  was  being  robbed  right 
along  and  asked  for  a guard. 

“ A change  of  terms  is  coming  on.  Inside  the 
American  lines,  and  in  the  vicinity  of  territory 
that  has  been  for  some  time  under  American 
control,  the  insurrecto  becomes  a ‘ ladrone  ’ or  a 
‘ tulisan.’  The  ladrone  is  a thief  and  a robber. 
The  tulisan  is  a villain  of  deeper  dye.  He  may 
even  commit  a murder,  and  frequently  operates 
in  considerable  bands.  Benevolent  assimilation 
is  turning  him,  by  name  at  least,  from  an  insur- 
recto, a rebel,  into  a tulisan,  a robber.  But  he  is 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  311 

very  much  the  same  bird,  in  spite  of  his  new 
name. 

“Notwithstanding  the  steps  that  are  being 
taken  toward  the  establishment  of  civil  govern- 
ment in  San  Fernando,  there  remain  ample 
signs  that  the  times  are  not  those  of  peace. 
Firing  is  heard  from  time  to  time  in  different 
directions.  Under  the  window  at  which  I am 
writing,  two  men  are  chopping  fire-wood.  A 
guard  with  loaded  and  bayoneted  rifle  stands 
over  them.  They  are  captured  Filipinos  being 
instructed  and  trained  in  the  arts  of  peace. 
They  use  axes  belonging  to  the  American  army, 
but  they  sit  down  while  they  chop.  Others  of 
the  same  kind  come  and  go,  doing  various  duties 
and  similarly  attended.  That  old  chap  out  there 
with  a blue  shirt  on  and  a dirty  rag  around  his 
head  failed  to  convince  an  American  scouting- 
party  that  he  was  an  ‘ amigo  ’ engaged  in  peace- 
ful pursuits  when  they  found  him  up  a tree 
with  a rifle  in  his  hands.” 

Thus  far  it  is  not  to  be  claimed  with  truth 
that  American  government  in  the  Philippines 
has  been  attended  with  any  measure  of  success. 
It  is  doubtless  owing  to  the  conditions  of  an 
existing  war,  but,  up  to  the  present  time,  Ameri- 
can government  has  been  less  successful  than 
was  the  Filipino  during  its  fifteen  months  of 
control.  The  administration  has  announced  the 
vague  policy  that : 


312 


TEE  PHILIPPINES 


It  is  our  purpose  to  establish  in  the  Philippines  a 
government  suitable  to  the  wants  and  conditions  of  the 
inhabitants  and  to  prepare  them  for  self-government, 
and  to  give  them  self-government  when  they  are  ready 
for  it  and  as  rapidly  as  they  are  ready  for  it.  That  I 
am  aiming  to  do  under  my  constitutional  authority,  and 
will  continue  to  do  until  Congress  shall  determine  the 
political  status  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  archipelago. 

The  “ inhabitants  ” say  that  their  “ wants  ” are 
the  expulsion  of  the  friars  and  the  recognition 
of  their  political  rights.  Who  is  to  determine 
what  government  is  suitable  to  their  “wants 
and  conditions,”  and  why,  once  such  a govern- 
ment is  established,  should  it  be  changed  to  any 
other  form  ? Who  is  to  determine  the  suitability, 
America  or  the  Filipinos  themselves  ? Is  it  not 
possible  that  the  Filipinos  have  sufficient  in- 
telligence to  know  what  kind  of  a government 
will  suit  them  and  be  suitable  for  them,  quite  as 
well  as  any  collection  of  American  legislators  or 
commissioners  ? These  are  pertinent  questions, 
as  is  also  the  question  whether  any  form  which 
those  of  wholly  American  experience  are  likely 
to  establish  would  be  suitable  for  the  place  and 
people.  The  Filipino  loves  display.  He  would 
see  his  highest  official  ride  in  state  with  coach 
and  four,  gaudy  liveries  and  outriders.  He 
would  see  that  official  garbed  in  resplendent 
uniform,  with  sword  and  chapeau.  We  think 
that  silly.  We  admire  Jacksonian  simplicity 
and  rejoice  in  a President  who  walks  down- 
town and  buys  a necktie  or  a newspaper  just  as 


AMERICAN  VS.  FILIPINO  GOVERNMENT  313 

does  the  department  clerk.  The  Asiatic  does 
not  think  as  we  do,  and  a menace  to  American 
success  in  the  far  East  lies  in  the  American 
tendency  to  disregard  that  fact,  and  to  issue 
decrees  against  cock-fighting,  insist  upon  the 
adoption  of  American  standards  in  all  depart- 
ments of  life  and  oblige  the  Oriental  to  tuck  in 
his  shirt. 


XYI 


THE  CHURCH  AND  THE  FRIARS 


The  root  of  Philippine  troubles— Early  arrival  of  the  friars 
—Abuse  of  power  and  influence— Religion  rather  than 
spirituality— A Manila  church  service— Curious  customs— 
Church  music— America’s  position— Arrival  of  Archbishop 
Chapelle — Its  immediate  residts— Local  press  comments 
— An  alleged  interview  and  its  results— Free  speech  in 
Manila. 


the  very  root  of  all  things  political  in  the 


Philippines  there  lies  that  most  delicate  of 
all  matters,  a religious  question.  No  competent 
knowledge  of  affairs  in  the  islands  is  possible 
without  a clear  understanding  of  the  position  of 
the  church  in  Filipino  life.  As  the  church  has 
affected  the  history  of  the  islands  in  the  past, 
so  is  its  influence  still  potent  to-day.  Beyond 
this,  it  lies  before  the  American  occupation  as 
a barrier,  bristling  with  serious  complications, 
which  is  not  surmountable  by  mere  force  of 
arms.  The  difficulties  that  confront  the  Amer- 
ican government  would  still  remain  a long  way 
from  solution  even  were  the  last  insurrecto  to 
be  shot  down  or  imprisoned.  With  the  Spanish 


314 


THE  CHURCH  AND  THE  FRIARS  315 


soldiers  of  the  days  of  the  sixteenth  century, 
actuated  by  the  idea  of  “ territorial  expansion,” 
went  the  representatives  of  the  church,  with 
their  ideas  of  the  extension  of  the  kingdom  of 
God  and  the  augmentation  of  the  power  of  the 
church.  A review  of  the  writers  of  those  early 
days  will  show  that,  while  these  two  elements 
operated  together  in  the  establishment  of  Span- 
ish authority  in  the  Philippines,  they  were  in  an 
almost  constant  state  of  dissension  as  to  which 
of  the  two  constituted  the  supreme  authority. 
During  the  latter  years  of  that  century  Spain 
was  the  scene  of  a somewhat  animated  and 
sometimes  bitter  controversy  regarding  the 
scope  and  functions  of  the  church  in  the  islands 
of  the  East. 

Previous  to  and  during  the  controversy,  men- 
dicant friars  had  gone  to  the  islands  in  con- 
siderable numbers,  though  lacking  the  proper 
authorization  of  the  rulers  of  the  church.  The 
controversy  at  home  terminated  in  an  arrange- 
ment by  which  the  church  should  receive  one 
tenth  of  the  tributes  of  the  island.  A body  of 
Augustinian  friars  was  to  be  sent  out  at  once, 
and  they  were  to  be  followed  by  representatives 
of  other  orders.  Serious  friction  occurred  at 
frequent  intervals  between  the  authorities  of  the 
church  and  those  of  the  state,  and  many  acri- 
monious contests  took  place  between  the  friars 
of  different  orders.  Upon  the  plastic  materials 
of  ignorance,  credulity  and  superstition,  the 


316 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


priests  and  friars,  many  of  them  men  of  keen  and 
highly  trained  minds,  have  impressed  an  idea  of 
a religious  power  greater  than  that  of  the  state. 

Most  unfortunately  for  the  natives,  and  also 
most  unfortunately  for  the  church,  the  power  of 
the  priesthood  has  been  greatly  abused.  That 
statement  needs  some  qualification.  I do  not 
find  that  the  protest  of  the  people  has  been 
against  the  Church  of  Eomejjcr  se.  It  has  been 
directed  more  distinctly  against  the  extortions 
and  abuses  which  are  admitted  to  have  been 
exercised  by  the  various  religious  orders,  the 
Augustinians,  the  Dominicans  and  the  Francis- 
cans. The  J esuits  were  expelled  from  the  islands 
in  1768,  but  were  permitted  to  return  in  1852, 
upon  the  definite  condition  that  their  operations 
should  be  wholly  confined  to  educational  work. 
The  Recoletos,  being  a branch  of  the  Francis- 
can order,  may  be  grouped  with  the  mother 
organization. 

I believe  myself  to  be  wholly  in  accord  with  the 
facts  in  stating  that,  while  Spain  has  nominally 
exercised  authority  in  the  Philippines,  the  real 
power  and  many  of  the  minor  functions  of  gov- 
ernment have  been  in  the  hands  of  the  religious 
orders.  The  decision  of  the  Council  of  Trent, 
which  forbade  the  holding  of  benefices  by  friars, 
has  been  made  void  in  the  Philippines  and 
nowhere  else,  if  I am  rightly  informed.  Papal 
bulls  have  made  an  exception  in  these  islands, 
and  misfortune  and  revolt  have  followed  the 


THE  CHURCH  ART)  THE  FRIARS  317 


system.  In  spite  of  a notably  strong  protesting 
element,  those  orders  have  a grip  on  the  Philip- 
pines and  a power  over  its  people  that  cannot  be 
loosened  by  guns  and  bayonets. 

It  is  distasteful  to  comment  unfavorably  upon 
any  branch  of  an  institution  which  stands  in  the 
world  of  to-day  as  stands  the  Church  of  Rome. 
But  the  Philippine  Islands  present  a long  array 
of  wholly  uncontrovertible  facts  regarding  the 
misrule,  the  misconduct,  and  the  oppression  and 
extortion  of  these  religious  orders  against  which 
in  past  years  Filipino  revolt  has  been  directed. 
Many  of  the  better  class  of  the  natives  have  no 
hesitation  in  saying  that  the  Spanish  govern- 
ment, though  hard,  was  far  from  unbearable.  It 
was  the  exactions  of  the  monastic  orders,  whose 
sway  was  supreme,  against  which  they  rebelled. 
These  orders  own  and  control  vast  areas  of  rural 
property  and  have  extensive  and  valuable  hold- 
ings in  the  towns  and  cities.  What  they  give 
in  return  for  what  they  get  does  not  seem  to  be 
known.  In  his  book,  the  standard  work  on  the 
subject,  Mr.  John  Foreman  covers  a number  of 
pages  with  detailed  accouuts  of  monastic  oppres- 
sion and  corruption.  He  also  frequently  alludes 
to  the  great  possessions  and  the  gross  abuse  of 
the  great  power  held  by  these  monastic  orders. 
It  is  interesting  to  note  that  Mr.  Foreman  is 
himself  a Catholic.  His  statements  are  those  of 
an  honest  man  who  is  ready  to  acknowledge  the 
faults  he  sees. 


318 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


To-day  these  orders  are  watching  every  move 
and  every  step  taken  by  the  officials  of  the 
United  States.  Democratic  measures  and  sys- 
tems are  wholly  subversive  of  the  principles  and 
methods  of  monastic  orders.  The  orders  repre- 
sented here  “ view  with  alarm  ” the  possibility 
of  an  American  intrenchment  within  their 
stronghold,  the  possibility  of  democratic 
encroachment  upon  preserves  which  have  been 
theirs  for  three  centuries.  With  all  the  power 
of  their  organizations  they  are  to-day  working, 
for  the  greater  part  by  secret  and  insidious 
methods,  to  support  antagonism  to  American 
control. 

Their  religion,  Roman  Catholicism,  means  ■ 
much  to  the  Filipino  people.  Men  as  well  as 
women  are  faithful  in  their  attendance  upon 
church  worship,  not  only  on  Sunday,  but  upon 
the  prescribed  holy  days  as  well.  Stand  for  an 
hour  by  a church  door  in  Manila  at  any  time 
of  day  during  the  week.  The  majority  of  the 
men  will  be  seen  to  lift  their  hats  as  they  pass 
the  portal.  A Protestant  American  attending  a 
service  in  one  of  the  many  churches  in  Manila 
would  be  inrpressed  by  it  along  the  line  of  the 
breadth  of  his  previous  experience.  If  he  had 
attended  corresponding  services  in  other  coun- 
tries, he  would  especially  note  only  the  minor 
differences  of  detail  that  arise  from  the  differ- 
ences of  race  and  national  life  and  custom. 

If  he  were  suddenly  transplanted  from  an  en- 


THE  CHURCH  AND  THE  FRIARS  319 


vironment  which  had  always  been  limited  to  the 
Sabbath  life  of  New  England,  it  is  more  than 
probable  that  he  would  be  decidedly  shocked. 
Religion  as  a dominating  and  radiating  force 
in  individual  life  has  little  meaning  in  the  Fili- 
pino life,  viewed  from  the  standpoint  of  New 
England  Congregationalism.  In  this  the  Filipino 
is  by  no  means  unique.  He  shares  with  perhaps 
the  majority  of  the  human  race  the  idea  that  the 
general  acceptance  of  certain  propositions  and 
the  observance  of  certain  ceremonies  will  assure 
him  of  a more  or  less  definite  state  of  happiness 
in  a future  existence.  But  while  his  religion 
manifests  no  dominant  motive  in  his  daily  life, 
and  while  his  ceremonies  are  attended  by  sur- 
roundings which  strike  the  American  observer 
as  decidedly  incongruous,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
that  such  religion  as  the  Filipino  has  is  a serious 
thing  with  him. 

I attended  service  one  morning  in  the  Binondo 
church.  The  building  is  a large  and  rather 
imposing  structure  of  stone,  stained  and  weather- 
beaten, with  here  and  there,  upon  walls  and 
tower,  a bunch  of  grass  or  growing  shrubs  which 
has  sprung  from  wind-blown  seeds  lodged  in 
accumulations  of  dust.  A chime  of  bells  hangs 
in  its  tower,  and  while  these  are  doubtless  rung 
upon  some  system,  they  peal,  in  various  tones 
and  combinations,  at  any  and  at  frequent  times, 
week-days  as  well  as  Sundays,  from  early  morn- 
ing until  sometimes  late  at  night. 


320 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


As  one  approaches  the  church  at  the  time  of 
a service  of  any  special  importance,  he  finds  the 
broad  sidewalk  densely  thronged  with  passers, 
idlers,  attendants  and  peddlers.  The  peddlers 
are  particularly  numerous  on  Sundays  and  high 
feast-days.  The  majority  are  women.  Their 
wares,  consisting  of  various  fruits,  flowers, 
cigars  and  cigarettes,  cakes  and  different  kinds 
of  native  compounds  of  sweetened  pastes,  are 
displayed  in  broad,  shallow  baskets  of  circular 
form.  Around  and  beside  these  the  venders 
squat  in  the  common  Filipino  attitude.  As  a 
friend  of  mine  puts  it,  “ they  double  up  like  a 
closed  jackknife.”  Among  the  delicacies  thus 
displayed  the  American  army  hardtack  finds  a 
prominent  place  and  ready  sale. 

With  very  few  exceptions,  the  people  are  neatly 
dressed.  Their  fashions  are  other  than  ours, 
as  is  shown  in  the  many  illustrations  that  have 
appeared  in  American  periodicals.  Most  of  the 
garments  are  made  of  inexpensive  materials. 
White  cotton  or  drill  prevails  among  the  men, 
though  many  wear  as  an  outer  garment,  in  place 
of  a coat,  a shirt  of  the  conventional  pattern, 
made  from  either  a light  muslin  or  a native 
cloth  of  very  thin  texture  and  open  mesh.  This 
native  cloth  is  wholly  transparent  and  one 
rather  wonders  what  purpose  it  serves.  It 
offers  neither  warmth,  coolness,  nor  conceal- 
ment, yet  many  of  the  garments  are  quite  elab- 
orate and  somewhat  expensive.  The  specially 


THE  CHURCH  AXD  THE  FRIARS  321 


striking  feature  about  the  great  majority  of  gar- 
ments is  their  evidence  of  recent  appearance 
from  the  laundry.  The  people  are  quiet,  orderly, 
and  sober  almost  to  seriousness.  The  Filipino 
does  not  seem  to  be  a ready  laugher.  He  is 
somber  and  sedate  rather  than  hilarious  or  even 
vivacious. 

The  interior  of  the  church  is  conventional. 
The  marble-tiled  floor,  the  fonts  of  holy  water, 
the  candle-illuminated  high  altar,  the  choir-stalls, 
the  statues  and  figures  and  the  altar-boys  atten- 
dant upon  their  duties  behind  the  officiating 
priests,  may  be  seen  in  any  of  the  Catholic 
churches  in  America  and  elsewhere.  The  atti- 
tude of  all  the  worshipers  is  reverential.  The 
poor,  the  wretched,  the  lame  and  the  blind  kneel 
or  stand  commingled  with  their  fellows  of  a better 
fortune.  No  special  section  is  reserved  for 
women,  but  some  habitual  separation  is  evident. 
Some  portions  of  the  floor  show  a predominat- 
ing feminine  occupation,  while  in  others  the 
men  are  the  more  numerous.  The  women  gen- 
erally kneel ; the  men  usually  stand.  As  I was 
a spectator  rather  than  a worshiper,  I noted  the 
congregation  rather  than  the  service.  I noticed 
one  man  in  conventional  European  clothes.  He 
was  evidently  a Spanish  half-breed.  His  form 
and  face  would  have  made  him  a model  for  an 
artist  to  paint  as  Colonel  Newcome.  He  knelt 
with  upright  form  and  bowed  head,  his  hands 
resting  upon  the  top  of  his  walking-stick.  Dur- 


322 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


ing  the  whole  of  my  stay  in  his  vicinity  he 
remained  as  motionless  as  a statue.  The  entire 
setting  and  the  attitude  of  the  man  made  him  a 
study  for  a striking  picture. 

The  music  of  the  service  was  excellent.  Upon 
another  occasion  I heard  it  to  better  advantage 
in  the  same  church.  The  organ  was  of  fine 
tone  and  was  skilfully  handled.  The  choirs  con- 
tained excellent  voices.  The  attendants  were 
evidently  wholly,  familiar  with  the  services. 
This  was  indicated  by  the  general  recogni- 
tion of  those  points  in  their  process  at  which 
the  crossing,  the  bowing  of  the  head  or  the 
bending  of  the  knee  are  called  for.  Some  upon 
entering,  most  upon  leaving,  dipped  the  fingers  in 
the  font  of  holy  water  and  crossed  themselves 
with  its  drops.  As  I left  the  building,  immedi- 
ately as  I crossed  its  threshold,  a hand-bill  was 
passed  to  me,  among  others.  It  advertised  that 
at  half-past  three,  on  the  afternoon  of  that  Sun- 
day, there  would  be  a performance  of  Verdi’s 
great  opera  of  “ Aida  ” by  Tagal  artists,  in  the 
Tagal  language,  at  the  Teatro  Libertad. 

In  all  the  demands  for  reform  made  by  the 
Filipinos  upon  the  Spanish  government,  at  the 
bottom  of  all  revolutions  and  uprisings, and  in  all 
of  such  demands  as  the  Filipinos  have  made  to 
the  United  States,  there  appears,  with  unfalter- 
ing persistence,  as  the  one  thing  indispensable 
in  Filipino  life  and  peace,  the  demand  for  the 
expulsion  of  the  friars. 


THE  CHURCH  AXI)  THE  FRIARS  323 


In  his  letter  of  November  3,  1898,  dated  at 
Malolos  and  addressed  to  General  Otis,  Agui- 
naldo  makes  the  following  statements : 

These  priests  . . . have  been  for  a long  time  the 
absolute  masters  of  the  life,  honor  and  property  of  the 
Filipinos.  For  this  reason  it  is  a widely  known  and 
notorious  fact,  recognized  by  all  foreigners  who  have 
studied  Philippine  affairs,  that  the  primary  causes  of 
the  Philippine  revolution  were  the  ecclesiastical  cor- 
porations, which,  taking  advantage  of  the  corrupt 
Spanish  government,  have  robbed  the  country,  pre- 
venting progress  and  liberty. 

There  is  no  question  of  theory,  it  is  a ques- 
tion of  fact.  Apologists,  be  they  -who  they  may, 
may  make  what  statements  they  will,  deny  as 
they  will  the  charges  preferred  against  the  friars, 
urge  what  advantages  they  will  for  the  present 
system.  The  fact  remains,  indisputably,  the 
Filipino  people  have  demanded  and  still  demand 
the  expulsion  of  the  friars.  Conceding  the  most 
that  can  possibly  be  conceded, — namely,  that 
the  demand  is  unjust  and  unwarranted, — the 
fact  of  the  demand  remains.  Moreover,  it  may 
be  confidently  expected  that  it  will  remain  so 
long  as  the  present  system  continues.  Even 
were  the  friars  to  amend  their  ways,  live  the 
purest,  holiest,  most  charitable  and  useful  of 
lives,  it  may  be  doubted  if  they  would  then  be 
acceptable  to  a people  who  have  become  deeply 
embittered  against  them. 

I do  not  care  to  go  into  details  concerning  the 
charges  of  gross  immorality,  wrong  and  oppres- 


324 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


sion  that  are  brought  against  the  orders  as 
organized  bodies  and  against  the  members  of  the 
orders  as  individuals,  from  the  archbishop  down- 
ward. The  charges  are  brought  openly,  and 
there  can  be  no  question  that  many  of  them  are 
capable  of  the  fullest  substantiation.  All  that 
may  well  be  regarded  as  a side  issue,  important 
if  you  will,  but  subordinate  to  the  main  and 
fundamental  proposition.  That  proposition 
may  be  briefly  stated  thus : Does  the  American 
principle  of  religious  toleration  warrant  the  con- 
tinued imposition  of  an  unacceptable  priesthood 
upon  an  unwilling  people  ? Behind  that  stands 
a question  of  almost  equal  moment : What  can 
be  done  about  it?  There  is  little  question  that 
such  continuance  will  only  result  in  further 
protest  here,  and  that  the  protest  wflll  again,  as 
it  has  in  the  past,  lead  to  revolt.  The  official  or 
military  support  of  the  institution  will  make  the 
United  States  a party  to  a condition  operative 
against  itself,  subversive  of  law  and  order  and 
contrary  to  American  principles. 

The  arrival  of  Archbishop  Chapelle  was  pre- 
sumably a step  toward  the  adjustment  of  differ- 
ences and  difficulties  for  which  any  adjustment 
seems  little  short  of  impossible.  The  demand 
is  for  a new  order  of  things,  not  for  a readjust- 
ment of  an  old  system.  Thus  far  it  may  be 
questioned  whether  his  presence  has  not  worked 
an  added  harm.  His  very  association  with 
Americans  is  used  as  a basis  for  rumors,  which 


THE  CHURCH  ARE  THE  FRIARS  325 


spread  widely,  of  affiliation  between  the  Ameri- 
can officials  and  the  representatives  of  the 
church.  The  reception  given  in  his  honor,  under 
American  auspices,  was  largely  attended  by 
Americans,  who  were  prompted  by  different 
motives.  Some  went  out  of  respect,  some  out 
of  courtesy,  some  from  curiosity,  some  to  enjoy 
a sociable  time.  The  Filipino  does  not  know, 
does  not  distinguish.  He  sees  the  official  launch 
sent  off  to  bring  the  ecclesiastic  ashore ; he  sees 
the  visiting  archbishop  on  cordial  terms  with 
the  (to  the  Filipinos)  more  or  less  objectionable 
Dominican,  Archbishop  Nozaleda,  through 
whose  influence  and  authority  they  believe  they 
have  been  oppressed  and  at  whose  instigation 
they  believe  their  friends  and  fellow-countrymen 
have  been  brutally  shot  on  the  Luneta ; they  see 
hundreds  of  Americans  flocking  to  a social 
reception  given  to  the  visitor,  beside  whom 
stand  Xozaleda  and  three  other  local  church 
dignitaries.  Had  these  people  been  imbued  with 
confidence  in  the  purposes  and  kindly  intentions 
of  the  Americans,  their  views  might  have  been 
cheerful  and  hopeful  of  better  things.  As  it  is, 
they  are  suspicious  and  look  upon  all  these  re- 
lations as  evidence  of  a common  action  between 
the  old  order  and  the  new  rulers. 

The  incident  is  also  seized  upon  by  the  politi- 
cal element  as  a basis  of  other  and  further 
rumors.  The  leading  Spanish  paper  prints  a 
long  list  of  subjects,  claiming  them  as  the  topics 


326 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


proposed  for  discussion  by  Archbishop  Nozaleda. 
“ Libertas,”  the  organ  of  the  Dominican  arch- 
bishop, discredits  the  authenticity  of  this  pro- 
gram. “ Libertas  ” and  “ Comercio  ” are  both 
Spanish  papers  and  both  Roman  Catholic. 
“ Libertas  ” supports  the  friars,  “ Comercio  ” 
stands  for  a secular  clergy. 

Whether  or  not  the  list  be  authentic,  it  does 
unquestionably  include  many  of  the  topics 
that  will  be  considered  by  the  reverend  gen- 
tlemen. From  the  purely  American  standpoint, 
one  would  be  justified  in  asking  what  these  gen- 
tlemen have  to  do  with  some  of  these  matters 
anyway.  The  principles  have  been  determined 
and  accepted  in  the  United  States  and  it  would 
seem  to  be  a new  phase  of  things  if  America 
must  ask  certain  monastic  orders  what  it  shall 
or  shall  not  do  concerning  matters  upon  which 
a determination  has  been  reached.  It  would 
seem  a waste  of  time  to  discuss,  on  American 
soil  and  under  the  American  flag,  the  mainte- 
nance by  the  church  of  schools  and  hospitals. 
The  answer  is  wholly  simple  and  fully  estab- 
lished. They  may  maintain  all  for  which  they 
will  themselves  pay,  and  control  none  for  which 
they  do  not  pay.  “ Shall  there  be  American 
priests  in  the  capitals'?”  Another  broad  ques- 
tion with  a simple  answer.  If  they  are  wanted 
there,  yes ; if  they  are  not  wanted,  no.  “ Shall 
the  catechism  be  taught  in  the  primary  schools  ? ” 
11  Shall  taxes  be  imposed  for  the  maintenance 


THE  CHURCH  AXD  THE  FRIARS  327 


of  the  church?”  “What  shall  be  the  scale  of 
parochial  fees  ? ” etc. 

These  and  all  other  questions  are  wholly  fruit- 
less until  the  basis  be  established.  The  real 
questions  are,  Shall  the  present  order  continue, 
contrary  to  the  will  of  the  people?  Shall  the 
friars  be  expelled  and  their  places  be  filled  by 
an  acceptable  secular  clergy  that  will  deal  hon- 
estly, justly  and  in  love  and  kindness  with  the 
people?  This  is  the  demand,  and  the  vital 
question  is  that  of  compliance  with  it.  In  this 
question  the  American  people  are  deeply  inter- 
ested, whether  they  be  Catholic  or  Protestant. 
Will  the  American  people  back  up  the  Domini- 
can, the  Franciscan  and  the  Augustinian  parish 
priest,  as  did  the  Spaniards,  with  bullet  and 
bayonet  ? Already,  it  is  said,  the  friars  are  pro- 
posing a return  to  their  parishes  and  demand- 
ing their  protection  by  American  troops  in  the 
places  to  which  they  go.  Already  rumors  come 
of  the  assertions  of  the  Filipino  people  that 
if  the  friars  come  back  they  will  kill  them. 
Already  petitions  are  coming  to  headquarters 
for  a secular  clergy.  A priesthood  is  wanted, 
but  the  demand  is  for  a secular  clergy  whose 
aims  and  purposes  shall  be  the  welfare,  spiritual 
and  social,  of  those  to  whom  they  minister. 
Under  the  present  system  the  accumulation  of 
money  is  an  evident  object,  and  morality  and 
spiritual  development  are  minor  considerations. 

The  finest  and  most  costly  buildings  on  the 


328 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


islands  are  the  churches  and  the  church  build- 
ings. Those  who  pay  for  them  live  in  nipa  huts. 
El  fraile  fares  sumptuously  and  drinks  his  good 
wine.  He  who  pays  for  the  wine  lives  on  rice, 
bananas,  and  fish  when  he  can  get  it.  The 
orders  hold  more  or  less  valid  titles  to  vast  tracts 
of  land  in  the  Philippine  Islands.  There  seems 
firm  ground  for  the  current  rumors  of  transfers 
of  these  titles  to  private  holders  who  are  aliens, 
English  and  others.  What  is  the  object  ? Sen- 
sational stories  are  told  of  the  way  in  which 
large  amounts  of  landed  and  other  property 
have  been  acquired.  There  are  tales  of  dying 
men  terrorized  into  devising  their  possessions ; 
of  the  denunciation  of  wealthy  Filipinos  as 
political  conspirators  and  a “ stand  in”  with  the 
authorities  for  the  property  of  the  condemned. 
I do  not  vouch  for  the  methods  of  acquisition, 
though  such  stories  are  openly  told  and  gener- 
ally believed.  The  “great  possessions”  are 
evidently  facts. 

Comparatively  little  complaint  is  heard 
regarding  the  Jesuits.  Their  work,  except  for 
missions  among  the  Mohammedans,  has  been 
chiefly  along  educational  lines.  In  that  depart- 
ment it  has  been  of  great  value.  Their  college, 
library,  museum  and  observatory  with  meteoro- 
logical observations  and  reports  are  of  incal- 
culable value  to  the  islands  and  to  any  nation 
that  may  possess  them.  Much  of  that  which 
they  have  received  has  gone  back  to  the  people 


THE  CHURCH  AATD  THE  FRIARS  329 


increased  a hundredfold.  The  bitter  complaint, 
the  protest  and  the  revolt,  are  against  those 
who  absorb  and  retain  and  who  pervert  the  func- 
tions of  their  holy  office  by  obtaining  in  unholy 
ways. 

I submit  the  following  quotations  from  local 
papers  of  January,  1899.  From  “La  Patria,” 
J anuary  16 : 

That  a river  of  blood  flows  between  the  Filipino 
people  and  the  monastic  orders  is  already  a matter  of 
history.  It  is  inconceivable  that  they  should  be  en- 
throned once  more  on  their  former  heights  of  power  to 
control  the  affairs  of  the  people  like  so  many  Jupiters, 
to  retard  as  they  have  done  hitherto  the  education  of 
the  people  that  they  may  be  able  to  live  on  in  their 
ignorance  in  ceternum,  to  commit,  in  short,  the  grossest 
meanness  and  insult  to  which  there  is  no  parallel  in 
history.  How  can  the  people  be  reconciled  to  those 
who  have  amassed  enormous  fortunes  by  deceiving  the 
good  faith  of  our  ancestors  and  by  abusing  their  reli- 
gion in  bringing  about  the  deaths  of  our  ancestors  and 
of  our  great  men,  Burgos,  Gomez,  Zamora  and  Rizal— 
be  reconciled,  in  fact,  to  those  who  by  their  mischief 
brought  about  the  revolution  of  1896  ? 

From  “ El  Grito  del  Pueblo,”  January  16 : 

Those  who  intend  to  reestablish  the  friars  in  the 
parishes  here  need  have  no  doubt  that,  as  Cicero  in- 
voked the  sword  of  justice  and  fury  of  the  gods  upon 
all  traitors,  so  will  the  provoked  people  invoke  a 
justice  of  their  own  if  a new  tyranny  of  their  hated 
enemies  be  imposed  upon  them ; . . . but  this  surely 
will  not  happen,  for  the  apostolic  delegate  must  realize 
that  this  step  would  involve  the  converting  into  a rank 
imposition  what  they  have  looked  forward  to  as  their 
salvation  from  misfortune. 


330 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


There  can  be  no  doubt  that  these  extracts  give 
voice  to  a common  opinion.  The  same  ideas 
reach  me  through  private  channels  from  Fili- 
pinos of  education  and  high  social  position. 
Further  evidence  is  found  in  the  following  peti- 
tion submitted  to  the  archbishop  by  a delegation 
from  the  Santa  Cruz  district  of  the  city  of 
Manila.  Petitions  of  similar  tenor  have  been 
presented  from  other  points. 

To  Mgr.  P.  L.  Chapelle,  Apostolic  Delegate  of  his 
Holiness  Leo  XIII  in  the  Philippine  Islands  : 

The  undersigned  proprietors,  merchants,  lawyers, 
physicians,  pharmaceutists  and  other  leading  citizens 
of  the  Santa  Cruz  district  of  the  city  of  Manila,  present 
themselves  before  your  Reverence  with  all  due  respect 
and  veneration,  and  state : That  they  have  heard  it 
rumored  that  the  regular  clergy,  that  is  to  say,  the 
members  of  the  different  religious  corporations  now 
residing  in  these  islands,  will  be  charged  again  with  the 
salvation  of  souls  and  will  assume  all  the  other  ecclesi- 
astical dignities  which  they  enjoyed  throughout  the 
archipelago  under  the  long  Spanish  regime.  Your 
Reverence  cannot  imagine  what  a disagreeable  effect 
this  report  lias  had  on  the  Philippine  people,  who 
unanimously  protest  against  the  pretension  of  such  in- 
dividuals, who,  by  their  hateful  behavior,  caused,  to  a 
great  extent,  the  revolution  which  shook  the  Spanish 
yoke  in  these  islands. 

The  undersigned  are  stanch  Catholics,  faithful  sons 
of  the  Roman  Church,  but  they  earnestly  desire  to  have 
all  their  parishes  and  other  ecclesiastical  dignities  ad- 
ministered by  their  secular  clergy,  without  the  inter- 
ference of  the  friars  in  any  wav. 

The  friars  are  foreigners  here,  and  are  everywhere 
rejected,  even  in  Spain  itself.  The  best  policy  of  the 
American  government,  especially  at  the  present  junc- 


THE  CHURCH  AND  THE  FRIARS  331 


ture,  would  be  not  to  admit  the  friars  remaining  here. 
In  making  this  respectful  application  to  your  Rever- 
ence as  the  true  representative  of  the  Common  Father, 
the  undersigned  refer  especially  to  the  church  of  the 
Santa  Cruz  district,  which  they  hope  will  never  be  ad- 
ministered by  a friar,  but  by  a Philippine  clergyman. 

This  is  a grace  and  a justice  which  they  hoiie  your 
Reverence,  whose  hands  they  kiss,  will  grant  to  them. 

Manila,  Santa  Cruz, 

January  10,  1900. 

Nor  is  tlie  agitation  confined  to  the  island  of 
Luzon.  The  following  is  a translation  from  the 
news  columns  of  a Manila  Spanish  paper,  “El 
Progreso  ” : 

Cebu,  November  12,  1899. 

A special  meeting  having  been  called,  in  the  Govern- 
ment Building,  of  the  representatives  of  all  the  social 
classes  of  this  city,  the  meeting  was  called  to  order  at 
10 : 30  A.M.,  and  the  President  informed  the  meeting 
of  the  arrival,  according  to  information,  in  this  city,  of 
seven  friars,— persons  who  have  been  the  cause  of  the 
evils  which  are  so  fresh  in  the  memory  of  all,— in  order 
that  each  one  present  might  express  his  opinion  on  a 
matter  of  such  vital  interest.  After  a short  discussion, 
the  meeting  resolved  to  inform  the  Provincial  Council, 
for  transmittal  to  the  American  government,  that  the 
people  are  opposed  to  the  permanency  of  the  friars, 
which  might  give  rise  to  disorder,  and  for  which  reason 
it  is  necessary,  and  they  so  demand,  that  the  said  friars 
be  immediately  expelled.  The  meeting  was  adjourned 
at  11 : 15,  and  all  present  signed  the  minutes. 

The  signers  of  the  foregoing  have  a right  to  be  re- 
garded as  representatives  of  the  better  class  of  Cebu, 
whether  or  not  their  propositions  are  accepted.  Don 
Florentin  Ratios  is  the  president  of  the  American  gov- 
ernment of  the  island  of  Cebu,  and  the  other  signers 
are  merchants,  lawyers  and  leading  men  of  the  town, 
which  is  a truly  Catholic  one. 


332 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


One  notable  result  followed  the  arrival  of 
Archbishop  Chapelle.  “ El  Progreso,”  which  is 
printed  in  Spanish  and  is  bitterly  antagonistic 
to  the  friars,  published  an  alleged  interview 
with  the  newly  arrived  ecclesiastic.  It  con- 
tained some  remarkable  statements  and  for 
several  days  my  friend  the  editor,  Senor  Juan 
de  Juan,  went  about  in  fear  and  trembling  lest 
his  paper  be  suppressed  and  his  property  confis- 
cated. In  some  way  the  matter  slipped  through. 
He  was  not  molested,  but  he  had  opened  a flood- 
gate and  pent-up  feelings  found  vent  in  a way 
wholly  unknown  in  Manila  experience. 

In  the  alleged  interview  Father  Chapelle  was 
quoted  as  saying : u The  four  public  lectures 
given  by  Father  McKinnon  caused  President 
McKinley  to  realize  the  necessity  for  the  monas- 
tic orders  remaining  in  the  Philippines.  I come 
to  Manila  with  ample  authority  for  everything. 
The  friars  of  the  Philippines  have  alarmed 
themselves  without  any  reason.  I know  their 
importance  and  am  openly  predisposed  in  their 
favor.  If  the  friars  occupy  the  parishes  they 
will  be  considered  as  elements  of  order  and 
therefore  as  American  agents.”  There  was  more 
of  somewhat  similar  tenor. 

That  was  too  much  even  for  Filipinos.  They 
let  themselves  out.  That  which  had  been  whis- 
pered in  corners  was  shouted  from  the  housetops. 
Without  suppression  and  without  punishment, 
journals  printed  and  men  shouted:  “Abajo  los 


THE  CHURCH  AND  THE.  FRIARS  333 


frailes ! ” (“  Down  with  the  friars  ! ”)  “ Fuera  a los 
frailes ! ” (“  Away  with  the  friars ! ”)  “ Mnerte  a 
los  frailes ! ” (“  Death  to  the  friars  ! ”)  “ Fuera 
Nozaleda ! ” (“  Away  with  Nozaleda ! ”)  Nozaleda 
is  the  archbishop.  Foreman  styles  him  “ the 
Bloodthirsty.”  These  were  the  cries  of  a large 
number  of  men,  all  of  them  Roman  Catholics 
and  all  of  them  prominent,  and  most  of  them 
representative  Filipinos,  at  a public  reception 
tendered  by  Archbishop  Chapelle  to  the  “ parish 
priests  and  Filipino  Catholics.” 

The  pro-friar  element,  evidently  a 'very  limited 
body,  and  the  friars  themselves,  sought  to  dis- 
credit these  proceedings  by  charging  them  to 
“non-Catholic  sects  and  the  diabolical  spirit  of 
Freemasonry.”  This  will  hardly  hold  water,  as 
there  are  no  representatives  of  “ non-Catholic 
sects”  here,  excepting  the  Americans,  and  they 
took  no  part  in  it.  Neither  is  there  any  Masonic 
order  or  organization.  As  said  by  the  Manila 
“ Times,”  it  was  “ no  effervescence,  but  a great 
movement,  deep-rooted  and  far-reaching,  in  fact, 
the  voice  of  the  Philippine  people.”  The  demon- 
stration, which  was  prearranged,  may  have  been 
in  bad  taste,  but  there  can  be  no  doubt  of  its 
sincerity  and  its  deep  significance. 


XVII 

THE  ARMY  AND  THE  NAVY  IN  THE 
PHILIPPINES 

Submerged  heroes— A word  for  deserving  men— Philippine 
“battles” — An  attack  on  San  Mateo— An  army  “dandy” 
—An  engagement  on  the  south  line— Stragglers— Incidents 
of  the  field — Imus — Generals  in  the  Philippines— The  work 
of  the  navy — A fight  at  Subig  Bay— At  Novaleta — A dan- 
gerous coast— The  navy  in  the  south— The  Mosquito  Fleet. 

THE  story  of  the  army  and  the  navy  in  the 
Philippines  would  make  several  books,  each 
of  them  larger  than  this.  Some  day  it  will  be 
written.  It  will  be  a tale  including  many 
accounts  of  hardships  patiently  and  pluckily 
endured,  of  personal  courage  and  of  general 
bravery  in  fight.  I sincerely  hope  that  when- 
ever such  a work  is  done  it  may  include  several 
chapters  on  “ Submerged  Heroes.”  Their  coun- 
try should  know  of  and  appreciate  the  work 
done  by  men  whose  story  is  too  seldom  told.  It 
seems  hardly  fair  to  quote  any  names  here.  To 
cite  a half-dozen  instances  gives  to  six  a promi- 
nence which  is  due  to  sixscore.  Colonels,  majors, 
captains  and  lieutenants  have  served  their 

334 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  335 


country  on  active  campaigns  and  on  warm  firing- 
lines.  G-ood  work  under  sucli  circumstances  is 
usually  reported.  Yet  even  better  and  more 
telliug  work  is  often  done  behind  the  lines.  The 
men  who  do  it  get  no  glory  and  the  reading 
public  knows  little  of  them.  Who  knows  how 
Major  Butler  D.  Price  for  months  held  the  city 
and  administered  the  affairs  of  the  district  of 
Imus,  commanding  the  Fourth  United  States 
Infantry  in  the  absence  of  his  regimental  supe- 
riors, at  an  almost  isolated  post  in  the  very  heart 
of  the  most  turbulent  district  of  Luzon  ? Who 
knows  of  the  work  done  by  the  Third  Infantry 
up  in  Baliuag,  San  Udefonso  and  the  Candaba 
country!  Who  knows  how  much  of  the  main- 
tenance of  order  and  of  safety  to  American 
civilians  in  Manila  is  due  to  the  untiring  and 
intelligent  work  of  such  men  as  Captain  Morri- 
son and  his  fellow-officers  of  the  Twentieth 
Infantry,  the  Fourteenth  Infantry  and  the  Sixth 
Artillery!  Who  ever  thinks  of  Censor  Greene, 
good  fellow,  gentleman  and  faithful  officer  that 
he  is,  except  to  condemn  him  for  his  steadfast 
discharge  of  his  thankless  and  disagreeable  task  ! 
I admit  that  the  correspou  dents  are  to  blame 
for  giving  Captain  Greene  a somewhat  unsavory 
reputation,  but  the  truth  is  that  Greene  de- 
serves credit  and  honor  for  his  work.  I have 
mentioned  names,  after  all.  Let  them  stand. 
They  stand  also  for  scores  who  are  equally 
deserving. 


336 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


It  is  no  discredit  to  tlie  army  to  ' ay  that  many 
of  the  accounts  of  their  operations  have  been 
overdrawn.  Few  of  their  “ battles  ” would  have 
counted  for  much  during  the  Civil  War,  but 
they  were  the  biggest  affairs  we  had  on  hand 
and  they  loomed  up  in  a false  perspective. 
I reported  one  of  these  at  the  time  of  its  occur- 
rence and  the  account  may  be  taken  as  typical 
of  much  the  greater  number  of  “ battles  ” in  the 
Philippines.  On  December  18,  1899,  the  gallant 
Lawton  fell,  in  what  was  practically  a repetition 
in  duplicate  of  this  movement  upon  the  same 
place. 


“ Manila,  August  20,  1899. 

“ The  so-called  ‘ battles  ’ in  the  Philippines 
serve  little  purpose  save  the  illustration  of  the 
general  fighting  qualities  of  the  American  sol- 
dier and  the  personal  courage  of  many  of  the 
members  of  the  army.  The  ‘battle’  of  San 
Mateo,  on  August  12,  may  be  cited  as  fairly 
illustrative  of  the  great  majority  of  military 
engagements  in  the  Philippines.  It  is  a larger 
affair  than  some,  a smaller  affair  than  others. 
The  objective  point,  San  Mateo,  lies  some  fifteen 
miles  to  the  northeast  of  Manila.  It  has  been 
occupied  and  abandoned  by  the  Americans  per- 
haps more  than  once.  Some  points  have  been 
‘captured’  and  abandoned  again  and  again, 
with  a resulting  casualty  list  upon  each  occa- 
sion. Except  for  its  extension  to  San  Fernando 


WORK  OF  TEE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  337 


along  the  railway,  the  American  line  northward 
and  eastward  of  the  city  describes,  generally, 
the  arc  of  a circle  whose  diameter  would  be 
about  ten  miles.  It  runs  from  Malabon,  on  the 
bay,  through  Kalookan,  La  Loma  and  San  J uan 
del  Monte,  with  brigade  headquarters  at  Depo- 
sito,  not  far  from  the  latter  point. 

“ The  handful  of  troops  to  be  employed  in  the 
San  Mateo  trip  were  from  Young’s  brigade  of 
Lawton’s  division.  The  movement  was  to  be 
effected  by  the  advance  of  three  separate  col- 
umns. One,  under  Captain  Cronin,  consisted 
of  a hundred  and  fifty  men  from  the  Twenty- 
fifth  (colored)  Infantry.  It  was  to  move  east- 
ward from  Novaliches,  effecting  a junction  with 
Captain  Rivers,  who,  with  a hundred  men  of  the 
Fourth  Cavalry,  was  to  move  from  the  south- 
west and  join  Cronin  in  or  near  San  Mateo  to 
intercept  the  retreat  forced  by  Captain  Parker 
of  the  Fourth  Cavalry.  Parker,  who,  by  the 
way,  made  an  excellent  record  as  lieutenant- 
colonel  of  the  Twelfth  New  York,  was  to  lead 
the  main  attacking  body.  That  consisted  of 
two  hundred  and  eighty  men,  in  six  companies, 
from  the  Fourth  Cavalry  and  Twenty-first  and 
Twenty-fourth  (colored)  Infantry.  Four  of 
these  companies  were  commanded  by  second 
lieutenants. 

“Parker  was  to  cross  the  river  near  Mariquina 
and  follow  the  road  leading  northward  upon  its 
eastern  bank.  The  purpose  was  to  drive  the 


338 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Filipinos,  known  to  be  in  the  vicinity,  back 
upon  San  Mateo,  where  they  would  encounter 
the  combination  of  the  other  two  columns.  The 
general  plan  miscarried,  but  Parker’s  force  found 
a busy  time  for  some  four  miles.  The  enemy, 
well  intrenched,  was  encountered  near  the  little 
river  Nanca.  Their  dispersion  involved  the 
crossing  of  an  unusually  long  stretch  of  those 
abominably  muddy  rice-fields  which  make  mili- 
tary movements  here  so  arduous.  The  troops 
plunge  and  flounder  about  in  mud  and  muddy 
water  from  six  to  eighteen  inches  in  depth.  If 
the  fire  of  the  enemy  becomes  too  galling  (I 
believe  ‘galling’  is  the  proper  and  accepted 
term),  it  sometimes  becomes  necessary  for  the 
men  to  imitate  the  carabao,  and  lie  down  and 
wallow  in  the  stuff.  That  soils  the  clothing, 
ruins  the  temper  and  has  a tendency  to  cause 
rheumatism  and  fever. 

“ A forty-minute  fight  took  place  at  this  point. 
The  command  was  composed  largely  of  recruits, 
but  they  showed  all  the  pluck  and  dash  and 
coolness  of  well-seasoned  troopers.  They  mani- 
fested but  one  desire,  and  that  was  to  charge 
forward.  The  junior  officers  won  and  received 
the  cordial  approval  of  their  leader.  Lieutenant 
Van  Duyne,  a young  fellow  from  Newark,  New 
Jersey,  just  out  of  West  Point,  displayed  a 
most  praiseworthy  coolness  and  courage.  In 
the  face  of  such  work  as  that  the  Filipino  does 
nothing  but  run.  I do  not  think  his  running  to 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  A XI)  XAYY  339 


be  as  much  a sign  of  fear  or  cowardice  as  a part 
of  his  kind  of  warfare.  Fear,  or  something 
akin  to  it,  may  well  be  a factor,  for  it  must  be 
rather  appalling  to  face  a line  of  brawny  Ameri- 
cans whose  onrush  is  attended  by  yells  that 
almost  drown  the  rattle  of  their  shots.  The 
first  dash  of  the  1 scrap  ’ was  the  hot  one.  It 
was  made  across  the  open  and  against  trenches. 
It  cost  the  Americans  eighteen  men  in  killed 
and  wounded.  The  Filipino  loss  is  not  known. 
Under  such  circumstances  the  loss  to  the  enemy 
is  usually  reported  to  be  four  hundred. 

“For  the  next  four  miles  it  was  a running 
fight,  with  the  Filipinos  gaining  at  every  jump. 
The  lightly  clad  native,  who  knows  every  inch 
of  the  running,  rather  handicaps  his  American 
pursuer  at  that  kind  of  a foot-race.  Parker  kept 
them  moving  at  a rate  that  sent  them  through 
the  city  before  Cronin’s  arrival.  Some  escaped 
to  the  north.  Others  undoubtedly  played  the 
usual  game  and  got  away  around  to  the  right  of 
our  line  and  were  ‘ amigos’  by  the  time  they 
reached  the  rear.  It  is  beyond  question  that  a 
fair  number  of  the  Americans’  opponents  of  the 
12th  were  seen  as  industrious  agriculturists 
at  work  in  their  fields,  and  all  very  friendly, 
when  the  troops  returned  a day  or  two  later. 
That  is  quite  a way  they  have.  It  has  led  to 
some  misconception  regarding  the  attitude  of  a 
considerable  number  of  Filipinos  toward  the 
Americans.  After  discussing  the  point  with  a 


340 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


good  many  officers  wlio  spend  their  time  on  the 
line,  I am  disposed  to  a belief  that  such  things  as 
honestly  friendly  Filipinos  belong  to  the  rara 
avis  family. 

“ Cronin’s  march  was  without  special  incident. 
Some  three  or  four  miles  outside  of  San  Mateo, 
Captain  Fivers  came  upon  an  intrenched  out- 
post. A sharp  little  engagement  followed,  with 
the  stereotyped  result.  The  Filipinos  fired  a 
few  moments  and  then  disappeared.  Their  fire 
cost  one  American  life  and  a few  wounds.  What 
was  gained  by  it  all  f I cannot  say.  A town 
or  two  which  had  been  previously  captured  and 
abandoned  was  again  captured  and  again  aban- 
doned. The  Filipinos  were  scattered  from  the 
vicinity,  just  as  flies  are  driven  from  the  sugar- 
bowl.  They  are  soon  back  again.  Our  guard- 
lines around  Manila  are  fairly  strong  and  could 
be  quickly  reinforced  from  the  regiments  in  the 
city.  Beyond  that  guard-line  it  really  makes 
little  difference  whether  the  enemy  be  five  miles 
away  or  fifty. 

“ Captain  Parker’s  trip  resulted  in  an  incident 
or  two  worth  recording.  One  company  was 
under  command  of  Captain  Wilhelm  of  the 
Twenty-first  Infantry.  Besides  his  qualities  as 
a fighting  man  with  plenty  of  courage  and  cool 
nerve,  Captain  Wilhelm  is  one  of  those  whom 
some  would  call  a 1 dandy.’  But  dandies  of  his 
kind  are  good  things  to  have  in  the  army.  At 
a certain  stage  of  the  fighting  he  saw  four  of 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  341 


the  enemy  running  away  at  close  range.  He 
ordered  his  men  to  fire  on  them  and  bring  them 
down.  Just  at  the  critical  moment,  and  just  in 
time  to  save  them,  a native  woman  ran  out  and 
placed  herself,  with  extended  arms,  immediately 
behind  the  fugitives,  in  the  line  of  the  fire. 
There  was  but  one  thing  for  Wilhelm  to  do  as 
an  American  gentleman,  and  he  did  it  promptly. 
He  ordered  his  men  to  reserve  their  fire  and 
moved  on,  while  the  hurrying  Filipinos  got  as 
quickly  as  possible  out  of  range,  sheltered  from 
harm  by  American  gallantry  and  their  guardian 
angel. 

“ This  same  Captain  Wilhelm  showed  himself 
in  another  role  during  the  same  scrap.  The 
command  was  moving  along  an  open  road  when 
it  was  assailed  by  a very  lively  shower  of  bul- 
lets. All  of  his  men  did  just  what  they  should 
have  done  under  such  circumstances:  they  hunted 
what  cover  they  could  find  in  the  muddy  rice- 
fields,  where  they  floundered  about  as  one  must 
under  such  conditions.  Wilhelm  remained  alone, 
standing  in  the  roadway,  the  only  prominent 
object  in  the  whole  field,  while  Mauser  and 
Remington  bullets  pattered  around  him,  kicking 
up,  as  they  do,  each  its  little  puff  of  dust.  Peo- 
ple who  want  to  chaff  Wilhelm  say  he  stayed 
there  because  he  preferred  getting  shot  to  get- 
ting his  clothes  muddied.  That  is  as  it  may  be, 
but,  clothes  or  not,  it  took  plenty  of  cold  nerve 
to  stand  there,  the  sole  target  for  the  Filipino  fire. 


342 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


“Whatever  else  they  do,  these  little  ‘scraps,’ 
as  the  men  call  them,  show  very  clearly  that  the 
stock  of  American  courage  was  not  exhausted  at 
Bunker  Hill,  at  Missionary  Bidge  or  at  San 
Juan;  there  is  evidently  a good  supply  still  on 
hand.” 

Another  of  these  representative  movements 
was  reported  as  follows : 

“ Manila,  October  6, 1899. 

“News-getting  in  the  Philippines  is  as  varia- 
ble an  occupation  as  that  of  the  commercial 
traveler.  Active  seasons  come  somewhat  spas- 
modically. During  the  greater  part  of  the  time 
business  is  either  dull  or  normal,  with  an  occa- 
sional day  of  unusual  activity.  But  the  man 
who  is  ‘ on  the  end  of  a wire  ’ can  never  be  really 
idle.  Much  of  his  work  may  be  and  is  only  a 
routine  of  visits  to  certain  places  from  which 
news  may  emanate.  Upon  these  places  he  must 
keep  a constant  watch  lest  the  unexpected  hap- 
pen and  he  lose  a desirable  news  paragraph 
which  his  more  fortunate  or  more  faithful  com- 
petitors secure  and  send  in  ahead  of  him.  News- 
getting  on  the  line  is  more  interesting  and  less 
tedious.  It  is  usually  more  fruitful,  but  it  is 
also  more  dangerous. 

“Bakoor  is  a town  on  the  shore  of  Manila 
Bay,  some  seven  or  eight  miles  south  of  the  city 
as  the  crow  flies;  by  the  shore  road  it  is  some 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  ARE  KAYY  343 


twelve  miles.  Imus  is  about  four  miles  south 
of  Bakoor.  The  Imus  River  passes  Imus  and 
empties  into  the  bay  at  Bakoor.  A road,  which 
is  a very  good  road  in  the  dry  season,  runs 
southward  from  Bakoor  along  the  river  into  a 
land  that  is  yet  unknown  to  more  than  a very 
few  Americans.  The  road  runs  upon  the  eastern 
bank  of  the  river,  crossing  by  a bridge  on  the 
outskirts  of  Imus.  For  two  or  three  miles  along 
the  western  bank  of  the  river  the  Filipinos  had 
constructed  rude  irenches  and  breastworks 
among  the  dense  thickets  of  bamboo  and  other 
growth. 

“ The  engagements  of  Friday  and  Saturday 
resulted  in  several  casualties  for  the  Americans. 
On  Monday  the  Americans  assumed  something 
of  the  aggressive.  A detachment  of  the  Four- 
teenth Infantry  was  sent  out  from  Bakoor  to 
effect  a junction  with  a detachment  of  the 
Fourth  Infantry,  which  was  started  from  Imus. 
They  had  a decidedly  interesting  time,  but  failed 
to  break  up  the  Filipino  lines.  Four  Americans 
were  killed  and  some  six  or  eight  were  wounded. 
Among  the  killed  was  Captain  Eldridge  of  the 
Fourteenth.  In  the  afternoon  a call  was  made 
for  reinforcements.  The  wires  were  down,  so 
that  news  of  the  Monday  engagement  was  late 
in  reaching  the  city.  Farther  troops  were 
ordered  up  and  one  hundred  and  fifty  marines 
were  ordered  ashore  from  the  ships  in  the  bay 
of  Cavite.  General  Lawton  and  his  staff  rode 


344 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


out  from  the  city  at  an  early  hour  on  Tuesday 
morning.  General  Grant,  brigade  commander 
of  the  district,  was  already  on  the  ground. 

“Mr.  Collins  of  the  Associated  Press  and 
I left  Manila  for  Bakoor  on  board  a com- 
missary tug  at  8 a.m.  We  got  out  a little  too 
late  to  be  upon  the  immediate  firing-line,  but 
as  we  were  after  news  of  what  had  been  done 
and  how  it  was  done,  rather  than  on  a hunt 
for  Filipino  scalps,  it  was  perhaps  quite  as 
well  for  us.  While  we  were  still  some  distance 
from  the  shore  we  heard  the  boom  of  artillery 
at  work.  As  we  approached  the  shore  the 
sound  of  the  rifle-fire  became  quite  distinct. 
Scattering  shots  and  volleys  were  plainly  audible. 
Shallow  water  and  no  pier  necessitated  an 
anchorage  at  some  distance  from  the  beach. 
We  secured  a native  canoe  and  got  to  the  shore 
as  quickly  as  possible.  The  town  had  a notably 
deserted  look.  A few  native  women  were  about, 
but  there  was  hardly  a native  man  to  be  seen. 
Soldiers  on  detail  duty,  hospital  men  and  a few 
stragglers  were  loafing  around  or  going  about 
their  work. 

“ We  spent  a half-hour  picking  up  information 
and  putting  it  on  the  wire  for  Manila  and  then 
started  out  on  the  road  toward  the  firing-line. 
I think  I never  saw  a prettier  road.  Nipa  huts, 
fenced  with  plaited  bamboo,  nestled  under  dense 
foliage.  Graceful  bamboos  waved  and  swayed  in 
the  wind.  The  broad-leaved  bananas  and  the 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AXE  XAYY  345 


denser  foliage  of  hardwoods  served  to  turn  the 
whole  into  a parkway  as  beautiful  as  one  could 
wish.  Occasionally  we  met  soldiers  resting 
under  trees  or  straggling  back.  There  are 
always  some  that  straggle  back.  I don’t  know 
why.  They  get  separated  from  their  particular 
command  and  instead  of  joining  something  else 
in  their  vicinity  they  go  poking  alone  to  the 
rear.  As  we  had  been  told  in  Bakoor  that  the 
road  was  not  quite  safe  even  for  peaceful 
pedestrians,  we  questioned  these  stragglers 
regarding  the  advisability  of  going  on.  Had  we 
listened  to  them  we  should  have  started  for  the 
United  States  at  once.  All  had  tales  to  tell  of 
very  close  shaves,  sharp-shooters  in  trees  and 
danger  everywhere. 

“We  came  upon  one  group  of  a half-dozen 
men  sprawling  comfortably  in  the  shade  of  a 
tree.  We  had  seen  the  same  group  start  out  a 
little  ahead  of  us.  We  questioned  them  con- 
cerning their  being  there.  They  told  a fearsome 
tale.  A little  farther  on  there  was  a bridge 
which  it  was  dangerous  to  pass.  A little  way 
beyond  the  bridge  there  was  a stretch  of  open 
road  that,  according  to  their  horrible  tale, 
seemed  to  be  constantly  swept  by  a hail-storm  of 
Filipino  bullets.  They  dared  not  cross  it  and 
had  returned.  Apparently,  by  their  story,  the 
thickets  swarmed  with  sharp-shooters.  I had 
heard  the  tales  of  that  type  of  soldier  before. 
We  knew  that  General  Lawton,  dressed  as  usual 


346 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  his  conspicuous  light-colored  suit  and 
mounted  on  his  big  bay  horse,  was  a half-hour  or 
so  ahead  of  us  over  that  same  road.  We  left  the 
stragglers  to  their  straggling.  As  we  proceeded, 
the  sound  of  the  fighting  became  more  distinct. 
We  could  hear  the  Americans  howl  as  they 
rushed  some  trench  or  breastwork,  the  rattle  of 
volleys  and  the  crack  of  Krags  and  Mausers 
fired  at  will. 

“ Turning  a bend  in  the  road,  I regretted  that 
I had  not  brought  my  camera.  I am  a man  of 
peace,  but  I love  the  artillery.  I like  the  infan- 
try and  I like  the  cavalry,  but  the  artillery 
somehow  makes  a special  appeal  to  me.  Around 
that  corner  we  came  upon  a bunch  of  huge 
artillery-horses  standing  by  a caisson.  Just 
beyond  them  was  a 3.2-inch  field-gun  trained 
across  the  river.  The  battery-men  were  scat- 
tered about,  some  idle  and  some  alert  and 
watchful.  The  breech  of  the  gun  was  open  and 
shrapnel  lay  at  hand.  The  scene  and  its  setting 
made  a picture  that  I very  much  wanted.  We 
stopped  for  a little  chat  and  then  pushed  on  to 
the  bridge,  which  was  just  beyond. 

“ We  found  the  entrance  to  the  bridge  guarded 
by  a squad  from  the  Fourteenth  and  stopped  to 
hear  their  story.  They  were  on  the  watch  for 
straggling  Filipinos.  They  pointed  out  a bam- 
boo jungle  some  fifty  rods  away.  From  that 
point  General  Lawton  had  been  fired  upon  as 
he  rode  past.  The  words  were  barely  out  of  the 


WORK  OF  TEE  ARMY  AXD  XAYY  347 

speaker’s  mouth  when,  crack ! crack ! came  the 
tones  of  two  or  three  Mausers.  There  was  a 
general  dropping  and  plunging  for  cover  behind 
the  low  wall  that  bordered  the  road  at  the 
entrance  to  the  bridge.  Eager  hands  clutched 
the  rifles  and  cautious  heads  were  raised  to  look 
over  the  wall  for  a possible  shot  at  the  shooters 
in  the  jungle.  A few  more  shots  came,  a dozen 
or  so  in  all,  but  there  was  no  sign  of  the  hidden 
marksmen.  Five  minutes  later  all  were  as 
unconcerned,  standing  up,  walking  about,  or 
sitting  down,  as  if  there  were  no  such  things  in 
the  world  as  guns  and  bullets.  'SYe  crossed  the 
bridge  and  came  upon  a solitary  sentry  at  the 
other  end.  He  was  a tall,  very  broad-shoul- 
dered chap,  evidently  of  German  blood.  He 
was  as  alert  and  watchful  as  his  position 
required,  but  as  cool  and  as  phlegmatic  as  he 
would  have  been  had  he  been  hunting  rabbits. 
He  called  our  attention  to  an  object  in  a near-by 
field.  It  was  a dead  ‘ nigger.’ 

“Forty  rods  farther  brought  us  to  a well- 
shaded  spot  on  the  bank  of  the  river.  There 
was  no  need  to  ask  what  those  men  were  doing 
there.  The  green  stripe  of  the  hospital  service 
and  the  white  sleeve-band  with  the  red  Geneva 
cross  told  plainly  enough  of  the  field-hospital 
following  the  firing-line.  But  there  had  been 
nothing  for  them  to  do  all  the  morning  and  I 
am  glad  to  say  that  we  saw  them  pack  up  and 
return  to  Bakoor  as  we  passed  on  our  return 


348 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


late  in  tlie  afternoon.  They  then  reported  1 not 
a case  all  day.’  Just  beyond  them  was  that 
awful  stretch  of  oj)en  road  from  whose  terrors 
the  squad  we  had  seen  farther  back  had  turned 
in  apprehension.  A skirmisher  posted  in  a 
thicket  at  the  beginning  of  the  clean  stretch  told 
us  that  everything  had  been  quiet  for  a while 
and  he  ‘reckoned’  that  we  could  get  over  all 
right.  We  did.  There  may  or  may  not  have 
been  Filipinos  covering  the  spot  from  across 
the  river.  If  there  were,  they  evidently  did  not 
think  us  worth  a shot. 

u At  the  other  end  of  the  stretch  there  was  a 
low  breastwork  behind  which  three  soldiers  were 
hugging  the  ground.  They  told  of  a heavy 
firing  there  a half-hour  before  our  arrival,  but 
all  was  quiet  at  that  time.  From  the  Bakoor 
bridge  all  the  way  to  Imus  there  rested  a line 
of  guards.  Every  few  rods  we  came  upon  one, 
two,  three  or  more  soldiers  guarding  the  line 
under  such  protection  as  was  available.  Some 
were  behind  rudely  made  breastworks.  Some 
were  hidden  in  dense  bamboo  thickets.  All  had 
stories  to  tell  of  1 close  calls  ’ and  thrilling  expe- 
riences, which  we  discounted  duly.  We  next 
came  to  the  spot  where  Eldridge  was  killed.  It 
was  an  ugly  corner.  There  was  a sharp  bend  in 
the  road  at  that  point.  Immediately  opposite 
the  bend,  on  the  other  side  of  the  little  river, 
a strong  body  of  Filipinos  had  been  well 
intrenched.  From  that  place  of  concealment 


WORK  OF  THF  ARMY  AND  NAVY  349 


they  had  sent  in  a fire  which  cost  two  or  three 
American  lives  and  sent  a half-dozen  wounded 
Americans  to  the  hospital.  Here  we  met  Cap- 
tain Reilly  of  the  Fifth  Artillery,  in  command 
of  the  battery  engaged  about  Imus.  He  pointed 
out  the  details  of  the  engagement  of  the  previ- 
ous day,  showing  where  one  of  his  3. 2-inch  field- 
guns  had  stood  and  operated  on  trenches  at  less 
than  one  hundred  yards’  range.  The  trees,  leaves 
and  roadside  fence  were  spotted  with  the  marks 
of  Filipino  bullets.  The  same  across  the  stream 
showed  the  marks  of  American  shrapnel  in 
addition  to  bullet-holes. 

“ From  this  point  to  Imus  the  road  was  entirely 
safe,  made  so  by  the  skirmish-line  that  guarded 
it  and  by  the  fact  that  the  advancing  firing-line 
was  driving  the  Filipino  troops  farther  away  to 
the  south  and  southwest.  This  was  shown  by 
the  lessening  of  the  fire  and  its  evident  greater 
distance.  We  entered  Imus  and  went  to  head- 
quarters, only  to  find  that  every  one  from  there 
was  still  out  on  the  line.  We  went  to  the  hos- 
pital to  learn  of  the  casualties  at  that  end. 
Only  one  had  been  reported,  that  of  Lieutenant 
Burgess  of  the  artillery,  shot,  rather  badly, 
near  the  ankle-joint.  We  kept  on  toward  the 
retreating  sounds  of  the  engagement.  A half- 
mile  out  of  the  town  we  met  General  Lawton 
and  his  staff  coming  back.  We  turned  back 
with  them.  It  was  useless  to  go  any  farther. 
When  General  Lawton  rides  back  from  the 


350 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


front,  over  a couple  of  miles  of  the  vilest  kind 
of  muddy  road,  just  to  get  lunch,  there  is  not 
much  for  newspaper  men  to  see.  The  row  was 
practically  over.  We  spent  an  hour  or  two  in 
pleasant  company  and  started  hack. 

“ On  the  edge  of  the  town  we  overtook  the 
marines  on  their  way  to  the  shore.  I am  quite 
sure  that  if  I were  to  see  such  a bunch  of  big, 
strong  men  coming  in  my  direction  with  ‘ malice 
prepense,’  I should  do  just  what  the  Filipinos 
do — run  for  all  that  was  in  me.  I inferred  that 
the  marines  did  not  wholly  relish  the  job  they 
had  been  doing.  They  said  it  was  not  a fight ; 
it  was  very  much  like  hunting  rabbits  in  a land 
of  swamps  and  thicket.  All  was  quiet  on  our 
return.  The  skirmish-line  was  still  on  duty 
along  the  road.  Occasionally  some  of  them 
saw,  or  imagined  that  they  saw,  Filipinos  across 
the  river,  and  blazed  away  at  something  or  at 
nothing.  We  met  further  reinforcements  com- 
ing up,  but  they  were  not  needed  and  were  sent 
back. 

“ The  marines  told  us  that  in  following  up  the 
retreating  Filipinos  they  encountered  many 
whose  apparel  was  clear  evidence  of  their  having 
been  in  the  trenches,  but  they  held  up  their 
hands  and  declared  themselves  amigos.  I have 
said  that  on  our  way  out  we  saw  no  men.  On 
our  return  the  place  was  full  of  them.  They 
had  simply  followed  down  the  western  side  of 
the  river  and  crossed  to  their  homes  after  their 


WORE  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  351 

day  of  fighting  the  Americans.  They,  too,  were 
our  friends,  the  amigos,  the  ‘ benevolently  as- 
similated.’ On  Wednesday  they  were  quiet, 
orderly,  peaceful  and  law-abiding  Filipino- 
Americans.  On  Wednesday  night  they  burned 
Paranaque,  a few  miles  north  of  Bakoor.  That 
is  war  in  the  Philippines.  All  this  was  as  near 
to  Manila  as  Elizabeth  is  to  New  York,  and 
some  of  it  was  about  as  far  from  Manila  as 
Newark  is  from  New  York.  It  was  within  the 
territory  which  has  accepted  American  sover- 
eignty with  reported  avidity.  Three  months 
ago  it  was  officially  reported  that  the  Filipino 
force  on  the  south  line  had  been  wholly  scattered 
and  broken.  There  seems  to  be  a little  ‘life  in 
the  old  dog  yet.’  On  Tuesday  night  there  was 
another  threatened  uprising  in  Manila  itself. 
Again  the  guards  were  doubled  and  the  author- 
ities were  on  the  alert.  Provost  Marshal  Colonel 
Williston  spent  the  night  in  going  about  the  city, 
watching,  studying  and  directing. 

“ A local  paper  on  Thursday  morning  prints 
an  editorial  headed  ‘ On  a Volcano.’  It  makes 
the  following  statements : ‘ There  has  not  been 
an  hour  since  February  4 that  this  city  has  not, 
figuratively  speaking,  been  nestling  over  a vol- 
cano. . o . One  hour  of  neglect  in  the  precau- 
tions established  and  rigidly  maintained,  and 
there  would  be  such  an  eruption  here  as  would 
shake  the  city  from  its  foundation  and  drench 
the  ruins  with  the  blood  of  foreigners.’  This  is 


352 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


a somewhat  overdrawn  statement,  but  there  is  a 
thread  of  truth  in  it.” 

In  the  following  article  I essayed  brief 
sketches  of  the  personality  of  some  of  our  mili- 
tary leaders  with  whom  my  work  brought  me 
into  more  or  less  of  personal  contact : 

“Manila,  December  24,  1899. 

“ A general  officer  is  a General.  The  officers 
of  the  army  are  those  of  the  line  and  those  of 
the  staff.  The  staff  does  the  business  and  the 
line  does  the  fighting.  In  the  line  three  groups 
occur — general  officers,  field  officers  and  line 
officers.  Below  the  last,  and  not  exactly  to  be 
included,  are  the  non-commissioned  officers — 
the  sergeants  and  the  corporals.  General 
officers  are  those  of  any  grade  entitled  to  wear 
a star  or  two.  Field  officers  include  colonels, 
lieutenant-colonels  and  majors*  Line  officers 
include  captains  and  first  and  second  lieutenants. 

“ A certain  personal  interest  always  attaches 
to  leaders.  Yet  personalities  are  always  a most 
difficult  topic  to  handle.  All  men  are  open  to 
both  praise  and  censure.  One  may  comment, 
dispassionately  or  otherwise,  upon  the  work 
done  by  some  one  of  high  rank  or  position,  yet 
be  charitably  loath  to  touch  upon  his  personal 
idiosyncrasies.  The  man  may  be  of  a peevish, 
irritable,  pompous,  conceited,  or  any  other  kind 
of  disagreeable  temperament.  One  does  not 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  353 


like  to  post  such  little  human  weaknesses  before 
the  reading  public.  It  is  much  pleasanter  to 
say  nice  things  about  people  than  it  is  to  tell  the 
other  kind,  even  though  they  be  true.  Let  me 
essay  a few  thumb-nail  sketches  of  these  military 
leaders  in  the  Philippines. 

“ General  Otis  is  one  whose  face  is  entirely 
familiar  from  many  pictures,  some  honest  and 
some  caricatures.  The  shaven  chin  with  the  un- 
graceful side-beard  framing  it  and  the  somewhat 
heavy  cast  of  countenance  are  well  known. 
Much  has  been  written  about  the  man.  Some 
of  it  is  true,  some  wholly  false.  I read  a letter 
recently,  alleged  to  have  been  written  by  a local 
correspondent,  in  which  General  Otis  was  pic- 
tured as  a man  of  quite  elegant  leisure  and  a 
tendency  to  enjoy  it.  The  writer  told  of  the 
general’s  life  in  a palace  and  implied  that  his 
principal  business  was  to  ride  in  a comfortable 
carriage  .and  to  ‘ fare  sumptuously  every  day.’ 
He  does  live  in  what  passes  for  a ‘palace’  in 
this  region;  he  does  ride  in  a carriage;  and  I 
hope  he  fares  sumptuously.  I am  no  warm 
admirer  of  General  Otis.  His  methods  of  work- 
ing seem  to  me,  as  a business  man,  most 
unbusinesslike.  But  work  he  does,  day  in  and 
day  out  and  far  into  the  night,  indefatigably, 
persistently  and  conscientiously.  He  is  the 
hardest  worker  on  the  islands.  In  that,  it  seems 
to  me,  lies  his  greatest  error.  He  wastes  endless 
time  and  strength  in  the  doing  and  supervision 


354 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  petty  details.  His  work  should  be  adminis- 
trative, executive,  that  of  direction,  plan  and 
arrangement— broad,  not  narrow.  He  lives  in  a 
valley  and  works  with  a microscope,  while  his 
proper  place  is  on  a hilltop  with  a spy-glass. 
Some  say  he  is  in  both  places,  using  both  instru- 
ments. That  is  not  in  human  nature.  His 
endurance  is  wonderful.  He  has  been  shot 
through  the  head  and  suffers  from  loss  of  sleep. 
No  criticism  rests  upon  the  amount  of  work  he 
does,  whatever  may  rest  upon  the  kind  of  work 
and  its  results.  He  does  enough  work  to  kill 
most  men. 

“In  an  office  adjoining  that  of  General  Otis 
sits  General  Schwan,  the  chief  of  staff,  one  of 
the  ablest  and  most  competent  men  in  the  ser- 
vice. Loyal  to  his  chief  and  faithful  in  his 
work,  he  puts  in  almost  as  many  hours  a day  as 
does  General  Otis.  He  is  a tall  man  of  rather 
gaunt  frame — a man  of  a clear  and  well-stored 
mind,  a ready  and  pleasant  talker,  courteous  in 
manner,  with  the  direct  straightforwardness  of 
one  who  has  seen  many  years  of  military  life. 
He  is  a German  by  birth,  enlisting  as  a very 
young  man  in  the  American  army.  He  has 
risen  steadily,  step  by  step,  through  his  own 
personal  worth  and  merit.  He  served  with  dis- 
tinction in  the  campaign  in  Porto  Rico  and 
commanded  a small  but  successful  expedition 
in  the  Philippines  early  in  October.  His  best 
work  here  has  been  done  in  his  office  in  the 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AXE  NAVY  355 


ayuntamiento,  where  the  American  public  does 
not  see  it  and  does  not  know  about  it. 

“ The  ranking  officer  in  the  field  is  General 
MacArthur.  He,  too,  is  a staff  man  in  the  regu- 
lars, and,  like  General  Schwan,  in  the  adjutant- 
general’s  department.  He  is  a man  of  strong 
and  sturdy  figure,  which  a less  active  life 
would  probably  develop  into  rotundity.  He 
enlisted  in  the  Twenty-fourth  Wisconsin  in 
1862,  serving  as  first  lieutenant  and  battalion 
adjutant.  He  was  mustered  out  as  lieutenant- 
colonel  of  his  regiment  in  June,  1865,  and 
entered  the  regular  service  as  second  lieutenant 
in  the  Seventeenth  Infantry  in  February,  1866. 
He  was  transferred  to  the  staff  as  major  in  1889, 
was  appointed  brigadier-general  of  volunteers 
in  May,  1898,  and  made  major-general  in 
August  of  the  same  year.  General  MacArthur 
is  a man  of  wide  and  thoughtful  reading  and  is 
unusually  well  read  in  military  matters.  In 
work  of  the  kind  so  well  done  by  Lawton  and 
Young — the  rapid  movement,  the  brilliant  dash, 
the  quick  sweep  through  a hostile  country — Gen- 
eral MacArthur  would  probably  be  no  rival  for 
such  men.  In  efficient  strategical  movement  of 
an  army  corps  or  a division  there  are  probably 
few  men  in  the  army  who  could  excel  him.  He 
is  a man  of  thoughtful  habit,  who  studies  and 
plans.  Some  think  him  slow,  but  if  left  to  him- 
self he  would  rarely  have  to  do  his  work  a sec- 
ond time.  He  is  a gentleman  both  in  manner 


356 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  costume,  courteous  and  somewhat  formal, 
not  readily  approachable  by  strangers  and  apt 
to  be  unpopular  with  the  ill-bred,  who  set  him. 
down  as  being  4 stuck  up.’ 

“ Taking  the  brigadiers  as  they  stand  in  their 
rank  in  the  regular  army,  the  list  would  run  as 
follows : Hughes,  Bates,  Hall,  Young,  Wheaton, 
Kobbe,  Bell.  Three  are  here  appointed  from 
civil  life:  Wheeler, Grant  and  Smith.  Another 
civilian  appointee,  Funston,  is  on  his  way.  Of 
General  Lawton  I shall  say  nothing.  All  the 
world  has  read  the  obituaries  of  that  gallant  offi- 
cer, whose  life  was  lost  in  a mere  skirmish  with 
the  little  brown  men  of  Luzon.  He  deserved  a 
nobler  death  in  a nobler  cause.  He,  too,  was 
from  the  staff,  the  inspector-general’s  depart- 
ment, and  was  the  last  of  the  staff  men  on  the 
list  of  general  officers  here  except  the  next  in 
relative  rank  in  the  regular  army,  General 
Hughes. 

“ General  Hughes,  ranking,  as  did  Lawton,  as 
colonel  in  the  inspector-general’s  department, 
has  been  winning  laurels  as  a soldier  in  Panay. 
He  is  military  governor  of  his  district,  and  now 
that  troops  have  been  furnished  him  and  the 
season  has  come  when  army  movement  has  be- 
come possible,  he  has  scattered  his  opponents 
and  is  proceeding  with  the  work  of  garrisoning 
his  district.  His  troubles  are  not  over,  but 
they  are  being  simplified.  In  the  prize-ring 
General  Hughes  would  be  classed  as  a ‘light- 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  357 


weight.’  His  strength  lies  more  in  his  head 
than  in  his  body. 

“ The  second  in  relative  rank  is  General  Bates, 
of  whose  achievements  I have  already  given 
some  account.  Some  rather  severe  criticism 
has  been  passed  upon  his  work  in  effecting  a 
treaty,  a few  months  ago,  with  the  sultan  of 
Sulu.  This  criticism  is  quite  unwarranted. 
General  Bates  had  a certain  work  to  do,  with 
generally  outlined  instructions.  His  mission 
was  admirably  accomplished,  so  far  as  his  per- 
sonal work  is  concerned.  The  principle  involved 
is  a matter  of  opinion.  One  thing  is  wholly 
certain : he  deeply  impressed  the  people  of  that 
southern  department  by  the  justice  that  he 
manifested,  the  tact  that  he  displayed  and  the 
fairness  and  courtesy  of  his  attitude  toward  all 
in  that  section.  Part  of  his  success  was  due  to 
a striking  personality.  He  is  a tall  and  slightly 
stooping  man  who,  in  a black  frock-coat  instead 
of  a uniform,  might  easily  be  taken  for  a profes- 
sional man,  a student.  Very  heavy  and  bushy 
eyebrows  overhang  piercing  brown  eyes,  which 
can  flash  or  twinkle,  according  to  the  situation. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  his  personality  carries 
great  weight  with  those  with  whom  he  is 
appointed  to  deal.  Fortunately,  this  is  well 
backed  up  by  clear  judgment  and  unflinching- 
honesty. 

“ General  Hall  is  unique  in  his  position  here. 
Among  the  general  officers  serving  in  the 


358 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Philippines  who  belong  to  the  regular  army,  he 
is  the  only  one,  except  the  newly  appointed  Bell, 
that  is  a graduate  of  West  Point.  He  entered 
that  institution  in  1855  and  served  through  the 
Civil  War  in  regiments  of  the  regular  army. 
He  is  an  excellent  type  of  the  soldier-man  in 
his  personal  appearance.  He  is  of  medium 
height,  well  and  cleanly  built,  square-shouldered 
and  flat-backed,  a fine  face,  with  white  mus- 
tache and  short  imperial.  His  clothes  corre- 
spond to  his  build,  well  fitted  and  always  in 
order,  kept  as  a soldier  is  expected  always  to 
keep  his  equipment.  He  is  of  dignified  and 
somewhat  reserved  bearing,  improves  steadily 
upon  increasing  acquaintance,  and  after  one 
has  gotten  to  know  him  turns  out  to  be  of  the 
kind  whom  one  is  very  glad  to  know. 

“ General  Young  is  a cavalryman  who  needs 
a horse  that  is  a weight-carrier.  He  is  a tall, 
heavily  built  man  of  two  hundred  and  forty 
pounds  of  normal  weight.  His  endurance  on 
his  long  trip  through  the  wilds  of  northern 
Luzon  has  been  marvelous.  He  has  broken 
down  men  and  horses,  and  pushed  on,  himself, 
any  way  he  could  get  along — in  the  saddle,  on 
foot  or  sitting  on  the  floor  of  a clumsy  and 
springless  hill-cart.  His  men  dropped  out  and 
his  native  scouts  fell  behind ; but  Young  kept 
on  until  he  got  about  as  far  as  any  one  could  go. 
When  he  got  there  his  command  had  dwindled 
to  a squad.  He  is  another  type  of  soldier 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NA  VY  359 

than  those  described.  A big,  fine-looking  man 
with  a frank,  breezy  manner,  he  says  what  he 
thinks,  with  little  regard  to  his  audience— a 
bluff,  open-hearted,  free-handed  man.  He,  too, 
is  a Civil  War  veteran.  He  enlisted  as  private 
in  the  same  regiment  as  General  Hughes— the 
Twelfth  Pennsylvania.  He  came  out  as  colonel 
and  brevet  brigadier-general.  He  then  entered 
the  regular  army  as  second  lieutenant  and  rose 
by  gradations  to  the  colonelcy  of  the  Third  Cav- 
alry and  now  to  a brigadier-generalship. 

“We  have  another  fighting  soldier-man  in 
General  Wheaton,  one  of  the  most  deservedly 
popular  men  in  the  islands.  He  is  tall,  fine- 
looking,  heavily  bearded.  He  is  approaching 
the  time  of  his  retirement  and  does  not  stand 
quite  as  straight  up  and  down  as  he  did  a few 
years  ago.  He  hunts  no  newspaper  reputation 
and  gets  less  of  public  notice  than  he  deserves, 
yet  he  is  the  friend  of  the  newspaper  men  and 
his  quarters  are  always  open  to  them  in  most 
cordial  hospitality.  He  is  a man  of  strong 
opinions  and  goes  at  his  points  in  conversation 
as  he  goes  at  his  opponents  in  the  field — directly 
and  vigorously.  Yet  he  is  not  intolerant.  I 
have  had  a tilt  or  two  with  him  myself.  He  is 
a man  who  thinks  strongly  and  fights  as  he 
thinks.  He  is  essentially  the  man  of  the  field 
rather  than  of  the  office.  He  thinks  his  place 
is  at  the  head  of  his  troops,  and  when  his  power- 
ful voice  rings  out,  ‘ Men,  follow  me  in  a 


360 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


charge ! ’ every  blue  flannel  shirt,  whether  it  be 
on  a man’s  back  or  hanging  on  a bush,  starts  up 
and  follows  wherever  Wheaton  may  go. 

“ General  KobM  is  one  of  the  many  good  men 
in  the  army  that  are  but  little  known  outside  of 
army  circles.  It  takes  a long  time  to  get  rank 
in  the  artillery,  and  after  twenty-seven  years  in 
that  arm,  following  ten  years  in  the  infantry, 
he  is  still  a major.  His  present  star  is  a just 
recognition  of  valuable  service  rendered  here  in 
the  Philippines.  He  is  a man  of  sound  and 
ripened  judgment,  quiet  and  rather  retiring  in 
manner,  cool,  clear  and  level-headed  in  action. 
He  talks  little,  but  says  something  when  he 
talks.  He  is  spare  of  figure  and  a little  above 
medium  height.  His  face  is  serious  and  thought- 
ful, but  lights  up  with  a pleasant  smile  in  con- 
versation. 

“ Compared  with  these  whom  I have  men- 
tioned General  Bell  is  something  of  an  infant, 
though  a very  sturdy  one.  At  the  opening  of 
1899,  J.  Franklin  Bell  was  in  the  regular  service, 
a first  lieutenant  in  the  Seventh  Cavalry.  At 
its  close  he  wears  the  star  of  a brigadier-general 
of  volunteers.  He  has  earned  it.  At  first  I 
thought  him  rather  theatrical,  given  to  gallery 
plays.  I now  feel  that  I was  wrong.  Scouting- 
trips  are  the  pyrotechnics  of  warfare,  but  they 
are  essential.  They  are  spectacular,  but  they 
are  important  and  often  vital.  The  more 
efficiently  they  are  executed  the  more  spectacu- 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NA  VY  361 


lar  they  become.  Hence  Bell  seemed  endlessly 
spectacular.  Bell  and  the  Thirty-sixth  were 
everywhere,  but  that  is  only  evidence  that  they 
were  doing  their  work.  Bell  is  hardly  yet  in 
the  prime  of  his  life,  a robust,  vigorous,  ener- 
getic man,  laudably  ambitious  in  his  work.  He 
is  yet  untried  as  a brigade  commander,  but  all 
who  know  him  hope  for  and  believe  in  his 
success. 

“ Of  these  men,  Otis,  Schwan,  Hughes,  Bates, 
Hall,  Young,  Wheaton  and  Kobbe— all  except- 
ing Bell— are  veterans  of  the  Civil  War.  Of 
the  civil  appointees,  Wheeler,  Grant  and  Smith, 
I have  no  room  to  speak  here.  Wheeler  and 
Grant  need  no  introduction  or  description. 
Their  work  in  the  Philippines  has  been  minor 
and  relatively  unimportant.  General  Smith 
came  out  as  colonel  of  the  First  Californias,  but 
has  stayed  to  do  most  creditable  work  as 
administrator  in  the  island  of  Negros.  I wonder 
what  they  all  really  think  about  this  thing. 
Their  honestly  expressed  opinions  would  be 
valuable  and  interesting.” 


My  tribute  to  the  work  of  the  navy  was  paid 
in  the  following  article.  Its  major  fault  lies  in 
its  failure  to  make  fitting  individual  mention  of 
all  the  scores  of  gallant  gentlemen,  from  Admiral 
Watson  downward,  who  did  so  efficiently  the 
work  which  they  had  to  do.  It  is  faulty  also  in 
its  scant  attention  to  the  gentlemen  of  the  ma- 


362 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


vine  corps,  whose  work  in  Cuba,  in  the  Philip- 
pines and  in  China  has  done  something  toward 
giving  them  that  place  in  the  public  estimation 
to  which  they  are  so  justly  entitled. 

“ Manila,  December  22,  1899. 

“ The  operations  of  the  army  in  the  Philip- 
pines during  the  year  that  is  past  have  some- 
what overshadowed  those  of  the  navy;  but 
there  is  a navy  here  and  its  presence  and  its 
work  have  been  indispensable  in  the  establish- 
ment of  American  supremacy  in  the  islands. 
A comparatively  small  amount  of  anything  that 
could  be  called  fighting  has  been  done,  but  there 
have  been  no  tales  of  the  building  of  birds’  nests 
in  the  throats  of  the  navy’s  guns. 

“ In  some  instances  the  navy  has  operated  as 
a serviceable  attendant  upon  the  operations  of 
the  land  forces.  In  other  instances  there  has 
been  a more  prominent  cooperation.  In  a few 
cases  the  navy  has  acted  alone.  A blockade, 
only  partly  effective,  has  been  maintained. 
There  has  been  no  cordon  of  alert  and  watchful 
ships  drawn  around  the  islands,  as  there  was  in 
the  case  of  Cuba.  That  would  be  a process 
which  is  practically  out  of  the  question. 
Probably  not  less  than  one  hundred  vessels 
would  be  required  for  an  absolutely  effective 
blockade  around  the  Philippines  and  for  the 
stoppage  of  all  coastwise  and  inter-island  com- 
munication. 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  363 


“ The  huge  Oregon  does  some  cruising  and, 
when  occasion  offers,  presents  her  majestic  bulk 
and  ominous  muzzles  along  the  coast  in  the 
vicinity  of  army  operations  on  land,  thus  lend- 
ing a moral  and,  if  needed,  a very  material  sup- 
port to  the  land  forces.  I saw  her  a few  weeks 
ago  at  Iloilo,  a very  emphatic  object-lesson  to 
the  people  of  that  vicinity.  A few  days  ago  she 
was  acting  in  cooperation  with  General  Young 
on  his  expedition  up  the  west  coast  of  Luzon  to 
Vigan.  Philippine  waters  are  not  the  safest 
possible  cruising-grounds  for  a boat  of  her  size, 
but  there  is  no  question  that  her  appearance 
makes  an  impression  upon  all  natives  who  get 
a look  at  her. 

“ The  most  extensive  distinctly  naval  engage- 
ment of  recent  months  was  that  of  Subig  Bay 
on  September  23.  It  was  a somewhat  formida- 
ble and  expensive  operation  for  a seemingly 
small  work.  It  was  known  that  somewhere  on 
the  western  coast  of  Luzon  the  insurgents  (now 
known  as  ‘bandits’)  were  in  possession  of  four 
modern  6-inch  Krupp  guns  which  the  Spaniards 
were  said  to  have  left  behind  them  on  Isla 
Grande,  at  the  opening  to  Subig  Bay.  It  was 
reported  that  the  Spaniards  had  taken  away  the 
breech-blocks  and  dropped  them  overboard  in 
deep  water.  Word  came  that  one  of  those  guns 
had  been  taken  to  the  mainland  by  the  Filipinos, 
who  had  mounted  it  and  fitted  a new  breech- 
block. It  was  a menace  of  some  consideration, 


364 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


though  nothing  very  serious  in  the  hands  of 
people  who  can  do  no  better  shooting  than  can 
the  Filipinos.  But  it  was  thought  desirable  to 
break  up  the  establishment,  and  the  Monterey , 
Charleston , Concord  and  Zafiro  were  sent  in  for 
the  job. 

“ For  three  or  four  hours  the  ships  made  vari- 
ous-sized holes  in  the  air  of  Subig  Bay,  the 
Monterey  making  seventeen  12-inch  and  twenty- 
one  10-inch  ones  with  her  big  guns;  while  she 
and  the  rest  pounded  away  with  an  assortment 
of  sizes  down  to  the  Zafiro"1  s one-pounder.  The 
result  was  inevitable.  One  shell  from  the  shore 
gun,  well  aimed  by  an  accident  probably,  came 
quite  near  to  scoring  on  the  Monterey.  A force 
of  one  hundred  and  eighty  blue-jackets  and 
seventy  marines  was  landed  under  cover  of  the 
fire  of  the  ships,  and  though  they  were  also  under 
a rifle-fire  from  the  enemy  on  shore,  the  affair 
was  soon  over.  The  gun,  a valuable  piece  of 
twenty-five  feet  in  length,  was  blown  up  with 
guncotton,  and  the  force  returned  to  the  ships 
Avith  a loss  of  but  one  man  wounded.  Their 
reception  had  been  a warm  one,  the  Filipinos 
showing  a notable  degree  of  pluck.  That  the 
American  loss  was  so  small  is  due  to  the  same 
cause  that  accounts  for  the  small  casualties  in 
all  engagements  here : the  Filipinos  shoot  often 
enough,  but  they  don’t  shoot  straight ; they  fire 
high  and  their  shots  are  wasted. 

“On  October  2 a detachment  of  small  gun- 


WORK  OF  THE  ARMY  ANT)  NAVY  365 


boats  was  sent  in  to  smash  up  the  town  of  Orani 
and  recover  the  gunboat  Urdaneta,  which  the 
Filipinos  had  captured  at  that  place.  This  was 
the  boat  commanded  by  Lieutenant  Wood,  who 
was  killed,  while  his  crew  were  taken  prisoners. 
Some  of  them  have  since  come  in,  released 
through  the  dispersion  of  the  Filipino  army  in 
the  northern  provinces.  They  encountered  lit- 
tle resistance  in  recovering  what  was  left  of  the 
Urdaneta  and  little  in  an  investment  and  occu- 
pation of  the  town,  which  had  been  practically 
deserted  by  its  inhabitants.  The  town  appears 
to  have  suffered  some  damage  during  the 
engagement. 

“ Some  important  work  was  also  done  by  the 
Petrel  and  the  Callao  at  the  time  of  the  move- 
ment on  the  south  line  on  October  8.  Some  of 
the  operations  were  near  the  coast  and  it  was 
possible  for  these  light-draft  boats  to  lie  suffi- 
ciently near  to  the  coast  to  help  in  clearing  the 
country  with  their  small  guns.  Special  credit 
is  due  upon  that  occasion  to  the  marines  who 
landed,  three  hundred  strong,  under  Colonel 
Elliott  and  most  efficiently  cooperated  with  the 
troops  under  command  of  General  Schwan. 
Their  percentage  of  losses  was  very  much 
greater  than  that  of  the  military  arm  and  this 
too  little  known  and  too  little  appreciated 
branch  of  the  service  certainly  met  hot  resis- 
tance and  did  good  work  in  the  fight  at  Novaleta, 
a town  which,  it  is  said,  the  Spaniards  were 


366 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


never  able  to  conquer  in  any  of  their  operations. 
This  was  the  affair  which  General  Otis  disposed 
of  in  an  official  despatch  by  the  brief  statement 
that  the  ‘navy  vessels  and  marines  at  Cavite 
made  a demonstration  on  Novaleta  yesterday.’ 
The  ‘demonstration’  cost  the  marines  one 
man  killed,  two  officers  and  eight  men  wounded, 
and  fifty  heat  prostrations.  That  is  quite  up  to 
the  average  casualty  list  in  Filipino  ‘battles’ 
and  the  work  of  the  marines  on  that  day  is 
deserving  of  far  more  credit  than  General  Otis 
accords  it  in  reporting  it  as  only  a ‘demon- 
stration.’ 

“ The  navy  also  covered  the  landing  of  Gen- 
eral Wheaton’s  troops  at  the  head  of  Lingayen 
Bay  on  November  7.  The  Bennington , Prince- 
ton, Helena , Manila , Callao  and  Samar  shelled  the 
coast  for  an  hour  or  so  prior  to  the  disembarking 
of  the  troops,  the  Thirteenth  and  the  Thirty- 
third.  Here,  as  at  the  landing  of  the  blue-jackets 
and  marines  at  Subig,  the  Filipinos  stuck  to  their 
posts  in  spite  of  the  shelling  and  put  up  some 
resistance  to  the  landing  troops.  The  boats  of 
this  little  squadron  were  also  of  endless  service 
as  despatch-boats  between  Manila  and  this  point 
of  occupation.  At  that  time  the  water  route 
was  the  only  means  of  communication  with 
headquarters.  That  condition  obtained  until, 
some  days  later,  a juncture  was  effected  at 
Dagupan  with  the  forces  under  General  Mac- 
Arthur. 


WORK  OF  TEE  ARMY  AND  NAVY  3G7 


“ I do  not  care  to  comment  on  the  loss  of  the 
Charleston.  A few  clouds  on  the  horizon  por- 
tend a possible  scandal.  There  appears  to  be  a 
disposition  on  the  part  of  the  crew  to  enter 
rather  serious  charges  against  the  officers.  The 
determination  of  the  cause  of  the  disaster  and 
the  responsibility  for  it  rests  with  the  board  of 
inquiry  which,  of  course,  will  be  established. 
Testimony  will  be  taken  from  both  officers  and 
men.  It  may  easily  be  that  the  loss  would  have 
occurred  in  any  case,  even  granting  a founda- 
tion for  the  complaints  of  the  men.  The  vessel 
was  cruising  in  badly  surveyed  waters  and  was 
less  fortunate  than  others  which  have  found 
themselves  in  dangerous  positions.  The  Oregon 
had  a close  shave  not  long  ago.  The  Manila 
spent  some  days  aground  on  a reef  in  the  Sibutu 
Channel  in  September  and  the  Yorktown  took 
a little  scrape  on  the  reefs  of  Palawan  in 
November.  There  is  a big  job  ahead  for  the 
Department  of  Coast  Survey  in  charting  all  the 
thousands  of  square  miles  of  Philippine  waters. 
There  are  charts,  but  they  are  neither  adequate 
nor  wholly  reliable. 

“ Small  gunboats  of  the  navy  have  done  an 
extensive  work  in  preventing  inter-island  trade 
carried  on  by  the  small  sailing-vessels  of  the 
native  people.  The  real  advantages  and  benefits 
of  this  stoppage  of  local  traffic  and  the  real 
wisdom  of  interfering  with  it  may  be  open  to 
doubt  and  argument.  But  the  order  being 


368 


THE  PHILIPPIXES 


issued  interdicting  such  trade,  the  work  of  these 
little  vessels  has  been  excellent.  That  it  has 
not  been  entirely  effective  is  due  to  the  limited 
number  of  them  available  for  the  work.  Their 
effectiveness  is,  perhaps,  best  proven  by  the 
condition  of  real  distress  which  has  existed  and 
which  still  exists  in  some  of  the  central  islands 
and  in  the  southern  provinces  of  Luzon.  The 
questionable  point  would  be  as  to  the  wisdom 
of  beginning  an  experience  with  a new  people 
by  subjecting  them  to  hardships  with  no  good 
and  sufficient  reason  for  doing  so.  But  no  fault 
lies  with  the  navy  in  the  matter.  Their  work 
was  to  obey  orders,  and  that  they  have  done 
with  commendable  judgment  and  surprising  effi- 
ciency, considering  the  number  of  vessels  placed 
at  their  disposal. 

“ The  work  of  the  navy  in  the  Sulu  waters  is 
worthy  of  notable  credit.  Captain  Very  of  the 
Castine  watched  the  important  port  of  Zam- 
boanga for  several  months  as  a cat  watches  a 
rat-hole.  On  shore  there  was  an  insurgent 
organization  of  five  or  six  hundred  men  in  camp, 
some  armed  with  rifles.  The  outfit  had  twenty- 
five  or  thirty  Nordenfeldt  and  rapid-fire  guns, 
with  ammunition,  taken  from  Spanish  gun- 
boats prior  to  their  being  gathered  up  by  the 
Americans,  who  had  purchased  them.  During 
those  seven  months  Very  and  his  men  were  sel- 
dom ashore.  Seven  months  on  board  a ship  in 
southern  waters  is  no  pleasant  experience. 


WORK  OF  TEE  ARM T AXE  XAYY  369 


“The  climax  of  Captain  Very’s  work  came 
peculiarly.  Orders  for  his  relief  by  the  Manila 
had  come.  The  Manila  was  on  the  ground, 
rushed  down  after  convoying  General  Wheaton’s 
expedition  to  Lingayen  Bay.  The  Castine  was 
ready  and  about  to  start  northward  when  Senor 
Midel  appeared  with  his  importunity  for  the 
American  occupation  of  the  long-watched  place. 
The  Manila  was  despatched  to  Jolo  for  a mili- 
tary force  to  occupy  the  town  of  Zamboanga, 
and  upon  their  arrival  the  place  was  surrendered 
to  the  Americans  without  a struggle.  General 
Otis  was  irritated  at  the  course  taken  by  Cap- 
tain Very  and  querulously  intimated  that  he 
had  been  embarrassed  by  an  unwarrantedly 
premature  step  on  the  part  of  the  navy.  The 
place  is  in  the  department  of  General  Bates. 
At  the  time  of  my  late  visit  to  Zamboanga,  Gen- 
eral Bates  told  me,  in  terms  of  the  highest 
commendation,  of  his  cordial  approval  and 
indorsement  of  Captain  Very’s  course  and 
action,  not  only  in  the  matter  of  the  occupation, 
but  in  all  that  had  preceded  it  during  those 
many  and  tedious  months.  The  work  of  both 
Captain  Sperry  of  the  Yorlctown  and  Captain 
Nazro  of  the  Manila  in  those  southern  waters 
is  to  be  mentioned  in  terms  of  emphatic  praise 
and  approval.  Trouble  was  to  be  had  for 
the  asking.  Tact  and  sound  judgment  were 
required  for  its  averting.  I feel  highly  hon- 
ored indeed,  when  I am  made  the  guest  in 


370 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


quarters  and  at  table  of  men  who,  like  Bates 
and  Sperry  and  Very  and  Nazro,  have  served 
their  country  by  exercising  a wisdom  and  a tact 
that  has  kept  that  country  thus  far  from  war 
with  a people  to  whom  war  is  something  of  a 
pleasant  pastime.  To  this  quartet  and  to  the 
officers  of  the  Twenty-third  United  States  Infan- 
try is  due  the  addition  to  the  United  States  of 
the  territory  between  the  fifth  and  ninth  paral- 
lels of  latitude  without  a blow  and  without  the 
loss  of  a single  life.  It  is  an  honorable  record 
and  its  maintenance  is  something  to  be  hoped 
for. 

“In  treating  of  water  operations  here  some 
note  should  be  made  of  the  work  of  a flotilla 
which  does  not  belong  to  the  navy.  It  consists 
of  a little  collection  of  gunboats  like  the  Napin- 
dan  and  the  Laguna  de  Bag.  They  are  officered 
by  army  men  and  ply  upon  the  waters  of  lakes 
and  rivers.  An  affair  at  the  town  of  Paete  led 
to  the  court-martialing  of  a couple  of  lieuten- 
ants, but,  barring  one  or  two  such  incidents,  the 
work  of  this  lake  and  river  flotilla  has  been 
admirable.” 


XVIII 


THE  PRESENT 

Official  reports — Change  in  the  situation— Comparison  of 
incidents  of  different  dates— Reports  of  correspondents — 
A serious  factor— Unfortunate  attitude  of  American  sol- 
diery. 

AGAIN  and  again,  during  the  eighteen  months 
■T\-  of  strife  in  the  Philippines,  the  reading 
public  has  been  officially  assured  that  the  trouble 
in  the  islands  would  be  of  brief  duration,  that  it 
would  be  over  in  variously  specified  periods 
marked  by  days,  weeks  or  months.  Its  ending 
is  now  officially  asserted  as  the  inevitable  result 
of  Filipino  despair  in  the  event  of  Republican 
success  in  the  Presidential  campaign  of  1900. 
The  term  “ despair  ” is  not  used ; we  are  told 
that  the  u Filipinos  will  realize  the  hopelessness 
of  further  resistance.”  At  the  same  time,  it  is 
asserted  that  the  “war  is  over”  and  that  such 
disturbances  as  have  occurred  within  recent 
months  are  but  the  work  of  “bandits”  and 
“ robber  bands.” 

There  has  been  a marked  change  in  the  mili- 
tary situation  on  the  islands  during  the  twelve 
months  preceding  this  election ; but  the  change 

371 


372 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


has  been  one  of  scope  rather  than  of  character. 
The  arrival  of  large  bodies  of  reinforcements 
during  the  autumn  of  1899  has  effected  a wide 
extension  of  the  territory  occupied  by  American 
troops.  With  two  and  a half  times  the  number 
of  soldiers  that  Spain  ever  had  on  the  islands  at 
any  one  time,  — Spain’s  strongest  force  having 
been  twenty-seven  thousand  in  the  days  of  Pola- 
vieja, — there  has  been  a more  general  and  more 
effective  military  occupation  than  was  ever  the 
experience  of  Spanish  authority.  Upon  one 
side  it  is  asserted  that  this  military  extension 
constitutes  a gratifying  success ; upon  the  other 
it  is  charged  that  it  is  a marked  failure,  in  that 
it  has  engendered  and  stimulated  feelings  of 
hatred  and  bitterness,  the  fruitful  seed  of 
troubles  to  come.  How  much  or  how  little  the 
military  situation  has  changed  within  recent 
months  is  indicated  by  the  following  comments 
bearing  different  dates.  I take  the  following 
from  a letter  of  my  own : 

“Manila,  January  11,  1900. 

“ From  such  copies  of  the  local  newspapers  as 
happen  to  lie  on  my  table  at  the  moment,  I cull 
the  following  in  illustration  of  the  many  similar 
incidents  that  may  be  looked  for  during  the 
coming  days  in  the  Philippines : 

“Murcia,  January  5,  1900. 

“The  regular  train,  No.  1,  which  left  Manila  at 
nine  o’clock  this  morning,  wras  laid  over  here  this  after- 


THE  PRESENT 


373 


noon  on  account  of  the  engine  giving  out.  Conse- 
quently an  engine  was  telegraphed  for  from  Bautista 
to  come  down  and  take  up  the  train. 

“ About  five  miles  south  of  Bautista  the  engine  ran 
into  two  logs  of  wood  that  were  laid  across  the  track. 

“ Between  Gerona  and  the  Tarlak  bridge  the  train 
ran  into  a big  bunch  of  wire  that  was  evidently  laid 
across  the  track  with  the  intention  of  getting  it 
entangled  in  the  wheels  of  the  engine,  but  as  they 
were  moving  at  a low  rate  of  speed  no  damage  was 
done.  At  Tarlak  the  engine  was  turned  around  and 
started  to  back  down  to  Murcia  and  hitch  on  to  the 
waiting  train.  Some  four  miles  from  this  place  the 
engine  suddenly  left  the  track,  the  engineer  at  ouce 
reversing  the  engine.  Just  theu  about  fifty  insurrectos 
began  to  yell,  and  started  for  the  engine.  The  crew, 
not  being  armed,  did  not  stop  to  investigate,  but 
started  on  a four-mile  race  for  tliis  place.  I Company 
of  the  Ninth  was  immediately  sent  out,  but  was  unable 
to  find  any  insurgents  on  account  of  the  darkness.  An 
investigation  showed  that  the  insurgents  had  relnoved 
a thirty-foot  rail  and  placed  the  same  across  the  track 
near  a bridge.  The  supposition  is  that  they  were  trying 
to  ditch  the  regular  north-bound  train,  and,  had  they 
succeeded  in  their  plans,  the  train  would  have  gone 
into  the  creek,  with  a severe  loss. 

“ Last  Wednesday  a detachment  of  the  Third  Cavalry 
was  despatched  from  San  Fernando  de  la  Union  by 
Colonel  Wessels  to  reconnoiter  the  neighboring  moun- 
tains. The  party  consisted  of  a squad  of  only  ten  or 
twelve  men  under  a sergeant,  and  when  they  had  gone 
a few  miles  into  the  hills  they  were  suddenly  surprised 
by  a mounted  body  of  about  forty  insurgents,  who 
immediately  charged  them. 

“Without  waiting  for  orders,  the  squad  at  once 
sought  safety  in  flight,  seeing  the  futility  of  resistance. 
The  men  scattered  in  all  directions  and  the  sergeant  in 
command  was  the  first  to  reach  camp,  where  he  reported 
to  the  commanding  officer.  The  rest  of  the  men  strag- 
gled in  at  different  times,  and  none  were  injured, 


374 


THE  PIIILirriXES 


though  several  did  not  turn  up  till  next  day.  The 
enemy  captured  three  large  cavalry-horses  and  a rifle. 
Colonel  Wessels  severely  censured  the  sergeant  for  not 
conducting  a more  orderly  retreat,  but  as  yet  nothing 
more  has  been  done  with  him.  He  said  in  explanation 
that  he  thought  it  was  about  time  to  look  for  a better 
place. 

“ Sunday  evening’s  train  brought  to  this  city  the  re- 
mains of  Private  Carter  of  L Company,  Twelfth  United 
States  Infantry,  who  was  murdered  by  a prisoner  that 
he  was  guarding.  The  guard  took  the  prisoner  out  to 
cut  a few  bamboo  poles  for  the  company  camp  and  as 
neither  of  the  men  returned,  a search  was  made,  which 
revealed  the  fact  of  the  murder. 

“ It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  prisoner  took 
advantage  of  the  guard’s  kindness  to  him  and  at  an 
unsuspected  moment  plunged  the  knife  used  for  cut- 
ting bamboo  into  him. 

“ When  found  by  his  comrades,  Private  Carter  was 
horribly  mutilated.  A deep  gash  on  the  head  is  evi- 
dence’that  the  guard  had  not  thought  it  necessary  to 
keep  a particularly  close  watch  on  his  prisoner,  as  the 
wound  without  doubt  was  caused  by  the  blow  that 
felled  him. 

“On  January  3,  while  a squad  of  men  from  Com- 
pany D of  the  Thirty-second  Infantry  were  engaged 
in  repairing  a bridge  on  the  road  between  Dinalupihan 
and  Liana  Hermosa,  the  little  party  was  surprised  by 
a band  of  insurgent  guerrillas.  Being  outnumbered 
more  than  ten  to  one,  there  was  nothing  for  the  Ameri- 
cans to  do  but  retire  as  they  could.  While  the  squad  was 
engaged  with  the  insurgents,  Private  Claude  Pearson 
had  two  fingers  of  his  right  hand  shot  off  and  Private 
Charles  More  was  made  a prisoner  by  the  insurrectos. 

“ On  Friday  morning  the  loss  of  thirty-two  rifles  and 
seven  thousand  rounds  of  ammunition  was  discovered 
in  the  camp  of  the  Ninth  Infantry  at  Tarlak.  The 
guns  were  in  a box  and  stored  in  the  kitchen  of  one 
of  the  companies,  and  in  the  absence  of  the  soldiers  at 
dress-parade  were  loaded  on  a bull  team  by  insurgent 


THE  PRESENT 


375 


agents  and  carried  off.  A bull  team  had  been  stand- 
ing near  by  and  when  the  soldiers  returned  its  absence 
gave  the  clue.  A thorough  scout  of  the  surrounding 
country  was  made  and  a short  distance  from  the  town 
the  empty  box  was  found  with  two  rusty  old  Reming- 
tons inside.  No  trace  of  the  thieves  could  be  found 
and  a hunt  is  still  in  progress.  It  is  thought  that  the 
native  cook,  who  was  the  only  person  about  quarters 
at  the  time,  had  planned  the  robbery  and  given  the 
signal.  The  man  was  formerly  an  insurgent  sergeant. 

“ Bautista,  January  8,  1900. 

“ On  the  afternoon  of  the  6th  instant,  Musician 
Joseph  Crispie  of  Company  A,  Seventeenth  Infantry, 
disappeared  from  his  command  at  this  place,  and  dili- 
gent search  of  the  surrounding  country  failed  to 
produce  any  tidings  of  his  whereabouts  until  this 
morning,  when  his  dead  body  was  found  on  the  river- 
bank  about  a mile  from  the  town.  It  is  a clear  case 
of  murder,  the  body  being  horribly  mutilated,  appa- 
rently with  a bolo.  From  the  appearance  of  the  corpse 
it  is  evident  that  the  dead  man  made  a desperate  fight 
for  life  before  he  succumbed. 

“ The  insurrectos  are  causing  more  trouble  along 
the  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railroad.  On  Tuesday, 
while  the  native  train  was  running  from  Tarlak  to 
Kapas,  it  was  fired  upon.  The  conductor  notified  Con- 
ductor Bon,  who  was  in  charge  of  the  regular  train,  by 
cable,  of  what  had  happened.  The  despatch  was  re- 
ceived at  Tarlak  and  all  made  preparations  to  give  the 
insurrectos  a warm  greeting.  When  nearing  the 
place  designated  in  the  despatch,  Engineer  Benware 
• slowed  the  train  down  and  continued  to  run  at  a low 
speed,  and  reached  Kapas  without  meeting  any  ob- 
structions whatever.  A detachment  of  soldiers  was 
sent  out  to  disperse  the  bolomen  that  were  seen  along 
the  line. 

“ Angeles. 

“ The  outpost  Sunday  night  retreated  near  the  village, 
expecting  an  attack.  Upward  of  three  hundred  native 


376 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


women  left  the  village  *Snnday  and  Monday.  When- 
ever the  native  women  and  amigos  go  away  in  a hurry, 
as  those  of  Angeles  have  done  during  the  past  few 
days,  it  means  an  attack  by  the  insurgents  soon. 

“ The  insurgents  are  becoming  troublesome  along 
the  railroad  on  the  north  line.  Last  Saturday,  about 
midnight,  a band  of  Aggie’s  adherents  attacked  the 
town  of  Mabalakat.  Quite  a number  were  armed  with 
rifles,  the  rest  being  bolomen. 

“ The  boys  of  the  Twenty-fifth  were  not  to  be  caught 
napping,  however,  and  they  gave  the  midnight  ma- 
rauders a decidedly  warm  reception.  Sunday  morn- 
ing, when  the  sun  peeped  over  the  tops  of  the  bamboos 
that  form  a jungle  around  Mabalakat,  several  dead 
insurrectos  were  found.” 

Under  date  of  April  19,  1900,  the  correspon- 
dent of  the  New  York  “Herald”  reported  the 
situation  as  follows : 

I have  endeavored  to  find  out  the  military  situa- 
tion in  Luzon  and  the  southern  islands  as  it  exists 
to-day. 

The  results  obtained  have  been  from  my  own  obser- 
vation in  the  Camarines,  Albay,  Leyte,  Samar,  Min- 
danao, Cavite,  Manila,  Tarlak  and  Pangasinan,  and 
from  reliable  officers  in  Tayabas,  Laguna,  Union,  Uocos, 
Abra  and  other  northern  provinces,  as  well  as  in  Cebu, 
Negros  and  Panay. 

I find  that  the  canvass  hardly  sustains  the  optimistic 
rejmrts  to  be  had  at  headquarters  in  Manila.  In  other 
words,  there  is  still  a good  deal  of  fighting  going  on ; 
there  is  a wide-spread,  almost  general  hatred  of  the 
Americans ; there  are  approximately  twenty  thousand 
rifles  still  in  possession  of  the  Filipinos,  and  there  are 
numberless  forces  of  armed  men  operating  in  many 
districts. 

That  the  insurgent  army,  as  an  organized  force  hold- 
ing definite  limitations  of  territory  and  maintaining  an 


THE  PRESENT 


377 


orderly  and  tangible  formation,  is  broken  and  disrupted, 
there  is  no  doubt.  Instead  of  knowing  that  the  enemy 
holds  certain  to  urns  and  districts  and  that  a fight  is 
necessary  to  possess  those  districts,  our  troops  can  now 
plan  no  movement  or  expedition  with  the  certainty  of 
making  contact  with  an  armed  force. 

Reports  which  tell  of  the  presence  of  large  bodies  of 
armed  Filipinos  in  the  vicinity  of  garrison  towns  fre- 
quently are  brought  in,  but  when  a force  of  Americans 
goes  out  to  find  them  they  are  gone — that  is,  if  the 
American  force  is  a strong  one. 

But  let  a small  body  go  out  and  the  woods  and  hills 
will  be  found  alive  with  riflemen  and  bolomen.  The 
Filipino  method  of  warfare  has  changed  from  their 
old,  defiant  methods  to  a new  and  more  insidious  one, 
that  is  as  much,  if  not  more,  to  be  feared. 

Long  before  Tarlak  was  taken,  Aguinaldo  realized 
that  his  troops  could  not  stand  against  ours.  Even  a 
force  numerically  much  stronger  could  be  driven  at 
will  by  comparatively  small  American  forces.  Soon 
after  this  discovery,  which  he  seems  to  have  been  long- 
in  making,  he  heard  that  the  LTnited  States  was  going  to 
increase  the  Philippine  army  to  about  sixty-five  thou- 
sand, a force  that  could  annihilate  him  if  he  contested 
its  advance  or  will.  He  then  issued,  along  in  October, 
a proclamation  advising  many  of  his  followers  to  return 
to  their  homes,  hide  their  rifles  and  await  a call  at  some 
future  time.  Others  of  his  followers  were  held  under 
arms  and  directed  to  begin  a guerrilla  warfare  in  the 
territory  held  by  the  Americans  at  that  time  or  to  be 
held  by  them  later  on. 

That  proclamation,  which  was  undoubtedly  forced 
by  the  vigorous  campaign  inaugurated  at  the  time  by 
Generals  MacArthur,  Lawton,  Wheaton  and  Young, 
marked  the  end  of  organized  resistance  on  a large  scale. 
It  will  be  remembered  that  Tarlak  was  taken  without 
a shot  and  that  our  troops  occupied  in  turn  all  the 
provinces  of  the  north  with  fewer  than  a dozen  fights 
of  any  consequence.  From  that  time  on  it  became  a 
foot-race  after  the  demoralized  bands  that  were  leaving 


378 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  Tarlak  lowlands.  There  was  no  established  capital, 
no  machinery  of  government,  no  grand  army,  and  half 
the  Cabinet  surrendered  or  were  captured. 

The  insurgents,  or  robbers,  or  ladrones,  still  have 
between  fifteen  and  twenty  thousand  rifles.  I have 
no  record  of  the  number  we  have  captured,  but  Gen- 
eral Bell,  one  of  the  most  active  and  successful  officers 
operating  on  the  islands,  admits  that  he  has  captured 
only  about  four  hundred  altogether.  An  official 
bulletin  was  once  posted  in  Manila  which  detailed 
the  surrender  of  eight  hundred  arms  and  men  at  Ba- 
yombon.  I have  since  learned  that  only  forty  rifles 
were  really  captured,  while  the  general  who  surrendered 
stated  that  there  were  eight  hundred  in  the  province. 
In  all  the  captures  of  arms  there  has  been  a very  small 
proportion  of  Mausers.  Assuming  six  thousand  to  be 
a very  liberal  estimate  of  the  rifles  we  have  taken,  it  is 
therefore  seen  that  the  Filipinos  still  have  nearly 
twenty  thousand  in  their  possession. 

Most  of  the  military  leaders  of  the  insurgents  are 
still  at  liberty.  Generals  Tino,  Macabulos,  Mascardo 
and  Alejandrino  are  still  in  the  north,  all  of  them  with 
well-armed  forces. 

The  military  situation  in  Albav  is  bad,  a condition 
that  I believe  to  have  been  brought  about  partly  by 
our  own  soldiers.  When  Legaspi  was  taken  a great 
many  bolomen  were  killed.  This  was  due  to  the  fact 
that  they  were  in  the  Filipino  trenches  and  therefore 
exposed  themselves  to  that  danger.  There  were  also  a 
number  of  liemp-workmen,  armed  only  with  wooden 
hemp-beaters,  who  were  shot  down  in  that  mad,  exul- 
tant carnage  that  our  soldiers  indulged  in.  Some  of 
these  were  non-combatants  and  should  have  kept  out 
of  the  way.  When  Albay  was  taken  our  outpost  fired 
on  everybody  who  attempted  to  enter  the  town.  Even 
natives  who  were  professedly  friendly  were  prevented 
from  returning  to  their  homes.  As  one  American  offi- 
cer said,  with  an  oath,  “ There  are  no  amigos.”  • Never- 
theless this  indiscrimination  kept  all  Filipinos  out  of 
town  and  as  a result  all  the  people  who  might  other- 


TEE  PRESENT 


379 


wise  have  been  at  least  passive  became  violently  hostile. 
There  was  a reign  of  terror. 

The  correspondent  goes  on  to  describe  condi- 
tions in  the  Camarines  and  in  Cavite  and  Laguna 
provinces,  and  adds : 

This  sullen  indifference  is  found  pretty  generally 
through  the  towns  held  by  our  troops.  The  people 
don’t  like  the  Americans.  We  have  found  many  of 
them  who  were  believed  to  be  honestly  friendly,  but 
time  has  proved  that  they  were  simulating.  Some  of 
our  most  promising  local  presidentes  have  been  found 
guilty  of  the  rankest  treachery  toward  the  Americans. 
It  is  doubtful  whether  they  hated  the  Spaniards  as 
much  as  they  hate  the  Americans.  Between  them  and 
the  Spaniards  there  were  some  instincts  and  ties  in 
common.  Intermarriage  was  quite  frequent.  Long 
association  has  grafted  into  the  native  character  many 
of  the  habits  and  likes  of  the  Spaniard.  With  the 
American  it  is  different.  There  is  n’t  an  impulse  that 
is  common  to  the  two  races.  We  may  mean  well,  but 
they  don’t  understand  our  ways.  Neither  do  we  under- 
stand theirs.  When  patience  and  forbearance  would 
be  immensely  effective,  the  American  methods  hurry 
and  irritate  the  people. 

On  my  return  from  South  Africa  I received  a 
personal  letter  from  one  of  the  ablest  and  best- 
known  correspondents  in  the  Philippines. 
From  it  I extract  the  following : 

Manila,  May  22,  1900. 

My  dear  Robinson  : It  is  more  than  doubtful  whe- 
ther this  letter  ever  penetrates  to  that  part  of  darkest 
Africa  which  holds  you,  wherever  it  may  be,  but  I will 
have  the  conscientious  knowledge  of  a pleasant  duty 


380 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


done  in  despatching  it.  The  Philippines  are  still  well 
in  hand— apparently  in  the  hands  of  the  devil.  The 
backbone  of  the  insurrection  gets  itself  crushed  every 
week,  but  as  fast  as  one  robber  band  is  put  down, 
there  are  a dozen  more  springing  up  in  unexpected 
corners. 

The  situation  to-day  is  this:  Young  reports  that 
Aguinaldo  and  Tino  have  collected  a considerable  army 
in  the  north  of  Benguet  and  he  must  have  reinforce- 
ments to  go  after  them.  General  J.  M.  Bell  reports 
that  several  thousand  insurgents  are  besieging  the  gar- 
risoned towns  in  his  provinces,  Nueva  Caceres,  Sorso- 
gon,  Albay  and  the  Camarines,  and  that  his  troops 
cannot  do  anything  without  reinforcements.  Samar, 
Leyte,  Marin duque,  Masbate  are  in  the  same  plight. 
Major  Brett  reports  fighting  with  the  Moros  around 
Cortabatto,  who  have  intrenched  themselves  in  the  old 
Spanish  forts  and  cannot  be  dislodged  without  rein- 
forcements, his  battalion  with  two  gunboats  being  in- 
sufficient. In  northern  Mindanao  we  are  also  fighting 
the  Yisayans  and  Moros ; they  killed  twelve  of  our  men 
in  a night  attack  on  Iligan,  Four  Americans  killed  at 
Bongao  by  Moros.  One  of  our  garrisons  consisting  of 
thirty  men  in  Samar  was  surrounded  five  days  and 
twenty  of  them  killed.  This  evening  comes  a report  of 
four  killed  and  sixteen  wounded  at  one  of  our  small 
garrisons  in  Pan  ay. 

The  situation  in  Panay  and  Cebu  is,  if  possible,  worse 
than  a year  ago.  From  every  direction  come  howls  for 
reinforcements  and  no  reinforcements  are  available 
unless  McKinley  sends  more  troops. 

An  Associated  Press  despatch,  from  Manila, 
dated  August  5,  1900,  reads  as  follows: 

There  has  been  an  increase  of  insurgent  activity 
during  the  last  three  weeks,  especially  in  the  way  of 
ambushes  and  attacks  upon  small  parties.  First  Lieu- 
tenant Alstaetter  of  the  engineer  corps,  with  an  escort 


THE  PRESENT 


381 


of  fifteen  men,  was  taken  in  ambush  iu  the  province  of 
Nueva  Ecija,  Luzon,  on  August  1,  by  a large  force. 
The  Americans  fought  until  their  ammunition  was 
gone,  and  as  they  were  surrounded  there  was  nothing 
to  do  but* surrender.  One  man  was  killed  and  three 
were  wounded.  General  Lacuna,  who  was  in  command 
of  the  insurgents,  returned  the  wounded  with  a letter 
promising  to  treat  the  prisoners  well. 

Lieutenant  Boctou  Hulesberg  was  ambushed  and 
killed  near  Santa  Cruz,  province  of  Laguna. 

Five  men  of  the  Twenty-fourth  Infantry  were  cap- 
tured at  Nueva  Ecija,  but  Sergeant  Schmidt  of  the 
Twelfth  Infantry,  with  seven  men,  trailed  the  captors 
and  killed  five. 

Captain  Lara*of  the  Manila  native  police  was  dan- 
gerously shot  by  an  unknown  assailant  yesterday  while 
on  the  street.  He  had  been  effectively  enforcing  regu- 
lations and  had  made  enemies  among  the  Filipinos, 
some  of  whom  have  long  threatened  vengeance.  Lara 
had  been  generally  accused  of  gross  corruption  in  office 
and  specific  charges  were  filed  against  him  by  an  Ameri- 
can officer. 

Under  date  of  September  19,  Major-General 
MacArtliur  submitted  an  official  report  begin- 
ning thus : 

Manila,  September  19,  1900. 
Adjutant-General,  Washington: 

Considerable  activity  throughout  Luzon.  Fighting 
reported  vicinity  Carig  and  Estella,  Isabella  province. 
Insurgents  estimated  five  hundred  ; probably  much  ex- 
aggerated, but  sufficient  force  to  make  trouble  in  district 
heretofore  quiet.  In  the  Ilocan  provinces  Samuel  B. 
M.  Young  (brigadier-general)  reports  numerous  small 
affairs  and  has  called  so  emphatically  for  more  force 
that  Kingsbury’s  squadron,  Third  Cavalry,  and  Bor- 
den’s battalion,  Fifth  Infantry,  have  been  sent  him ; 
other  battalion,  Fifth,  same  destination  upon  arrival. 

Country  north  Pasig,  including  all  of  Bulacan,  very 


382 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


much  disturbed  and  numei’ous  contacts  with  small 
parties  throughout  that  district.  South  of  Pasig,  in- 
cluding Tayabas  province  (Luzon),  same  conditions 
obtain. 

It  is  upon  this  sequence  of  corresponding  inci- 
dents at  different  dates  that  I rest  my  statement 
that  the  military  situation  in  the  Philippines 
has  changed  in  scope  hut  not  in  character. 
The  more  important  question  of  a probable 
change  in  character  can  be  no  more  than  a 
matter  of  personal  view  and  opinion.  Washing- 
ton authorities  and  their  supporters  are  em- 
phatic in  their  assertion  of  an  utter  collapse  in 
the  event  of  the  reelection  of  President  McKin- 
ley. There  are  those,  at  home  and  in  the 
islands,  who  hold  the  opposite  opinion.  There 
has  appeared  what  purports  to  be  a translation 
of  a part  of  a proclamation  issued  by  Aguinaldo 
on  June  30,  1900.  It  reads  as  follows: 

Let  us  be  constant  and  enduring  in  our  resistance; 
we  are  on  our  soil,  and  should  this  war  be  unfortu- 
nately prolonged,  even  then  let  us  not  despair.  Let  us 
go  ahead  and  our  happiness  will  be  more  profitable. 
In  all  times  and  in  all  places  independence  has  been 
won  only  at  great  cost.  You  must  bear  in  mind  that 
the  majority  of  the  American  people  are  not  deaf  to 
the  performance  of  true  justice.  . . . Therefore,  my 
fellow-citizens,  let  us  not  cease  until  we  have  clearly 
seen  what  we  most  ardently  desire— our  independence. 


On  September  8, 1900,  the  following  letter  was 
written  by  Sehor  Sixto  Lopez,  a prominent  Fili- 


THE  PEESEXT 


383 


pino  who  arrived  in  the  United  States  during 
the  closing  days  of  that  month.  He  says : 

Aguinaldo’s  safety  and  success  depend  largely  on 
the  truly  marvelous  way  in  which  he  conceals  his  move- 
ments and  the  rapidity  with  which  he  moves  from  place 
to  place.  In  order  to  do  this  successfully  you  can  well 
understand  that  every  one  is  not  allowed  to  share  his 
confidence.  He  was  recently  for  a considerable  tune 
within  seven  miles  of  Manila.  I have  the  very  latest 
news  of  him  both  by  letter  and  by  Filipinos  who  have 
just  arrived  in  London.  They  tell  me  that  he  is  exer- 
cising an  unparalleled  amount  of  energy,  that  he  enjoys 
good  health  and  is  most  hopeful  of  being  able  to  con- 
tinue the  defense  for  an  indefinite  time.  His  losses  in 
men  are  always  made  good  from  an  inexhaustible  re- 
serve of  men  who,  owing  to  insufficiency  of  arms,  are 
waiting  to  take  the  place  of  those  who  fall  or  are  taken 
prisoners.  His  losses  in  arms  and  munitions  are  made 
good  and  added  to  by  frequent  captures  of  small  con- 
voys from  the  American  forces.  These  captures  are 
not  reported  in  America,  but  that  they  occur  is  a fact 
for  which  I can  vouch.  In  one  province'  alone  there 
are  fifty-four  of  Aguinaldo’s  officers  mounted  on  Ameri- 
can horses  ! And  many  of  our  soldiers  are  armed  with 
American  rifles.  In  addition  to  this  we  manufacture 
our  own  ammunition ; we  make  black  powder  from 
materials  obtained  in  Luzon. 

In  view  of  this  practically  inexhaustible  supply  of 
men  and  gradually  increasing  supply  of  arms  and  am- 
munition, with  the  nature  of  the  country  in  our  favor, 
which  is  so  adapted  for  guerrilla  warfare,  and  with  the 
unrelenting  determination  of  our  people  to  die  rather 
than  submit  to  foreign  rule,  we  are  confident  of  being 
able  to  continue  the  defense  for  twenty  years  if  neces- 
sary, or  even  a longer  period. 

The  events  of  the  months  of  August  and 
September,  1900,  and  the  various  incidents  con- 


384 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


nected  with  them,  present  little  ground  for  hope 
that  Filipino  hostility  to  American  military  rule 
is  by  any  means  ended.  The  influence  of  the 
election  may  or  may  not  be  determined  before 
these  images  reach  their  readers.  One  serious 
factor  remains.  It  lies  in  that  reckless  portion 
of  the  American  army  which  enlisted  for  a fight, 
hopes  for  fighting  and  has  no  hesitation  in  say- 
ing that  it  does  not  intend  to  return  without  a 
fight.  My  very  good  friend,  General  Schwan, 
a man  of  sound  and  ripened  judgment,  recog- 
nizes the  importance  of  this  factor  when  he 
says,  vide  his  recent  report : “ The  most  serious 
obstacle  in  the  way  of  complete  pacification  of 
the  islands  now  lies  in  the  mutual  distrust  be- 
tween the  troops  and  the  inhabitants.”  General 
Schwan  also  introduces  the  “effect  of  the  elec- 
tion ” argument,  in  which  I cannot  quite  agree 
with  him,  and  he  states  this  other  proposition 
less  flatly  than  I do.  But  he  recognizes  its 
force. 

The  Filipinos  have  learned  to  hate  the  Ameri- 
can soldier,  justly  or  unjustly,  and  the  Ameri- 
can soldier,  rightly  or  wrongly,  is  disposed  to 
return  the  feeling  in  kind.  It  bodes  ill  for  peace 
so  long  as  the  two  are  in  contact.  The  enlisted 
man  of  the  army  to-day  is  not  a philanthropist 
with  a broad  love  for  his  fellow-men  and  a 
desire  to  help  them  to  higher  things.  There  are 
few  of  the  soldiers  who  will  not  do  their  utmost,  . 
after  a fight,  to  help  or  to  succor  a wounded 


THE  PRESENT 


385 


Filipino,  who  will  not  treat  a Filipino  prisoner 
with  kindness.  At  all  other  times  a Filipino  is 
generally  regarded  as  an  enemy  and  an  enemy 
is  something  which  should  be  killed.  Many 
enlisted  for  the  avowed  purpose  of  “killing 
niggers  ” and  such  have  neither  intent  nor 
desire  to  return  without  having  done  their 
errand.  The  enlisted  man  is  not  a diplomat 
and  his  relations  with  and  attitude  toward  the 
people  around  him  are  seldom  those  which  tend 
toward  a peaceful  settlement  of  international  or 
inter-racial  differences.  This  has  been  illus- 
trated in  both  Cuba  and  Porto  Pico,  as  well  as 
in  the  Philippines.  It  is  little  to  many  of  our 
men  whether  the  United  States  is  at  peace  or 
at  war.  The  purpose  of  enlistment  is  not  the 
civilizing  of  “niggers,”  but  the  shooting  of 
them.  That  General  Otis  pronounces  the  Fili- 
pinos, vide  his  recent  report,  to  be  “ industrious 
and  intelligent,”  that  so  many  of  those  who 
know  them  best  have  so  much  to  say  in  their 
favor,  has  little  effect  upon  this  class.  Their 
business  is  to  shoot  Filipinos,  whether  they  be 
men  or  “ niggers.”  This  attitude  on  the  part  of  so 
many  Americans  in  the  islands  is  full  of  menace 
and  d.anger  to  our  peace  with  the  island  people. 


XIX 


THE  FUTURE 

The  future— The  Chinese  as  a factor— The  Chinese  worker— 
The  Chinese  merchant— The  social  future— The  educa- 
tional future— The  religious  future— The  Filipinos  as  they 
are— Evidence  of  capacity  for  self-government— The  policy 
needed. 

AND  now,  in  closing  this  volume,  I turn  to 
II  the  days  that  are  to  come.  All  futures  are 
mysterious  and  complex.  Into  the  future  of  a 
new  life  for  the  Filipino  people,  whatever  may 
be  their  government,  there  enter  the  many-sided 
problems  which  concern  all  nations.  These  may 
be  summarized  under  the  heads  of  the  industrial 
and  commercial,  the  social,  the  educational,  and 
the  religious.  Something  of  what  I saw  and 
thought  of  the  first  of  these  has  already  been 
presented  in  these  pages.  One  element  needs  a 
further  emphasis.  On  February  6,  1900,  I sent 
to  the  New  York  “Evening  Post”  the  following 
letter  on  the  influence  and  position  of  the  Chi- 
nese in  the  commercial  and  industrial  future  of 
the  Philippines.  I see  no  reason  for  change  or 
modification  of  the  views  therein  expressed. 

386 


TEE  FUTURE 


387 


“ Manila,  February  6,  1900. 

“ The  Chinaman  forms  an  almost  indispensa- 
ble element  in  the  life  of  the  Philippines.  The 
islands  would  undoubtedly  remain  here  and  life 
would  go  on  if  every  Chinaman  and  every  Chi- 
nese mestizo  were  to  be  deported ; but  it  would 
be  easier  to  picture  the  Southern  States  with 
the  negroes  eliminated  from  the  industrial  and 
agricultural  life  o'f  that  section  than  to  picture 
the  life  of  the  Philippines  without  the  China- 
man. I am  not  wholly  sure  that  it  would  be  a 
wild  statement  to  say  that  development  in  the 
islands  would  be  impossible  without  the  patient, 
submissive,  industrious  Chinaman. 

“ The  history  of  these  people  in  the  Philip- 
pines is  a long  tale  of  a tenacious  struggle 
against  opposing  conditions.  No  one  knows 
just  when  these  relations  first  began.  Chinese 
trade  with  the  semi-barbarous  aborigines  prob- 
ably very  greatly  antedates  Spanish  discovery 
and  settlement.  Legaspi,  the  founder  of  Manila 
(1571),  would  appear  to  have  been  their-  first  real 
protector  in  their  traffic  here.  Prior  to  that 
their  junks  were  their  warehouses.  They  sold 
their  wares  to  the  natives  if  they  were  the 
stronger,  and  were  robbed  by  the  natives  if  the 
weaker.  Legaspi  encouraged  their  trade, 
afforded  them  a measure  of  protection  and  en- 
abled them  to  effect  a land  establishment.  In 
fact,  it  may  be  said  that  the  Chinese  were  the 
founders  of  Philippine  commerce. 


388 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


“As  they  were  its  founders,  so  also  are  they 
its  propagators.  Within  a score  of  years  of  their 
establishment  on  the  land,  their  influence  and 
importance  were  recognized.  Within  fifty  years, 
the  Chinese  population,  traders  and  workers  all 
of  them,  was  estimated  at  over  thirty  thousand. 
Their  increase  became  a menace  to  Spanish 
domination  and  various  measures  were  proposed 
for  their  restriction.  Such  steps  were  not  easily 
to  be  undertaken,  however,  as  they  were  even 
then  almost  the  only  merchants  and  traders,  and 
then,  as  ever  after,  they  were  a source  of  very 
considerable  revenue  to  the  government.  If  the 
government  wanted  money,  it  found  a way  to 
get  some  from  the  Chinaman.  He  was  a tangi- 
ble proposition,  with  his  wares  and  merchandise, 
far  more  readily  accessible  than  the  irresponsi- 
ble and  often  vagrant  native.  Then,  as  now, 
Filipino  merchants  were  rare  and  the  trading 
Spaniard  was  not  much  in  evidence. 

u Their  position  in  the  islands  has  always  been 
a peculiar  one.  They  have  been  tolerated  be- 
cause of  a manifest  necessity  for  their  presence, 
rather  than  encouraged.  Even  Legaspi’s  encour- 
agement was  that  of  the  politician  rather  than 
anything  else.  They  have  never  been  really 
welcome,  never  popular,  always  regarded  as  a 
thing  apart,  a sort  of  necessary  evil.  Again 
and  again  their  total  expulsion  has  been  consid- 
ered and  about  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth 
century  it  was  actually  ordered,  but  the  order 


THE  FUTURE 


389 


was  suppressed.  The  complaint  brought  against 
the  Chinaman  here  is  the  same  as  that  so  often 
heard  in  the  States.  He  does  not  form  or 
become  an  integral  part  of  the  social  and  politi- 
cal organism.  He  is  a kind  of  commercial  par- 
asite or  leech.  He  goes  to  another  country  than 
his  own  simply  to  make  what  money  he  can  out 
of  that  country  and  then  return  to  his  own  land. 
He  will  work  cheaply  and  sell  for  a narrow  mar- 
gin. His  patient  industry,  his  economy  and 
thrift  are  offensive  rather  than  otherwise  to  the 
indolent  and  improvident  native.  The  Filipino 
would  not  do  the  work  that  John  does,  but  he 
clings  to  an  idea  that  John  is  his  industrial 
competitor  and  by  working  at  a cheaper  rate 
is  taking  the  bread  out  of  his  mouth.  As  a 
consequence  John  is  not  approved. 

“ Throughout  the  islands  the  Chinaman  is  the 
general  trader.  His  shop  is  seldom  much  larger 
than  a dry-goods  box,  but  he  crams  a lot  of 
merchandise  into  it.  In  many  sections  he  is  the 
middleman  between  the  producer  and  the  Eng- 
lish or  European  trading-house.  He  buys  hemp, 
copra  and  other  products  in  small  lots,  often 
takes  them  in  trade  by  barter  for  his  wares.  He 
stores  his  hemp  until  he  has  a bale  or  two, 
which  he  may  sell  direct  to  the  exporter  or  turn 
over  to  a compatriot  who  deals  on  a little  larger 
scale  than  himself.  His  general  transactions 
are  on  a small  scale,  though  here  and  there  one 
finds  a Chinaman  of  very  extensive  trade  rela- 


390 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


tions  and  large  income.  Such  men,  as  a rule, 
are  the  gatherers  of  the  small  lots  picked  up  by 
their  fellow-countrymen.  The  Chinese  pack- 
peddler  has  also  been  a feature  in  island  life 
and  many  of  this  class  have  lost  both  life  and 
pack  at  the  hands  of  those  with  whom  they 
sought  trade  in  outlying  and  isolated  sections. 
In  a certain  way,  John  does  not  seem  to  have 
the  pluck  of  a sheep ; but  he  will  seek  trade  at 
the  risk  of  his  life  among  those  that  hate  him, 
and  the  Chinese  litter-bearer  jogging  along  in 
dangerous  spots  on  the  firing-line,  seemingly  in- 
different to  bullets,  is  a well-recognized  feature 
in  military  experience  here.  This  apparent 
temerity  is  probably  less  due  to  courage  or 
pluck  than  it  is  to  the  fact  that  the  king  of  ter- 
rors is  less  of  a bugaboo  to  him  than  to  many 
of  greater  physical  and  moral  courage.  His 
belief  in  a blissful  immortality  seems  to  be  a bit 
more  firmly  anchored  than  that  of  the  average 
Christian  and  death  is  an  incident  that  does 
not  scare  him  as  it  does  most  of  us. 

“John  is  a shrewd  trader,  a clever  evader  of 
customs  tariffs  and  an  economical  merchant; 
yet  he  is  surprisingly  honest  in  commercial 
transactions.  The  type  that  comes  to  the 
Philippines  is  not  the  best.  The  best  can 
usually  do  well  enough  at  home.  From  the 
stocks  displayed  in  the  Chinese  shops  in  Manila, 
in  Iloilo,  in  Jolo,  in  Zamboanga  and  in  the 
smaller  cities  of  Luzon  and  Visaya,  one  might 


THE  FUTURE 


391 


readily  infer,  probably  with  correctness,  that 
the  Philippine  trade  was  chiefly  in  the  hands  of 
a few  houses  in  Hongkong  and  Singapore. 
There  is  a very  noticeable  sameness  in  the  arti- 
cles and  patterns  displayed.  The  Jolo  store 
might  almost  as  well  be  in  San  Fernando  or 
Aparri,  and  vice  versa.  This  may  be  due,  in 
large  measure,  to  a certain  conservativeness  on 
the  part  of  the  patrons.  Certain  colors,  certain 
wares  and  certain  patterns  seem  to  be  staple. 
Fashions  do  not  change,  as  with  us,  and  the 
demand  is  not,  like  that  of  ‘civilized’  people, 
for  novelties  simply  because  they  are  novel- 
ties. 

“ Perhaps  the  special  interest  for  Americans  in 
this  trade  condition  lies  in  the  fact  of  the  emi- 
nent improbability  of  the  capture  of  Filipino 
retail  trade  from  the  hands  of  such  competitors. 
Some  day  there  may  and  perhaps  will  be  room 
here  for  the  American  merchant.  But  there  is 
likely  to  be  very  little  room  for  the  American 
shopkeeper.  There  are  several  large  and  fairly 
imposing  retail  establishments  on  the  Escolta. 
They  serve  a certain  class  of  patrons— the  better 
class,  of  course.  But  the  great  bulk  of  the  trade 
of  the  people  goes  to  the  Chinaman,  in  Manila 
and  elsewhere.  Neither  the  Hebrew  nor  the 
Spaniard,  both  of  them  among  the  shrewdest  of 
traders,  has  been  able  to  take  that  trade  from 
him,  and  the  case  is  almost  hopeless,  under  nor- 
mal conditions  of  competition,  for  the  American. 


392 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


John’s  expenses  are  of  the  smallest.  He  will 
sell  five  dollars’  worth  of  goods  a day  at  a 
smaller  profit  and  with  smaller  store  expenses, 
and  out  of  that  business  will  lay  up  more  money 
than  an  American  could  or  would  on  sales  of 
fifty  dollars  a day. 

“ The  position  of  the  Chinaman  in  the  indus- 
trial and  agricultural  life  of  the  islands  is  prob- 
ably one  of  supreme  importance.  I am  quite 
disposed  to  think  that  the  industrial  future  here 
depends  absolutely  upon  Chinese  labor.  I am 
coming  to  a belief  that  the  future  is  hopeless 
without  it.  In  a way  the  Filipino  is  wholly 
lazy  and  indolent.  In  another  way  he  seems 
industrious.  As  one  goes  through  the  country 
and  sees  the  Filipino  at  work  in  his  rice-fields 
and  notes  the  endless  amount  of  tedious,  back- 
breaking work  involved  in  the  cultivation  of 
those  thousands  and  thousands  of  acres,  when 
one  notes  the  processes  of  plowing,  planting, 
setting,  weeding  and  gathering  and  realizes  the 
amount  of  labor  represented  and  that  a vast 
deal  of  it  is  Filipino  labor,  he  can  only  wonder 
if  this  race  is  so  very  lazy,  after  all. 

“ But  rice  culture  does  not  involve  that  continu- 
ous day-in-and-day-out,  all-the-year-round  labor 
to  which  the  Filipino  evidently  has  a rooted 
objection.  Intermittent  labor,  done  very  much 
when  the  laborer  feels  like  doing  it,  for  a period 
of  six  months  in  the  year,  supplies  the  average 
of  the  native  peasantry  with  maintenance  for 


THE  FUTURE 


393 


his  family.  The  Filipinos  are  far  from  wholly 
idle.  Even  in  this  land  some  work  is  obligatory. 
Its  people  are  not  wholly  exempt  from  the 
operation  of  that  law  which  compels  the  ex- 
change of  perspiration  for  bread.  But  the  labor 
of  the  native  is  desultory,  the  laborer  improvi- 
dent. Manana  obtains,  but  that  is  because 
there  is  no  manana.  The  average  Filipino  has 
no  special  object  in  life  beyond  maintenance  for 
himself  and  family  from  day  to  day. 

“ Different  in  aim  and  purpose  as  in  tempera- 
ment and  tendency,  John  Chinaman  has  an 
object  and  works  for  it.  He  works  patiently 
and  persistently.  He  will  work  all  the  time 
and,  if  necessary,  endless  hours  a day.  He 
can  be  counted  on  for  eight  hours,  for  ten  hours 
per  day.  The  Filipino  cannot.  He  employs  his 
time  to  suit  his  own  ideas,  not  to  suit  those 
of  his  employer.  Almost  no  reliance  is  to  be 
placed  upon  him.  That  is  one  of  the  things  we 
have  to  teach  him.  He  has  to  learn  that  he  will 
be  a great  deal  happier  if  he  will  work  himself 
half  to  death  for  the  sake  of  getting  a lot  of 
things  that  will  not  do  him  a bit  of  good.  He 
has  to  learn  that  life  is  a flat  failure  unless  he  has 
something  better  than  his  neighbors,  that  life  is 
useless  unless  spent  in  moiling  and  toiling,  early 
and  late.  Of  course  it  is  social  heresy,  but  the 
more  I see  of  tropical  races  the  more  do  I wonder 
if  they  really  have  not  the  best  of  it,  after  all. 

“ But  the  Chinaman  will  work  and  therefore 


394 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


is  of  much  interest  and  concern  for  the  prospec- 
tive investor  here„  He  is  the  laborer  of  the 
region  and  the  only  one.  He  will  labor  at  any- 
thing and  will  usually  do  his  work  faithfully 
and  well — at  least,  he  can  be  made  to  if  rightly 
handled.  He  is  the  worker  here  now,  particu- 
larly in  the  cities  and  towns,  where  his  life  is 
protected  by  laws  and  policemen.  In  many 
parts  of  the  rural  districts  he  runs  some  risk, 
with  no  added  inducement  to  do  so.  Right  there 
lies  a dilemma.  The  sugar-planter,  in  order 
to  succeed,  the  hemp-raiser,  the  tobacco-planter, 
the  indigo-  or  coffee-raiser,  if  these  industries 
prove  successful  here,  must  have  regular  and 
reliable  labor.  For  that,  Filipino  labor  is  ut- 
terly hopeless.  The  native  might  be  educated 
to  it  in  a generation  or  two,  but  who  is  to 
pay  for  his  education?  John  is  the  man  and 
there  are  enough  of  him  to  be  had  for  all  the 
farms,  plantations  and  estates,  for  all  the  mills 
and  factories,  that  will  ever  be  started  in  the 
Philippines.  But  if  he  be  allowed  to  come  here 
in  great  numbers  the  United  States  will  proba- 
bly stand  in  the  position  of  an  interested  partici- 
pant in  a very  lively  race  war  between  the 
Mongol  and  the  descendant  of  the  Malay. 

“Unless  some  acceptable  channel  of  industry 
be  found  by  which  the  Filipino  can  support 
himself  along  the  line  of  his  own  ideas,  he  is 
quite  likely  to  enter  a vigorous  and  perhaps 
offensive  protest  against  an  undue  percentage 


THE  FUTURE 


395 


of  Chinamen  in  his  midst.  A problem  is  intro- 
duced which  is  not  to  be  evaded.  If  the  China- 
man comes  there  is  strong  probability  of  a row. 
If  he  does  not  come  the  outlook  for  the  investor 
is  not  a cheerful  one.  One  needs  but  to  review 
the  past  history  of  the  Chinese  in  the  Philippines 
to  realize  the  force  of  the  former  of  these  propo- 
sitions. Any  business  man  can  see  the  diffi- 
culty, almost  hopeless,  of  essaying  production 
of  any  kind  with  a crew  of  erratic  and  unreliable 
laborers.  A Chinese  exclusion  act  means  an 
almost  insurmountable  barrier  to  industrial 
activity  and  progress.  An  open  door  to  Chinese 
immigration  means  danger  of  very  serious 
political  complications.” 

For  the  social  future  of  the  Filipinos,  Ameri- 
cans need  feel  no  special  concern.  They  have 
their  own  ideas  of  society,  suited  to  their  tem- 
perament and  environment.  In  social  morals 
they  are  above  the  average.  They  are  courteous 
and  hospitable,  by  the  evidence  of  those  who 
know  them  in  times  of  peace,  and  even  during  a 
time  of  war  many  Americans  have  been  the 
recipients  of  a kindly  hospitality  and  entertain- 
ment at  Filipino  hands  and  under  Filipino  roofs. 
We  may  regard  their  national  pastime  of  cock- 
fighting  as  brutal  and  degrading.  We  should 
remember  that  a number  of  our  American  cities, 
notably  in  the  South,  are  but  recently  and  in- 
completely emancipated  from  the  same  species 


396 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  entertainment.  They  have  their  own  ways  of 
enjoyment,  domestic,  social  and  musical.  Those 
ways  suit  them  and  being  an  adaptable  people 
they  will  readily  make  up  any  existing  defi- 
ciencies as  opportunity  may  present  itself. 

In  educational  departments  the  Filipino  needs 
little  encouragement  to  avail  himself  of  all  that 
may  be  opened  to  him.  Already  far  from  being 
an  illiterate  people,  those  whom  Professor 
Worcester  has  called  the  “five  millions  of  civi- 
lized” Filipinos  are  eager  for  greater  opportuni- 
ties for  a fuller  knowledge.  Thus  far  the  church 
has  been  their  principal  instructor;  but  the 
educational  system  of  Roman  Catholicism  is  open 
to  many  objections  from  the  American  point 
of  view,  and  there  is  every  reason  for  belief 
that  the  Filipinos  will  display  a marked  readiness 
to  adopt  a broader  and  more  American  system  if 
conditions  make  such  an  adoption  a possibility. 

The  religious  question  has  already  been 
treated  in  another  chapter  here.  With  no  desire 
save  to  treat  the  matter  honestly  and  in  the 
spirit  of  the  broadest  toleration  for  those  both 
of  Roman  Catholic  and  Protestant  connection, 
I repeat  my  conviction  that  the  future  perma- 
nent peace  of  the  Philippine  Islands  depends 
chiefly,  if  not  wholly,  upon  a happy  solution  of 
the  now  vexed  and  tangled  religious  question. 
The  demand  of  the  Filipino  people,  repeated 
again  and  again  in  their  past  and,  I believe, 
dominating  all  others  to-day,  is  for  the  establish- 


THE  FUTURE 


397 


ment  among  them  of  secular  priests,  preferably 
of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church,  the  incumbents 
to  be  chosen  from  among  their  own  people.  I 
go  so  far  as  to  assert  my  belief  that  for  every 
such  priest,  acceptable  to  the  people,  duly  in- 
stalled, an  American  garrison  may  be  withdrawn. 

The  following  letter  was  written  on  Septem- 
ber 27,  1899,  more  than  a year  ago.  In  using  it 
here,  I have  made  no  changes  save  those  of 
tense  and  one  or  two  alterations  in  matters  of 
minor  detail  corrected  by  fuller  iuformatiom 
It  lacks  the  weight  of  official  assertions,  covering 
a period  of  eighteen  months,  that  the  war  would 
see  a speedy  ending  and  a ready  establishment 
of  peace  and  peaceful  industry.  But  events 
have  more  fully  justified  the  views  of  this  cor- 
respondence than  they  have  the  general  tenor 
of  official  assertions.  I shall  feel  that  my  work 
has  not  been  fruitless  if  this  volume  shall  estab- 
lish in  the  mind  of  any  of  its  readers  a more 
charitable  and  kindly  feeling  toward  those  little 
brown  people  of  the  distant  islands  where 
America  has  become  so  unhappily  involved,  a 
people  struggling  and  fighting  with  no  mean 
heroism  for  an  idea,  crude  and  narrow  though 
it  may  be,  of  a fuller  and  freer  political  and 
religious  life.  The  letter  is  as  follows : 

“ Manila,  September  27,  1899. 

“ I have  no  wish  to  represent  the  Filipinos  as 
being  any  better  or  any  more  able  than  they 


398 


TEE  PEILIPPIXES 


really  are.  That  they  are  greatly  misunderstood 
by  a large  class  of  Americans  is  plainly  shown 
by  comment  and  expression  constantly  recurring 
in  newspapers  and  magazines.  This  mistaken 
view,  which  is  held  by  so  many,  seems  to  be 
based  upon  statements  made  and  information 
written  by  those  who  have  never  visited  the 
islands  or  by  those  whose  observation  has  been 
either  very  brief  or  very  superficial.  Much  is  also 
due  to  a biased  selection  of  the  most  unfavora- 
ble comment  from  the  work  of  competent  ob- 
servers. If  one  wished  to  do  so,  he  could  find  a 
good  bit  of  evidence  even  in  such  a work  as 
Bryce’s  ‘American  Commonwealth,’  that  would 
represent  the  American  people  as  a decidedly 
undesirable  lot. 

“ The  serious  military  mistake  has  been  made 
of  greatly  underestimating  the  fighting  strength 
and  ability  of  the  Filipinos.  No  amount  of  vili- 
fication of  Aguinaldo  and  no  amount  of  sneer- 
ing at  the  courage  of  the  Filipinos  because  they 
do  not  stand  out  in  the  open  to  be  shot  by 
American  soldiers,  can  do  away  with  the  fact 
that  their  resistance  has  lasted  for  eight  [now 
twenty]  months,  that  the  resistance  has  made 
imperative  an  enormous  increase  in  the  army 
sent  against  it  and  that  it  may  even  necessitate 
a still  further  increase  in  the  American  army  of 
conflict  and  occupation.  More  or  less  of  this 
military  blunder,  prolonged  by  those  in  author- 
ity long  after  it  was  seen  by  others  who  raised  a 


TEE  FUTURE 


399 


warning  voice,  is  dne  to  a general  ignorance  of 
the  people  with  whom  the  United  States  has 
had  to  deal.  Out  of  that  ignorance  and  out  of 
something,  too,  of  a supercilious  self-confidence 
and  an  idea  that  a little  fellow  would  always  lie 
down  at  the  feet  of  a big  fellow,  or  could  be 
made  to  lie  down  without  much  trouble,  came 
the  idea  which  has  prolonged  this  struggle  and 
cost  the  United  States  hundreds  of  lives  and 
millions  of  dollars. 

“ As  relations  between  the  American  and  the 
Philippine  people  are  likely  to  be  maintained 
for  some  time  to  come,  whether  the  war  be  pro- 
longed or  whether  it  find  an  early  termination, 
it  is  eminently  desirable  that,  in  the  political 
relations  which  follow  the  war,  the  mistake 
should  be  avoided  of  underestimating  the  politi- 
cal and  social  capacity  of  the  Filipinos  and  the 
Yisayans.  These  are  the  two  races,  or  tribes, 
with  which  politics  will  have  most  to  do.  They 
probably  represent  three  quarters  of  the  popu- 
lation of  the  islands.  Perhaps  one  third  of  the 
remainder  may  be  included  in  the  general  politi- 
cal proposition.  Its  representation  would  be 
some  of  the  lesser  tribes,  such  as  the  Uocos,  the 
Pampangans,  the  Macabebes  and  others  more 
or  less  distinct  from  Tagal  and  Visayan,  but 
also  more  or  less  affiliated  with  them  and  pre- 
senting a measure  of  civilization  which  would 
constitute  them  a political  factor.  The  re- 
mainder of  the  population,  represented  by  the 


400 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


Moros  of  the  southern  islands  and  by  such  of 
the  wilder  tribes  as  the  Gaddanes,  the  Negritos, 
the  Igorrotes,  the  Itavis  and  others,  are  a dis- 
tinctly military  problem. 

“ One  contention  of  the  Filipino  leaders  is  that 
for  considerably  more  than  a year  from  the  time 
when  they  had  the  Spaniards  practically  be- 
sieged in  Manila,  six  weeks  after  the  arrival  of 
Admiral  Dewey,  they  administered  the  affairs  of 
very  much  the  greater  part  of  Luzon  and  con- 
stituted such  authority  as  there  was  in  many  of 
the  central  islands. 

“ I cannot  feel  that  it  would  be  wise  or  right 
immediately  to  leave  these  people  to  the  sole 
conduct  of  their  own  affairs;  yet,  unless  some 
marked  improvement  be  shown  in  American 
methods,  there  can  be  little  doubt  that  they 
would  get  along  by  themselves  quite  as  well  as 
with  American  interference.  But  there  are 
many  who  contend  that  to  leave  them  to  them- 
selves would  be  to  yield  them  up  to  a general 
anarchy  and  the  drenching  of  the  islands  in  the 
bloodshed  of  strife  among  themselves.  What 
would  really  come,  no  man  can  say;  but  the 
best  authorities  and  the  closest  observers  set 
these  people  down  as  peaceable  and  peace-loving 
rather  than  bloodthirsty  and  quarrelsome.  That 
their  history  has  in  it  much  of  turbulence  and 
revolt  argues  for  them  rather  than  against  them. 
Their  fighting  has  not  been  done  for  the  sake  of 
or  the  love  for  fighting.  It  has  been  their  pro- 


THE  FUTURE 


401 


test  against  injustice  and  oppression,  tlie 
struggle  of  crude  patriots  rather  than  of  crude 
and  warlike  men.  At  least,  that  is  the  charita- 
ble and,  probably,  the  correct  view  of  it. 

“ Coming  to  a more  tangible  and  more  evident 
proposition,  some  notice  may  be  given  to  the 
experience  of  that  time  during  which  the  Fili- 
pinos claim,  and  quite  rightly,  to  have  been 
administering  their  own  affairs  over  so  large  a 
territory.  Has  the  experience  in  that  territory 
borne  out  the  idea  that  Filipino  self-government 
would  mean  only  anarchy  and  bloodshed? 
News  from  outside  the  American  lines  has  been 
neither  abundant  nor  reliable.  The  major  por- 
tion of  what  has  come  has  been  brought  by 
those  whom  it  is  wholly  safe  to  suspect  of  being 
actuated  by  some  personal  motive.  I am  in- 
clined to  think  that  too  much  stock  has  been 
taken  in  that  kind  of  thing.  If  Senor  Don  Any- 
body, or  somebody  claiming  to  be  Senor  Don 
Anybody,  representing  himself  as  the  owner  of 
vast  properties  in  some  far-distant  province  and 
the  accredited  delegate  from  his  vicinity,  arrived 
with  a tale  of  Filipino  oppression  and  a prayer 
for  American  recognition  and  protection  of  his 
property,  he  was  accepted  with  sympathy  and 
Washington  was  notified  that  another  province 
was  hungry  and  thirsty  for  American  rule.  El 
Senor  Don  may  be  an  honest  and  truthful 
emissary  from  his  section,  but  it  is  quite  an 
open  question  whether,  on  the  other  hand,  he 


402 


THE  PHILIPPINES 


may  not  be  practically  a spy  or  a shrewd  and 
far-seeing  chap  with  an  eye  to  the  main  chance 
who  desires  to  have  ‘an  anchor  to  windward.’ 
Viewing  the  whole  matter  broadly,  there  is  little 
ground  upon  which  to  doubt  that  the  majority 
of  Filipinos  would  rather  be  Filipinos  than 
Americans.  The  amigo  is  a well-demonstrated 
humbug  in  whom  the  American  soldier  has  nei- 
ther belief  nor  confidence. 

“That  this  lack  of  faith  in  Filipino- Ameri- 
canism is  justified  is  evidenced  by  the  frequent 
transformance  of  the  amigo  at  work  in  his  rice- 
field  into  the  insurrecto  who  fires  a gun  from 
the  trenches.  It  is  demonstrated  by  the  fact 
that  in  the  towns  and  villages  where  civil  gov- 
ernment has  been  established  within  American 
lines  it  is  the  custom  to  elect,  as  president  or 
alcalde,  the  most  ardent  Filipino  of  the  place. 
Many  of  those  so  elected  have  shown  their  Fili- 
pino loyalty,  have  proved  recreant  to  their  pro- 
fessions of  fidelity  to  the  United  States,  and 
several  of  them  have  gone  to  jail  for  using  their 
posts  in  furtherance  of  their  efforts  to  give  ‘ aid 
and  comfort  to  the  enemy.’ 

“ I have  learned  of  no  well-authenticated  evi- 
dence of  anarchy  or  disturbance  within  the  ter- 
ritory controlled  by  the  Filipino  government. 
Complaints  reached  Manila  from  individual 
planters  that  insurgent  bands  appropriated 
their  cattle  and  their  poultry  and  made  levy 
upon  them  for  financial  aid  to  the  Filipino  cause. 


TEE  FUTURE 


403 


But  that  is  a condition  of  war  which  is  by  no 
means  unique  in  the  Philippines.  While  a Fili- 
pino army  is  maintained  in  the  field,  other  Fili- 
pinos continue  the  production  of  their  staple 
crops  of  rice,  hemp,  tobacco  and  sugar.  Neither 
Spain  nor  the  United  States  governed  the  dis- 
tricts in  which  these  industries  went  on.  They 
were  either  in  no  hands  or  in  Filipino  hands. 
If  there  was  no  government,  it  speaks  well  for 
the  people  as  peaceable  and  orderly  citizens.  If 
they  recognized  and  were  subject  to  a Filipino 
government,  that  appears  to  be  a fair  argument 
for  the  strength  and  wisdom  of  the  adminis- 
tration. 

“ There  is  one  point  which  I think  is  not  gen- 
erally known  to  the  American  people,  but  which 
is  a very  strong  factor  in  the  question  of  Fili- 
pino self-government,  both  now  and  in  any 
future  position.  In  the  West  Indies  the  greater 
number  of  offices  and  official  positions  were  filled 
by  Spaniards,  either  native-born  or  from  the 
Peninsula.  In  the  Philippines  the  percentage 
of  available  Spaniards  for  minor  positions  was 
vastly  less  than  that  shown  in  the  West  Indian 
colonies.  The  result  was  that  while  the  more 
prominent  and  more  profitable  offices  in  the 
Philippines  were  filled  by  Spaniards,  many  of 
the  minor  offices  in  the  larger  cities  and  most 
of  those  in  the  country  were  held  by  Filipinos. 
Therefore,  when  the  Filipino  party  assumed  the 
government  for  those  districts  which  the  Span- 


404 


THE  miLIPriNES 


iards  evacuated,  the  Filipinos  had  a system  of 
government  in  which  Filipinos  held  most  of  the 
positions,  already  established  for  their  purposes. 
It  was  but  necessary  to  change  its  head  and  its 
name.  Instead  of  being  dominated  by  the  agents 
of  Alfonso  XIII,  por  la  gracia  de  Dios  Reg  cato- 
Uca  de  Espana , the  same  machinery  was  set  in 
motion  and  controlled  first  by  the  dictatorial 
government  and  then  by  the  Philippine  revolu- 
tionary government,  under  the  constitution  pro- 
claimed on  June  23,  1898.  This  fact  simplified 
matters  for  the  Filipinos  and  gave  them  the 
ground  upon  which  they  make  their  assertion  of 
maintaining  a successful  administration  in  those 
provinces  which  they  occupied. 

“ The  great  danger  in  absolute  self-government 
for  the  Filipino  is  in  the  lack  of  a balance-wheel 
among  aspiring  leaders.  That  may  well  be  the 
function  of  the  United  States.  Protection  from 
other  powers  they  must  have.  For  that  the 
United  States  is  now  almost  irretrievably 
pledged.  Protection  against  disorder  arising 
out  of  struggle  for  leadership  is  also  a work  to 
which  the  United  States  is  morally  committed. 
A tactful  hand  for  guidance  and  restraint  is  the 
special  need  of  the  Filipinos  until  the  now  un- 
tried and  half-broken  political  colt  shall  become 
settled  in  the  traces  and  accustomed  to  his  work. 

“ The  great  danger  in  American  interference 
in  Filipino  affairs  lies  in  the  idea  that  American 
ways  are  best  and  right,  and  regardless  of  estab- 


THE  FUTURE 


405 


lished  habit,  custom  and  belief,  those  ways 
must  be  accepted  by  any  and  all  people  who  live 
under  the  American  flag.  We  assert  a glorious 
American  liberty  and  insist  that  all  shall  live 
by  American  standards.  The  American  mind 
lacks  elasticity.  It  has  become  hidebound  and 
makes  no  allowance  for  people  whom  it  does  not 
know  and  for  conditions  which  it  does  not 
understand.  The  little  Porto  Rican  toddler 
makes  mud-pies  and  rolls  in  the  sunshine,  naked 
but  innocent.  That  is  declared  immodest  and 
indecent  and  the  little  beggars  must  wear  petti- 
coats and  pinafores.  My  own  direct  ancestors 
left  their  homes  in  Scrooby,  England,  went  to 
Leyden  and  from  there  to  Massachusetts,  to 
find  1 freedom  to  worship  God  ’ in  their  own  way. 
Descendants  of  Pilgrim  and  Puritan  and  Hugue- 
not, of  Scotch  Presbyterians  and  of  the  fol- 
lowers of  Charles  Wesley,  have  said  to  Porto 
Rican  and  to  Cuban,  and  will  say  to  Filipino, 
Visayau  and  Moro,  that  the  Puritan  Sabbath 
shall  be  their  Sabbath.  The  menace  to  the 
success  of  American  colonial  administration  lies 
in  the  strong  probability  that  American  author- 
ity will  too  strenuously  seek  to  force  upon 
unwilling  people  standards  of  life  and  conduct 
which  are  none  too  rigorously  observed  at 
home. 

“ There  have  been  protests  against  the  tolera- 
tion of  a Mohammedan  sultan  to  rule  over  the 
Moros  of  Sulu  and  Mindanao.  Hands  are  raised 


406 


TEE  PHILIPPINES 


in  horror  that  there  should  be  any  perpetuation 
of  those  forms  of  polygamy  and  slavery  which 
exist  in  the  sultan’s  territory.  When  those 
questions  are  too  closely  touched  in  that  coun- 
try, the  people  of  America  may  look  to  see  the 
uprising  of  thousands  upon  thousands  of  fierce 
fighting-men  to  whom  death  is  no  more  a terror 
than  is  sleep  to  us.  Their  weapons  will  be  the 
barong,  the  kris,  the  spear  and  the  shield,  but 
their  method  of  fighting  will  not  be  that  of  the 
Filipino  who  runs  from  his  trenches  and  main- 
tains a dragging  guerrilla  warfare.  It  will  be 
more  that  of  ‘ Fuzzy- wuzzy  ’ with  his  ‘ ’ome  in  the 
Sudan.’  The  Moro  will  prove  to  be  ‘a  pore 
benighted  ’eathen,  but  a fust-class  fightin’-man.’ 
“ The  United  States  now  has  these  propositions 
before  it.  There  seems  to  be  no  clear  way  to  any 
complete  withdrawal  which  shall  be  consistent 
with  right,  honor  and  justice.  The  mistake  has 
been  made,  the  ‘day  of  grace  sinned  away.’ 
Nothing  is  now  left  save  to  retrieve  the  mistakes 
of  the  past  as  far  as  that  can  be  done,  by  the 
realization  of  such  powers  and  possibilities  as 
these  people  do  possess,  and  the  utilization  of 
those  powers  and  possibilities  instead  of  their 
suppression.  This  must  be  accompanied  by  a 
policy,  broad,  tolerant  and  charitable,  which 
shall  recognize  and  take  into  consideration  facts 
of  difference  in  race,  character,  training  and 
environment.  Cuba,  Porto  Rico  and  Hawaii 
bear  about  the  same  relation  to  the  Philippine 


TEE  FUTURE 


407 


question  that  2x2  = 4 bears  to  the  stiff est  propo- 
sition in  Euclid.  America  has  plenty  of  men 
capable  of  doing  the  work  that  is  to  be  done, 
but  they  are  not  of  the  type  which  secures 
appointment  by  reason  of  the  number  of  votes 
controlled  in  an  election.” 


DATE  DUE 


\4 

II  Ui 

aJlftf 

GAYLORD 

PRINTED  IN  U.S.  A. 

/ 


